Remote Language Compatibility Measurement

Remote Language Compatibility Measurement
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
This help file provides documentation for the following
X-Series Analyzers:
PXA Signal Analyzer N9030A
MXA Signal Analyzer N9020A
EXA Signal Analyzer N9010A
Remote Language
Compatibility
Measurement
Application User's &
Programmer's
Reference
Notices
damages in connection with the
furnishing, use, or performance of
this document or of any
information contained herein.
Should Keysight and the user
have a separate written
agreement with warranty terms
covering the material in this
document that conflict with these
terms, the warranty terms in the
separate agreement shall control.
© Keysight Technologies, Inc.
2008-2014
No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form or by any
means (including electronic
storage and retrieval or
translation into a foreign
language) without prior
agreement and written consent
from Keysight Technologies, Inc.
Technology Licenses
as governed by United States and The hardware and/or software
international copyright laws.
described in this document are
furnished under a license and may
Acknowledgments
be used or copied only in
Microsoft® and Windows® are
accordance with the terms of such
U.S. registered trademarks of
license.
Microsoft Corporation.
Manual Part Number
N9020-90119
Edition
August 2014
Printed in USA
Keysight Technologies, Inc.
1400 Fountaingrove Parkway
Santa Rosa, CA 95403
Warranty
The material contained in this
document is provided “as is,” and
is subject to being changed,
without notice, in future editions.
Further, to the maximum extent
permitted by applicable law,
Keysight disclaims all warranties,
either express or implied, with
regard to this manual and any
information contained herein,
including but not limited to the
implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. Keysight shall
not be liable for errors or for
incidental or consequential
2
Restricted Rights
Legend
If software is for use in the
performance of a U.S.
Government prime contract or
subcontract, Software is delivered
and licensed as “Commercial
computer software” as defined in
DFAR 252.227-7014 (June 1995),
or as a “commercial item” as
defined in FAR 2.101(a) or as
“Restricted computer software”
as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (June
1987) or any equivalent agency
regulation or contract clause.
Use, duplication or disclosure of
Software is subject to Keysight
Technologies’ standard
commercial license terms, and
non-DOD Departments and
Agencies of the U.S. Government
will receive no greater than
Restricted Rights as defined in
FAR 52.227-19(c)(1-2) (June
1987). U.S. Government users will
receive no greater than Limited
Rights as defined in FAR 52.22714 (June 1987) or DFAR 252.2277015 (b)(2) (November 1995), as
applicable in any technical data.
Safety Notices
A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It calls
attention to an operating procedure, practice,
or the like that, if not correctly performed or
adhered to, could result in damage to the
product or loss of important data. Do not
proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the
indicated conditions are fully understood and
met.
A WARNING notice denotes a hazard. It calls
attention to an operating procedure,
practice, or the like that, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in
personal injury or death. Do not proceed
beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Table Of Contents
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application User's & Programmer's Reference 1
Table Of Contents
3
1 Additional Documentation
61
Documentation Categories
Downloading PDF Files
98
99
2 About the Instrument
101
Installing Application Software
Viewing a License Key
Obtaining and Installing a License Key
Updating Measurement Application Software
X-Series Options and Accessories
Front & Rear Panel Features
Display Annotations
Window Control Keys
Multi-Window
Zoom
Next Window
Mouse and Keyboard Control
Right-Click
PC Keyboard
Instrument Security & Memory Volatility
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
N9061A Application Description
Documentation for the N9061A application
Scope of this Document
Where to Obtain this Document
Instrument Updates
General Rules and Limitations
AC/DC Coupling
Couplings
Markers
Numeric Ranges
Parsing
Predefined Functions
Remote Control
Returning Data
Units
User-defined Functions
Supported Commands
EP Parameter
3
102
102
102
103
104
105
106
107
107
107
108
110
110
111
115
117
118
119
119
119
119
120
120
120
121
121
121
121
121
121
122
122
122
122
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
OA Parameter
Handling of Unsupported Commands and Queries
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
Installing the N9061A Application
Installation
Licensing
Verify the Installation
Setting up N9061A
Hints and Tips
Compatibility (Speed and Consistency)
Compatibility and Sweep Times
Timeout
Synchronization (1)
Synchronization (2)
Changing Modes
AC and DC Coupling
Service and Calibration
4 Programming the Instrument
What Programming Information is Available?
List of Supported SCPI Commands
*
A
C
D
F
G
H
I
M
O
R
S
T
U
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
All
Clear Status
Standard Event Status Enable
Standard Event Status Register Query
Identification Query
Operation Complete
Query Instrument Options
Recall Instrument State
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
122
122
123
125
125
125
125
126
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
129
131
132
133
133
133
133
138
139
139
140
140
141
142
142
142
151
153
154
154
156
156
157
157
158
159
159
4
Table Of Contents
*RST (Remote Command Only)
Save Instrument State
Service Request Enable
Status Byte Query
Trigger
Self Test Query
Wait-to-Continue
Remote Measurement Functions
Measurement Group of Commands
MEASure Command
:MEASure:<measurement>[n]?
CONFigure Commands
:CONFigure:<measurement>
:CONFigure: <measurement>: NDEFault
CONFigure?
CONFigure:CATalog?
FETCh Command
:FETCh:<measurement>[n]?
INITiate Command
:INITiate:<measurement>
READ Command
:READ:<measurement>[n]?
Other Common Measurement Commands
Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only)
Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only)
Data Query (Remote Command Only)
Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)
Sample Trace Data
Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)
Data Format Commands
Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)
Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)
STATus Subsystem
Detailed Description
What Are Status Registers
What Are Status Register SCPI Commands
How to Use the Status Registers
Using a Status Register
Using the Service Request (SRQ) Method
Generating a Service Request
Status Register System
The Status Byte Register
Standard Event Status Register
5
160
160
160
161
161
161
162
163
163
163
163
164
164
165
165
165
165
165
165
165
166
166
166
167
167
167
167
171
172
174
174
175
177
179
180
180
181
182
184
184
185
186
188
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Operation and Questionable Status Registers
Operation Status Register
Questionable Status Register
STATus Subsystem Command Descriptions
Operation Register
Operation Condition Query
Operation Enable
Operation Event Query
Operation Negative Transition
Operation Positive Transition
Preset the Status Byte
Questionable Register
Questionable Condition
Questionable Enable
Questionable Event Query
Questionable Negative Transition
Questionable Positive Transition
Questionable Calibration Register
Questionable Calibration Condition
Questionable Calibration Enable
Questionable Calibration Event Query
Questionable Calibration Negative Transition
Questionable Calibration Positive Transition
Questionable Calibration Skipped Register
Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition
Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable
Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query
Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition
Questionable Calibration Skipped Positive Transition
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Register
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Register
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Enable
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Negative Transition
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive Transition
Questionable Frequency Register
Questionable Frequency Condition
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
190
190
190
191
191
191
192
192
193
193
193
194
194
194
195
195
196
196
196
197
197
198
198
198
199
199
199
200
200
201
201
201
202
202
203
203
203
204
204
205
205
205
206
6
Table Of Contents
Questionable Frequency Enable
Questionable Frequency Event Query
Questionable Frequency Negative Transition
Questionable Frequency Positive Transition
Questionable Integrity Register
Questionable Integrity Condition
Questionable Integrity Enable
Questionable Integrity Event Query
Questionable Integrity Negative Transition
Questionable Integrity Positive Transition
Questionable Integrity Signal Register
Questionable Integrity Signal Condition
Questionable Integrity Signal Enable
Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query
Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition
Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Register
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition
Questionable Power Register
Questionable Power Condition
Questionable Power Enable
Questionable Power Event Query
Questionable Power Negative Transition
Questionable Power Positive Transition
Questionable Temperature Register
Questionable Temperature Condition
Questionable Temperature Enable
Questionable Temperature Event Query
Questionable Temperature Negative Transition
Questionable Temperature Positive Transition
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
221
Key to Table Columns "8566", "8568", and "8560 Series"
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
Command Syntax
Command Description Notes
A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A)
Syntax
7
206
207
207
207
208
208
209
209
209
210
210
211
211
212
212
212
213
213
213
214
214
215
215
216
216
216
217
217
218
218
219
219
219
220
222
223
251
252
254
255
255
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel Power)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
255
255
256
256
256
256
257
257
257
257
258
258
258
258
259
259
259
259
260
260
260
260
261
261
261
261
262
262
262
262
263
263
263
263
264
264
264
264
265
265
265
265
266
8
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Description
ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Query Data Type Details
ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AMB (A minus B into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
9
266
266
266
267
267
267
268
268
268
268
269
269
269
269
271
271
271
271
272
272
272
272
273
274
274
274
274
275
275
275
275
276
276
276
276
277
277
277
277
278
278
278
278
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ANNOT (Annotation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AT (Input Attenuation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
279
279
279
279
280
280
280
280
281
281
281
281
282
282
282
282
283
283
283
283
285
285
285
285
286
286
286
286
287
287
287
287
288
288
288
288
289
289
289
289
290
290
290
10
Table Of Contents
Description
BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
BLANK (Blank Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
BML (Trace B Minus Display Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CA (Couple Attenuation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CARROFF (Carrier Off Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CARRON (Carrier On Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CF (Center Frequency)
Syntax
11
290
291
291
291
291
292
292
292
292
293
293
293
293
294
294
294
294
295
295
295
295
296
296
296
296
297
297
297
297
298
298
298
298
299
299
299
299
300
300
300
300
301
301
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
CHANNEL (Channel Selection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CHANPWR (Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CHPWRBW (Channel Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CLRAVG (Clear Average)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CLRW (Clear Write)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CONTS (Continuous Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
COUPLE (Input Coupling)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CT (Couple Sweep Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
CV (Couple Video Bandwidth)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
301
301
303
303
303
303
304
304
304
304
305
305
305
305
306
306
306
306
307
307
307
307
309
309
309
309
310
310
310
310
311
311
311
311
312
312
312
312
313
313
313
313
314
12
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DA (Display Address)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DET (Detection Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DL (Display Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DLE (Display Line Enable)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DLYSWP (Delay Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DONE (Done)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
DR (Display Read)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
E1[one] (Peak Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
13
314
314
314
315
315
315
315
316
316
316
316
317
317
317
317
318
318
318
318
320
320
320
320
321
321
321
321
322
322
322
322
323
323
323
323
324
324
324
324
325
325
325
325
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
EDITDONE (Edit Done)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ERR (Error)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ET (Elapsed Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FA (Start Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FB (Stop Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FDSP (Frequency Display Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
326
326
326
326
327
327
327
327
328
328
328
328
329
329
329
329
330
330
330
330
332
332
332
332
333
333
333
333
334
334
334
334
336
336
336
336
337
337
337
337
338
338
338
14
Table Of Contents
Description
FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FREF (Frequency Reference)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
FS (Full Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GATE (Gate)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GATECTL (Gate Control)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GD (Gate Delay)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GL (Gate Length)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GP (Gate Polarity)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
GRAT (Graticule)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
HD (Hold Data Entry)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC)
Syntax
15
338
340
340
340
340
341
341
341
341
342
342
342
342
344
344
344
344
345
345
345
345
346
346
346
346
347
347
347
347
348
348
348
348
349
349
349
349
350
350
350
350
351
351
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
351
Description
351
I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC)
353
Syntax
353
Legacy Products
353
Description
353
ID (Identify)
355
Syntax
355
Legacy Products
355
Description
355
IP (Instrument Preset)
356
Syntax
356
Legacy Products
356
Description
356
KS, (Mixer Level)
357
Syntax
357
Legacy Products
357
Description
357
KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution) 358
Syntax
358
Legacy Products
358
Description
358
KS( (Lock Registers)
359
Syntax
359
Legacy Products
359
Description
359
KS) (Unlock Registers)
360
Syntax
360
Legacy Products
360
Description
360
KSA (Amplitude in dBm)
361
Syntax
361
Legacy Products
361
Description
361
KSa (Normal Detection)
362
Syntax
362
Legacy Products
362
Description
362
KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)
363
Syntax
363
Legacy Products
363
Description
363
KSb (Positive Peak Detection)
364
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
16
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSc (A Plus B to A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSD (Amplitude in Volts)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSd (Negative Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSE (Title Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSe (Sample Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSG (Video Averaging On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSg (Display Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSH (Video Averaging Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSh (Display On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
17
364
364
364
365
365
365
365
366
366
366
366
367
367
367
367
368
368
368
368
369
369
369
369
370
370
370
370
371
371
371
371
372
372
372
372
373
373
373
373
374
374
374
374
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
KSI (Extend Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSj (View Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSK (Marker to Next Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSk (Blank Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSL (Marker Noise Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSM (Marker Noise On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSm (Graticule Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSN (Marker Minimum)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSn (Graticule On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
375
375
375
375
376
376
376
376
377
377
377
377
378
378
378
378
379
379
379
379
380
380
380
380
381
381
381
381
382
382
382
382
383
383
383
383
384
384
384
384
385
385
385
18
Table Of Contents
Description
KSO (Marker Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSo (Annotation Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSP (GPIB Address)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSp (Annotation On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KST (Fast Preset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSV (Frequency Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSx (External Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSy (Video Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
KSZ (Reference Level Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
L0 [zero] (Display Line Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LF (Low Frequency Preset)
Syntax
19
385
386
386
386
386
387
387
387
387
388
388
388
388
389
389
389
389
390
390
390
390
391
391
391
391
392
392
392
392
393
393
393
393
394
394
394
394
395
395
395
395
396
396
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
LG (Logarithmic Scale)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Query Data Type Codes
LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
396
396
397
397
397
397
398
398
398
398
399
399
399
399
400
401
401
401
401
402
402
402
402
403
403
403
403
404
404
404
404
405
405
405
405
406
406
406
406
407
407
407
407
20
Table Of Contents
LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
LN (Linear Scale)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
M1 [one] (Marker Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
M2 [two] (Marker Normal)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
M3 [three] (Delta Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
M4 [four] (Marker Zoom)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MA (Marker Amplitude Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MDS (Measurement Data Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
21
408
408
408
408
409
409
409
409
410
410
410
410
411
411
411
411
412
412
412
412
414
414
414
414
416
416
416
416
417
417
417
417
418
418
418
418
419
419
419
419
420
420
420
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Description
MDU (Measurement Data Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MEAN (Trace Mean)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MEANPWR (Mean Power measurement)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MEAS (Meas)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MF (Marker Frequency Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MINH (Minimum Hold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MINPOS (Minimum X Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKA (Marker Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKACT (Activate Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKBW (Marker Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)
Syntax
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
420
421
421
421
421
422
422
422
422
423
423
423
423
424
424
424
424
425
425
425
425
426
426
426
426
427
427
427
427
428
428
428
428
429
429
429
429
430
430
430
430
431
431
22
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
MKD (Marker Delta)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKF (Marker Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKFC (Marker Counter)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKMIN (Marker Minimum)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKN (Marker Normal)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKNOISE (Marker Noise)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKOFF (Marker Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKP (Marker Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKPK (Marker Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKPT (Marker Threshold)
23
431
431
432
432
432
432
434
434
434
434
435
435
435
435
436
436
437
437
438
438
438
438
439
439
439
439
441
441
441
441
442
442
442
442
443
443
443
443
444
444
444
444
445
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKREAD (Marker Readout)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKSP (Marker Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKSS (Marker to Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKT (Marker Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKTRACE (Marker Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKTRACK (Marker Track)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MKTYPE (Marker Type)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ML (Mixer Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
445
445
445
446
446
446
446
447
447
447
447
449
449
449
449
450
450
450
450
451
451
451
451
452
452
452
452
453
453
453
453
454
454
454
454
455
455
455
455
456
456
456
456
24
Table Of Contents
MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MT1 [one] (Marker Track On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
MXMH (Maximum Hold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
NRL (Normalized Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
NRPOS (Normalized Reference Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
OA or ? (Query Active Function)
Legacy Products
Description
25
458
458
458
458
459
459
459
459
460
460
460
460
461
461
461
461
462
462
462
462
463
463
463
463
464
464
464
464
465
465
465
465
466
466
466
466
467
467
467
467
468
468
468
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
OL (Output Learn String)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
OT (Output Trace Annotations)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PEAKS (Peaks)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PKPOS (Peak Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PLOT (Plot)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PP (Preselector Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PRINT (Print)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
469
469
469
469
470
470
470
470
472
472
472
472
474
474
474
474
475
475
475
475
476
476
476
476
477
477
477
477
478
478
478
478
479
479
479
479
480
480
480
480
481
481
481
26
Table Of Contents
Description
R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RB (Resolution Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RC (Recall State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RCLS (Recall State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
REV (Revision)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RL (Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RMS (Root Mean Square Value)
Syntax
27
481
482
482
482
482
483
483
483
483
484
484
484
484
485
485
485
485
486
486
486
486
488
488
488
488
489
489
489
489
490
490
490
490
491
491
491
491
492
492
492
492
494
494
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
RQS (Request Service Conditions)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
S2 [two] (Single Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SADD (Add Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SAVES (Save State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SDON (Terminate SEDI Command)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SER (Serial Number)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SETDATE (Set Date)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
494
494
495
495
495
495
497
497
497
497
499
499
499
499
500
500
500
500
501
501
501
501
502
502
502
502
503
503
503
503
504
504
504
504
505
505
505
505
506
506
506
506
507
28
Table Of Contents
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SETTIME (Set Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SMOOTH (Smooth Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SNGLS (Single Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SP (Frequency Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SRQ (Service Request)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SS (Center Frequency Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
ST (Sweep Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
STB (Status Byte Query)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SUM (Sum)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
29
507
507
507
508
508
508
508
509
509
509
509
510
510
510
510
511
511
512
512
513
513
513
513
514
514
514
514
516
516
516
516
518
518
518
518
519
519
519
519
520
520
520
520
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
SV (Save State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
SWPCPL (Sweep Couple)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
T2 [two] (Line Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
T3 [three] (External Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
T4 [four] (Video Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TA (Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TB (Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TDF (Trace Data Format)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TH (Threshold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
521
521
521
521
522
522
522
522
523
523
523
523
524
524
524
524
525
525
525
525
526
526
526
526
527
527
527
527
528
528
528
528
529
529
529
529
530
530
530
530
531
531
531
30
Table Of Contents
Description
THE (Threshold Enable)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TIMEDATE (Time Date)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TITLE (Title)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TM (Trigger Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRA (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRB (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRC (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRDSP (Trace Display)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TRSTAT (Trace State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
TS (Take Sweep)
Syntax
31
531
533
533
533
533
534
534
534
534
535
535
535
535
536
536
536
536
537
537
537
537
538
538
538
538
539
539
539
539
540
540
540
540
541
541
541
541
542
542
542
542
543
543
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Legacy Products
Description
USERREV
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VAVG (Video Average)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VB (Video Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VIEW (View Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
VTL (Video Trigger Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
XCH (Exchange)
Syntax
Legacy Products
Description
543
543
544
544
544
544
545
545
545
545
547
547
547
547
549
549
549
549
550
550
550
550
551
551
551
551
552
552
552
552
553
553
553
553
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
555
AMPTD Y Scale
Reference Level
Amplitude Representations
Attenuation
Dual Attenuator Configurations
Single Attenuator Configuration
Determining Attenuator Configuration
(Mech) Atten
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
559
559
560
560
561
561
561
562
32
Table Of Contents
Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man
Enable Elec Atten
More Information
Mechanical Attenuator Transition Rules
When the Electronic Attenuation is enabled from a disabled state:
Examples in the dual attenuator configuration:
When the Electronic Attenuation is disabled from an enabled state:
Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons
Elec Atten
Adjust Atten for Min Clip
Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
Off
Elec Atten Only
Mech + Elec Atten
(Mech) Atten Step
Max Mixer Level
Scale / Div
Scale Type
Presel Center
Proper Preselector Operation
Preselector Adjust
Y Axis Unit
dBm
dBmV
dBmA
W
V
A
dBµV
dBµA
dBpW
Antenna Unit
None
dBµV/m
dBµA/m
dBpT
dBG
dBµA
Reference Level Offset
More Information
µW Path Control
Standard Path
µW Preselector Bypass
33
563
564
565
565
565
565
565
566
566
567
567
568
568
569
569
570
570
570
571
572
572
573
575
575
575
576
576
576
577
577
577
578
578
578
578
579
579
579
580
580
581
582
582
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Internal Preamp
Off
Low Band
Full Range
Auto Couple
More Information
Auto/Man Active Function keys
Auto/Man 1-of-N keys
BW
Res BW
More Information
Video BW
Annotation Examples
VBW:3dB RBW
Auto Rules
Span:3dB RBW
RBW Control
Filter Type
More Information
Gaussian
Flattop
Filter BW
More Information
–3 dB (Normal)
–6 dB
Noise
Impulse
Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)
File
File Explorer
Page Setup
Print
Restore Down
Minimize
Exit
FREQ Channel
Zone Center
Zoom Center
Auto Tune
Center Freq
Center Frequency Presets
RF Center Freq
Ext Mix Center Freq
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
583
584
584
584
586
586
586
586
588
588
589
590
591
591
592
593
594
594
595
595
596
596
596
598
598
598
598
599
601
601
602
603
603
603
604
605
605
606
607
607
609
610
611
34
Table Of Contents
I/Q Center Freq
Start Freq
Stop Freq
CF Step
Freq Offset
More Information
Input/Output
Input/Output variables - Preset behavior
RF Input
Input Z Correction
RF Coupling
I/Q
Baseband I/Q (Option BBA)
Baseband I/Q Remote Language Compatibility
I/Q Path
I+jQ
I Only
Q Only
I Setup
I Differential Input
I Input Z
I Skew
I Probe
Combined Differential/Input Z (Remote Command Only)
Q Setup
Q Same as I
Q Differential Input
Q Input Z
Q Skew
Q Probe
Reference Z
I/Q Cable Calibrate…
Next
Exit
Exit Confirmation
I/Q Probe Setup
Attenuation
Offset
Coupling
Calibrate
Clear Calibration
I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)
I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)
35
612
612
614
616
617
618
619
621
621
621
622
623
623
625
626
627
628
628
628
628
629
630
630
632
633
633
634
635
635
636
638
639
639
640
640
640
641
641
642
643
644
644
644
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
RF Calibrator
50 MHz
4.8 GHz
Off
External Gain
Ext Preamp
MS
BTS
I Ext Gain
Q Ext Gain
Restore Input/Output Defaults
Corrections
Select Correction
Select Correction
Select Correction
Select Correction
Select Correction
Select Correction
Select Correction
Correction On/Off
Properties
Select Correction
Antenna Unit
Frequency Interpolation
Description
Comment
Edit
Delete Correction
Apply Corrections
Delete All Corrections
Merge Correction Data (Remote Command Only)
Set (Replace) Data (Remote Command Only)
Freq Ref In
Sense
Internal
External
Ext Ref Freq
External Reference Lock BW
External Ref Coupling
External Ref Coupling
External Ref Coupling
Output Config
Trig Out (1 and 2)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
644
645
646
646
646
647
648
649
650
650
651
651
652
652
652
653
653
653
654
654
655
655
657
659
661
661
662
663
663
663
664
664
665
666
666
666
667
668
668
670
671
673
673
36
Table Of Contents
Polarity
Off
Sweeping (HSWP)
Measuring
Main Trigger
Gate Trigger
Gate
Odd/Even Trace Point
Trig Out (1 and 2)
Polarity
Off
Sweeping (HSWP)
Measuring
Main Trigger
Gate Trigger
Gate
Odd/Even Trace Point
Analog Out
More Information
Auto
Off
Screen Video
Log Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Mixer Level)
Linear Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Ref Level)
Demod Audio
Digital Bus
Bus Out On/Off
I/Q Cal Out
1 kHz Square Wave
250 kHz Square Wave
Off
Aux IF Out
Off
Second IF
Arbitrary IF
Fast Log Video
I/Q Guided Calibration
I/Q Isolation Calibration
I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)
Marker
Marker Control Mode
Setting/Querying the Marker X Axis Value
Setting the Marker X Position in Trace Points
37
674
674
675
675
675
675
676
676
676
677
677
677
677
678
678
678
678
679
679
680
680
680
681
682
683
683
684
684
685
685
685
685
686
686
687
687
688
688
688
689
690
690
691
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Setting/Querying the Marker Y Axis Value
Querying the Marker Z Axis Value
Setting or Querying the Marker Z Position
Marker Backwards Compatibility
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Normal
Delta
Fixed
Fixed Marker X Axis Value
Fixed Marker Y Axis Value
Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
Fixed
Fixed Marker X Axis Value
Fixed Marker Y Axis Value
Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
Fixed
Fixed Marker X Axis Value
Fixed Marker Y Axis Value
Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
Off
Properties
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
692
692
693
693
694
694
694
695
695
695
695
696
696
696
697
697
697
698
698
699
699
700
700
700
701
701
702
702
702
703
703
704
704
704
705
705
705
706
706
706
707
707
707
38
Table Of Contents
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Relative To
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
X Axis Scale
More Information
Auto
Frequency
Period
Time
Inverse Time
Marker Trace
Auto Init On
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
Auto Init OFF
Marker Trace
Marker Trace
Marker Trace
Marker Trace
Marker Trace
Marker Trace
Marker Trace
Lines
Marker Table
Marker Count
Counter
Query Count Value
Understanding the Marker Counter
Counting Off-screen Markers
Delta Marker
Fixed Markers
39
707
708
708
708
709
709
710
710
710
711
711
711
711
712
712
712
713
713
714
714
714
715
715
716
716
717
717
718
720
723
725
728
730
733
735
735
736
736
737
737
738
738
738
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
More Information on "Counter"
Gate Time
Couple Markers
All Markers Off
Marker Function
More Information
Fixed marker functions
Interval Markers
Band Function Backwards Compatibility
1. Marker Mode compatibility
2. Span Pair Compatibility
3. Delta Pair/Band Pair functionality
4. Arbitrary Marker Pair functionality
5. Band changes with analyzer settings
6. Offscreen Markers
7. Direct Marker Positioning
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Select Marker
Marker Noise
More Information
Off-trace Markers
Band/Interval Power
Band/Interval Density
More Information
What is band/interval density?
Marker Function Off
Band Adjust
Band/Interval Span
Band/Interval Left
Band/Interval Right
Band Span Auto/Man
Measure at Marker
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
738
739
740
740
742
742
743
743
743
745
746
746
747
747
747
747
748
748
749
749
749
750
750
750
750
751
751
751
752
752
753
753
753
754
755
755
755
755
756
757
759
760
761
40
Table Of Contents
Measure at Marker
Meas at Marker Window
Window
Position
Detectors
Detector 1
Detector 2
Detector 3
Detector 1 Dwell Time
Detector 2 Dwell Time
Detector 3 Dwell Time
BW & Avg Type
BW & Avg Type
BW & Avg Type
Center Presel On/Off
Marker To
Mkr->CF
Mkr->CF Step
Mkr->Start
Mkr->Stop
Mkr->Ref Lvl
Mkr -> Zoom Center
Mkr -> Zone Center
MkrΔ->CF
MkrΔ->Span
Meas
RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Measurement Commands and their Results for Swept SA
Swept SA Measurement Description
Meas Setup
Average/Hold Number
More Information
AVER:CLE command
Average Type
More Information
Auto
Log-Pwr Avg (Video)
Pwr Avg (RMS)
Voltage Avg
Limits
Select Limit
Select Limit
Select Limit
41
761
764
765
765
765
766
770
775
780
780
781
781
782
783
784
785
785
785
786
786
787
787
788
788
789
790
790
790
792
794
794
794
795
795
796
796
797
797
798
798
799
799
799
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Select Limit
800
Select Limit
800
Select Limit
800
Select Limit
800
Limit
801
Properties
802
Select Limit
802
Test Trace
804
Type
808
Interpolation
809
Fixed / Relative
810
Description
812
Comment
812
Margin
813
Edit
814
Navigate
814
Frequency
814
Amplitude
815
Insert Point Below
815
Delete Point
815
Copy from Limit
815
Build from Trace
817
Offset
821
Scale X Axis
822
Delete Limit
823
Test Limits
823
X-Axis Unit
824
Delete All Limits
824
Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only)
825
Merge Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only)
825
Limit Line Fail? (Remote Command Only)
826
Limit Line Control (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)
826
Limit Line Upper / Lower (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance) 827
Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)
828
Limit Clear (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard conformance)
829
Trace Fail? (Remote Command Only)
829
Fixed / Relative Limit (Remote Command Only)
829
N dB Points
830
N dB Points Results Query
830
More Information
831
PhNoise Opt
833
Auto
834
Models with Option EP1
834
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
42
Table Of Contents
Models with Option EP2
Models with Option EP4
All other Models
Best Close-in Φ Noise
Best Wide-offset Φ Noise
Fast Tuning
ADC Dither
Auto
High (Best Log Accy)
Medium (Log Accy)
Off (Best Noise)
Swept IF Gain
Auto
Low Gain (Best for Large Signals)
High Gain (Best Noise Level)
FFT IF Gain
Auto
Autorange (Slower – Follows Signals)
Low Gain (Best for Large Signals)
High Gain (Best Noise Level)
Analog Demod Tune & Listen
AM
Channel BW (AM Demod)
FM
Channel BW (FM Demod)
De-emphasis (FM Demod only)
ΦM
Channel BW (ΦM Demod)
Off
Demod Time
Demod State (Remote Command Only)
Noise Source
More Information
Noise Source
More Information
Noise Source
Noise Source
State
SNS Attached (Remote Command Only)
Meas Preset
Mode
More Information
Spectrum Analyzer
43
834
835
835
836
836
837
837
838
839
839
839
840
840
841
841
841
842
842
843
843
843
844
844
845
845
846
848
849
849
850
850
850
851
852
852
853
854
855
855
856
857
858
859
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
EMI Receiver
IQ Analyzer (Basic)
W-CDMA with HSPA+
GSM/EDGE/EDGE Evo
802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro)
Vector Signal Analyzer (VXA)
Phase Noise
Noise Figure
Analog Demod
TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK
cdma2000
1xEV-DO
LTE
LTE TDD
DVB-T/H with T2
DTMB (CTTB)
ISDB-T
CMMB
Combined WLAN
Combined Fixed WiMAX
802.16 OFDM (Fixed WiMAX)
iDEN/WiDEN/MOTOTalk
Remote Language Compatibility
89601 VSA
Bluetooth
SCPI Language Compatibility
Digital Cable TV
MSR
WLAN
Application Mode Number Selection (Remote Command Only)
Application Mode Catalog Query (Remote Command Only)
Application Identification (Remote Commands Only)
Current Application Model
Current Application Revision
Current Application Options
Application Identification Catalog (Remote Commands Only)
Application Catalog Number of Entries
Application Catalog Model Numbers
Application Catalog Revision
Application Catalog Options
Detailed List of Modes
Mode Preset
How-To Preset
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
859
860
860
860
861
861
862
862
862
862
863
863
863
864
864
864
865
865
865
865
866
866
866
867
868
868
868
869
869
869
871
871
871
872
872
872
873
873
873
874
874
876
877
44
Table Of Contents
Mode Setup
HP8560 series, HP8566/68
Cmd Error
Logging
Previous Page/Next Page
Cmd Error Log
Refresh
Clear Log
Preferences
Limit RBW/VBW
Atten Offset
Swp Type Rule
Limit Swp Time
Restore Mode Defaults
Preset Type (Remote Command Only)
Global Settings
Global Center Freq
Restore Defaults
Peak Search
More Information
Next Peak
Next Pk Right
Next Pk Left
Marker Delta
Mkr->CF
Mkr->Ref Lvl
Peak Criteria
“Peak Search” Criteria
Highest Peak
Same as “Next Peak” Criteria
“Next Peak” Criteria
Pk Excursion
Pk Threshold
Pk Threshold Line
Peak Table
Peak Table On/Off
Peak Sort
Peak Readout
More Information
All
Above Display Line
Below Display Line
Continuous Peak Search
45
879
879
880
881
881
881
881
882
882
882
883
883
884
884
884
885
885
886
887
887
887
888
888
889
889
889
889
890
891
891
891
891
892
893
894
894
895
895
896
897
897
897
898
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
More Information
Pk-Pk Search
Min Search
Peak Data Query (RemoteCommand Only)
Query the Signal Peaks (Remote Command Only)
Query Number of Peaks Found (Remote Command Only)
Peak Search All Traces
Quick Save
Recall
State
More Information
From File…
From File…
From File…
From File…
From File…
From File…
From File…
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Trace (+State)
To Trace
To Trace
To Trace
To Trace
To Trace
To Trace
To Trace
Register 1 thru Register 16
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
899
899
900
900
900
901
901
902
904
904
906
906
908
910
912
922
924
926
928
929
930
930
931
932
932
933
934
934
935
936
937
937
938
939
939
941
941
941
942
942
943
943
944
46
Table Of Contents
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
From File…
From File…
From File…
From File…
From File…
From File…
From File…
Data (Import)
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Limit
Limit Selection
Limit Selection
Limit Selection
Limit Selection
Limit Selection
Limit Selection
Open…
Open…
Open…
Open…
Open…
Open…
Open…
Restart
More Information
Save
47
944
945
946
946
947
949
951
953
963
965
967
969
970
971
971
972
972
972
973
973
974
974
975
975
976
976
976
977
978
978
978
979
979
979
980
980
980
982
982
982
984
984
986
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
State
To File . . .
To File . . .
To File . . .
To File . . .
To File . . .
To File . . .
To File . . .
To File . . .
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Register 1 thru Register 16
Edit Register Names
More Information
Trace (+State)
Data (Export)
Amplitude Correction
Correction Data File
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Amplitude Correction
Trace
Trace File Contents
Metadata: Trace Specific
Metadata: Display Specific
Metadata: Measurement Related
Select Trace
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
986
987
989
991
993
995
997
999
1001
1003
1003
1004
1005
1006
1006
1007
1008
1008
1009
1010
1011
1011
1012
1013
1013
1014
1015
1015
1016
1017
1017
1020
1020
1020
1021
1021
1021
1022
1022
1022
1022
1023
1026
48
Table Of Contents
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Limit
Limits File Contents
.csv file format
.lim file format
Limit Selection
Limit Selection
Limit Selection
Limit Selection
Limit Selection
Limit Selection
Measurement Results
Meas Results File Contents
Marker Table
Peak Table
Spectrogram
Measurement Results
Measurement Results
Measurement Results
Save As . . .
Save As . . .
Save As . . .
Save As . . .
Save As . . .
Save As . . .
Save As . . .
Save As . . .
Screen Image
Themes
3D Color
3D Monochrome
Flat Color
Flat Monochrome
Save As…
Save As…
Save As…
Save As…
Save As…
49
1027
1027
1028
1028
1029
1029
1030
1031
1031
1032
1032
1032
1032
1033
1033
1033
1033
1034
1034
1037
1040
1044
1055
1066
1077
1078
1079
1079
1080
1081
1081
1082
1083
1084
1084
1084
1085
1085
1085
1086
1086
1086
1087
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Save As…
Save As…
Save As…
Mass Storage Catalog (Remote Command Only)
Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only)
Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only)
Mass Storage Delete (Remote Command Only)
Mass Storage Data (Remote Command Only)
Mass Storage Make Directory (Remote Command Only)
Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only)
Mass Storage Remove Directory (Remote Command Only)
Single (Single Measurement/Sweep)
More Information
Source
RF Output
Amplitude
Amplitude
Power Sweep
Amptd Offset
Amptd Step Auto/Man
Frequency
Multiplier Numerator
Multiplier Denominator
Source Sweep Reverse
Freq Offset
Source Mode
Select Source
Point Trigger
Select Highlighted Source
Source Preset
Source Setting Query (Remote Command Only)
SPAN X Scale
Span
Span Presets
Zone Span
Zoom Span
Full Span
Zero Span
Last Span
Signal Track (Span Zoom)
More Information
Sweep/Control
Sweep Time
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1087
1088
1088
1088
1089
1089
1089
1090
1090
1090
1091
1092
1092
1093
1093
1093
1094
1094
1096
1097
1097
1098
1099
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1106
1107
1108
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1112
1114
1114
1115
1117
1117
50
Table Of Contents
Sweep Setup
Sweep Time Rules
More Information
Auto
SA - Normal
SA - Accuracy
Stimulus/Response
Sweep Type
Auto
Swept
FFT
Sweep Type Rules
Auto
Best Dynamic Range
Best Speed
FFT Width
More Information
FFT Width
FFT Width
FFT Width
FFT Width
FFT Width
FFT Width
FFT Width
FFT Width
FFT Width
More Information
Gate
Gate On/Off
Gate View On/Off
Gate View Setup
Gate View Sweep Time
Gate View Start Time
Gate Delay
Gate Length
Method
LO
Video
FFT
Gate Source
Line
External 1
External 2
51
1119
1119
1120
1120
1121
1121
1121
1122
1123
1123
1124
1124
1125
1125
1125
1126
1127
1128
1131
1134
1137
1140
1143
1146
1149
1152
1154
1155
1155
1157
1160
1160
1161
1161
1162
1162
1163
1163
1163
1164
1165
1165
1167
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
RF Burst
Periodic Timer (Frame Trigger)
TV
Control Edge/Level
Gate Holdoff
Min Fast Position Query (Remote Command Only)
Gate Preset (Remote Command Only)
Gate Level (Remote Command Only)
Gate Polarity (Remote Command Only)
Points
Zoom Points
Pause/Resume
Abort (Remote Command Only)
System
Show
Errors
Previous Page
Next Page
History
History
Verbose SCPI On/Off
Refresh
Clear Error Queue
Input Overload Enable (Remote Command Only)
System
System
System
Show System contents (Remote Command Only)
Hardware
LXI
Power On
Mode and Input/Output Defaults
User Preset
Last State
Power On Application
Configure Applications
Preloading Applications
Access to Configure Applications utility
Virtual memory usage
Select All
Deselect All
Move Up
Move Down
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1169
1172
1183
1188
1189
1190
1191
1191
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1196
1196
1197
1198
1198
1198
1198
1199
1199
1200
1200
1201
1202
1202
1203
1203
1204
1204
1205
1205
1206
1206
1207
1207
1207
1208
1208
1208
1208
52
Table Of Contents
Select/Deselect
Save Changes and Exit
Exit Without Saving
Restore Power On Defaults
Configure Applications - Remote Commands
Configuration list (Remote Command Only)
Configuration Memory Available (Remote Command Only)
Configuration Memory Total (Remote Command Only)
Configuration Memory Used (Remote Command Only)
Configuration Application Memory (Remote Command Only)
Alignments
Auto Align
Normal
Partial
Off
All but RF
Alert
Execute Expired Alignments (Remote Command Only)
Align Now
All
All but RF
RF
External Mixer
Show Alignment Statistics
Restore Align Defaults
Backup or Restore Align Data…
Alignment Data Wizard
Perform Backup (Remote Command Only)
Perform Restore (Remote Command Only)
Advanced
Characterize Preselector
Timebase DAC
Calibrated
User
I/O Config
GPIB
GPIB Address
GPIB Controller
SCPI LAN
SCPI Telnet
SCPI Socket
SICL Server
HiSLIP Server
53
1209
1209
1209
1210
1210
1211
1211
1211
1211
1212
1212
1212
1213
1214
1214
1215
1216
1219
1219
1219
1221
1222
1223
1224
1229
1230
1231
1236
1237
1237
1237
1238
1239
1239
1240
1240
1241
1241
1242
1242
1243
1243
1244
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Command Only)
Reset Web Password
LXI
LAN Reset
System IDN Response
Factory
User
Query USB Connection (Remote Command Only)
USB Connection Status (Remote Command Only)
USB Packet Count (Remote Command Only)
Restore Defaults
Restore Input/Output Defaults
Restore Power On Defaults
Restore Align Defaults
Restore Misc Defaults
Restore Mode Defaults (All Modes)
All
Control Panel…
Licensing…
Security
USB
Read-Write
Read only
Diagnostics
Show Hardware Statistics
SCPI for Show Hardware Statistics (Remote Commands Only)
Query the Mechanical Relay Cycle Count
Query the Operating Temperature Extremes
Query the Elapsed Time since First Power-On
Service
Internet Explorer…
System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only)
System Powerdown (Remote Command Only)
List installed Options (Remote Command Only)
Lock the Front-panel keys (Remote Command Only)
List SCPI Commands (Remote Command Only)
SCPI Version Query (Remote Command Only)
Date (Remote Command Only)
Time (Remote Command Only)
Trace/Detector
Trace Mode Backwards Compatibility
Trace Update Indicator
Trace Annunciator Panel
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1244
1245
1245
1246
1246
1246
1247
1247
1247
1248
1248
1249
1249
1250
1251
1252
1252
1253
1254
1256
1256
1257
1257
1257
1258
1259
1259
1259
1260
1260
1260
1260
1261
1261
1261
1262
1262
1262
1263
1264
1266
1266
1266
54
Table Of Contents
Trace Annotation
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Clear Write
Trace Average
Trace Averaging: More Information
Max Hold
Min Hold
View/Blank
Trace Update State On/Off
Trace Display State On/Off
More Information
View/Blank
Trace Update State On/Off
Trace Display State On/Off
More Information
View/Blank
Trace Update State On/Off
Trace Display State On/Off
More Information
View/Blank
Trace Update State On/Off
Trace Display State On/Off
More Information
View/Blank
Trace Update State On/Off
Trace Display State On/Off
More Information
Detector
More Information
Multiple Detectors
Auto
Normal
Average (Log/RMS/V)
Peak
Sample
Negative Peak
Quasi Peak
55
1267
1268
1268
1269
1269
1269
1269
1270
1270
1271
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1276
1277
1278
1278
1279
1279
1280
1281
1281
1282
1283
1283
1284
1284
1285
1286
1286
1287
1290
1290
1291
1291
1292
1293
1293
1294
1294
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
More Information
EMI Average
RMS Average
Preset Detectors
All Traces Auto
Peak / Average / NPeak
Peak / Sample / NPeak
Clear Trace
Clear All Traces
Preset All Traces
Math
Math: More Information
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Select Trace
Power Diff (Op1-Op2)
Power Sum (Op1+Op2)
Log Offset (Op1 + Offset)
Log Diff (Op1-Op2+Ref)
More Information
Off
Trace Operands
Operand 1
Operand 2
Copy/Exchange
From Trace
From Trace
From Trace
From Trace
From Trace
From Trace
From Trace
To Trace
To Trace
To Trace
To Trace
To Trace
To Trace
To Trace
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1295
1295
1296
1297
1297
1297
1298
1298
1298
1299
1299
1300
1302
1302
1302
1303
1303
1303
1304
1304
1304
1305
1306
1306
1306
1307
1307
1309
1312
1312
1313
1313
1313
1313
1314
1314
1314
1314
1315
1315
1315
1315
1315
56
Table Of Contents
Copy Now
Exchange Now
Normalize
Normalize On/Off
More Information
Measurement Details
Normalize Block Diagram
Store Ref (1 -> 3)
Show Ref Trace (Trace 3)
Norm Ref Lvl
Open/Short Cal
Open/Short Guided Cal
Norm Ref Posn
Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)
Query Trace Data
More Information
Smooth Trace Data (Remote Command Only)
Number of Points for Smoothing (Remote Command Only)
Mean Trace Data (Remote Command Only)
Display Trace Time Query (Remote Command Only)
Trigger
Trigger Source Presets
RF Trigger Source
I/Q Trigger Source
More Information
Free Run
Video (IF Envelope)
Trigger Level
Trig Slope
Trig Delay
Line
Trig Slope
Trig Delay
External 1
Trigger Level
Trig Slope
Trig Delay
External 2
Trigger Level
Trig Slope
Trig Delay
RF Burst
Absolute Trigger Level
57
1316
1316
1316
1316
1317
1317
1318
1319
1319
1319
1320
1320
1320
1321
1322
1322
1323
1324
1325
1325
1326
1327
1330
1331
1332
1333
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1338
1339
1339
1340
1340
1341
1342
1342
1343
1343
1344
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
Relative Trigger Level
Trigger Slope
Trig Delay
Periodic Timer (Frame Trigger)
Period
Offset
Offset Adjust (Remote Command Only)
Reset Offset Display
Sync Source
Off
External 1
External 2
RF Burst
Trig Delay
TV
TV Line
Field
Entire Frame
Field One
Field Two
Standard
NTSC-M
NTSC-Japan
NTSC–4.43
PAL-M
PAL-N
PAL-N-Combin
PAL-B,D,G,H,I
PAL–60
SECAM-L
Auto/Holdoff
Auto Trig
Trig Holdoff
User Preset
User Preset
User Preset All Modes
Save User Preset
View/Display
View
Display
Annotation
Meas Bar On/Off
Screen
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1345
1346
1347
1347
1349
1350
1351
1351
1352
1352
1352
1354
1355
1359
1359
1360
1361
1361
1361
1362
1362
1363
1363
1363
1363
1364
1364
1364
1364
1364
1365
1365
1366
1367
1367
1368
1369
1370
1370
1371
1371
1372
1373
58
Table Of Contents
Trace
Active Function Values On/Off
Title
Change Title
Clear Title
Graticule
Display Line
System Display Settings
Annotation Local Settings
Theme
Backlight
Backlight Intensity
Normal
Spectrogram
More Information
Representation of Time
Markers
Trace Zoom
Transition Rules
Zone Span
More Information
Transition Rules
Display Trace
Full Screen
Display Enable (Remote Command Only)
59
1373
1373
1374
1375
1375
1376
1376
1377
1377
1379
1380
1381
1381
1381
1382
1384
1385
1385
1386
1386
1387
1388
1388
1388
1389
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Table Of Contents
60
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
This section lists all available documentation for the X-Series
instruments.
All documents are available for download from the Keysight web
site. In most cases, if your instrument has an internet connection,
you can click on a hyperlink below to download the document
directly. (If your instrument does not have an internet connection,
see "Downloading PDF Files" on page 99 for alternative download
methods.)
Except for Specifications Guides, all the documents listed here are
included on the Documentation DVD shipped with your instrument.
Certain documents are also installed on the instrument’s hard disk.
For these items, you can click an "On-disk" hyperlink below to open
the document directly.
For details of the types of documentation available, see
"Documentation Categories" on page 98.
The available documentation is divided into 4 groups as listed below.
Click on a link for a detailed list of the documents in each group.
l
l
"Documentation Common to All Measurement Applications" on
page 62
"Documentation Specific to a Measurement Application or
Option" on page 63
l
"Application Notes & Other Documentation" on page 96
l
"Specifications Guides" on page 97
61
1 Additional Documentation
Documentation Common to All Measurement Applications
Click on any of the links below to open the document.
l
Getting Started Guide
l
l
Keysight Web Site [N9020-90225.pdf]
Instrument Messages Guide
l
Keysight Web Site [N9020-90095.pdf]
l
CXA Functional Tests Guide [N9000-90017.pdf]
l
EXA Functional Tests Guide [N9010-90013.pdf]
l
MXA Functional Tests Guide [N9020-90086.pdf]
l
PXA Functional Tests Guide [N9030-90018.pdf]
l
Programmer's Guide [N9020-90112.pdf]
l
Programming Conversion Guide [N9020-90090.pdf]
l
PSA Programming Compatibility Guide [N9020-90192.pdf]
For details of the types of documentation available, see "Documentation Categories" on page 98.
62
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
Documentation Specific to a Measurement Application or Option
For a list of links to all documents for a specific Measurement Application, click on one of the links below.
l
"N6141A & W6141A EMC Measurement Application" on page 65
l
"N6149A iDEN/WiDEN/MotoTalk Measurement Application" on page 66
l
"N6152A & W6152A Digital Cable TV Measurement Application" on page 67
l
"N6153A & W6153A DVB-T/H with T2 Measurement Application" on page 68
l
"N6155A & W6155A ISDB-T Measurement Application" on page 69
l
"N6156A & W6156A DTMB (CTTB) Measurement Application" on page 70
l
"N6158A & W6158A CMMB Measurement Application" on page 71
l
"N9030A RTSA Option" on page 72
l
"N9060A IQ Analyzer Mode" on page 73
l
"N9060A Spectrum Analyzer Mode" on page 74
l
"N9061A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application" on page 75
l
"N9062A & W9062A SCPI Language Compatibility Measurement Application" on page 76
l
"N9063A & W9063A Analog Demod Measurement Application" on page 77
l
"N9064A & W9064A VXA Measurement Application" on page 78
l
"N9068A & W9068A Phase Noise Measurement Application" on page 79
l
"N9069A & W9069A Noise Figure Measurement Application" on page 80
l
"N9071A & W9071A GSM/EDGE with EDGE Evolution Measurement Application" on page 81
l
"N9072A & W9072A cdma2000 Measurement Application" on page 82
l
"N9073A & W9073A W-CDMA & HSPA Measurement Application" on page 83
l
"N9074A Single Acquisition Combined Fixed WiMAX Measurement Application" on page 84
l
"N9075A & W9075A 802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro) Measurement Application" on page 85
l
"N9076A & W9076A 1xEV-DO Measurement Application" on page 86
l
"N9077A Single Acquisition Combined WLAN Measurement Application" on page 87
l
"N9077A & W9077A WLAN Measurement Application" on page 88
l
"N9079A & W9079A TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK Measurement Application" on page 89
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
63
1 Additional Documentation
l
"N9080A & W9080A LTE (FDD) Measurement Application" on page 90
l
"N9080B & W9080B LTE Advanced (FDD) Measurement Application" on page 91
l
"N9081A & W9081A Bluetooth Measurement Application" on page 92
l
"N9082A & W9082A LTE TDD Measurement Application" on page 93
l
"N9082B & W9082B LTE Advanced TDD Measurement Application" on page 94
l
"N9083A & W9083A Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Measurement Application" on page 95
For details of the types of documentation available, see "Documentation Categories" on page 98.
64
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N6141A & W6141A EMC Measurement Application
l
User's & Programmer's Reference [N6141-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N6141-90002.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
65
1 Additional Documentation
N6149A iDEN/WiDEN/MotoTalk Measurement Application
l
User's & Programmer's Reference [N6149-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N6149-90002.pdf]
66
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N6152A & W6152A Digital Cable TV Measurement Application
l
User's & Programmer's Reference [N6152-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N6152-90002.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
67
1 Additional Documentation
N6153A & W6153A DVB-T/H with T2 Measurement Application
l
User's & Programmer's Reference [N6153-90003.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N6153-90004.pdf]
68
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N6155A & W6155A ISDB-T Measurement Application
l
User's & Programmer's Reference [N6155-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N6155-90002.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
69
1 Additional Documentation
N6156A & W6156A DTMB (CTTB) Measurement Application
l
User's & Programmer's Reference [N6156-90003.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N6156-90004.pdf]
70
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N6158A & W6158A CMMB Measurement Application
l
User's & Programmer's Reference [N6158-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N6158-90002.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
71
1 Additional Documentation
N9030A RTSA Option
l
User's & Programmer's Reference [N9030-90059.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9030-90060.pdf]
72
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9060A IQ Analyzer Mode
l
User's & Programmer's Reference [N9060-90029.pdf]
l
Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measurement Guide [N9060-90034.pdf]
Note that there is no separate Measurement Guide for IQ Analyzer Mode. Measurement setup information
is included in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measurement Guide.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
73
1 Additional Documentation
N9060A Spectrum Analyzer Mode
l
User's & Programmer's Reference [N9060-90027.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9060-90034.pdf]
74
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9061A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application
l
Remote Language Compatibility Guide [N9020-90119.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
75
1 Additional Documentation
N9062A & W9062A SCPI Language Compatibility Measurement
Application
l
76
SCPI Language Compatibility Guide [N9062-90001.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9063A & W9063A Analog Demod Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9063-90005.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9063-90006.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
77
1 Additional Documentation
N9064A & W9064A VXA Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9064-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9064-90002.pdf]
78
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9068A & W9068A Phase Noise Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9068-90010.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9068-90011.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
79
1 Additional Documentation
N9069A & W9069A Noise Figure Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9069-90005.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9069-90006.pdf]
80
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9071A & W9071A GSM/EDGE with EDGE Evolution Measurement
Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9071-90015.pdf]
l
Single Acquisition Combined GSM Measurement Application [N9071-90014.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9071-90016.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
81
1 Additional Documentation
N9072A & W9072A cdma2000 Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9072-90006.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide and Programming Examples [N9072-90005.pdf]
82
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9073A & W9073A W-CDMA & HSPA Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9073-90016.pdf]
l
Single Acquisition Combined W-CDMA Measurement Application [N9073-90015.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9073-90017.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
83
1 Additional Documentation
N9074A Single Acquisition Combined Fixed WiMAX Measurement
Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9074-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9074-90002.pdf]
84
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9075A & W9075A 802.16 OFDMA (WiMAX/WiBro) Measurement
Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9075-90012.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9075-90013.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
85
1 Additional Documentation
N9076A & W9076A 1xEV-DO Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9076-90003.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9076-90004.pdf]
86
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9077A Single Acquisition Combined WLAN Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9077-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9077-90002.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
87
1 Additional Documentation
N9077A & W9077A WLAN Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9077-90003.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9077-90004.pdf]
88
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9079A & W9079A TD-SCDMA with HSPA/8PSK Measurement
Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9079-90007.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9079-90005.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
89
1 Additional Documentation
N9080A & W9080A LTE (FDD) Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9080-90005.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9080-90006.pdf]
90
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9080B & W9080B LTE Advanced (FDD) Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9080-90007.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9080-90008.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
91
1 Additional Documentation
N9081A & W9081A Bluetooth Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9081-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9081-90002.pdf]
92
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9082A & W9082A LTE TDD Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9082-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9082-90002.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
93
1 Additional Documentation
N9082B & W9082B LTE Advanced TDD Measurement Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9082-90003.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9082-90004.pdf]
94
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
N9083A & W9083A Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Measurement
Application
l
User's and Programmer's Reference [N9083-90001.pdf]
l
Measurement Guide [N9083-90002.pdf]
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
95
1 Additional Documentation
Application Notes & Other Documentation
Click on any of the links below to open the document in a new window.
l
Application Note 57-1: Fundamentals of RF and Microwave Noise Figure Measurements [59528255E.pdf]
l
Application Note 57-2: Noise Figure Measurement Accuracy - The Y-Factor Method [5952-3706E.pdf]
l
Application Note 150: Spectrum Analysis Basics [5952-0292.pdf]
l
Application Note 1325: Performing cdma2000 Measurements Today [5968-5858E.pdf]
l
Application Note 1355: Designing & Testing 3GPP W-CDMA Base Transceiver Stations [59801239E.pdf]
l
Application Note 1356: Designing & Testing 3GPP W-CDMA User Equipment [5980-1238E.pdf]
l
Application Note 1357: Designing and Testing cdma2000 Base Stations [5980-1303E.pdf]
l
Application Note 1358: Designing and Testing cdma2000 Mobile Stations [5980-1237E.pdf]
l
Application Note 1398: Forward Link Measurements for 1xEV-DO Access Networks [5988-6125EN.pdf]
l
Application Note 1414: Understanding Measurement of 1xEV-DO Access Terminals [5988-7694EN.pdf]
l
l
l
l
Application Note 1578: IEEE 802.16e WiMAX OFDMA Signal Measurements and Troubleshooting
[5989-2382EN.pdf]
Application Note 1583: Maximizing Measurement Speed with Keysight’s X-Series Signal Analyzers
[5989-4947EN.pdf]
Application Note 1585: Using Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers for Measuring and Troubleshooting
Digitally Modulated Signals [5989-4944EN.pdf]
Application Note: Keysight 3GPP Long Term Evolution: System Overview, Product Development, and
Test Challenges [5989-8139EN.pdf]
l
Application Note: Mobile WiMAX™ PHY Layer (RF) Operation and Measurement [5989-8309EN.pdf]
l
Application Note: Keysight Preamplifiers and System Noise Figure [5989-5742EN.pdf]
l
Tips for Preventing Damage to Spectrum Analyzer [5989-8791EN.pdf]
l
Keysight VISA Help for I/O Libraries
This documentation is included in HTML Help (CHM) format in the Keysight I/O Libraries Suite installer,
which may be downloaded from:
www.agilent.com/find/iosuite
After installing the library, you can access the help by clicking the IO taskbar icon, then selecting
Documentation > API Documentation > VISA Documentation from the popup menus.
For details of the types of documentation available, see "Documentation Categories" on page 98.
96
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
Specifications Guides
Specifications documents are not located on the instrument's disk, but may be downloaded from the
Keysight web site as PDF files. To download a copy, do the following:
1. Browse to one of the following URLs, according to the product name of your instrument:
www.agilent.com/find/cxa
www.agilent.com/find/exa
www.agilent.com/find/mxa
www.agilent.com/find/pxa
2. The home page for your instrument appears (in some cases, you may see an initial splash screen
containing a button named View the Webpage, which you should click to display the home page).
3. Locate the Technical Support tab, at the top right of the screen, as highlighted in the example below,
which shows the home page for the PXA.
4. Click the Technical Support tab, as highlighted above, to display the Technical Support page for your
instrument.
5. Locate the Specifications tab on the Technical Support page, as highlighted in the PXA example below,
and click the tab to display a list of available specification documents for the instrument.
6. Locate the "N90x0A Signal Analyzer Specifications Guide" in the list of available downloads, then click
the title to open or copy the PDF file. (When the PDF is open, you can save it to your computer.)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
97
1 Additional Documentation
Documentation Categories
Documentation Categories
All available documentation for X-Series instruments falls into one of the following categories.
Type
Description
"Getting Started Guide" on page 62
Turn on process, Windows operating system use/configuration, Front and Rear panel.
Specifications Guide
Specifications for all available Measurement Applications and optional hardware (for
example, Spectrum Analyzer and W-CDMA).
For details of how to obtain these documents, see Specifications Guides.
Functional Tests Guides
Quick checks to verify overall instrument operation. The following manuals are
available:
l
CXA Functional Tests Guide
l
EXA Functional Tests Guide
l
MXA Functional Tests Guide
l
PXA Functional Tests Guide
Instrument Messages Guide
Descriptions of displayed messages of Information, Warnings and Errors.
Measurement Guides
Includes examples of measurements made using the front panel keys, or over a
remote interface.
Measurement Guides are specific to each Measurement Application: see
"Documentation Specific to a Measurement Application or Option" on page 63.
Programmer's Guide
Provides information about how to program Keysight X-Series instruments using SCPI
commands, and explains how to use the programming documentation. Describes
programming examples, which are available in several languages.
User's and Programmer's References
Descriptions of front panel key functionality and the corresponding SCPI commands
and queries. Also includes some concept information.
User's and Programmer's Reference manuals are specific to each Measurement
Application: see "Documentation Specific to a Measurement Application or Option"
on page 63.
98
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
1 Additional Documentation
Downloading PDF Files
Downloading PDF Files
You can download any of the PDF files listed in this chapter by opening any internet browser program on an
internet-connected computer, and entering a URL as follows.
1. Enter the following prefix:
http://cp.literature.agilent.com/litweb/pdf/
2. Append the file name of the manual you want to download, including the .pdf extension, as specified in
the main "Additional Documentation" on page 61 list. The file name for each manual appears in square
brackets, following its title text.
(Note that the name is case-sensitive; letters in the part number portion of the name must be uppercase.)
For example, if you want to download the Measurement Guide for the "N9060A Spectrum Analyzer
Mode" on page 74, the correct file name is: N9060-90034.pdf, so the complete URL would be:
http://cp.literature.agilent.com/litweb/pdf/N9060-90034.pdf
3. Depending on your browser settings, the PDF file for the manual you specified will be downloaded and
opened automatically, or a dialog will appear that allows you to download the file.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
99
1 Additional Documentation
Downloading PDF Files
100
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the Instrument
The X-Series instrument measures and monitors complex RF and
microwave signals. Analog baseband analysis is available on MXA.
The instrument integrates traditional spectrum measurements with
advanced vector signal analysis to optimize speed, accuracy, and
dynamic range. The instrument has Microsoft Windows 7 built-in as
an operating system, which expands its usability.
With a broad set of applications and demodulation capabilities, an
intuitive user interface, outstanding connectivity and powerful onebutton measurements, the instrument is ideal for both R&D and
manufacturing engineers working on cellular, emerging wireless
communications, general purpose, aerospace and defense
applications.
This chapter includes the following topics:
l
"Installing Application Software" on page 102
l
"X-Series Options and Accessories" on page 104
l
"Front & Rear Panel Features" on page 105
l
"Display Annotations" on page 106
l
"Window Control Keys" on page 107
l
"Mouse and Keyboard Control" on page 110
l
"Instrument Security & Memory Volatility" on page 115
101
2 About the Instrument
Installing Application Software
Installing Application Software
If you want to install a measurement application after your initial hardware purchase, you need only to
license it. All of the available applications are loaded in your instrument at the time of purchase.
Thus, when you purchase a new application, you will receive an entitlement certificate that you can use to
obtain a license key for that application. To activate the new measurement application, enter the license
key that you obtain into the instrument.
For the latest information on Keysight measurement applications and upgrade kits, visit the following web
site:
http://www.agilent.com/find/sa_upgrades
This section includes the following topics:
l
"Viewing a License Key" on page 102
l
"Obtaining and Installing a License Key " on page 102
l
"Updating Measurement Application Software" on page 103
Viewing a License Key
Measurement applications that you purchased with your instrument have been installed and activated at
the factory before shipment. The instrument requires a unique License Key for every measurement
application purchased. The license key is a hexadecimal string that is specific to your measurement
application, instrument model number and serial number. It enables you to install, or reactivate, that
particular application.
Press System, Show, System to display the measurement applications that are currently licensed in your
instrument.
Go to the following location to view the license keys for the installed measurement applications:
C:\Program Files\Agilent\Licensing
You may want to keep a copy of your license key in a secure location. To do this, you can print out a copy of
the display showing the license numbers. If you should lose your license key, call your nearest Keysight
Technologies service or sales office for assistance.
Obtaining and Installing a License Key
If you purchase an additional application that requires installation, you will receive an "Entitlement
Certificate", which may be redeemed for a license key for one instrument. To obtain your license key, follow
the instructions that accompany the certificate.
Installing a license key for the selected application can be done automatically using a USB memory device.
To do this, you copy the license file to the USB memory device, at the root level. Follow the instructions
that come with your software installation kit.
Installing a license key can also be done manually using the built-in license management application,
which may be found via the instrument front panel keys at System, Licensing. . . , or on-disk at:
C:\Programming Files\Agilent\Licensing
102
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the Instrument
Installing Application Software
You can also use these procedures to reinstall a license key that has been accidentally deleted, or lost due
to a memory failure.
Updating Measurement Application Software
All the software applications were loaded at the time of original instrument manufacture. It is a good idea
to regularly update your software with the latest available version. This helps to ensure that you receive
any improvements and expanded functionality.
Because the software was loaded at the initial purchase, further additional measurement applications may
now be available. If the application you are interested in licensing is not available, you will need to do a
software update. (To display a list of installed applications, press System, Show, System.)
Check the appropriate page of the Keysight web site for the latest available software versions, according
to the name of your instrument, as follows:
l
http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa_software
l
http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa_software
l
http://www.agilent.com/find/exa_software
You can load the updated software package into the instrument from a USB drive, or directly from the
internet. An automatic loading program is included with the files.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
103
2 About the Instrument
X-Series Options and Accessories
X-Series Options and Accessories
You can view an online list of available Options and Accessories for your instrument as follows:
1. Browse to one of the following URLs, according to the product name of your instrument:
l
www.agilent.com/find/exa
l
www.agilent.com/find/mxa
l
www.agilent.com/find/pxa
2. The home page for your instrument appears (in some cases, you may see an initial splash screen
containing a button named View the Webpage, which you should click to display the home page).
3. Locate the Options tab, as highlighted in the example below, which shows the home page for the MXA.
4. Click the Options tab, to display a list of available options and accessories for your instrument.
104
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the Instrument
Front & Rear Panel Features
Front & Rear Panel Features
The instrument's front and rear panel features are fully detailed in the chapter "Front and Rear Panel
Features" of the document:
"Getting Started Guide" on page 62
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
105
2 About the Instrument
Display Annotations
Display Annotations
Display Annotations are fully detailed under the chapter "Front and Rear Panel Features" of the document:
"Getting Started Guide" on page 62
106
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the Instrument
Window Control Keys
Window Control Keys
The instrument provides three front-panel keys for controlling windows. These are:
l
"Multi-Window" on page 107
l
"Zoom" on page 107
l
"Next Window" on page 108
These are all “immediate action” keys.
Multi-Window
The Multi-Window key can be found on the instrument's front panel, below the display screen.
Pressing the key toggles back and forth between the Normal View and the last Multi-Window View (Zone
Span, Trace Zoom or Spectrogram) that you selected when using the Swept SA measurement of the
Spectrum Analyzer Mode. The selected view is retained through a Preset. On a Restore Mode Defaults,
the “previous view” is set to Zone Span.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Zoom
The Zoom key can be found on the instrument's front panel, below the display screen.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
107
2 About the Instrument
Window Control Keys
Zoom is a toggle function. Pressing this key once increases the size of the selected window; pressing the
key again returns the window to the original size.
When Zoom is on for a window, that window occupies the entire primary display area. The zoomed window,
since it is the selected window, is outlined in green.
Zoom is local to each Measurement. Each Measurement remembers its Zoom state. The Zoom state of
each Measurement is part of the Mode’s state.
Data acquisition and processing for the other windows continues while a window is zoomed, as does all
SCPI communication with the other windows.
Remote Command
:DISPlay:WINDow:FORMat:ZOOM
Remote Command
:DISPlay:WINDow:FORMat:TILE
Example
:DISP:WIND:FORM:ZOOM sets zoomed
:DISP:WIND:FORM:TILE sets un-zoomed
Preset
TILE
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Next Window
The Next Window key can be found on the instrument's front panel, below the display screen.
Pressing the key selects the next window of the current view. When the Next Window key is pressed, the
next window in the order of precedence becomes selected. If the selected window was zoomed, the next
window will also be zoomed.
The window numbers are as shown in the diagrams below. Note that these numbers also determine the
order of precedence (that is, Next Window goes from 1 to 2, then 2 to 3, etc.):
Remote Command
:DISPlay:WINDow[:SELect] <number>
:DISPlay:WINDow[:SELect]?
Example
:DISP:WIND 1
Preset
1
108
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the Instrument
Window Control Keys
Min
1
Max
If <number> is greater than the number of windows, limit to <number of windows>
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
One and only one window is always selected. The selected window has the focus; this means that all
window-specific key presses apply only to that window. You can tell which window is selected by the thick
green border around it. If a window is not selected, its boundary is gray.
If a window in a multi-window display is zoomed, it is still outlined in green. If there is only one window, the
green outline is not used. This allows the user to distinguish between a zoomed window and a display with
only one window.
The selected window is local to each Measurement. Each Measurement remembers which window is
selected. The selected window for each Measurement is remembered in the Mode state.
When this key is pressed with Help open, it toggles focus between the table of contents window and the
topic pane window.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
109
2 About the Instrument
Mouse and Keyboard Control
Mouse and Keyboard Control
If you do not have access to the instrument front-panel, there are several ways that a mouse and PC
Keyboard can give you access to functions normally accessed using the front-panel keys.
l
"Right-Click" on page 110
l
"PC Keyboard" on page 111
Right-Click
If you plug in a mouse, then right-click on the instrument screen, a menu appears as below:
Placing the mouse on one of the rows marked with a right arrow symbol causes that row to expand, as in
the example below, where the mouse is hovered over the “Utility” row:
110
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the Instrument
Mouse and Keyboard Control
This method can be used to access any of the front-panel keys by using a mouse; as for example if you are
accessing the instrument via Remote Desktop.
The array of keys thus available is shown below:
PC Keyboard
If you have a PC keyboard plugged into the instrument (or via Remote Desktop), certain key codes on the
PC keyboard map to front-panel keys on the instrument. These key codes are listed below:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
111
2 About the Instrument
Mouse and Keyboard Control
Front-panel key
Key code
Frequency
CTRL+SHIFT+F
Span
CTRL+SHIFT+S
Amplitude
CTRL+SHIFT+A
Input/Output
CTRL+SHIFT+O
View/Display
CTRL+SHIFT+V
Trace/Detector
CTRL+ALT+T
Auto Couple
CTRL+SHIFT+C
Bandwidth
CTRL+ALT+B
Source
CTRL+ALT-U
Marker
CTRL+ALT+K
Peak Search
CTRL+ALT+P
Marker To
CTRL+ALT+N
Marker Function
CTRL+ALT+F
System
CTRL+SHIFT+Y
Quick Save
CTRL+Q
Save
CTRL+S
Recall
CTRL+R
Mode Preset
CTRL+M
User Preset
CTRL+U
Print
CTRL+P
File
CTRL+SHIFT+L
Mode
CTRL+SHIFT+M
Measure
CTRL+ALT+M
Mode Setup
CTRL+SHIFT+E
Meas Setup
CTRL+ALT+E
Trigger
CTRL+SHIFT+T
Sweep/Control
CTRL+SHIFT+W
Restart
CTRL+ALT+R
Single
CTRL+ALT+S
Cont
CTRL+ALT+C
Zoom
CTRL+SHIFT+Z
Next Window
CTRL+SHIFT+N
Split Screen
CTRL+L
Full Screen
CTRL+SHIFT+B
Return
CTRL+SHIFT+R
Mute
Mute
112
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the Instrument
Mouse and Keyboard Control
Front-panel key
Key code
Inc Audio
Volume Up
Dec Audio
Volume Down
Help
F1
Control
CTRL
Alt
ALT
Enter
Return
Cancel
Esc
Del
Delete
Backspace
Backspace
Select
Space
Up Arrow
Up
Down Arrow
Down
Left Arrow
Left
Right Arrow
Right
Menu key 1
CTRL+SHIFT+F1
Menu key 2
CTRL+SHIFT+F2
Menu key 3
CTRL+SHIFT+F3
Menu key 4
CTRL+SHIFT+F4
Menu key 5
CTRL+SHIFT+F5
Menu key 6
CTRL+SHIFT+F6
Menu key 7
CTRL+SHIFT+F7
Backspace
BACKSPACE
Enter
ENTER
Tab
Tab 1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
0
0
This is a pictorial view of the table:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
113
2 About the Instrument
Mouse and Keyboard Control
114
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
2 About the Instrument
Instrument Security & Memory Volatility
Instrument Security & Memory Volatility
If you are using the instrument in a secure environment, you may need details of how to clear or sanitize its
memory, in compliance with published security standards of the United States Department of Defense, or
other similar authorities.
For X-Series instruments, this information is contained in the document "Security Features and Document
of Volatility". This document is not included in the Documentation DVD, or the instrument's on-disk library,
but it may be downloaded from Keysight's web site.
To obtain a copy of the document, click on or browse to the following URL:
http://www.agilent.com/find/security
To locate and download the document, select Model Number "N9020A", then click Submit". Then, follow
the on-screen instructions to download the file.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
115
2 About the Instrument
Instrument Security & Memory Volatility
116
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
3 About the N9061A Measurement
Application
This chapter provides general information about the N9061A
application. It includes the following topics:
l
"N9061A Application Description" on page 118
l
"Documentation for the N9061A application" on page 119
l
"General Rules and Limitations" on page 120
l
"Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A" on page 123
l
"Installing the N9061A Application" on page 125
l
"Setting up N9061A" on page 126
l
"Hints and Tips" on page 127
l
"Service and Calibration" on page 129
117
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
N9061A Application Description
N9061A Application Description
N9061A is a Remote Language Compatibility application for Keysight Technologies X-Series instruments.
It allows X-Series instruments to be controlled using many non-SCPI remote programming commands
originally intended for the following analyzers:
l
8560 E/EC Series Portable Spectrum Analyzers, comprising:
l
8560E, 8560EC, 8561E, 8561EC, 8562E, 8562EC, 8563E, 8563EC, 8564E, 8564EC, 8565E, 8565EC
l
8566A/B
l
8568A/B
(The 8566A/B and the 8568A/B are not considered part of the 8560 series of analyzers.)
An X-Series instrument with N9061A installed can replace these analyzers in many automated systems
with minimal or no modification to the existing measurement software.
There are two options for N9061A:
Option
Description
N9061A-1FP
8566A/B and 8568A/B remote language compatibility
N9061A-2FP
8560 Series remote language compatibility.
118
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Documentation for the N9061A application
Documentation for the N9061A application
Scope of this Document
This manual does not provide a comprehensive guide to all legacy commands. It provides brief descriptions
of legacy commands that are supported by N9061A, and highlights important functional or behavioral
differences that you should be aware of when using existing legacy code to control your X-Series
instrument. For a complete description of all legacy commands, refer to the manuals supplied with your
original analyzer.
Where to Obtain this Document
When you purchase an X-Series instrument with the Remote Language Compatibility Application
(N9061A), this manual (N9061A Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application User’s &
Programmer’s Reference, part number N9020-90119) is included on the documentation DVD. It may also
be downloaded from the Keysight web site at:
http://cp.literature.agilent.com/litweb/pdf/N9020-90119.pdf
This document contains exactly the same content as the instrument’s online Help file (CHM) for N9061A.
Instrument Updates
For the latest information about your X-Series instrument, including software upgrades, application
information, and product information, please visit the URL below that corresponds to your instrument’s
product name:
l
http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa/
l
http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa/
l
http://www.agilent.com/find/exa/
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
119
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
General Rules and Limitations
General Rules and Limitations
The N9061A application has been designed to emulate as closely as possible the operation of the specified
spectrum analyzers. It is not, however, intended as a fully-compatible, direct replacement for these
analyzers. This section highlights the following specific emulation differences and limitations:
l
"AC/DC Coupling" on page 120
l
"Couplings" on page 120
l
"Markers" on page 121
l
"Numeric Ranges" on page 121
l
"Parsing" on page 121
l
"Predefined Functions" on page 121
l
"Remote Control" on page 121
l
"Returning Data" on page 121
l
"Units" on page 122
l
"User-defined Functions" on page 122
l
"Supported Commands" on page 122
l
"EP Parameter" on page 122
l
"OA Parameter" on page 122
l
"Handling of Unsupported Commands and Queries" on page 122
AC/DC Coupling
The 44 GHz and 50 GHz X-Series instruments only have DC coupling. The X-Series instruments with a 26.5
GHz frequency range, and lower, default to AC coupling on preset. When the selected legacy instrument is
HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8563, HP8564, or HP8565, N9061A defaults to DC coupling.
When AC coupled, the 8560E/61E/62E have a 100 kHz low frequency limit, whereas X-Series instruments
have a 10 MHz limit.
For HP8568A/B compatibility and consistency, N9061A supports the I1 and I2 commands. These select AC
or DC coupling at the RF input. Note that the HP8568A/B has two RF input ports, whereas X-Series
instruments have only one.
Couplings
For optimal use of the X-Series instrument, N9061A uses the auto coupling features of the X-Series, and
does not attempt to mimic the exact coupling behavior of the legacy analyzers. To eliminate the possibility
of "Meas Uncal" errors between auto and manual values, values generally default to the X-Series auto
120
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
General Rules and Limitations
settings where applicable (for example, Resolution Bandwidth). However, there are several exceptions, as
follows:
To prevent timeout errors in the legacy code, the Resolution Bandwidth minimum matches the minimum in
the legacy analyzer. Resolution Bandwidth steps and resolution, however, conform to X-Series values.
The Video Bandwidth couples to the Resolution Bandwidth according to the Video Bandwidth coupling
offset value, specified by the VBO or VBR command. X-Series instruments set the Video Bandwidth
according to the VBO or VBR setting, but use the X-Series instruments’ available bandwidths, to prevent
'Meas Uncal' errors.
Markers
N9061A emulates the behavior of legacy products. If any program uses a marker state that is not available
in the legacy instrument, further marker behavior is undefined, until a subsequent instrument preset
occurs.
On systems that support MKACT, there are 4 completely different marker pairs, each with its own
information. N9061A stores the currently active value of MKACT. For example, if MKACT is 2, then it uses
Markers 3 and 4 instead of 1 and 2.
Numeric Ranges
Numeric ranges are limited to that of X-Series unless otherwise stated, although commands such as FS or
IP that go to a default range use the range of the legacy instrument.
Parsing
For 8566B and 8568B emulation, N9061A remembers the active function and supports UP, DN, and OA, all
of which change the active function. It also supports ?, which does not change the active function.
Note that 8566/68 parses a command (for example CF 10.3GZ) immediately when it recognizes a complete
command (in this example, following GZ), whereas N9061A parses at the end of a line, when it sees the line
termination sequence.
Predefined Functions
In the 8566/8568/8560 Series analyzers, a “Predefined Function” is a command that returns a number that
can be operated on by other commands. “Predefined Variables” follow the same concept, except that the
value to be passed as a parameter to the next command is stored in a variable.
N9061A does not support this type of behavior, so any commands that originally acted as Predefined
Functions or Variables, or that accepted Predefined Functions or Variables as arguments in the
8566/8568/8560 Series, no longer do so.
Remote Control
N9061A supports remote operation via the GPIB interface. It does not support operation via LAN, USB or
Telnet.
Returning Data
X-Series and legacy instruments adopt differing approaches when returning data to the controller.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
121
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
General Rules and Limitations
X-Series and 8560-series analyzers operate a FIFO buffer for command return values. If a command
returns a value that the controller does not read, the returned data is stored until such a time that the
controller requires the value.
The 8566, 8568, and 8590-series legacy analyzers only store one value at a time. Any value stored is
overwritten each time a command returns a value. N9061A handles this difference appropriately only
within a single command string.
In the case of a query string, N9061A returns the query result for the last command in the string. For
example, if CF?MA?FA? is sent, the result of FA? is returned. However, this rule does not apply if the query
is located on either side of a TS command. When the command string MA;TS;CF? is sent, the result of CF?
is returned in the next query.
Units
N9061A supports all units used in legacy products. The accepted units are HZ, KHZ, MHZ, GHZ, KZ, MZ,
GZ, DBM, DBMV, DBUV, MV, UV, V, MW, UW, W, DB, DM, MS, US, SC, and S (case insensitive in 8566/68).
A command terminator, such as ";", also acts as a unit terminator.
User-defined Functions
User-defined functions, traces, or variables (FUNCDEF, TRDEF or VARDEF) cannot be used as arguments
or commands in programs for N9061A. In addition, the behavior of certain commands that rely on the
“active functions” (UP, DN, etc.) may be slightly different.
Supported Commands
N9061A supports only a subset of 8566/8568/8560 Series commands. The list of supported commands
was determined by feedback from customers, combined with technical considerations and constraints.
Device Clear is supported by N9061A, and causes a mode preset of the instrument.
EP Parameter
The EP (Enable Parameter) is supported by N9061A for the same active functions as the 8560 series. When
used as a secondary keyword after a command, EP transfers control to the analyzer’s front-panel.
EP is not displayed in any of the format diagrams for individual commands listed in "Legacy Command
Descriptions" on page 251.
OA Parameter
N9061A supports the OA parameter, which is used in conjunction with several legacy commands, such as
AT and CF. OA is equivalent to a query; for example, CF OA is equivalent to CF?.
Handling of Unsupported Commands and Queries
If a command is valid for legacy products but not supported by N9061A, no error message is generated,
although a "Command Not Supported" comment is appended to the Command Log file. Note that this
logging behavior can be controlled via the Logging menu, as described in "Logging" on page 881.
If N9061A receives a query that is valid for legacy products, but is not supported by N9061A, it returns a "0",
to avoid the situation where a program would otherwise halt indefinitely waiting for a return value.
122
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
For maximum compatibility, you should select an X-Series instrument that equals or exceeds the frequency
range of the legacy analyzer you are replacing. The frequency limits of the legacy analyzers are listed
below.
Frequency Ranges of Legacy Analyzers
Remote Language
Start Frequency
Stop Frequency
8560E/EC
30 Hz
2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
30 Hz
6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
30 Hz
13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
9 kHz
26.5 GHz
8564E/EC
9 kHz
40.0 GHz
8565E/EC
9 kHz
50.0 GHz
HP8566A
2 GHz
22 GHz
HP8566B
2 GHz
22 GHz
HP8568A
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
HP8568B
0 Hz
1.5 GHz
The following table lists the Upper Frequency Limits and minimum firmware revisions for Keysight X-Series
instruments that support N9061A.
Compatible Keysight X-Series Instruments
Product Name
Instrument Model Number
Upper Frequency Limit
Firmware Revision
PXA
N9030A-503
3.6 GHz
Rev A.04.00 or later
N9030A-508
8.4 GHz
N9030A-513
13.6 GHz
N9030A-526
26.5 GHz
N9030A-543
43 GHz
N9030A-544
44 GHz
N9030A-550
50 GHz
N9020A-503
3.6 GHz
N9020A-508
8.4 GHz
N9020A-513
13.6 GHz
N9020A-526
26.5 GHz
MXA
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Rev A.01.64 or later
123
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A
Product Name
Instrument Model Number
Upper Frequency Limit
Firmware Revision
EXA
N9010A-503
3.6 GHz
Rev A.01.64 or later
N9010A-507
7 GHz
N9010A-513
13.6 GHz
N9010A-526
26.5 GHz
N9010A-532
32 GHz
N9010A-544
44 GHz
124
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Installing the N9061A Application
Installing the N9061A Application
N9061A is a licensed application for X-Series instruments. The option for 8560 Series emulation is
N9061A-2FP, and the option for 8566/8568 emulation is N9061A-1FP. The application must be installed
and licensed on a suitable X-Series instrument (PXA, MXA, or EXA) for it to work correctly.
Installation
The license is installed on the X-Series instrument in one of the following ways:
If you purchased a new X-Series instrument with N9061A, then the product is already installed and
licensed, and is ready to use.
If you have an X-Series instrument and have subsequently purchased N9061A, then you can download
N9061A from the Keysight website. N9061A is installed as part of a software upgrade. See the links below
for instrument software upgrades. After upgrading your software you should then use your entitlement
certificate to license the product (see "Licensing" on page 125 below).
The latest revision of the software may be downloaded from:
l
http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa_software
l
http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa_software
l
http://www.agilent.com/find/exa_software
No calibration is required after N9061A is installed.
Licensing
For details of how to install and activate an N9061A license, see the section "Keysight X-Series Analyzer
Licensing Options" in the chapter "Instrument Operating System" of the "Getting Started and
Troubleshooting Guide", which may be downloaded in PDF format from the following location.
http://www.agilent.com/find/xseries_getting_started_guide_windows7
Verify the Installation
l
Press System > Show > System, to display the list of installed applications.
l
Verify that N9061A appears in the Option list.
If you require further assistance, please contact the Keysight support team.
l
l
Online assistance: http://www.agilent.com/find/assist
If you do not have access to the Internet, contact your local Keysight Technologies Sales and Service
Office, or if in the United States, call 1-800-829-4444.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
125
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Setting up N9061A
Setting up N9061A
To set up your X-Series instrument for emulation of one of the supported legacy analyzers, do the
following:
Step
Action
Notes
1
Select the N9061A Measurement Application
(Mode)
Press the Mode hardkey on the front panel, then press the sofkey for
Remote Language Compatibility mode.
If there are more than six modes on the instrument, you may need to
use the More softkey to display the Remote Language Compatibility
selection.
For details of the menu, see "Mode" on page 857.
2
Select the legacy analyzer you wish to
emulate
Press the Mode Setup hardkey on the front panel, then select the
specific analyzer type from the keys in the submenu.
For details of this menu, see "Mode Setup" on page 879.
126
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Hints and Tips
Hints and Tips
This section provides hints and tips that will help you get the most from the X-Series N9061A application.
Compatibility (Speed and Consistency)
To maximize compatibility with your legacy analyzer, the N9061A application should be used on the
instrument whose frequency range most closely matches the frequency range of your legacy analyzer. For
example, the best match for the 8563E, which has a 26.5 GHz upper frequency limit, is an X-Series
instrument that also has an upper frequency limit of 26.5 GHz.
Compatibility and Sweep Times
To maximize compatibility between X-Series instruments and legacy analyzers, use the Manual Swept
mode for 8566A/B, 8568A/B analyzers. Manual Swept mode is the default setting on X-Series instruments
with N9061A installed.
When analyzing stationary signals, you can change to the Best Speed setting, which is accessed from the
Mode Setup > Preferences > Swp Type Rule menu. This results in faster sweep times on an X-Series
instrument than on the legacy analyzers, due to the X-Series instrument’s better performance. In the
majority of applications, this faster speed would be desirable, but that is not always the case.
Timeout
Keysight recommends increasing the timeout on a serial poll (SPOLL) due to differences in Sweep Times on
some settings. Note, however, that this may not be necessary when using the Best Speed setting on the
Preferences > Swp Type Rule menu (accessed from the Mode Setup hardkey).
Synchronization (1)
To synchronize after an IP command, Keysight recommends that you use the DONE command. We also
suggest that the DONE command be used in conjunction with a timeout of about 5 seconds, in case the
instrument starts to Auto Align.
Alternatively, you can switch off auto alignment. To set auto alignment to Off, press System, Alignments,
Auto Align on the front panel.
Synchronization (2)
Keysight recommends that synchronization (using the DONE command) be used with marker functions
when signal tracking is turned on.
Changing Modes
After changing into or out of N9061A mode, allow at least a 1 second delay before sending subsequent
commands.
AC and DC Coupling
The 8560 Series of legacy analyzers have one RF input port, and support AC and DC coupling through the
command "COUPLE (Input Coupling)" on page 310.
The 8568A/B has two RF input ports:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
127
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Hints and Tips
l
DC Coupled (with a BNC connector) to handle a frequency range of 100 Hz to 1.5 GHz
l
AC Coupled (with an N Type connector) to handle a frequency range of 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz
If the input signal to the X-series instrument has a DC component, ensure that when you select legacy
instrument emulation that involves a possible coupling change to DC, the input signal does not exceed the
input specifications of the X-series instrument.
X-series instruments also have one RF input port. When using X-Series instruments, you must use DC
coupling to see calibrated frequencies of less than 20 MHz. Signals of less than 20 MHz are not calibrated
when using AC coupling on these instruments.
128
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Service and Calibration
Service and Calibration
Since the Performance Verification and Adjustment Software uses the SCPI command language, you must
exit the N9061A application and change to N9060A Spectrum Analyzer Mode, prior to calibration or service
of your instrument.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
129
3 About the N9061A Measurement Application
Service and Calibration
130
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
This section provides introductory information about the
programming documentation included with your product.
l
"What Programming Information is Available?" on page 132
l
"List of Supported SCPI Commands" on page 133
l
"IEEE 488.2 Common Commands" on page 154
l
"Remote Measurement Functions" on page 163
l
"STATus Subsystem " on page 177
131
4 Programming the Instrument
What Programming Information is Available?
What Programming Information is Available?
The X-Series Documentation can be accessed through the Additional Documentation page in the
instrument Help system and is included on the Documentation DVD shipped with the instrument. It can
also be found online at:
http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa_manuals.
The following resources are available to help you create programs for automating X-Series
measurements:
Resource
Description
X-Series
Programmer's
Guide
Provides general SCPI programming information on the following topics:
l
Programming the X-Series Applications
l
Programming fundamentals
l
Programming examples
Note that SCPI command descriptions for measurement applications are not in this book, but are in the
User's and Programmer's Reference.
User's and
Programmer's
Reference
manuals
Describes all front-panel keys and softkeys, including SCPI commands for a measurement application. Note
that:
l
l
Each measurement application has its own User's and Programmer's Reference.
The content in this manual is duplicated in the instrument's Help (the Help that you see for a key is
identical to what you see in this manual).
Embedded Help in
your instrument
Describes all front-panel keys and softkeys, including SCPI commands, for a measurement application. Note
that the content that you see in Help when you press a key is identical to what you see in the User's and
Programmer's Reference.
X-Series Getting
Started Guide
Provides valuable sections related to programming including:
l
Licensing New Measurement Application Software - After Initial Purchase
l
Configuring instrument LAN Hostname, IP Address, and Gateway Address
l
Using the Windows XP Remote Desktop to connect to the instrument remotely
l
Using the Embedded Web Server Telnet connection to communicate SCPI
This printed document is shipped with the instrument.
Keysight
Application Notes
Printable PDF versions of pertinent application notes.
Keysight VISA
User's Guide
Describes the Keysight Virtual Instrument Software Architecture (VISA) library and shows how to use it to
develop I/O applications and instrument drivers on Windows PCs.
132
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
List of Supported SCPI Commands
When the N9061A application has been selected, the X-Series instrument supports only a subset of SCPI
commands.
The SCPI commands available while using the N9061A application are listed below. (Non-SCPI commands
for legacy analyzers are not listed here; see instead "List of Legacy Analyzer Commands" on page 221.)
To find a command in the list, search according to its first alphanumeric character, ignoring any leading ":"
or "[" characters. The sole exception to this is the asterisk [*] prefix, identifying IEEE 488.2 Common
commands and queries; all these appear at the start of the list.
*
*CAL?
"All" on page 1219
*CLS
"Clear Status " on page 156
*ESE
"Standard Event Status Enable " on page 156
*ESE?
*ESR?
"Standard Event Status Register Query " on page 157
*IDN?
"Identification Query " on page 157
*OPC
"Operation Complete " on page 158
*OPC?
*OPT?
"Query Instrument Options " on page 159
*RCL
"Recall Instrument State " on page 159
*RST
"*RST (Remote Command Only)" on page 160
*SAV
"Save Instrument State " on page 160
*SRE
"Service Request Enable " on page 160
*SRE?
*STB?
"Status Byte Query " on page 161
*TRG
"Trigger " on page 161
*TST?
"Self Test Query " on page 161
*WAI
"Wait-to-Continue " on page 162
A
:ABORt
"Abort (Remote Command Only)" on page 1195
C
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB
"N dB Points " on page 830
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult?
"N dB Points " on page 830
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe]
"N dB Points " on page 830
:CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL?
"Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only)" on page
167
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
133
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:CALCulate:DATA{0:50}?
"Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167
:CALCulate:DATA{0:50}:COMPress?
"Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command
Only)" on page 167
:CALCulate:DATA{0:50}:PEAKs?
"Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on
page 172
:CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:CLEar
"Limit Clear (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard
conformance)" on page 829
:CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:CONTrol[:DATA]
"Limit Line Control (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard
conformance)" on page 826
:CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:CONTrol:POINts?
"Limit Line Control (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard
conformance)" on page 826
:CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:FAIL?
"Limit Fail? (Remote Command Only, SCPI standard
conformance)" on page 828
:CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:LOWer[:DATA]
"Limit Line Upper / Lower (Remote Command Only, SCPI
standard conformance)" on page 827
:CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:LOWer:POINts?
"Limit Line Upper / Lower (Remote Command Only, SCPI
standard conformance)" on page 827
:CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:UPPer[:DATA]
"Limit Line Upper / Lower (Remote Command Only, SCPI
standard conformance)" on page 827
:CALCulate:LIMit{1:6}:UPPer:POINts?
"Limit Line Upper / Lower (Remote Command Only, SCPI
standard conformance)" on page 827
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:ALL:DELete
"Delete All Limits" on page 824
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:AMPLitude:CMODe:RELative
"Relative to RL" on page 811
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE
"Amplitude Interpolation" on page 810
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:BUILd
"Build from Trace" on page 820
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:CMODe
"Fixed / Relative Limit (Remote Command Only)" on page 829
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:COMMent
"Comment" on page 812
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:CONTrol:DOMain
"X-Axis Unit" on page 824
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE
"Frequency Interpolation" on page 809
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:COPY
"Copy from Limit" on page 817
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:DATA
"Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 825
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:DATA:MERGe
"Merge Limit Line Data (Remote Command Only)" on page
825
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:DELete
"Delete Limit" on page 823
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:DISPlay
"Limit " on page 801
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:FAIL?
"Limit Line Fail? (Remote Command Only)" on page 826
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:FREQuency:CMODe:RELative
"Relative to CF" on page 811
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:MARGin
"Margin" on page 813
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:MARGin:STATe
"Margin" on page 813
134
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:OFFSet:UPDate
"Apply Offsets to Limit Table" on page 822
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:OFFSet:X
"X Offset" on page 821
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:OFFSet:Y
"Y Offset" on page 821
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:TEST
"Test Limits" on page 823
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:TRACe
"Test Trace" on page 808
:CALCulate:LLINe{1:6}:TYPE
"Type" on page 808
:CALCulate:MAMarker:COUPling
"BW & Avg Type" on page 783
:CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector{1:3}
"Detectors" on page 765
:CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector{1:3}:DWELl
"Detectors" on page 765
:CALCulate:MAMarker:PCENter
"Center Presel On/Off" on page 784
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:AOFF
"All Markers Off " on page 740
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:COUPle[:STATe]
"Couple Markers " on page 740
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:CPSearch[:STATe]
"Continuous Peak Search " on page 898
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt:GATetime
"Gate Time " on page 739
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt:GATetime:AUTO
"Gate Time " on page 739
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt:RESolution
"Gate Time " on page 739
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO
"Gate Time " on page 739
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt[:STATe]
"Counter " on page 736
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FCOunt:X?
"Counter " on page 736
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion
"Marker Function" on page 742
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT
"Band/Interval Left " on page 757
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt
"Band/Interval Right " on page 759
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN
"Band/Interval Span " on page 756
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN:AUTO
"Band Span Auto/Man" on page 760
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:FUNCtion:MAMarker
"Measure at Marker" on page 761
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:LINes[:STATe]
"Lines" on page 735
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MAXimum:ALL
"Peak Search All Traces" on page 901
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MAXimum:LEFT
"Next Pk Left " on page 888
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MAXimum:NEXT
"Next Peak " on page 887
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MAXimum[:PEAK]
"Peak Search" on page 887
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MAXimum:RIGHt
"Next Pk Right " on page 888
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MINimum[:PEAK]
"Min Search " on page 900
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:MODE
"Marker" on page 689
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:EXCursion
"Pk Excursion " on page 891
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe
"Pk Excursion " on page 891
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:SEARch:MODE
"“Peak Search” Criteria" on page 890
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
135
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:SORT
"Peak Sort " on page 895
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:TABLe:READout
"Peak Readout " on page 895
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:TABLe:STATe
"Peak Table On/Off" on page 894
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:THReshold
"Pk Threshold " on page 892
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PEAK:THReshold:STATe
"Pk Threshold " on page 892
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:PTPeak
"Pk-Pk Search " on page 899
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:REFerence
"Relative To" on page 708
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:CENTer
"Mkr->CF " on page 785
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:DELTa:CENTer
"MkrΔ->CF" on page 788
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:DELTa:SPAN
"MkrΔ->Span" on page 789
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:RLEVel
"Mkr->Ref Lvl" on page 787
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:SPAN
"MkrΔ->Span" on page 789
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:STARt
"Mkr->Start" on page 786
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:STEP
"Mkr->CF Step" on page 785
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:STOP
"Mkr->Stop" on page 786
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:TZOom:CENTer
"Mkr -> Zoom Center" on page 787
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}[:SET]:ZSPan:CENTer
"Mkr -> Zone Center" on page 788
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:STATe
"Normal " on page 698
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:TABLe[:STATe]
"Marker Table " on page 735
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:TRACe
"Marker Trace " on page 733
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:TRACe:AUTO
"Marker Trace " on page 733
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:TRCKing[:STATe]
"Signal Track (Span Zoom)" on page 1114
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X
"Marker" on page 689
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:CENTer
"Marker" on page 689
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:POSition
"Marker" on page 689
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:POSition:CENTer
"Marker" on page 689
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:POSition:SPAN
"Band/Interval Span " on page 756
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:POSition:STARt
"Band/Interval Left " on page 757
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:POSition:STOP
"Band/Interval Right " on page 759
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:READout
"X Axis Scale" on page 713
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:READout:AUTO
"X Axis Scale" on page 713
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:SPAN
"Band/Interval Span " on page 756
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:STARt
"Band/Interval Left " on page 757
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:X:STOP
"Band/Interval Right " on page 759
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:Y
"Marker" on page 689
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:Z?
"Marker" on page 689
136
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer{1:12}:Z:POSition
"Marker" on page 689
:CALCulate:MATH
"Math" on page 1299
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]
"Normalize On/Off" on page 1316
:CALCulate:TRACe{1:6}:FAIL?
"Trace Fail? (Remote Command Only)" on page 829
:CALibration[:ALL]
"All" on page 1219
:CALibration:AUTO
"Auto Align" on page 1212
:CALibration:AUTO:ALERt
"Alert" on page 1216
:CALibration:AUTO:MODE
"All but RF" on page 1215
:CALibration:AUTO:TIME:OFF?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:DATA:BACKup
"Perform Backup (Remote Command Only)" on page 1236
:CALibration:DATA:DEFault
"Backup or Restore Align Data…" on page 1230
:CALibration:DATA:RESTore
"Perform Restore (Remote Command Only)" on page 1237
:CALibration:EMIXer
"External Mixer" on page 1223
:CALibration:EXPired?
"Execute Expired Alignments (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1219
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse
"User" on page 1239
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:FINE
"User" on page 1239
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE
"Timebase DAC" on page 1238
:CALibration:IQ:FLATness:I
"Next" on page 639
:CALibration:IQ:FLATness:I:TIME?
"I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page
644
:CALibration:IQ:FLATness:IBAR
"Next" on page 639
:CALibration:IQ:FLATness:IBAR:TIME?
"I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page
644
:CALibration:IQ:FLATness:Q
"Next" on page 639
:CALibration:IQ:FLATness:Q:TIME?
"Next" on page 639
:CALibration:IQ:FLATness:QBAR
"Next" on page 639
:CALibration:IQ:FLATness:QBAR:TIME?
"I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page
644
:CALibration:IQ:ISOLation
"Next" on page 639
:CALibration:IQ:ISOLation:TIME?
"I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on
page 688
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I
"Next" on page 639
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I:CLEar
"Clear Calibration" on page 644
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I:TIME?
"I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page
644
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:IBAR
"Next" on page 639
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:IBAR:TIME?
"I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
137
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
644
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:Q
"Next" on page 637
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:Q:CLEar
"Clear Calibration" on page 644
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:Q:TIME?
"I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page
644
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:QBAR
"Next" on page 639
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:QBAR:TIME?
"I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)" on page
644
:CALibration:NRF
"All but RF" on page 1221
:CALibration:RF
"RF" on page 1222
:CALibration:SOURce:STATe
"RF Calibrator" on page 644
:CALibration:TEMPerature:CURRent?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TEMPerature:LALL?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TEMPerature:LPReselector?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TEMPerature:LRF?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TEMPerature:RFPSelector:LCONducted?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TEMPerature:RFPSelector:LRADiated?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TEMPerature:SOURce:LALL?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TIME:LALL?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TIME:LPReselector?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TIME:LRF?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TIME:RFPSelector:LCONducted?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TIME:RFPSelector:LRADiated?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:TIME:SOURce:LALL?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:CALibration:YTF
"Characterize Preselector " on page 1237
:CONFigure?
"RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference"
on page 790
:CONFigure:CATalog?
"Measurement Group of Commands" on page 163
:CONFigure:SANalyzer
"RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference"
on page 790
:CONFigure:SANalyzer:NDEFault
"RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference"
on page 790
:COUPle
"Auto Couple" on page 586
D
:DISPlay:ACTivefunc[:STATe]
"Active Function Values On/Off" on page 1373
:DISPlay:ANNotation:MBAR[:STATe]
"Meas Bar On/Off" on page 1372
138
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe]
"Screen" on page 1373
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA
"Change Title " on page 1375
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe]
"Trace " on page 1373
:DISPlay:BACKlight
"Backlight" on page 1380
:DISPlay:BACKlight:INTensity
"Backlight Intensity" on page 1381
:DISPlay:ENABle
"Display Enable (Remote Command Only)" on page 1389
:DISPlay:FSCReen[:STATe]
"Full Screen" on page 1388
:DISPlay:MENU[:STATe]
"Full Screen" on page 1388
:DISPlay:THEMe
"Theme" on page 1379
:DISPlay:VIEW1|VIEW[:SELect]
"View " on page 1370
:DISPlay:WINDow:ANNotation[:ALL]
"Annotation Local Settings" on page 1378
:DISPlay:WINDow:FORMat:TILE
"Zoom" on page 107
:DISPlay:WINDow:FORMat:ZOOM
"Zoom" on page 107
:DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker:POSition
"Position " on page 765
:DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker[:STATe]
"Window " on page 765
:DISPlay:WINDow[:SELect]
"Next Window" on page 108
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]
"Graticule " on page 1376
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe
"Display Line" on page 1376
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe
"Display Line" on page 1376
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel
"Norm Ref Lvl" on page 1319
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition
"Norm Ref Posn" on page 1320
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision
"Scale / Div" on page 570
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel
"Reference Level" on page 559
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet
"Reference Level Offset" on page 580
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing
"Scale Type" on page 570
F
:FETCh:SANalyzer{0:9}?
"RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on page
790
:FORMat:BORDer
"Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)" on page 175
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]
"Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174
G
:GLOBal:DEFault
"Restore Defaults" on page 886
:GLOBal:FREQuency:CENTer[:STATe]
"Global Center Freq" on page 885
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
139
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
H
:HCOPy:ABORt
"Print" on page 603
:HCOPy[:IMMediate]
"Print" on page 603
I
:ID?
Also a legacy command. See "ID (Identify)" on page 355.
:INITiate:CONTinuous
"Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599
:INITiate[:IMMediate]
"Restart" on page 984
:INITiate:PAUSe
"Pause/Resume" on page 1194
:INITiate:RESTart
"Restart" on page 984
:INITiate:RESume
"Pause/Resume" on page 1194
:INITiate:SANalyzer
"RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on
page 790
:INPut:COUPling
"RF Coupling" on page 622
:INPut:COUPling?
RLC option is available only in N9061A Mode.
:INPut:COUPling:I
"Coupling" on page 642
:INPut:COUPling:Q
"Coupling" on page 642
:INPut:IMPedance:IQ
"Combined Differential/Input Z (Remote Command Only)" on page
632
:INPut:IMPedance:REFerence
"Reference Z" on page 638
:INPut:IQ:BALanced[:STATe]
"I Differential Input" on page 628
:INPut:IQ:DIFFerential
"I Differential Input" on page 628
:INPut:IQ:I:DIFFerential
"I Differential Input" on page 628
:INPut:IQ:I:IMPedance
"I Input Z" on page 629
:INPut:IQ:IMPedance
"I Input Z" on page 629
:INPut:IQ:MIRRored
"Q Same as I" on page 633
:INPut:IQ:Q:DIFFerential
"Q Differential Input" on page 634
:INPut:IQ:Q:IMPedance
"Q Input Z" on page 635
:INPut:IQ:TYPE
"I/Q Path" on page 626
:INPut:MIXer
"Input/Output" on page 619
:INPut:OFFSet:I
"Offset" on page 641
:INPut:OFFSet:Q
"Offset" on page 641
:INSTrument:CATalog?
"Application Mode Catalog Query (Remote Command Only)" on page
871
:INSTrument:COUPle:DEFault
"Restore Defaults" on page 886
:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer
"Global Center Freq" on page 885
:INSTrument:DEFault
"Restore Mode Defaults" on page 884
:INSTrument:NSELect
"Application Mode Number Selection (Remote Command Only)" on
140
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:INSTrument:NSELect?
page 869
Specify parameter 266 to select N9061A
:INSTrument[:SELect]
"Mode" on page 857
:INSTrument[:SELect]?
Specify parameter RLC to select N9061A
:INSTrument:SOURce[:SELect]
"Source Mode" on page 1101
M
:MEASure:EMI:MARKer{1:12}
"Measure at Marker" on page 761
:MEASure:SANalyzer{0:9}?
"RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on
page 790
:MMEMory:CATalog?
"Mass Storage Catalog (Remote Command Only)" on page 1088
:MMEMory:CDIRectory
"Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1089
:MMEMory:COPY
"Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only)" on page 1089
:MMEMory:DATA
"Mass Storage Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1090
:MMEMory:DELete
"Mass Storage Delete (Remote Command Only)" on page 1089
:MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection
"Amplitude Correction " on page 970
:MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit
"Limit" on page 976
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe
"State" on page 904
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe
"Trace (+State)" on page 939
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe:DATA
"Trace" on page 973
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe:REGister
"Trace (+State)" on page 939
:MMEMory:MDIRectory
"Mass Storage Make Directory (Remote Command Only)" on page
1090
:MMEMory:MOVE
"Mass Storage Move (Remote Command Only)" on page 1090
:MMEMory:RDIRectory
"Mass Storage Remove Directory (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1091
:MMEMory:REGister:STATe:LABel
"Edit Register Names" on page 1014
:MMEMory:STORe:CORRection
"Amplitude Correction " on page 1017
:MMEMory:STORe:LIMit
"Limit " on page 1030
:MMEMory:STORe:RESults
"Measurement Results" on page 1066
:MMEMory:STORe:RESults:MTABle
"Measurement Results" on page 1066
:MMEMory:STORe:RESults:PTABle
"Measurement Results" on page 1066
:MMEMory:STORe:RESults:SNGLS
"Measurement Results" on page 1066
:MMEMory:STORe:RESults:SPECtrogram
"Measurement Results" on page 1066
:MMEMory:STORe:SCReen
"Screen Image" on page 1083
:MMEMory:STORe:SCReen:THEMe
"Themes" on page 1084
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
"State" on page 986
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
141
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe
"Trace (+State)" on page 1015
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:DATA
"Trace" on page 1022
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:REGister
"Trace (+State)" on page 1015
O
:OUTPut:ANALog
"Analog Out" on page 679
:OUTPut:ANALog:AUTO
"Analog Out" on page 679
:OUTPut:AUX
"Aux IF Out" on page 685
:OUTPut:AUX:AIF
"Arbitrary IF" on page 687
:OUTPut:DBUS1|DBUS[:STATe]
"Bus Out On/Off" on page 684
:OUTPut:DBUS2[:STATe]
"Bus Out On/Off" on page 684
:OUTPut[:EXTernal][:STATe]
"RF Output" on page 1093
:OUTPut:IQ:OUTPut
"I/Q Cal Out" on page 684
R
:READ:SANalyzer{0:9}?
"RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference" on page
790
S
[:SENSe]:ADC:DITHer:AUTO[:STATe]
"Auto " on page 838
[:SENSe]:ADC:DITHer[:STATe]
"ADC Dither" on page 837
[:SENSe]:ADC:RANGe
"Auto" on page 842
[:SENSe]:AVERage:CLEar
"Average/Hold Number" on page 794
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt
"Average/Hold Number" on page 794
[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe]
"Trace/Detector" on page 1264
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE
"Average Type" on page 795
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO
"Average Type" on page 795
[:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:RESolution]
"Res BW " on page 588
[:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO
"Res BW " on page 588
[:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:SHAPe
"Filter Type " on page 594
[:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:TYPE
"Filter BW" on page 596
[:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:VIDeo
"Video BW " on page 590
[:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO
"Video BW " on page 590
[:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio
"VBW:3dB RBW " on page 591
[:SENSe]:BWIDth|BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO
"VBW:3dB RBW " on page 591
142
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
[:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:GAIN
"BTS" on page 649
[:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:LOSS
"BTS" on page 649
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:ALL:DELete
"Delete All Corrections " on page 663
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:ALL[:STATe]
"Apply Corrections" on page 663
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:ANTenna[:UNIT]
"Antenna Unit" on page 657
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:COMMent
"Comment" on page 661
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:DATA
"Set (Replace) Data (Remote Command Only)" on page
664
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:DATA:MERGe
"Merge Correction Data (Remote Command Only)" on
page 664
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:DELete
"Delete Correction" on page 663
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:DESCription
"Description" on page 661
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}[:STATe]
"Correction On/Off" on page 654
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET{1:6}:X:SPACing
"Frequency Interpolation" on page 659
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude]
"Input Z Correction " on page 621
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:ATTenuation
"Attenuation" on page 641
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:ATTenuation:RATio
"Attenuation" on page 641
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:GAIN
"I Ext Gain" on page 650
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ[:I]:SKEW
"I Skew" on page 630
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:ATTenuation
"Attenuation" on page 641
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:ATTenuation:RATio
"Attenuation" on page 641
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:GAIN
"Q Ext Gain" on page 650
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:SKEW
"Q Skew" on page 635
[:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:GAIN
"MS " on page 648
[:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:LOSS
"MS " on page 648
[:SENSe]:CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude]
"Ext Preamp " on page 647
[:SENSe]:CORRection:SA[:RF]:GAIN
"Ext Preamp " on page 647
[:SENSe]:DEMod
"Analog Demod Tune & Listen" on page 843
[:SENSe]:DEMod:AM:BANDwidth:CHANnel
"Channel BW (AM Demod)" on page 844
[:SENSe]:DEMod:FM:BANDwidth:CHANnel
"Channel BW (FM Demod)" on page 845
[:SENSe]:DEMod:FM:DEEMphasis
"De-emphasis (FM Demod only)" on page 848
[:SENSe]:DEMod:PM:BANDwidth:CHANnel
"Channel BW (Φ M Demod)" on page 849
[:SENSe]:DEMod:STATe
"Demod State (Remote Command Only)" on page 850
[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME
"Demod Time" on page 850
[:SENSe]:DETector:AUTO
"Auto " on page 1291
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]
"Detector" on page 1287
[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe{1:6}
"Detector" on page 1287
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
143
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe{1:6}:AUTO
"Auto " on page 1291
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:AVERage[:STATe]
"Detector 3" on page 779
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:DWELl
"Detectors" on page 765
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:QPEak[:STATe]
"Detector 2" on page 775
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:PCENter[:STATe]
"Center Presel On/Off" on page 784
[:SENSe]:FEED
"Input/Output" on page 619
[:SENSe]:FEED:AREFerence
"RF Calibrator" on page 644
[:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE
"I/Q Path" on page 626
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer
"Center Freq" on page 607
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO
"CF Step" on page 616
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]
"CF Step" on page 616
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:IQ:CENTer
"Center Freq" on page 607
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet
"Freq Offset" on page 617
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:RF:CENTer
"Center Freq" on page 607
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN
"Span " on page 1108
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio
"Span:3dB RBW " on page 593
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BWIDth|BANDwidth
[:RESolution]:RATio:AUTO
"Span:3dB RBW " on page 593
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
"Full Span " on page 1112
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious
"Last Span " on page 1114
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt
"Start Freq" on page 612
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP
"Stop Freq" on page 614
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis:AUTO[:STATe]
"Auto " on page 834
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis[:STATe]
"PhNoise Opt " on page 833
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:TUNE:IMMediate
"Auto Tune" on page 607
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:TZOom:CENTer
"Zoom Center " on page 606
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:TZOom:SPAN
"Zoom Span " on page 1111
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:ZSPan:CENTer
"Zone Center " on page 605
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:ZSPan:SPAN
"Zone Span " on page 1110
[:SENSe]:IF:GAIN:FFT:AUTO[:STATe]
"Auto" on page 842
[:SENSe]:IF:GAIN:FFT[:STATe]
"FFT IF Gain " on page 841
[:SENSe]:IF:GAIN:SWEPt:AUTO[:STATe]
"Auto" on page 840
[:SENSe]:IF:GAIN:SWEPt[:STATe]
"Swept IF Gain" on page 840
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation
"(Mech) Atten " on page 562
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO
"(Mech) Atten " on page 562
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement]
"(Mech) Atten Step" on page 569
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation
"Elec Atten" on page 566
144
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation:STATe
"Enable Elec Atten" on page 564
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN:BAND
"Internal Preamp" on page 583
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]
"Internal Preamp" on page 583
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]
"Max Mixer Level" on page 570
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MMW:PADJust
"Preselector Adjust" on page 572
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust
"Preselector Adjust" on page 572
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH
"µW Path Control " on page 581
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PRESelector[:STATe]
"µW Preselector Bypass " on page 582
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust
"Preselector Adjust" on page 572
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector
"Preselector Adjust" on page 572
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter
"Presel Center" on page 571
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize
"Adjust Atten for Min Clip" on page 567
[:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe
"Atten Offset" on page 883
[:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe?
[:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit
"Limit RBW/VBW" on page 882
[:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit?
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes
"Swp Type Rule" on page 883
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes?
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TIME:LIMit ON|OFF
"Limit Swp Time" on page 884
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TIME:LIMit?
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:BANDwidth
"External Reference Lock BW" on page 668
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling
"External Ref Coupling" on page 671
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency
"Ext Ref Freq" on page 667
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce
"Freq Ref In " on page 665
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE
"Freq Ref In " on page 665
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:CONTrol
"Control Edge/Level" on page 1188
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay
"Gate Delay " on page 1161
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:EXTernal{1:2}:LEVel
"Gate Level (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff
"Gate Holdoff" on page 1189
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff:AUTO
"Gate Holdoff" on page 1189
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth
"Gate Length " on page 1162
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:METHod
"Method" on page 1162
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:MINFast?
"Min Fast Position Query (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1190
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:POLarity
"Gate Polarity (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce
"Gate Source" on page 1164
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe]
"Gate On/Off " on page 1155
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
145
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:TIME
"Gate View Sweep Time" on page 1160
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW
"Gate View On/Off" on page 1157
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW:STARt
"Gate View Start Time " on page 1161
[:SENSe]:SWEep:FFT:SPAN:RATio
"FFT Width" on page 1152
[:SENSe]:SWEep:FFT:WIDTh
"FFT Width" on page 1152
[:SENSe]:SWEep:FFT:WIDTh:AUTO
"FFT Width" on page 1152
[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts
"Points " on page 1192
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME
"Sweep Time" on page 1117
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO
"Sweep Time" on page 1117
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes
"Sweep Time Rules" on page 1119
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes:AUTO[:STATe]
"Auto" on page 1120
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:DELay
"Gate Delay " on page 1161
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LENGth
"Gate Length " on page 1162
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LEVel
"Gate Polarity (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:POLarity
"Gate Polarity (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:PRESet
"Gate Preset (Remote Command Only)" on page 1191
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE[:STATe]
"Gate On/Off " on page 1155
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:TYPE
"Control Edge/Level" on page 1188
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE AUTO|SWEep|FFT
"Sweep Type" on page 1122
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE?
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO
"Auto" on page 1123
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes
"Sweep Type Rules " on page 1124
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes?
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes:AUTO[:STATe]
"Auto" on page 1125
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TZOom:POINts
"Zoom Points" on page 1193
:SOURce:CORRection:OFFSet
"Amptd Offset " on page 1096
:SOURce:EXTernal:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
"Amplitude" on page 1094
:SOURce:EXTernal:POWer:MODE
"Power Sweep " on page 1094
:SOURce:EXTernal:SWEep:OFFSet:FREQuency
"Freq Offset " on page 1100
:SOURce:EXTernal:SWEep:OFFSet[:STATe]
"Freq Offset " on page 1100
:SOURce:FREQuency[:MULTiplier]:DENominator
"Multiplier Denominator" on page 1099
:SOURce:FREQuency[:MULTiplier]:NUMerator
"Multiplier Numerator" on page 1098
:SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet
"Freq Offset " on page 1100
:SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet:STATe
"Freq Offset " on page 1100
:SOURce:FREQuency:SSReverse
"Source Sweep Reverse" on page 1099
:SOURce:NOISe:SNS:ATTached?
"SNS Attached (Remote Command Only)" on page 855
146
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:SOURce:NOISe[:STATe]
"State" on page 855
:SOURce:NOISe:TYPE
"Noise Source " on page 854
:SOURce[:EXTernal]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
"Amplitude" on page 1094
:SOURce[:EXTernal]:POWer:MODE
"Power Sweep " on page 1094
:SOURce:[EXTernal][:SWEep]:POWer:SPAN
"Power Sweep " on page 1094
:SOURce:POWer:STARt
"Amplitude" on page 1094
:SOURce:POWer:STEP:AUTO
"Amptd Step Auto/Man" on page 1097
:SOURce:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]
"Amptd Step Auto/Man" on page 1097
:SOURce:POWer:SWEep
"Power Sweep " on page 1094
:SOURce:POWer:SWEep:STATe
"Power Sweep " on page 1094
:SOURce:PRESet
"Source Preset" on page 1106
:SOURce:SETTings?
"Source Setting Query (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1107
:SOURce:TRIGger:TYPE
"Point Trigger" on page 1103
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
"Operation Condition Query" on page 191
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle
"Operation Enable" on page 192
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
"Operation Event Query" on page 192
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition
"Operation Negative Transition" on page 193
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition
"Operation Positive Transition" on page 193
:STATus:PRESet
"Preset the Status Byte " on page 193
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition?
"Questionable Calibration Condition" on page 196
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle
"Questionable Calibration Enable" on page 197
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Calibration Event Query" on page 197
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:CONDition?
"Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition"
on page 201
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:ENABle
"Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable" on
page 201
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query"
on page 202
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:NTRansition
"Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative
Transition" on page 202
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:PTRansition
"Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive
Transition" on page 203
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:CONDition?
"Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition"
on page 203
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:ENABle
"Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Enable" on
page 204
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event
Query" on page 204
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
147
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:NTRansition
"Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Negative
Transition" on page 205
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:PTRansition
"Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive
Transition" on page 205
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition
"Questionable Calibration Negative Transition" on page
198
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition
"Questionable Calibration Positive Transition" on page
198
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:CONDition?
"Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition" on page
199
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:ENABle
"Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable" on page 199
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query" on page
199
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:NTRansition
"Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition"
on page 200
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:PTRansition
"Questionable Calibration Skipped Positive Transition"
on page 200
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
"Questionable Condition " on page 194
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle
"Questionable Enable " on page 194
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Event Query " on page 195
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
"Questionable Frequency Condition" on page 206
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle
"Questionable Frequency Enable" on page 206
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Frequency Event Query" on page 207
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition
"Questionable Frequency Negative Transition" on page
207
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition
"Questionable Frequency Positive Transition" on page
207
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition?
"Questionable Integrity Condition" on page 208
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle
"Questionable Integrity Enable" on page 209
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Integrity Event Query" on page 209
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition
"Questionable Integrity Negative Transition" on page
209
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition
"Questionable Integrity Positive Transition" on page 210
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:CONDition?
"Questionable Integrity Signal Condition" on page 211
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:ENABle
"Questionable Integrity Signal Enable" on page 211
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query" on page
212
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:NTRansition
"Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition" on
page 212
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:PTRansition
"Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition" on
page 212
148
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:CONDition?
"Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition" on page
213
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle
"Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable" on page
213
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query" on
page 214
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition
"Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative
Transition" on page 214
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition
"Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive
Transition" on page 215
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition
"Questionable Negative Transition " on page 195
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?
"Questionable Power Condition" on page 216
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle
"Questionable Power Enable" on page 216
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Power Event Query" on page 216
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition
"Questionable Power Negative Transition" on page 217
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition
"Questionable Power Positive Transition" on page 217
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition
"Questionable Positive Transition" on page 196
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:CONDition?
"Questionable Temperature Condition" on page 218
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:ENABle
"Questionable Temperature Enable" on page 219
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]?
"Questionable Temperature Event Query" on page 219
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:NTRansition
"Questionable Temperature Negative Transition" on
page 219
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition
"Questionable Temperature Positive Transition" on page
220
:SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog[:NAME]?
"Current Application Model " on page 871
:SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog[:NAME]:COUNt?
"Application Catalog Number of Entries" on page 873
:SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog:OPTion?
"Application Catalog Options" on page 874
:SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog:REVision?
"Application Catalog Revision" on page 873
:SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent][:NAME]?
"Current Application Model " on page 871
:SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent]:OPTion?
"Current Application Options" on page 872
:SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent]:REVision?
"Current Application Revision" on page 872
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess
"GPIB Address" on page 1241
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:CONTroller[:ENABle]
"GPIB Controller" on page 1241
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:HISLip:ENABle
"HiSLIP Server" on page 1244
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:SICL:ENABle
"SICL Server" on page 1243
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:SOCKet:CONTrol?
"SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1244
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:SOCKet:ENABle
"SCPI Socket" on page 1243
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
149
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SCPI:TELNet:ENABle
"SCPI Telnet" on page 1242
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SOURce[:EXTernal]:IP
"Select Highlighted Source" on page 1104
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOURce:ADDRess
"Select Highlighted Source" on page 1104
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:CONNection?
"Query USB Connection (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1247
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:PACKets?
"USB Packet Count (Remote Command Only)" on page
1248
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:STATus?
"USB Connection Status (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1247
:SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]?
"Show System contents (Remote Command Only) " on
page 1202
:SYSTem:DATE
"Date (Remote Command Only)" on page 1262
:SYSTem:DEFault
"Restore Defaults" on page 1248
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
"Errors" on page 1196
:SYSTem:ERRor:OVERload[:STATe]
"Input Overload Enable (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1200
:SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose
"Verbose SCPI On/Off" on page 1198
:SYSTem:HELP:HEADers?
"List SCPI Commands (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1262
:SYSTem:HID?
"Licensing…" on page 1254
:SYSTem:IDN
"System IDN Response" on page 1246
:SYSTem:KLOCk
"Lock the Front-panel keys (Remote Command Only)"
on page 1261
:SYSTem:LANGuage
"Mode Setup" on page 879
:SYSTem LANGuage?
This command is only available if N9061A is installed
on your instrument.
:SYSTem:LKEY
"Licensing…" on page 1254
:SYSTem:LKEY:DELete
"Licensing…" on page 1254
:SYSTem:LKEY:LIST?
"Licensing…" on page 1254
:SYSTem:MRELay:COUNt?
"Query the Mechanical Relay Cycle Count" on page
1259
:SYSTem:OPTions?
"List installed Options (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1261
:SYSTem:PDOWn
"System Powerdown (Remote Command Only)" on page
1261
:SYSTem:PON:APPLication:LLISt
"Configuration list (Remote Command Only)" on page
1211
:SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory[:AVAilable]?
"Configuration Memory Available (Remote Command
Only)" on page 1211
:SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory:TOTal?
"Configuration Memory Total (Remote Command Only)"
on page 1211
150
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory:USED?
"Configuration Memory Used (Remote Command Only)"
on page 1211
:SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory:USED:NAME?
"Configuration Application Memory (Remote Command
Only)" on page 1212
:SYSTem:PON:ETIMe?
"Query the Elapsed Time since First Power-On" on page
1260
:SYSTem:PON:MODE
"Power On Application " on page 1206
:SYSTem:PON:TIME?
"Show Alignment Statistics" on page 1224
:SYSTem:PON:TYPE
"Power On" on page 1204
:SYSTem:PRESet
"Mode Preset" on page 876
:SYSTem:PRESet:USER
"User Preset" on page 1367
:SYSTem:PRESet:USER:ALL
"User Preset All Modes" on page 1368
:SYSTem:PRESet:USER:SAVE
"Save User Preset " on page 1369
:SYSTem:PRINt:THEMe
"Page Setup" on page 602
:SYSTem:PUP:PROCess
"Save Changes and Exit" on page 1209
:SYSTem:SECurity:USB:WPRotect[:ENABle]
"USB" on page 1256
:SYSTem:SHOW
"Show" on page 1196
:SYSTem:TEMPerature:HEXTreme?
"Query the Operating Temperature Extremes" on page
1259
:SYSTem:TEMPerature:LEXTreme?
"Query the Operating Temperature Extremes" on page
1259
:SYSTem:TIME
"Time (Remote Command Only)" on page 1263
:SYSTem:VERSion?
"SCPI Version Query (Remote Command Only)" on page
1262
T
:TRACe:CLEar
"Clear Trace" on page 1298
:TRACe:CLEar:ALL
"Clear All Traces" on page 1298
:TRACe:COPY
"Copy/Exchange" on page 1312
:TRACe[:DATA]
"Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1321
:TRACe{1:6}:DISPlay[:STATe]
"View/Blank " on page 1284
:TRACe{1:6}:DISPlay:VIEW1|VIEW:SPECtrogram:POSition
"Display Trace" on page 1388
:TRACe{1:6}:DISPlay:VIEW1|VIEW:SPECtrogram:TIME?
"Display Trace Time Query (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1325
:TRACe:EXCHange
"Copy/Exchange" on page 1312
:TRACe:MATH:MEAN?
"Mean Trace Data (Remote Command Only) " on page
1325
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK[:DATA]?
"Query the Signal Peaks (Remote Command Only)" on
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
151
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
page 900
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:POINts?
"Query Number of Peaks Found (Remote Command
Only)" on page 901
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:SORT
"Peak Sort " on page 895
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth
"Smooth Trace Data (Remote Command Only) " on page
1323
:TRACe{1:6}:MATH:SMOoth:POINts
"Number of Points for Smoothing (Remote Command
Only) " on page 1324
:TRACe{1:6}:MODE
"Trace/Detector" on page 1264
:TRACe{1:6}:PRESet:ALL
"Clear All Traces" on page 1298
:TRACe{1:6}:TYPE
"Trace/Detector" on page 1264
:TRACe{1:6}:UPDate[:STATe]
"View/Blank " on page 1284
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger
"Auto Trig " on page 1365
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger:STATe
"Auto Trig " on page 1365
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay
"Trig Delay " on page 1336
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe
"Trig Delay " on page 1336
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal{1:2}:DELay
"Trig Delay " on page 1340
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal{1:2}:DELay:STATe
"Trig Delay " on page 1340
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal{1:2}:LEVel
"Trigger Level " on page 1353
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal{1:2}:SLOPe
"Trig Slope " on page 1353
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:ADJust
"Offset Adjust (Remote Command Only)" on page 1351
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:DELay
"Trig Delay" on page 1359
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:DELay:STATe
"Trig Delay" on page 1359
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:EXTernal{1:2}:LEVel
"Trigger Level " on page 1353
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:EXTernal{1:2}:SLOPe
"Trig Slope " on page 1353
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet
"Offset " on page 1350
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet
"Reset Offset Display " on page 1351
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod
"Period " on page 1349
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:RFBurst:LEVel:ABSolute
"Absolute Trigger Level" on page 1356
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:RFBurst:SLOPe
"Trigger Slope " on page 1358
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC
"Sync Source " on page 1352
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff
"Trig Holdoff " on page 1366
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:STATe
"Trig Holdoff " on page 1366
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:DELay
"Trig Delay " on page 1336
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:LEVel
"Trigger Level " on page 1334
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:IF:SLOPe
"Trig Slope " on page 1335
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LINE:DELay
"Trig Delay " on page 1338
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LINE:DELay:STATe
"Trig Delay " on page 1338
152
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
List of Supported SCPI Commands
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LINE:SLOPe
"Trig Slope " on page 1338
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet
"Trig Delay " on page 1336
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet:STATe
"Trig Delay " on page 1336
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:DELay
"Trig Delay " on page 1347
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:DELay:STATe
"Trig Delay " on page 1347
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel
"Relative Trigger Level" on page 1357
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:ABSolute
"Absolute Trigger Level" on page 1356
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:RELative
"Relative Trigger Level" on page 1357
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:TYPE
"Absolute Trigger Level" on page 1356
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:SLOPe
"Trigger Slope " on page 1358
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe
"Trig Slope " on page 1335
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce
"Trigger" on page 1326
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:FMODe
"Field " on page 1361
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:LINE
"TV Line " on page 1360
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:STANdard
"Standard " on page 1362
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay
"Trig Delay " on page 1336
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:DELay:STATe
"Trig Delay " on page 1336
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel
"Trigger Level " on page 1334
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:SLOPe
"Trig Slope " on page 1335
:TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut
"Trig Out (1 and 2)" on page 676
:TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:POLarity
"Polarity " on page 677
U
:UNIT:POWer
"Y Axis Unit" on page 573
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
153
4 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
The instrument supports the following subset of IEEE 488.2 Common Commands, as defined in Chapter 10
of IEEE Standard 488.2–1992. As indicated in the detailed description of each command, some of these
commands correspond directly to instrument front-panel key functionality, while others are available only
as remote commands.
Commands
Description
*CAL?
"All" on page 1219
*CLS
"Clear Status " on page 156
*ESE <int>
"Standard Event Status Enable " on page 156
*ESE?
*ESR?
"Standard Event Status Register Query " on page 157
*IDN?
"Identification Query " on page 157
*OPC
"Operation Complete " on page 158
*OPC?
*OPT?
"Query Instrument Options " on page 159
*RCL <reg>
"Recall Instrument State " on page 159
*RST
"*RST (Remote Command Only)" on page 160
*SAV <reg>
"Save Instrument State " on page 160
*SRE <int>
"Service Request Enable " on page 160
*SRE?
*STB?
"Status Byte Query " on page 161
*TRG
"Trigger " on page 161
*TST?
"Self Test Query " on page 161
*WAI
"Wait-to-Continue " on page 162
All
Immediately executes an alignment of all subsystems. The instrument stops any measurement currently
underway, performs the alignment, then restarts the measurement from the beginning (similar to pressing
the Restart key).
If an interfering user signal is present at the RF Input, the alignment is performed on all subsystems except
the RF. After completion, the Error Condition message “Align skipped: 50 MHz interference” or “Align
skipped: 4.8 GHz interference” is generated. In addition the Error Condition message “Align Now, RF
required” is generated, and bits 11 and 12 are set in the Status Questionable Calibration register.
The query form of the remote commands (:CALibration[:ALL]? or *CAL?) invokes the alignment of all
subsystems and returns a success or failure value. An interfering user signal is not grounds for failure; if the
alignment was able to succeed on all portions but unable to align the RF because of an interfering signal,
the resultant will be the success value.
154
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
Successful completion of Align Now, All will clear the “Align Now, All required” Error Condition, and clear
bit 14 in the Status Questionable Calibration register. It will also begin the elapsed time counter for Last
Align Now, All Time, and capture the Last Align Now, All Temperature.
If the Align RF subsystem succeeded in aligning (no interfering signal present), the elapsed time counter
begins for Last Align Now, RF Time, and the temperature is captured for the Last Align Now, RF
Temperature. In addition the Error Conditions “Align skipped: 50 MHz interference” and “Align skipped: 4.8
GHz interference” are cleared, the Error Condition “Align Now, RF required” is cleared, and bits 11 and 12
are cleared in the Status Questionable Calibration register
Align Now, All can be interrupted by pressing the Cancel (ESC) front-panel key or remotely with Device
Clear followed by the :ABORt SCPI command. When this occurs the Error Condition message “Align Now,
All required” is generated, and bit 14 is set in the Status Questionable Condition register. This is because
new alignment data may be employed for an individual subsystem, but not a cohesive set of data for all
subsystems.
In many cases, you might find it more convenient to change alignments to Normal, instead of executing
Align Now, All. When the Auto Align process transitions to Normal, the analyzer will immediately start to
update only the alignments that have expired, thus efficiently restoring the alignment process.
In models with the RF Preselector, such as the N9038A, the Align Now All alignment will immediately
execute an alignment of all subsystems in the Spectrum Analyzer and partial subsystems of the RF
Preselector. The additional alignments are the System Gain, Mechanical attenuator and Electronic
attenuator alignments on the RF Preselector path. The purpose of these alignments is to improve the RF
Preselector path amplitude variation compared to the bypass path. Key Path
System, Alignments, Align Now
Mode
All
Remote Command
:CALibration[:ALL]
:CALibration[:ALL]?
Example
:CAL
Notes
:CALibration[:ALL]? returns 0 if successful
:CALibration[:ALL]? returns 1 if failed
:CALibration[:ALL]? is the same as *CAL?
While Align Now, All is performing the alignment, bit 0 in the Status Operation register is set.
Completion, or termination, will clear bit 0 in the Status Operation register.
This command is sequential; it must complete before further SCPI commands are processed.
Interrupting the alignment from remote is accomplished by invoking Device Clear followed by the
:ABORt command.
Successful completion will clear bit 14 in the Status Questionable Calibration register.
An interfering user signal is not grounds for failure of Align Now, All. However, bits 11 and 12 are set
in the Status Questionable Calibration register to indicate Align Now, RF is required.
An interfering user supplied signal will result in the instrument requiring an Align Now, RF with the
interfering signal removed.
Couplings
Initializes the time for the Last Align Now, All Time.
Records the temperature for the Last Align Now, All Temperature.
If Align RF component succeeded, initializes the time for the Last Align Now, RF Time.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
155
4 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
If Align RF component succeeded, records the temperature for the Last Align Now, RF Temperature.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Bits 11, 12, or 14 may be set in the Status Questionable Calibration register.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mode
All
Remote Command
*CAL?
Example
*CAL?
Notes
*CAL? returns 0 if successful
*CAL? returns 1 if failed
:CALibration[:ALL]? is the same as *CAL?
See additional remarks described with :CALibration[:ALL]?
Everything about :CALibration[:ALL]? is synonymous with *CAL? including all conditions, status
register bits, and couplings
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Clear Status
Clears the status byte register. It does this by emptying the error queue and clearing all bits in all of the
event registers. The status byte register summarizes the states of the other registers. It is also responsible
for generating service requests.
Key Path
No equivalent key. Related key System, Show Errors, Clear Error Queue
Remote Command
*CLS
Example
*CLS Clears the error queue and the Status Byte Register.
Notes
For related commands, see the SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? command. See also the STATus:PRESet
command and all commands in the STATus subsystem.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Resets all bits in all event registers to 0, which resets all the status byte register bits to 0 also.
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In general the status bits used in the X-Series status system will be backwards compatible with ESA
and PSA. However, note that all conditions will generate events that go into the event log, and some
will also generate status bits.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Standard Event Status Enable
Selects the desired bits from the standard event status enable register. This register monitors I/O errors
and synchronization conditions such as operation complete, request control, query error, device
dependent error, status execution error, command error, and power on. The selected bits are OR’d to
become a summary bit (bit 5) in the byte register which can be queried.
156
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
The query returns the state of the standard event status enable register.
Key Path
No equivalent key. Related key System, Show Errors, Clear Error Queue
Remote Command
*ESE <integer>
*ESE?
Example
*ESE 36 Enables the Standard Event Status Register to monitor query and command errors (bits 2
and 5).
*ESE? Returns a 36 indicating that the query and command status bits are enabled.
Notes
For related commands, see the STATus subsystem and SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? commands.
Preset
255
State Saved
Not saved in state.
Min
0
Max
255
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Event Enable Register of the Standard Event Status Register.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Standard Event Status Register Query
Queries and clears the standard event status event register. (This is a destructive read.) The value
returned is a hexadecimal number that reflects the current state (0/1) of all the bits in the register.
Remote Command
*ESR?
Example
*ESR? Returns a 1 if there is either a query or command error, otherwise it returns a zero.
Notes
For related commands, see the STATus subsystem commands.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
255
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Standard Event Status Register (bits 0 – 7).
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Identification Query
Returns a string of instrument identification information. The string will contain the model number, serial
number, and firmware revision.
The response is organized into four fields separated by commas. The field definitions are as follows:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
157
4 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
l
Manufacturer
l
Model
l
Serial number
l
Firmware version
Key Path
No equivalent key. See related key System, Show System.
Remote Command
*IDN?
Example
*IDN? Returns instrument identification information, such as:
Keysight Technologies, N9020A, US01020004, A.01.02
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Operation Complete
The *OPC command sets bit 0 in the standard event status register (SER) to “1” when pending operations
have finished, that is when all overlapped commands are complete. It does not hold off subsequent
operations. You can determine when the overlapped commands have completed either by polling the OPC
bit in SER, or by setting up the status system such that a service request (SRQ) is asserted when the OPC
bit is set.
The *OPC? query returns a “1” after all the current overlapped commands are complete. So it holds off
subsequent commands until the "1” is returned, then the program continues. This query can be used to
synchronize events of other instruments on the external bus.
Remote Command
*OPC
*OPC?
Example
INIT:CONT 0 Selects single sweeping.
INIT:IMM Initiates a sweep.
*OPC? Holds off any further commands until the sweep is complete.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Not global to all remote ports or front panel. *OPC only considers operation that was initiated on the
same port as the *OPC command was issued from.
*OPC is an overlapped command, but *OPC? is sequential.
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
1. The ESA/PSA/VSA products do not meet all the requirements for the *OPC command specified by
IEEE 488.2. This is corrected for X-Series. This will sometimes cause behavior that is not backward
compatible, but it will work as customers expect.
2. Commands such as, *OPC/*OPC?/*WAI/*RST used to be global. They considered front panel
operation in conjunction with the GPIB functionality. Now they are evaluated on a per channel basis.
That is, the various rear panel remote ports and the front panel i/o are all considered separately. Only
the functionality initiated on the port where the *OPC was sent, is considered for its operation.
3. *OPC used to hold off until the operation bits were cleared. Now it holds off until all overlapping
commands are completed. Also, earlier instruments did not wait for completion of all processes,
only the ones identified here (in the STATus:OPERation register):
Calibrating: monitored by PSA, ESA, VSA (E4406A)
158
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
Sweeping: monitored by PSA, ESA, VSA (E4406A)
Waiting for Trigger: monitored by PSA, ESA, VSA (E4406A)
Measuring: monitored by PSA and ESA (but not in all Modes).
Paused: monitored by VSA (E4406A).
Printing: monitored by VSA (E4406A).
Mass memory busy: monitored by VSA (E4406A).
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Query Instrument Options
Returns a string of all the installed instrument options. It is a comma separated list with quotes, such as:
“503,P03,PFR”.
To be IEEE compliant, this command should return an arbitrary ascii variable that would not begin and end
with quotes. But the quotes are needed to be backward compatible with previous SA products and
software. So, the actual implementation will use arbitrary ascii. But quotes will be sent as the first and last
ascii characters that are sent with the comma-separated option list.
Remote Command
*OPT?
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Recall Instrument State
This command recalls the instrument state from the specified instrument memory register.
• If the state being loaded has a newer firmware revision than the revision of the instrument, no state is
recalled and an error is reported
• If the state being loaded has an equal firmware revision than the revision of the instrument, the state
will be loaded.
• If the state being loaded has an older firmware revision than the revision of the instrument, the
instrument will only load the parts of the state that apply to the older revision.
Remote Command
*RCL <register #>
Example
*RCL 7 Recalls the instrument state that is currently stored in register 7.
Notes
Registers 0 through 6 are accessible from the front panel in menu keys for Recall Registers.
Min
0
Max
127
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
The command is sequential.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
159
4 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
*RST (Remote Command Only)
*RST is equivalent to :SYST:PRES;:INIT:CONT OFF, which is a Mode Preset in the Single measurement
state. This remote command is preferred over Mode Preset remote command - :SYST:PRES, as optimal
remote programming occurs with the instrument in the single measurement state.
Remote Command
*RST
Example
*RST
Notes
Sequential
Clears all pending OPC bits and the Status Byte is set to 0.
Couplings
A *RST will cause the currently running measurement to be aborted and cause the default
measurement to be active. *RST gets the mode to a consistent state with all of the default couplings
set.
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In legacy analyzers *RST did not set the analyzer to Single, but in the X-Series it does, for compliance
with the IEEE 488.2 specification.
In the X-Series, *RST does not do a *CLS (clear the status bits and the error queue). In legacy
analyzers, *RST used to do the equivalent of SYSTem:PRESet, *CLS and INITiate:CONTinuous OFF.
But to be 488.2 compliant, *RST in the X-Series does not do a *CLS.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Save Instrument State
This command saves the current instrument state and mode to the specified instrument memory register.
Remote Command
*SAV <register #>
Example
*SAV 9 Saves the instrument state in register 9.
Notes
Registers 0 through 6 are accessible from the front panel in menu keys for Save Registers.
Min
0
Max
127
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
The command is sequential.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Service Request Enable
This command enables the desired bits of the service request enable register.
The query returns the value of the register, indicating which bits are currently enabled.
Remote Command
*SRE <integer>
*SRE?
160
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
Example
*SRE 22 Enables bits 1, 2, and 4 in the service request enable register.
Notes
For related commands, see the STATus subsystem and SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? commands.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
255
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Service Request Enable Register (all bits, 0 – 7).
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Status Byte Query
Returns the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents.
Remote Command
*STB?
Example
*STB? Returns a decimal value for the bits in the status byte register.
For example, if a 16 is returned, it indicates that bit 5 is set and one of the conditions monitored in
the standard event status register is set.
Notes
See related command *CLS.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Status Byte Register (all bits, 0 – 7).
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Trigger This command triggers the instrument. Use the :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce command to select the
trigger source.
Key Path
No equivalent key. See related keys Single and Restart.
Remote Command
*TRG
Example
*TRG Triggers the instrument to take a sweep or start a measurement, depending on the current
instrument settings.
Notes
See related command :INITiate:IMMediate.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Self Test Query
This query performs the internal self-test routines and returns a number indicating the success of the
testing. A zero is returned if the test is successful, 1 if it fails.
Remote Command
*TST?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
161
4 Programming the Instrument
IEEE 488.2 Common Commands
Example
*TST? Runs the self-test routines and returns 0=passed, 1=some part failed.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Wait-to-Continue
This command causes the instrument to wait until all overlapped commands are completed before
executing any additional commands. There is no query form for the command.
Remote Command
*WAI
Example
INIT:CONT OFF; INIT;*WAI Sets the instrument to single sweep. Starts a sweep and waits for its
completion.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Not global to all remote ports or front panel. *OPC only considers operation that was initiated on the
same port as the *OPC command was issued from.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
162
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
Remote Measurement Functions
This section contains the following topics:
l
"Measurement Group of Commands" on page 163
l
"Other Common Measurement Commands" on page 166
l
"Data Format Commands" on page 174
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Measurement Group of Commands
The Measurement group of commands comprises the "MEASure Command" on page 163, which executes
the entire measurement, plus the "CONFigure Commands" on page 164, "FETCh Command" on page 165,
"INITiate Command" on page 165 and "READ Command" on page 166, which each accomplish only a part
of the overall measurement. FETCh and READ are queries only.
You can optimize measurements by creating programs that call MEASure and CONFigure a minimum
number of times, and that emphasize repeated READ, INITiate, and FETCh commands.
The diagram below illustrates the interactions between the Measurement family of commands: MEASure,
CONFigure, FETCh, INITiate and READ.
Not all measurements support all the commands: MEASure, CONFigure, FETCh, INITiate and READ. For
measurement-specific information, see the introductory description for each measurement in the User’s
and Programmer’s References or online Help.
MEASure Command
:MEASure:<measurement>[n]?
This is a fast single-command way to make a measurement using the factory default instrument settings.
These are the settings and units that conform to the Mode Setup settings (e.g. Radio Standard) that you
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
163
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
have currently selected.
Sending this query:
l
Stops the current measurement (if any) and sets up the instrument for the specified measurement using
the factory defaults,
l
Initiates the data acquisition for the measurement,
l
Blocks other SCPI communication, waiting until the measurement is complete before returning results,
l
l
Turns on averaging (if the function does averaging), and sets the number of averages to 10, 25, or 50,
depending upon the current measurement,
After the data is valid, returns the scalar results, or the trace data, for the specified measurement. The
type of data returned may be defined by an [n] value that is sent with the command.
If the optional [n] parameter is not included, or is set to 1, the scalar measurement results are
returned. If the [n] parameter is set to a value other than 1, the selected trace data results are
returned. For details of the types of scalar results or trace data results that are available, see the
introductory description for each measurement in the User’s and Programmer’s References or online
Help.
ASCII is the default format for the data output. The binary data formats should be used for handling
large blocks of data since they are more compact than the ASCII format. Refer to "Format Data:
Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174 for more information.
If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default settings, you can set
up the measurement with the CONFigure command. Use the commands in the SENSe:<measurement>
and CALCulate:<measurement> subsystems to change the settings. Then, use the READ? command to
initiate the measurement and query the results.
If you need to repeatedly make a given measurement with settings other than the factory defaults, you can
use the commands in the SENSe:<measurement> and CALCulate:<measurement> subsystems to set up
the measurement. Then, use the READ? command to initiate the measurement and query results.
Measurement settings persist if you initiate a different measurement and then return to a previous one. If
you want to use those persistent settings, use READ:<measurement>?. If you want to use the default
settings, use MEASure:<measurement>?.
CONFigure Commands
:CONFigure:<measurement>
This command stops the current measurement (if any) and sets up the instrument for the specified
measurement using the factory default instrument settings. It does not initiate the taking of measurement
data unless INITiate:CONTinuous is ON. If you change any measurement settings after using the
CONFigure command, the READ command can be used to initiate a measurement without changing the
settings back to their defaults.
In the Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer mode, the CONFigure command also turns the
averaging function on and sets the number of averages to 10 for all measurements.
164
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
:CONFigure: <measurement>: NDEFault
Stops the current measurement and changes to the specified measurement. It does not change the
settings to the defaults. It does not initiate the taking of measurement data unless INITiate:CONTinuous is
ON.
CONFigure?
Returns the current measurement name.
CONFigure:CATalog?
Returns a quoted string of all licensed measurement names in the current mode. For example, "SAN, CHP,
OBW, ACP, PST, TXP, SPUR, SEM, LIST".
FETCh Command
:FETCh:<measurement>[n]?
This command puts selected data from the most recent measurement into the output buffer. Use FETCh if
you have already made a good measurement and you want to return several types of data (different [n]
values, for example, both scalars and trace data) from a single measurement. FETCh saves you the time of
re-making the measurement. You can only FETCh results from the measurement that is currently active, it
will not change to a different measurement. An error message is reported if a measurement other than the
current one is specified.
If you need to get new measurement data, use the READ command, which is equivalent to an INITiate
followed by a FETCh.
The scalar measurement results will be returned if the optional [n] value is not included, or is set to 1. If the
[n] value is set to a value other than 1, the selected trace data results will be returned. See each command
for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available. The binary data formats
should be used for handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and transfer faster than the ASCII
format. (FORMat:DATA)
FETCh may be used to return results other than those specified with the original READ or MEASure
command that you sent.
INITiate Command
:INITiate:<measurement>
This command is not available for measurements in all the instrument modes.
l
l
Initiates a trigger cycle for the specified measurement, but does not output any data. You must then
use the FETCh<meas> command to return data. If a measurement other than the current one is
specified, the instrument will switch to that measurement and then initiate it.
For example, suppose you have previously initiated the ACP measurement, but now you are running
the channel power measurement. If you send INIT:ACP? it will change from channel power to ACP and
will initiate an ACP measurement.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
165
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
l
l
Does not change any of the measurement settings. For example, if you have previously started the ACP
measurement and you send INIT:ACP? it will initiate a new ACP measurement using the same
instrument settings as the last time ACP was run.
If your selected measurement is currently active (in the idle state) it triggers the measurement,
assuming the trigger conditions are met. Then it completes one trigger cycle. Depending upon the
measurement and the number of averages, there may be multiple data acquisitions, with multiple
trigger events, for one full trigger cycle. It also holds off additional commands on GPIB until the
acquisition is complete.
READ Command
:READ:<measurement>[n]?
l
l
Does not preset the measurement to the factory default settings. For example, if you have previously
initiated the ACP measurement and you send READ:ACP?, a new measurement is initiated using the
same instrument settings.
Initiates the measurement and puts valid data into the output buffer. If a measurement other than the
current one is specified, the instrument switches to that measurement before it initiates the
measurement and returns results.
For example, suppose you have previously initiated the ACP measurement, but now you are running
the Channel Power measurement. If you then send READ:ACPower?, the measurement changes from
Channel Power back to ACP and, using the previous ACP settings, the measurement is initiated and
results are returned.
l
Blocks other SCPI communication, waiting until the measurement is complete before returning the
results
If the optional [n] value is not included, or is set to 1, the scalar measurement results are returned.
If the [n] value is set to a value other than 1, the selected trace data results are returned. For details of
what types of scalar results or trace data results are available, see the introductory description for
each measurement in the User’s and Programmer’s References or online Help.
The binary data formats should be used when handling large blocks of data since they are more
compact than the ASCII format (for details, see "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)"
on page 174).
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Other Common Measurement Commands
This group includes commands that affect or apply to all modes and measurements. It comprises the
following commands:
l
"Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only) " on page 167
l
"Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only)" on page 167
166
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
l
"Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167
l
"Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167
l
"Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 172
Current Measurement Query (Remote Command Only)
This command returns the name of the measurement that is currently running.
Remote Command
:CONFigure?
Example
CONF?
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Limit Test Current Results (Remote Command Only)
Queries the status of the current measurement limit testing.
l
Returns a 0 if the measured results pass when compared with the current limits.
l
Returns a 1 if the measured results fail any limit tests.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL?
Example
CALC:CLIM:FAIL? queries the current measurement to check whether it fails the defined limits.
Returns 0 (pass) or 1 (fail).
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Data Query (Remote Command Only)
Returns the designated measurement data for the currently selected measurement and subopcode.
l
n = any valid subopcode for the current measurement. See the measurement command results table
for your current measurement, for information about what data is returned for the subopcodes.
This command uses the data setting specified by the FORMat:BORDer (see "Format Data: Byte Order
(Remote Command Only)" on page 175) and FORMat:DATA (see "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote
Command Only)" on page 174) commands, and can return real or ASCII data.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:DATA[n]?
Notes
The return trace depends on the selected measurement.
n is any valid subopcode for the current measurement.
This query returns the same data as FETCh:<meas>?, where <meas> is the current measurement.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)
Returns compressed data for the currently selected measurement and sub-opcode [n].
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
167
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
l
n = any valid sub-opcode for that measurement. See the MEASure:<measurement>? command
description of your specific measurement for information on the data that can be returned.
The data is returned in the current Y Axis Unit of the instrument. The command is used with a sub-opcode
<n> (default=1) to specify the trace. With trace queries, it is best if the instrument is not sweeping during
the query. Therefore, it is generally advisable to be in Single Sweep, or Update=Off.
This command is used to compress or decimate a long trace to extract and return only the desired data. A
typical example would be to acquire N frames of GSM data and return the mean power of the first burst in
each frame. The command can also be used to identify the best curve fit for the data.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:DATA<n>:COMPress? BLOCk | CFIT | MAXimum | MINimum | MEAN |
DMEan | RMS | RMSCubed | SAMPle | SDEViation | PPHase [,<soffset>
[,<length>[,<roffset>[,<rlimit>]]]]
Example
To query the mean power of a set of GSM bursts:
l
Supply a signal that is a set of GSM bursts.
l
Select the IQ Waveform measurement (in IQ Analyzer Mode).
l
Set the sweep time to acquire at least one burst.
l
Set the triggers such that acquisition happens at a known position relative to a burst.
l
Notes
Then query the mean burst levels using, CALC:DATA2:COMP? MEAN, 24e–6, 526e–6 (These
parameter values correspond to GSM signals, where 526e–6 is the length of the burst in the slot
and you just want 1 burst.)
The command supports 5 parameters. Note that the last 4 (<soffset>,<length>,<roffset>,<rlimit>)
are optional. But these optional parameters must be entered in the specified order. For example, if
you want to specify <length>, then you must also specify <soffset>. See details below for a definition
of each of these parameters.
This command uses the data in the format specified by FORMat:DATA, returning either binary or
ASCII data.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Option
Description
BLOCk
Block data
Returns all the data points from the region of the trace data that you specify. For example, it could be used
to return the data points of an input signal over several timeslots, excluding the portions of the trace data
that you do not want. (The points are x,y pairs for trace data, or I,Q pairs for complex data.)
CFIT
Curve fit
Applies curve fitting routines to the data. <soffset> and <length> are required to define the data that you
want. <roffset> is an optional parameter for the desired order of the curve equation. The query returns
the following values: the x-offset (in seconds) and the curve coefficients ((order + 1) values).
MINimum
("Note 1" on page
171)
MAXimum
168
Returns the minimum data point (y value) for the specified region(s) of trace data. For I/Q trace data, the
minimum magnitude of the I/Q pairs is returned.
Returns the maximum data point (y value) for the specified region(s) of trace data. For I/Q trace data, the
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
Option
("Note 1" on page
171)
MEAN
("Note 1" on page
171)
Description
maximum magnitude of the I/Q pairs is returned.
Returns a single value that is the arithmetic mean of the data point values (in dB/ dBm) for the specified
region(s) of trace data. For I/Q trace data, the mean of the magnitudes of the I/Q pairs is returned. See
the following equations.
If the original trace data is in dB, this function returns the arithmetic mean of
those log values, not log of the mean power which is a more useful value. The
mean of the log is the better measurement technique when measuring CW
signals in the presence of noise. The mean of the power, expressed in dB, is
useful in power measurements such as Channel Power. To achieve the mean of
the power, use the RMS option.
Equation 1: Mean Value of Data Points for Specified Region(s)
where Xi is a data point value, and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s).
Equation 2: Mean Value of I/Q Data Pairs for Specified Region(s)
where |Xi| is the magnitude of an I/Q pair, and n is the number of I/Q pairs in the specified region(s).
DMEan
("Note 1" on page
171)
RMS
("Note 1" on page
171)
Returns a single value that is the mean power (in dB/ dBm) of the data point values for the specified region
(s) of trace data. See the following equation:
Equation 3: DMEan Value of Data Points for Specified Region(s)
Returns a single value that is the average power on a root-mean-squared voltage scale (arithmetic rms) of
the data point values for the specified region(s) of trace data. See the following equation.
For I/Q trace data, the rms of the magnitudes of the I/Q pairs is returned. See the
following equation.
This function is very useful for I/Q trace data. However, if the original trace data is
in dB, this function returns the rms of the log values which is not usually needed.
Equation 4: RMS Value of Data Points for Specified Region(s)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
169
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
Option
Description
where Xi is a data point value, and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s).
Equation 5: RMS Value of I/Q Data Pairs for Specified Region(s)
where Xi is the complex value representation of an I/Q pair, Xi* its conjugate complex number, and n is the
number of I/Q pairs in the specified region(s).
Once you have the rms value for a region of trace data (linear or I/Q), you may want to calculate the mean
power. You must convert this rms value (peak volts) to power in dBm:
SAMPle
("Note 1" on page
171)
SDEViation
("Note 1" on page
171)
Returns the first data value (x,y pair) for the specified region(s) of trace data. For I/Q trace data, the first I/Q
pair is returned.
Returns a single value that is the arithmetic standard deviation for the data point values for the specified
region(s) of trace data. See the following equation.
For I/Q trace data, the standard deviation of the magnitudes of the I/Q pairs is returned. See the following
equation.
Equation 6: Standard Deviation of Data Point Values for Specified Region(s)
where Xi is a data point value, X is the arithmetic mean of the data point values for the specified region(s),
and n is the number of data points in the specified region(s).
where |Xi| is the magnitude of an I/Q pair, X is the mean of the magnitudes for the specified region(s), and n
is the number of data points in the specified region(s).
PPHase
("Note 1" on page
171)
Returns the x,y pairs of both rms power (dBm) and arithmetic mean phase (radian) for every specified region
and frequency offset (Hz). The number of pairs is defined by the specified number of regions. This parameter
can be used for I/Q vector (n=0) in Waveform (time domain) measurement and all parameters are specified
by data point in PPHase.
The rms power of the specified region may be expressed as:
170
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
Option
Description
Power = 10 x log [10 x (RMS I/Q value)] + 10.
The RMS I/Q value (peak volts) is:
where Xi is the complex value representation of an I/Q pair, Xi* its conjugate complex number, and n is the
number of I/Q pairs in the specified region.
The arithmetic mean phase of the specified region may be expressed as:
where Yi is the unwrapped phase of I/Q pair with applying frequency correction and n is the number of I/Q
pairs in the specified region.
The frequency correction is made by the frequency offset calculated by the arithmetic mean of every
specified region’s frequency offset. Each frequency offset is calculated by the least square method against
the unwrapped phase of I/Q pair.
Note 1
MIN, MAX, MEAN, DME, RMS, RMSC, SAMP, SDEV and PPH return one data value for each specified region
(or "Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167) of trace data, for as
many regions as possible until you run out of trace data (using "Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query
(Remote Command Only)" on page 167 to specify regions). Alternatively, they return the number of regions
you specify (using "Calculate/Compress Trace Data Query (Remote Command Only)" on page 167),
ignoring any data beyond that.
Sample Trace Data
Constant Envelope
See table below for explanation of variables.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
171
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
Non-Constant Envelope
See table below for explanation of variables.
Variable
Description
<soffset>
Start Offset is an optional real number.
Its unit is seconds for time-domain traces, or a dimensionless index (0 to Npoints – 1) for frequency-domain traces.
It specifies the amount of data at the beginning of the trace that will be ignored before the decimation process starts.
It is the time or frequency change from the start of the trace to the point where you want to start using the data.
The default value is zero.
<length>
An optional real number.
Its unit is seconds for time-domain traces, or a dimensionless index (0 to Npoints – 1) for frequency-domain traces.
It defines how much data will be compressed into one value.
This parameter has a default value equal to the current trace length.
<roffset>
Repeat Offset is an optional real number.
Its unit is seconds for time-domain traces, or a dimensionless index (0 to Npoints – 1) for frequency-domain traces.
It defines the beginning of the next field of trace elements to be compressed. This is relative to the beginning of the
previous field.
This parameter has a default value equal to the <length> variable. Note that this parameter is used for a completely
different purpose when curve fitting (see "CFIT" on page 168 above).
<rlimit>
Repeat Limit is an optional integer.
It specifies the number of data items that you want returned, and ignores any additional items beyond that number.
You can use the Start Offset and the Repeat Limit to pick out exactly which part of the data you want to use.
The default value is all the data.
Calculate Peaks of Trace Data (Remote Command Only)
Returns a list of all the peaks for the currently selected measurement and subopcode [n]. The peaks must
meet the requirements of the peak threshold and excursion values.
l
n = any valid subopcode for the current measurement. See the MEASure:<measurement> command
description of your specific measurement for information on the data that can be returned.
The command can only be used with specific subopcodes, and with measurement results that are trace
data. Both real and complex traces can be searched, but complex traces are converted to magnitude
172
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
in dBm. In many measurements, specifying subopcode n=0 retrieves the raw trace data, which cannot be
searched for peaks. Specifying subopcode n=1 typically retrieves calculated results values, which also
cannot be searched for peaks.
This command uses the data setting specified by the FORMat:BORDer (see "Format Data: Byte Order
(Remote Command Only)" on page 175) and FORMat:DATA (see "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote
Command Only)" on page 174) commands and can return real or ASCII data. If the format is set to INT,32, it
returns REAL,32 data.
The command has four types of parameters:
l
Threshold (in dBm)
l
Excursion (in dB)
l
Sorting order (amplitude, frequency, time)
l
Optional in some measurements: Display line use (all, > display line, < display line)
Remote Command
For Swept SA measurement:
:CALCulate:DATA[1]|2|...6:PEAKs? <threshold>,<excursion>[,AMPLitude |
FREQuency | TIME[,ALL | GTDLine | LTDLine]]
For most other measurements:
:CALCulate:DATA[1]|2|...6:PEAKs? <threshold>,<excursion>[,AMPLitude |
FREQuency | TIME]
Example
Example for Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode:
CALC:DATA4:PEAK? –40, 10, FREQ, GTDL
This identifies the peaks of trace 4 that are above –40 dBm, with excursions of at least 10 dB. The
peaks are returned in order of increasing frequency, starting with the lowest frequency. Only the
peaks that are above the display line are returned.
Query Results 1:
With FORMat:DATA REAL, 32 selected, returns a list of floating-point numbers. The first value in the
list is the number of peak points that are in the following list. A peak point consists of two values: a
peak amplitude followed by its corresponding frequency (or time).
If no peaks are found, then the peak list consists of only the number of peaks, (0).
Notes
l
l
l
<n> - is the trace that will be used
<threshold> - is the level below which trace data peaks are ignored. Note that the threshold
value is required and is always used as a peak criterion. To effectively disable the threshold
criterion for this command, provide a substantially low threshold value such as –200 dBm. Also
note that the threshold value used in this command is independent of and has no effect on the
threshold value stored under the Peak Criteria menu.
<excursion> - is the minimum amplitude variation (rise and fall) required for a signal to be
identified as peak. Note that the excursion value is required and is always used as a peak
criterion. To effectively disable the excursion criterion for this command, provide the minimum
value of 0.0 dB. Also note that the excursion value used in this command is independent of and
has no effect on the excursion value stored under the Peak Criteria menu.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
173
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
Values must be provided for threshold and excursion, but the sorting and display line parameters are
optional (defaults are AMPLitude and ALL).
Note that there is always a Y-axis value for the display line, regardless of whether the display line
state is on or off. It is the current Y-axis value of the display line, which is used by this command to
determine whether a peak should be reported.
l
Sorting order:
l
l
Initial S/W Revision
AMPLitude - lists the peaks in order of descending amplitude, with the highest peak first
(default if optional parameter not sent)
l
FREQuency - lists the peaks in order of occurrence, left to right across the x-axis.
l
TIME - lists the peaks in order of occurrence, left to right across the x-axis.
Peaks vs. Display Line:
l
ALL - lists all of the peaks found (default if optional parameter not sent).
l
GTDLine (greater than display line) - lists all of the peaks found above the display line.
l
LTDLine (less than display line) - lists all of the peaks found below the display line.
Prior to A.02.00
Data Format Commands
This group includes commands that control the formatting of data transfers between the instrument and
the controller. It comprises the following commands:
l
"Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174
l
"Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)" on page 175
Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)
This command specifies the format of the trace data input and output. It specifies the formats used for
trace data during data transfer across any remote port. It affects only the data format for setting and
querying trace data for the :TRACe[:DATA], TRACe[:DATA]?, :CALCulate:DATA[n]? and FETCh:SANalyzer
[n]? commands and queries.
Remote Command
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ASCii|INTeger,32|REAL,32 |REAL,64
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]?
Notes
The query response is:
ASCii: ASC,8
REAL,32: REAL,32
REAL,64: REAL,64
INTeger,32: INT,32
When the numeric data format is REAL or ASCii, data is output in the current Y Axis unit. When the
data format is INTeger, data is output in units of m dBm (.001 dBm).
174
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
The INT,32 format returns binary 32-bit integer values in internal units (m dBm), in a definite length
block.
Dependencies
Sending a data format spec with an invalid number (for example, INT,48) generates no error. The
analyzer simply uses the default (8 for ASCii, 32 for INTeger, 32 for REAL).
Sending data to the analyzer which does not conform to the current FORMat specified, results in an
error. Sending ASCII data when a definite block is expected generates message –161 "Invalid Block
Data" and sending a definite block when ASCII data is expected generates message –121 "Invalid
Character in Number".
Preset
ASCii
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
Note that the INT,32 format is only applicable to the command, TRACe:DATA. This preserves
backwards compatibility for the Swept SA measurement. For all other commands/queries which
honor FORMat:DATA, if INT,32 is sent the analyzer will behave as though it were set to REAL,32.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
The specs for each output type follow:
l
ASCii - Amplitude values are in ASCII, in the current Y Axis Unit, one ASCII character per digit, values
separated by commas, each value in the form:
SX.YYYYYEsZZ
Where:
l
S = sign (+ or -)
l
X = one digit to left of decimal point
l
Y = 5 digits to right of decimal point
l
E = E, exponent header
l
s = sign of exponent (+ or -)
l
ZZ = two digit exponent
l
REAL,32 - Binary 32-bit real values in the current Y Axis Unit, in a definite length block.
l
REAL,64 - Binary 64-bit real values in the current Y Axis Unit, in a definite length block.
Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)
This command selects the binary data byte order for data transfer and other queries. It controls whether
binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode. This command affects only the byte order for setting
and querying trace data for the :TRACe[:DATA], TRACe[:DATA]? , :CALCulate:DATA[n]? and
FETCh:SANalyzer[n]? commands and queries.
By definition, any command that is dependent on FORMat:DATA uses any format supported by
FORMat:DATA.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
175
4 Programming the Instrument
Remote Measurement Functions
l
l
NORMal order begins with the most significant byte (MSB) first, and ends with the least significant byte
(LSB) last, in the sequence: 1|2|3|4.
SWAPped order begins with the LSB first, and ends with the MSB last, in the sequence: 4|3|2|1.
Remote Command
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
:FORMat:BORDer?
Preset
NORMal
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
176
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
STATus Subsystem
The following diagram provides a graphical overview of the entire X-Series Status Register System.
For readability, the diagram is split into two sections:
l
"X-Series Status Register System (1) " on page 178
l
"X-Series Status Register System (2) " on page 179
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
177
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
X-Series Status Register System (1)
178
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
X-Series Status Register System (2)
Detailed Description
The STATus subsystem remote commands set and query the status hardware registers. This system of
registers monitors various events and conditions in the instrument. Software written to control the
instrument may need to monitor some of these events and conditions.
All status register commands are sequential. Most commands can be started immediately and will overlap
with any existing commands that are already running. This is not true of status commands. All the
commands in the spectrum analyzer are assumed to be overlapped unless a command description
specifically says that it is sequential.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
179
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
What Are Status Registers
The status system contains multiple registers that are arranged in a hierarchical order. The lower-level
status registers propagate their data to the higher-level registers in the data structures by means of
summary bits. The status byte register is at the top of the hierarchy and contains general status
information for the instrument’s events and conditions. All other individual registers are used to determine
the specific events or conditions. For a diagram of the registers and their interconnections, see above.
The operation and questionable status registers are sets of registers that monitor the overall instrument
condition. They are accessed with the STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable commands in the
STATus command subsystem. Each register set is made up of five registers:
l
l
l
l
l
Condition Register Reports the real-time state of the signals monitored by this register set. There is no
latching or buffering for a condition register.
Positive Transition Register This filter register controls which signals will set a bit in the event register
when the signal makes a low to high transition (when the condition bit changes from 0 to 1).
Negative Transition Register This filter register controls which signals will set a bit in the event register
when the signal makes a high to low transition (when the condition bit changes from 1 to 0).
Event Register Latches any signal state changes, in the way specified by the filter registers. Bits in the
event register are never cleared by signal state changes. Event registers are cleared when read. They
are also cleared by *CLS and by presetting the instrument.
Event Enable Register Controls which of the bits, being set in the event register, will be summarized as
a single output for the register set. Summary bits are then used by the next higher register.
The STATus:QUEStionable registers report abnormal operating conditions. The status register hierarchy is:
1. The summary outputs from the six STATus:QUEStionable:<keyword> detail registers are inputs to the
STATus:QUEStionable register.
2. The summary output from the STATus:QUEStionable register is an input to the Status Byte Register.
See the overall system diagram in "STATus Subsystem " on page 177.
The STATus:OPERation register set has no summarized inputs. The inputs to the
STATus:OPERation:CONDition register indicates the real time state of the instrument. The
STATus:OPERation:EVENt register summary output is an input to the Status Byte Register.
What Are Status Register SCPI Commands
Most monitoring of the instrument conditions is done at the highest level using the IEEE common
commands indicated below. Complete command descriptions can be found in the section "IEEE 488.2
Common Commands" on page 154. Individual status registers can be set and queried using the commands
described in "STATus Subsystem Command Descriptions" on page 191.
l
180
*CLS (clear status) clears the status byte by emptying the error queue and clearing all the event
registers.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
l
l
l
l
*ESE, *ESE? (event status enable) sets and queries the bits in the enable register part of the standard
event status register.
*ESR? (event status register) queries and clears the event register part of the standard event status
register.
*OPC, *OPC? (operation complete) sets the standard event status register to monitor the completion of
all commands. The query stops any new commands from being processed until the current processing
is complete, then returns a ‘1’.
*PSC, *PSC? (power-on state clear) sets the power-on state so that it clears the service request enable
register and the event status enable register at power on.
l
*SRE, *SRE? (service request enable) sets and queries the value of the service request enable register.
l
*STB? (status byte) queries the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents.
How to Use the Status Registers
A program often needs to be able to detect and manage error conditions or changes in instrument status.
There are two methods you can use to programmatically access the information in status registers:
l
The polling method
l
The service request (SRQ) method
In the polling method, the instrument has a passive role. It only tells the controller that conditions have
changed when the controller asks the right question. In the SRQ method, the instrument takes a more
active role. It tells the controller when there has been a condition change without the controller asking.
Either method allows you to monitor one or more conditions.
The polling method works well if you do not need to know about changes the moment they occur. The SRQ
method should be used if you must know immediately when a condition changes. To detect a change using
the polling method, the program must repeatedly read the registers.
Use the SRQ method when:
l
you need time-critical notification of changes
l
you are monitoring more than one device which supports SRQs
l
you need to have the controller do something else while waiting
l
you can’t afford the performance penalty inherent to polling
Use polling when:
l
l
your programming language/development environment does not support SRQ interrupts
you want to write a simple, single-purpose program and don’t want the added complexity of setting up
an SRQ handler
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
181
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
To monitor a condition:
a. Determine which register contains the bit that reports the condition.
b. Send the unique SCPI query that reads that register.
c. Examine the bit to see if the condition has changed.
You can monitor conditions in different ways.
l
Check the current instrument hardware and firmware status.
Do this by querying the condition registers which continuously monitor status. These registers
represent the current state of the instrument. Bits in a condition register are updated in real time. When
the condition monitored by a particular bit becomes true, the bit is set to 1. When the condition
becomes false, the bit is reset to 0.
l
Monitor a particular condition (bit).
You can enable a particular bit(s), using the event enable register. The instrument will then monitor that
particular condition(s). If the bit becomes true (0 to 1 transition) in the event register, it will stay set until
the event register is cleared. Querying the event register allows you to detect that this condition
occurred even if the condition no longer exists. The event register can only be cleared by querying it or
sending the *CLS command.
l
Monitor a particular type of change in a condition (bit).
l The transition registers are preset to register if the condition goes from 0 to 1 (false to true, or a
positive transition),
l
l
l
This can be changed so the selected condition is detected if the bit goes from 1 to 0 (true to false, or
a negative transition),
It can also be set for both types of transitions occurring,
Or it can be set for neither transition. If both transition registers are set to 0 for a particular bit
position, that bit will not be set in the event register for either type of change.
Using a Status Register
Each bit in a register is represented by a numerical value based on its location. See figure below. This
number is sent with the command to enable a particular bit. If you want to enable more than one bit, you
would send the sum of all the bits that you want to monitor.
Figure: Status Register Bit Values
182
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Bit 15 is not used to report status.
Example 1:
1. To enable bit 0 and bit 6 of standard event status register, you would send the command *ESE 65
because 1 + 64 = 65.
2. The results of a query are evaluated in a similar way. If the *STB? command returns a decimal value of
140, (140 = 128 + 8 + 4) then bit 7 is true, bit 3 is true and bit 2 is true.
Example 2:
1. Suppose you want to know if an Auto-trigger Timeout occurs, but you only cared about that specific
condition. So you would want to know what was happening with bit 10 in the Status Questionable
Integrity register, and not about any other bits.
2. It’s usually a good idea to start by clearing all the status registers with *CLS.
3. Sending the STAT:QUES:INT:ENAB 1024 command lets you monitor only bit 10 events, instead of the
default monitoring all the bits in the register. The register default is for positive transition events (0 to 1
transition). That is, when an auto-trigger timeout occurs. If instead, you wanted to know when the
Auto-trigger timeout condition is cleared, then you would set STAT:QUES:INT:PTR 0 and
STAT:QUES:INT:NTR 32767.
4. So now the only output from the Status Questionable Integrity register will come from a bit 10 positive
transition. That output goes to the Integrity Sum bit 9 of the Status Questionable register.
5. You can do a similar thing with this register to only look at bit 9, using STAT:QUES:ENAB 512.
6. The Status Questionable register output goes to the “Status Questionable Summary” bit 3 of the
Status Byte Register. The output from this register can be enabled using the *SRE 8 command.
7. Finally, you would use the serial polling functionality available for the particular bus/software that you
are using to monitor the Status Byte Register. (You could also use *STB? to poll the Status Byte
Register.)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
183
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Using the Service Request (SRQ) Method
Your language, bus, and programming environment must be able to support SRQ interrupts; for example,
BASIC used with VXI–11.3 (GPIB over LAN).
When you monitor a condition with the SRQ method, you must:
1. Determine which bit monitors the condition.
2. Determine how that bit reports to the request service (RQS) bit of the status byte.
3. Send SCPI commands to enable the bit that monitors the condition and to enable the summary bits
that report the condition to the RQS bit.
4. Enable the controller to respond to service requests.
When the condition changes, the instrument sets its RQS bit. The controller is informed of the change as
soon as it occurs. As a result, the time the controller would otherwise have used to monitor the condition
can be used to perform other tasks. Your program determines how the controller responds to the SRQ.
Generating a Service Request
To use the SRQ method, you must understand how service requests are generated. Bit 6 of the status byte
register is the request service (RQS) bit. The *SRE command is used to configure the RQS bit to report
changes in instrument status. When such a change occurs, the RQS bit is set. It is cleared when the status
byte register is queried using *SRE? (with a serial poll.) It can be queried without erasing the contents with
*STB?.
When a register set causes a summary bit in the status byte to change from 0 to 1, the instrument can
initiate the service request (SRQ) process. However, the process is only initiated if both of the following
conditions are true:
l
l
The corresponding bit of the service request enable register is also set to 1.
The instrument does not have a service request pending. (A service request is considered to be pending
between the time the instrument’s SRQ process is initiated and the time the controller reads the status
byte register.)
The SRQ process sets the SRQ true. It also sets the status byte’s request service (RQS) bit to 1. Both
actions are necessary to inform the controller that the instrument requires service. Setting the SRQ line
only informs the controller that some device on the bus requires service. Setting the RQS bit allows the
controller to determine which instrument requires service.
If your program enables the controller to detect and respond to service requests, it should instruct the
controller to perform a serial poll when the SRQ is set true. Each device on the bus returns the contents of
its status byte register in response to this poll. The device who's RQS bit is set to 1 is the device that
requested service.
When you read the instrument’s status byte register with a serial poll, the RQS bit is reset to 0. Other bits in
the register are not affected.
184
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
If the status register is configured to SRQ on end-of-measurement and the measurement is in continuous
mode, then restarting a measurement (INITiate command) can cause the measuring bit to pulse low. This
causes an SRQ when you have not actually reached the "end-of-measurement" condition. To avoid this:
1. Set INITiate:CONTinuous off.
2. Set/enable the status registers.
3. Restart the measurement (send INITiate).
Status Register System
The hardware status registers are combined to form the instrument status system. Specific status bits are
assigned to monitor various aspects of the instrument operation and status. See the diagram of the status
system above for information about the bit assignments and status register interconnections.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
185
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
The Status Byte Register
The RQS bit is read and reset by a serial poll. The same bit position (MSS) is read, non-destructively by the
*STB? command. If you serial poll bit 6 it is read as RQS, but if you send *STB it reads bit 6 as MSS. For more
information refer to Section 11 of IEEE Standard 488.2–1992.
186
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Bit
Description
0,
1
These bits are always set to 0.
2
A 1 in this bit position indicates that the SCPI error queue is not empty which means that it contains at least one error
message.
3
A 1 in this bit position indicates that the data questionable summary bit has been set. The data questionable event register
can then be read to determine the specific condition that caused this bit to be set.
4
A 1 in this bit position indicates that the instrument has data ready in the output queue. There are no lower status groups
that provide input to this bit.
5
A 1 in this bit position indicates that the standard event summary bit has been set. The standard event status register can
then be read to determine the specific event that caused this bit to be set.
6
A 1 in this bit position indicates that the instrument has at least one reason to report a status change. This bit is also called
the master summary status bit (MSS).
7
A 1 in this bit position indicates that the standard operation summary bit has been set. The standard operation event register
can then be read to determine the specific condition that caused this bit to be set.
To query the Status Byte register, send the command *STB? The response will be the decimal sum of the
bits which are set to 1. For example, if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are set to 1, the decimal sum of the 2
bits is 128 plus 8, so the decimal value 136 is returned. The *STB command does not clear the status
register.
In addition to the Status Byte register, the status byte group also contains the Service Request Enable
register. This register lets you choose which bits in the Status Byte register will trigger a service request.
Send the *SRE <integer> command where <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want
to enable plus the decimal value of bit 6. For example, assume that you want to enable bit 7 so that
whenever the standard operation status register summary bit is set to 1 it will trigger a service request.
Send the command *SRE 192 (because 192 = 128 + 64). You must always add 64 (the numeric value of RQS
bit 6) to your numeric sum when you enable any bits for a service request. The query *SRE? returns the
decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the *SRE <integer> command.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
187
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
The service request enable register presets to zeros (0).
Standard Event Status Register
The Standard Event Status register contains the following bits:
188
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Bit
Description
0
A 1 in this bit position indicates that all pending operations were completed
following execution of the *OPC command.
1
This bit is for GPIB handshaking to request control. Currently it is set to 0
because there are no implementations where the spectrum analyzer controls
another instrument.
2
A 1 in this bit position indicates that a query error has occurred. Query errors
have SCPI error numbers from –499 to –400.
3
A 1 in this bit position indicates that a device dependent error has occurred.
Device dependent errors have SCPI error numbers from –399 to –300 and 1 to
32767.
4
A 1 in this bit position indicates that an execution error has occurred. Execution
errors have SCPI error numbers from –299 to –200.
5
A 1 in this bit position indicates that a command error has occurred. Command
errors have SCPI error numbers from –199 to –100.
6
A 1 in this bit position indicates that the Local key has been pressed. This is
true even if the instrument is in local lockout mode.
7
A 1 in this bit position indicates that the instrument has been turned off and
then on.
The Standard Event Status register is used to determine the specific event that set bit 5 in the Status Byte
register. To query the Standard Event Status register, send *ESR?. The response will be the decimal sum of
the bits that are enabled (set to 1). For example, if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are enabled, the decimal
sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8, so the decimal value 136 is returned.
In addition to the Standard Event Status register, the standard event status group also contains a
Standard Event Status Enable register. This register lets you choose which bits in the Standard Event
Status register will set the summary bit (bit 5 of the status byte register) to 1. Send the *ESE <integer>
command where <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable. For example, to
enable bit 7 and bit 6 so that whenever either of those bits is set to 1, the standard event status summary
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
189
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
bit of the status byte register will be set to 1, send the command *ESE 192 (128 + 64). The query *ESE?
returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the *ESE <integer> command.
The Standard Event Status Enable register presets to zeros (0).
Operation and Questionable Status Registers
The Operation and Questionable Status registers monitor the overall instrument condition. They are
accessed with the STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable commands in the STATus command
subsystem. See the diagram in "STATus Subsystem " on page 177.
Operation Status Register
The Operation Status register monitors the current instrument measurement state. It checks to see if the
instrument is calibrating, sweeping, or waiting for a trigger. For more information see *OPC? located in the
section "IEEE 488.2 Common Commands" on page 154.
Bit
Condition
Operation
0
Calibrating
The instrument is busy executing its Align Now process
3
Sweeping
The instrument is busy taking a sweep.
4
Measuring
The instrument is busy making a measurement. Measurements
often require multiple sweeps. They are initiated by keys under the
Meas key or with the MEASure group of commands.
The bit is valid for most X-Series Modes.
5
Waiting for trigger
The instrument is waiting for the trigger conditions to be met, then
it will trigger a sweep or measurement.
Questionable Status Register
The Questionable Status register monitors the instrument’s condition to see if anything questionable has
happened to it. It is looking for anything that might cause an error or a bad measurement like a hardware
problem, an out of calibration situation, or a unusual signal. All the bits are summary bits from lower-level
event registers.
190
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Bit
Condition
Operation
3
Power summary
The instrument hardware has detected a power
unleveled condition.
4
Temperature summary
The instrument is still warming up.
5
Frequency summary
The instrument hardware has detected an unlocked
condition or a problem with the external frequency
reference.
8
Calibration summary
The instrument has detected a hardware problem
while doing the automatic internal alignment process.
9
Integrity summary
The instrument has detected a questionable
measurement condition such as: bad timing, bad
signal/data, timeout problem, signal overload, or
“meas uncal”.
STATus Subsystem Command Descriptions
The STATus subsystem controls the SCPI-defined instrument status reporting structures. Each status
register has a set of five commands used for querying or masking that particular register.
Numeric values for bit patterns can be entered using decimal or hexadecimal representations, that is,
decimal values 0 to 32767, which are equivalent to hexadecimal values #H0 to #H7FFF.)
Operation Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
l
"Operation Condition Query" on page 191
l
"Operation Enable" on page 192
l
"Operation Event Query" on page 192
l
"Operation Negative Transition" on page 193
l
"Operation Positive Transition" on page 193
Operation Condition Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Status Operation Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
Example
STAT:OPER:COND?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
191
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Operation Enable
This command determines which bits in the Operation Event register, will set the Operation Status
Summary bit (bit 7) in the Status Byte Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of
the bits you want to enable.
The preset condition is to have all bits in this enable register set to 0. To have any Operation Events
reported to the Status Byte Register, one or more bits need to be set to 1.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
Example
STAT:OPER:ENAB 1 Sets the register so that Align Now operation will be reported to the Status
Byte Register.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Operation Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Operation Event register.
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:OPER?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
192
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Operation Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in
the Operation Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable
<integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?
Example
STAT:OPER:NTR 1 Align Now operation complete will be reported to the Status Byte Register.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Operation Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in
the Operation Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable
<integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition?
Example
STAT:OPER:PTR 1 Align Now operation beginning will be reported to the Status Byte Register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Preset the Status Byte
Sets bits in most of the enable and transition registers to their default state.
Presets all the Transition Filters, Enable Registers, and the Error/Event Queue Enable.
Has no effect on Event Registers, Error/Event Queue, IEEE 488.2 ESE, and SRE Registers as described in
IEEE Standard 488.2–1992.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
193
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Remote Command
:STATus:PRESet
Example
STAT:PRES
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
l
"Questionable Condition " on page 194
l
"Questionable Enable " on page 194
l
"Questionable Event Query " on page 195
l
"Questionable Negative Transition " on page 195
l
"Questionable Positive Transition" on page 196
Questionable Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Event register will set the Questionable Status
Summary bit (bit3) in the Status Byte Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of
the bits you want to enable.
The preset condition is all bits in this enable register set to 0. To have any Questionable Events reported to
the Status Byte Register, one or more bits need to be set to 1. The Status Byte Event Register should be
queried after each measurement to check the Questionable Status Summary (bit 3). If it is equal to 1, a
condition during the test may have made the test results invalid. If it is equal to 0, this indicates that no
hardware problem or measurement problem was detected by the analyzer.
194
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle 16
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?
Example
STAT:OPER:PTR 1 Align Now operation beginning will be reported to the Status Byte Register.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Event register.
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit
in the Questionable Event register when the condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The
variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition 16
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition?
Example
STAT:QUES:NTR 16 Temperature summary ‘questionable cleared’ will be reported to the Status Byte
Register.
Preset
0
Min
0
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
195
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit
in the Questionable Event register when the condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The
variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition?
Example
STAT:QUES:PTR 16 Temperature summary ‘questionable asserted’ will be reported to the Status Byte
Register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
l
"Questionable Calibration Condition" on page 196
l
"Questionable Calibration Enable" on page 197
l
"Questionable Calibration Event Query" on page 197
l
"Questionable Calibration Negative Transition" on page 198
l
"Questionable Calibration Positive Transition" on page 198
Questionable Calibration Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition
register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
196
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition Register will set bits in the
Questionable Calibration Event register, which also sets the Calibration Summary bit (bit 8) in the
Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to
enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:ENAB 16384 Can be used to query if an alignment is needed, if you have turned off the
automatic alignment process.
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register.
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
197
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Questionable Calibration Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when the condition register bit has a
negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want
to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:NTR 16384
Alignment is not required.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when the condition register bit has a
positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want
to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:PTR 16384
Alignment is required.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Skipped Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
l
"Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition" on page 199
l
"Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable" on page 199
198
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
l
"Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query" on page 199
l
"Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition" on page 200
l
"Questionable Calibration Skipped Positive Transition" on page 200
Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped
Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Skipped Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition Register will set
bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Event register, which also sets bit 11 of the Questionable
Calibration Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:ENABle?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP:ENAB 1
Can be used to query if an EMI alignment skipped condition is detected
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Skipped Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
199
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Skipped Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition register will set
the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Event register when the condition register bit
has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that
you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:NTRansition?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP:NTR 1
Align RF skipped is not required.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Skipped Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Condition register will set
the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Skipped Event register when the condition register bit
has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you
want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped:PTRansition?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:SKIP:PTR 1
Align RF skipped is required.
200
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
l
"Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition" on page 201
l
"Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable" on page 201
l
"Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query" on page 202
l
"Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition" on page 202
l
"Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition" on page 203
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure
Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition Register
will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event register, which also sets bit 9 of the
Questionable Calibration Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you
want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:ENABle?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
201
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL:ENAB 1
Can be used to query if an EMI conducted alignment is needed.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure
Event register.
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition register
will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event register when the
condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal
values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:NTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL:NTR 1
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:NTRansition?
EMI conducted align failure is not required.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
202
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition register
will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event register when the
condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal
values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:PTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:FAIL:PTR 1
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:PTRansition?
EMI conducted align failure is required.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
l
"Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition" on page 203
l
"Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Enable" on page 204
l
"Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query" on page 204
l
"Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Negative Transition" on page 205
l
"Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive Transition" on page 205
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended
Needed Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
203
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:NEED:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition Register
will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event register, which also sets bit 14 of the
Questionable Calibration Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you
want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:ENABle?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:NEED:ENAB 2
Can be used to query if an EMI conducted alignment is needed.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended
Needed Event register.
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:NEED?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
204
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition register
will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event register when the
condition register bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal
values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:NTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:NEED:NTR 2
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:NTRansition?
Align EMI conducted is not required.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Condition register
will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Extended Needed Event register when the
condition register bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal
values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:PTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:CAL:EXT:NEED:PTR 2
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed:PTRansition?
Align EMI conducted is required.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Frequency Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
205
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
l
"Questionable Frequency Condition" on page 206
l
"Questionable Frequency Enable" on page 206
l
"Questionable Frequency Event Query" on page 207
l
"Questionable Frequency Negative Transition" on page 207
l
"Questionable Frequency Positive Transition" on page 207
Questionable Frequency Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition
register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:FREQ:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Frequency Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition Register will set bits in the
Questionable Frequency Event register, which also sets the Frequency Summary bit (bit 5) in the
Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to
enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:FREQ:ENAB 2
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle?
Frequency Reference Unlocked will be reported to the Frequency Summary of the Status Questionable register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
206
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Questionable Frequency Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register.
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES:FREQ?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Frequency Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when the condition register bit has a
negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want
to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:FREQ:NTR 2
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition?
Frequency Reference ‘regained lock’ will be reported to the Frequency Summary of the Status Questionable
register.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Frequency Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when the condition register bit has a
positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want
to enable.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
207
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:FREQ:PTR 2
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition?
Frequency Reference ‘became unlocked’ will be reported to the Frequency Summary of the Status Questionable
register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
l
"Questionable Integrity Condition" on page 208
l
"Questionable Integrity Enable" on page 209
l
"Questionable Integrity Event Query" on page 209
l
"Questionable Integrity Negative Transition" on page 209
l
"Questionable Integrity Positive Transition" on page 210
Questionable Integrity Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
208
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Questionable Integrity Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition Register will set bits in the
Questionable Integrity Event register, which also sets the Integrity Summary bit (bit 9) in the Questionable
Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:ENAB 8
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle?
Measurement Uncalibrated Summary will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable
register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register.
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES:INT?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when the condition register bit has a negative
transition (1 to 0)
The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
209
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:NTR 8
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition?
Measurement ‘regained calibration’ Summary will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status
Questionable register.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when the condition register bit has a positive
transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to
enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:PTR 8
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition?
Measurement ‘became uncalibrated’ Summary will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status
Questionable register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Signal Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
210
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
l
"Questionable Integrity Signal Condition" on page 211
l
"Questionable Integrity Signal Enable" on page 211
l
"Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query" on page 212
l
"Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition" on page 212
l
"Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition" on page 212
Questionable Integrity Signal Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition
register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Signal Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition Register will set bits in
the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register, which also sets the Integrity Summary bit (bit 9) in the
Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to
enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:ENABle?
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN:ENAB 4
Burst Not Found will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
211
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Questionable Integrity Signal Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event
register.
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Signal Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register when the condition register bit has a
negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want
to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:NTRansition?
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN:NTR 4
Burst found will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Signal Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Signal Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Signal Event register when the condition register bit has a
positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want
to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:PTRansition <integer>
212
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal:PTRansition?
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:SIGN:PTR 4
Burst not found will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
l
"Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition" on page 213
l
"Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable" on page 213
l
"Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query" on page 214
l
"Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition" on page 214
l
"Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition" on page 215
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated
Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:UNC:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register will set
bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register, which also sets the Data Uncalibrated
Summary bit (bit 3) in the Questionable Integrity Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal
values of the bits you want to enable.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
213
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:UNC:ENAB 1
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle?
Oversweep (Meas Uncal) will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event
register.
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:UNC?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set
the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register when the condition register
bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that
you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:UNC:NTR 1
214
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Oversweep cleared will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set
the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register when the condition register
bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that
you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:INT:UNC:PTR 1
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition?
Oversweep (Meas Uncal) occurred will be reported to the Integrity Summary of the Status Questionable register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Power Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
l
"Questionable Power Condition" on page 216
l
"Questionable Power Enable" on page 216
l
"Questionable Power Event Query" on page 216
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
215
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
l
"Questionable Power Negative Transition" on page 217
l
"Questionable Power Positive Transition" on page 217
Questionable Power Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:POW:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Power Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition Register will set bits in the
Questionable Power Event register, which also sets the Power Summary bit (bit 3) in the Questionable
Register.
The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:POW:ENAB 32
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle?
50 MHz Input Pwr too High for Cal will be reported to the Power Summary of the Status Questionable register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Power Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Event register.
216
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES:POW?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Power Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when the condition register bit has a negative
transition (1 to 0).
The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:POW:NTR 32
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition?
50 MHz Input Power became OK for Cal will be reported to the Power Summary of the Status Questionable
register.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Power Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when the condition register bit has a positive
transition (0 to 1).
The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
217
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:POW:PTR 32
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition?>
50 MHz Input Power became too high for Cal will be reported to the Power Summary of the Status Questionable
register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Temperature Register
The following commands and queries are available for this register:
l
"Questionable Temperature Condition" on page 218
l
"Questionable Temperature Enable" on page 219
l
"Questionable Temperature Event Query" on page 219
l
"Questionable Temperature Negative Transition" on page 219
l
"Questionable Temperature Positive Transition" on page 220
Questionable Temperature Condition
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition
register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:CONDition?
Example
STAT:QUES:TEMP:COND?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
218
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Questionable Temperature Enable
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition Register will set bits in
the Questionable Temperature Event register, which also sets the Temperature Summary bit (bit 4) in the
Questionable Register.
The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:ENABle <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:TEMP:ENAB 1
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:ENABle?
Reference Oscillator Oven Cold will be reported to the Temperature Summary of the Status Questionable
register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Temperature Event Query
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Temperature Event register.
The register requires that the associated PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a
bit in the event register. The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the register is
cleared
Mode
All
Remote Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature[:EVENt]?
Example
STAT:QUES:TEMP?
Preset
0
Status Bits/OPC dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Temperature Negative Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Temperature Event register when the condition register bit has a
negative transition (1 to 0).
The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
219
4 Programming the Instrument
STATus Subsystem
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:NTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:TEMP:NTR 1
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:NTRansition?
Reference Oscillator Oven not cold will be reported to the Temperature Summary of the Status Questionable
register.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Questionable Temperature Positive Transition
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Temperature Condition register will set the
corresponding bit in the Questionable Temperature Event register when the condition register bit has a
positive transition (0 to 1).
The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Mode
All
Remote
Command
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition <integer>
Example
STAT:QUES:TEMP:PTR 1
:STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature:PTRansition?
Reference Oscillator Oven became cold will be reported to the Temperature Summary of the Status
Questionable register.
Preset
32767
Min
0
Max
32767
Status
Bits/OPC
dependencies
Sequential command
Initial S/W
Revision
Prior to A.02.00
220
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
The following table ("Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands
with N9061A Support" on page 223) lists all legacy analyzer
programming commands (that is, commands for 8566A/B, 8568A/B,
and the 8560 Series), and indicates which are supported by N9061A.
For more detailed information about each supported command, click
on the link in the "More Information" column of the table to go to the
relevant section in the "Legacy Command Descriptions" on page 251
(SCPI commands supported by N9061A are not listed here; see
instead "List of Supported SCPI Commands" on page 133.)
221
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Key to Table Columns "8566", "8568", and "8560 Series"
Key to Table Columns "8566", "8568", and "8560 Series"
The entries in these columns have the following significance:
Entry
Significance
N/A
This command is not available in this legacy instrument.
No
This command is available in this legacy instrument, but is not supported by N9061A. This situation may occur
due to architectural differences between legacy and X-Series instruments, which make support of the command
either unnecessary or technically unfeasible.
Yes
This command is available in this legacy instrument, and is supported by N9061A.
Ext
This is an "extension" command. It is supported by N9061A when emulating this legacy instrument, but does not
appear in the native command set of the legacy instrument.
222
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
A1
Clear-writes trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A)" on
page 255
A2
Max Holds trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A)"
on page 256
A3
View trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A)"
on page 257
A4
Blanks trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)" on page
258
ABORT
Interrupt operation of all
user-defined functions
N/A
N/A
No
ABS
Absolute
No
No
No
ACP
Performs the adjacent
channel power
measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPACCL
Accelerate adjacent
channel power
measurement
N/A
N/A
No
Not required in N9061A, because ACP
measurement is faster than in legacy
analyzers
ACPALPHA
Adjacent channel power
alpha weighting
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power
Alpha Weighting)" on page 259
ACPALTCH
Adjacent channel power
alternate channels
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power
Alternate Channels)" on page 260
ACPBRPER
Adjacent channel power
burst period
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power
Burst Period)" on page 261
ACPBRWID
Adjacent channel power
burst width
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power
Burst Width)" on page 262
ACPBW
Specifies channel
bandwidth for ACP
measurement
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power
Bandwidth)" on page 263
ACPCOMPUTE
Compute adjacent
channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel
Power Compute)" on page 264
ACPCONTM
Performs ACP
measurement in
continuous sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPE
Adjacent channel power
extended
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPERR
ACP measurement error
query
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPFRQWT
Adjacent channel power
frequency weighting
N/A
N/A
Yes
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power
Frequency Weighting)" on page 265
223
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
ACPGR
Adjacent channel power
graph on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPGRAPH
Compute adjacent
channel power graph
N/A
N/A
No
ACPLOWER
Lower adjacent channel
power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel
Power)" on page 266
ACPMAX
Maximum adjacent
channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent
Channel Power)" on page 267
ACPMEAS
Measure adjacent
channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent
Channel Power)" on page 268
ACPMETHOD
Adjacent channel power
measurement method
N/A
N/A
No
ACPMK
Adjacent channel power
marker on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPMSTATE
Adjacent channel power
measurement state
N/A
N/A
Yes
ACPPAR
ACP manual or auto
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPPWRTX
Total power transmitted
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power
Total Power Transmitted)" on page
271
ACPRSLTS
Adjacent channel power
measurement results
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power
Measurement Results)" on page 272
ACPSNGLM
Performs ACP
measurement in single
sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACPSP
Channel spacing
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power
Channel Spacing)" on page 274
ACPT
Adjacent channel power
T weighting
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T
Weighting)" on page 275
ACPUPPER
Upper adjacent channel
power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel
Power)" on page 276
ACTDEF
Give user-defined
function active status
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACTVF
Active function
N/A
N/A
N/A
ACTVFUNC
Creates a user defined
active function
N/A
N/A
No
ADD
Add
No
No
No
ADJALL
LO & IF adjustment
N/A
N/A
Yes
224
More Information
"ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel
Power Measurement State)" on page
269
"ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments)" on
page 277
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
ADJCRT
Adjust CRT alignment
N/A
N/A
No
ADJIF
Adjust IF
N/A
N/A
No
AMB
Trace A - trace B ->
trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"AMB (A minus B into A)" on page 278
AMBPL
Trace A - trace B +
Display Line -> trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line
into A)" on page 279
AMPCOR
Applies amplitude
correction at specified
frequencies
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORDATA
Amplitude correction
data
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORRCL
Amplitude correction
recall
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORSAVE
Save amplitude
correction data
N/A
N/A
No
AMPCORSIZE
Amplitude correction
data array size
N/A
N/A
No
AMPLEN
Amplitude correction
length
N/A
N/A
N/A
ANLGPLUS
Turns on or off the
Analog+ display mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
ANNOT
Display Annotation
Yes
Yes
Yes
"ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 280
APB
Trace A + trace B ->
trace A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)" on
page 281
ARRAYDEF
Defines an array
N/A
N/A
No
AT
Input Attenuation
Yes
Yes
Yes
"AT (Input Attenuation)" on page 282
AUNITS
Amplitude Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
"AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)"
on page 283
AUTO
Auto couple
N/A
N/A
N/A
AUTOCPL
Auto couple
N/A
N/A
Yes
AUTOEXEC
Turns on or off the
function defined with
AUTOFUNC
N/A
N/A
No
AUTOFUNC
Defines a function for
automatic execution
N/A
N/A
No
AUTOSAVE
Automatically saves trace
N/A
N/A
No
AVG
Average
No
No
No
AXB
Exchange Traces A & B
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled)" on page
285
"AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)"
225
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
on page 286
B1
Clear-writes trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B)" on
page 287
B2
Max Holds trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B)"
on page 288
B3
View trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)"
on page 289
B4
Blanks trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)" on page
290
BAUDRATE
Baud rate of spectrum
analyzer
N/A
N/A
N/A
BIT
Return or receive state of
bit
N/A
N/A
N/A
BITF
Bit flag
N/A
N/A
N/A
BL
Trace B - Display line ->
trace B
Yes
Yes
N/A
"BL (Trace B minus Display Line to
Trace B)" on page 291
BLANK
Blanks specified trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
"BLANK (Blank Trace)" on page 292
BML
Trace B - Display line ->
trace B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"BML (Trace B Minus Display Line)" on
page 293
BRD
Bus Read
No
No
N/A
BTC
Transfer trace B to C
Yes
Yes
N/A
BWR
Bus Write
No
No
N/A
BXC
Exchange Traces B & C
Yes
Yes
N/A
"BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)"
on page 295
C1
Turns off A - B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off)" on
page 296
C2
A - B -> A
Yes
Yes
Yes
"C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)" on page
297
CA
Couples Attenuation
Yes
Yes
Yes
"CA (Couple Attenuation)" on page 298
CAL
Calibrate
N/A
N/A
N/A
CARDLOAD
Copies data from memory
card to module memory
N/A
N/A
No
CARDSTORE
Copies data to memory
card
N/A
N/A
No
CARROFF
Carrier off power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CARROFF (Carrier Off Power)" on
page 299
CARRON
Carrier on power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CARRON (Carrier On Power)" on page
300
226
"BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)" on
page 294
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
CAT
Catalog
N/A
N/A
N/A
CATALOG
Catalog
N/A
N/A
No
CF
Center Frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
"CF (Center Frequency)" on page 301
CHANNEL
Channel selection
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CHANNEL (Channel Selection)" on
page 303
CHANPWR
Channel power
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CHANPWR (Channel Power)" on page
304
CHP
Performs the channel
power measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
CHPGR
Channel power graph on
or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
CHPWRBW
Channel power
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
Yes
"CHPWRBW (Channel Power
Bandwidth)" on page 305
CLRAVG
Reset avg. counter to 1
Yes
Yes
N/A
"CLRAVG (Clear Average)" on page
306
CLRBOX
Clears a rectangular area
on the analyzer display
N/A
N/A
N/A
CLRDSP
Clear display
N/A
N/A
No
CLRSCHED
Clears autosave &
autoexec schedule buffer
N/A
N/A
No
CLRW
Clear-writes specified
trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
CLS
Clear status byte
N/A
N/A
N/A
CMDERRQ
Command error query
N/A
N/A
N/A
CNF
Confidence test
N/A
N/A
N/A
CNTLA
Auxiliary interface control
line A
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLB
Auxiliary interface control
line B
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLC
Auxiliary interface control
line C
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLD
Auxiliary interface control
line D
N/A
N/A
No
CNTLI
Auxiliary interface control
line input
N/A
N/A
No
CNVLOSS
Selects ref level offset to
calibrate amplitude
display
No
N/A
No
COMB
Turns the comb generator
N/A
N/A
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"CLRW (Clear Write)" on page 307
227
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
on or off
COMPRESS
Compress
No
No
N/A
CONCAT
Concat
No
No
N/A
CONTS
Continuous sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
CORREK
Correction factors on
N/A
N/A
N/A
COUPLE
Selects AC or DC
coupling
N/A
N/A
Yes
"COUPLE (Input Coupling)" on page
310
CR
Couples Resolution BW
Yes
Yes
Yes
"CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth)" on
page 311
CRTHPOS
Horizontal position of CRT
display
N/A
N/A
N/A
CRTVPOS
Vertical position of CRT
display
N/A
N/A
N/A
CS
Couples Step Size
Yes
Yes
N/A
"CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)" on
page 312
CT
Couples Sweep Time
Yes
Yes
N/A
"CT (Couple Sweep Time)" on page
313
CTA
Converts display units to
dBm
No
No
N/A
CTM
Converts dBm to display
units
No
No
N/A
CTRLHPIB
Allows SA to control HPIB
N/A
N/A
No
CV
Couples Video Bandwidth
Yes
Yes
N/A
D1
Sets display to normal
size
No
No
N/A
D2
Sets display to full CRT
size
No
No
N/A
D3
Sets display to expanded
size
No
No
N/A
DA
Display Memory Address
Yes
Yes
N/A
DATEMODE
Set the date display
format
N/A
N/A
No
DD
Display write binary
No
No
N/A
DELMKBW
Occupied power
bandwidth within delta
marker
N/A
N/A
Yes
228
"CONTS (Continuous Sweep)" on page
309
"CV (Couple Video Bandwidth)" on
page 314
"DA (Display Address)" on page 315
"DELMKBW (Occupied Power
Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)" on
page 316
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
DEMOD
Turns the demodulator on
or off
N/A
N/A
No
DEMODAGC
Demodulation automatic
gain control
N/A
N/A
No
DEMODT
Demodulation time
N/A
N/A
No
DET
Detection Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
DISPOSE
Frees Memory
No
No
No
DIV
Divide
No
No
No
DL
Display Line Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
"DL (Display Line)" on page 318
DLE
Turns the display line
on/off
Yes
Yes
N/A
"DLE (Display Line Enable)" on page
320
DLYSWP
Delay sweep
N/A
N/A
Yes
"DLYSWP (Delay Sweep)" on page
321
DN
Reduces the active
function by applicable
step size
N/A
N/A
N/A
DONE
Synchronizing function
Yes
Yes
Yes
DOTDENS
Sets the dot density value
in Analog+ display mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
DR
Display Memory Address
Read
Yes
Yes
N/A
DRAWBOX
Draws a rectangular box
on analyzer display
N/A
N/A
N/A
DSPLY
Display
No
No
No
DT
Define Terminator
No
No
N/A
DW
Display Memory Address
Write
No
No
N/A
E1
Active marker to
maximum signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
"E1[one] (Peak Marker)" on page 324
E2
Active marker to center
frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
"E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency)
" on page 325
E3
Active marker frequency
to CF step size
Yes
Yes
Yes
"E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size)"
on page 326
E4
Active marker to
reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
"E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level)"
on page 327
EDITDONE
Indicates limit line
editing is complete
N/A
N/A
Yes
"EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on page 328
EDITLIML
Allows current limit line
to be edited
N/A
N/A
No
"EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)" on page
329
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317
"DONE (Done)" on page 322
"DR (Display Read)" on page 323
229
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
EE
Enable entry
No
No
N/A
EK
Enable knob
No
No
N/A
ELSE
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
No
EM
Erase trace C memory
No
No
No
ENDIF
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
N/A
ENTER
Enter from HP-IB
No
No
No
EP
Enter parameter function
N/A
N/A
N/A
ERASE
User memory & registers
erased
N/A
No
N/A
ERR
Queries the error queue
Yes
Yes
Yes
"ERR (Error)" on page 330
ET
Elapsed time
N/A
N/A
Yes
"ET (Elapsed Time)" on page 332
EX
Exchanges trace A & B
Yes
Yes
Yes
"EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)"
on page 333
EXP
Exponential
No
No
No
EXTMXR
Presets external mixing
mode
No
N/A
No
FA
Start frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
"FA (Start Frequency)" on page 334
FB
Stop frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
"FB (Stop Frequency)" on page 336
FDIAG
Frequency diagnostics
N/A
N/A
No
FDSP
Frequency display off
N/A
N/A
Yes
FFT
Fast fourier transform
No
No
No
FFTAUTO
Marker to Auto FFT
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTCLIP
FFT signal clipped
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTCONTS
FFT continuous sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTKNL
Fast fourier transform
kernel
No
No
N/A
FFTMKR
FFT markers
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTMM
FFT marker to midscreen
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTMS
FFT marker to FFT stop
frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTOFF
FFT off
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTPCTAM
FFT percent amplitude
modulation
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTPCTAMR
FFT percent amplitude
modulation readout
N/A
N/A
N/A
230
More Information
"FDSP (Frequency Display Off)" on
page 337
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
FFTSNGLS
FFT single sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTSTAT
FFT status
N/A
N/A
N/A
FFTSTOP
FFT stop frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
FMGAIN
FM gain
N/A
N/A
N/A
FOFFSET
Frequency offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
FORMAT
Erase & format the
selected memory device
N/A
N/A
No
FPKA
Fast preselector peak
Yes
N/A
N/A
"FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak)" on
page 340
FREF
Frequency reference
N/A
N/A
Yes
"FREF (Frequency Reference)" on page
341
FS
Full frequency span
Yes
Yes
Yes
"FS (Full Span)" on page 342
FULBAND
Set start/stop freq for ext
mixing bands
No
N/A
No
FUNCDEF
Function definition
No
No
No
GATE
Turn time-gating on or off
N/A
N/A
Yes
"GATE (Gate)" on page 344
GATECTL
Gate control
N/A
N/A
Yes
"GATECTL (Gate Control)" on page 345
GC
Gate preset
N/A
N/A
N/A
GD
Gate delay
N/A
N/A
Yes
GDRVCLPAR
Clear pulse parameters
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGDEL
Gate Delay for the
frequency window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGLEN
Gate length for frequency
& time windows
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGT
Turns gate in frequency
window on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVGTIM
Gate trigger to marker
position for time window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVPRI
Pulse repetition interval
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVPWID
Pulse width
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVRBW
Couple resolution
bandwidth to pulse width
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVREFE
Enter reference edge
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVST
Couple sweep time to
pulse repetition interval
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVSWAP
Update the time or
frequency window
N/A
N/A
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)" on page
338
"GD (Gate Delay)" on page 346
231
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
GDRVSWDE
Delay sweep for time
window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVSWP
Sweep time for the time
window
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVUTIL
Turns the gate utility on
or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
GDRVVBW
Couple video bandwidth
to the gate length
N/A
N/A
N/A
GETPLOT
Get plot
N/A
N/A
N/A
GETPRNT
Get print
N/A
N/A
N/A
GL
Gate length
N/A
N/A
Yes
"GL (Gate Length)" on page 347
GP
Sets the polarity
(positive/negative) of the
gate trigger
N/A
N/A
Yes
"GP (Gate Polarity)" on page 348
GR
Plot GPIB input as Graphs
No
No
N/A
GRAT
Graticule on/off
Yes
Yes
Yes
HAVE
Checks for options
installed
N/A
N/A
N/A
HD
Holds data entry
Yes
Yes
Yes
HN
Harmonic number
N/A
N/A
N/A
HNLOCK
Harmonic lock
No
N/A
No
HNUNLK
Harmonic band unlock
No
N/A
No
I1
Sets the RF coupling to
AC
N/A
Yes
N/A
"I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC)" on
page 351
I2
Sets the RF coupling to
DC
N/A
Yes
N/A
"I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC)" on
page 353
IB
Input to trace B memory
No
No
N/A
ID
Instrument identification
Yes
Yes
Yes
IDCF
Identified signal to center
frequency
N/A
N/A
No
IDFREQ
Identified signal
frequency
N/A
N/A
No
IDSTAT
Signal identifier status
No
N/A
N/A
IF
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
No
IFTKNL
16 bit discrete fourier
transform
No
No
N/A
INT
Integer
No
No
No
232
More Information
"GRAT (Graticule)" on page 349
"HD (Hold Data Entry)" on page 350
"ID (Identify)" on page 355
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
INZ
Input impedance
N/A
N/A
N/A
IP
Instrument preset
Yes
Yes
Yes
KEYCLR
Clear user defined keys
N/A
N/A
No
KEYCMD
Define function & label of
softkey
N/A
N/A
N/A
KEYDEF
Assign function to soft
key
No
No
No
KEYENH
Key enhance
N/A
N/A
N/A
KEYEXC
Executes specified soft
key
No
No
N/A
KEYLBL
Relabels softkey without
changing its function
N/A
N/A
N/A
KS,
Mixer level
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KS, (Mixer Level)" on page 357
KS=
HP8566: Selects factory
preselector setting
HP8568: Marker counter
frequency resolution
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KS= (8566A/B: Automatic
Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B:
Marker Counter Resolution)" on page
358
KS(
Locks the save registers
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KS( (Lock Registers)" on page 359
KS)
Unlocks the save
registers
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KS) (Unlock Registers)" on page 360
KS>
Specifies preamp gain for
signal input 2
N/A
No
N/A
KS<
Specifies preamp gain for
signal input 1
N/A
No
N/A
KS|
Display memory address
write
No
No
N/A
KS#
Turns off YTX self-heating
correction
No
N/A
N/A
KS/
Allows preselector to be
peaked manually
No
N/A
N/A
KS39
Writes display memory
address in fast binary
No
No
N/A
KS43
Sets SRQ 102 when
frequency limit exceeded
No
No
N/A
KS91
Returns the amplitude
error
No
No
N/A
KS92
Specifies value DL, TH,
active mkr in display
units
No
No
N/A
KS94
Returns code for
No
No
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"IP (Instrument Preset)" on page 356
233
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
harmonic number in
binary
KS123
Returns up to 1001
words display memory
No
No
N/A
KS125
Writes up to 1001
display memory words
No
No
N/A
KS126
Returns every Nth value
of a trace
No
No
N/A
KS127
Sets analyzer to accept
binary display write
No
No
N/A
KSA
Sets amplitude units to
dBm
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSA (Amplitude in dBm)" on page
361
KSa
Selects normal detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSa (Normal Detection)" on page 362
KSB
Sets amplitude units to
dBmV
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)" on page
363
KSb
Selects positive peak
detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSb (Positive Peak Detection)" on
page 364
KSC
Sets amplitude units to
dBuV
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)" on page
365
KSc
Trace A + trace B ->
trace A
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSc (A Plus B to A)" on page 366
KSD
Sets amplitude units to V
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSD (Amplitude in Volts)" on page
367
KSd
Selects negative peak
detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSd (Negative Peak Detection)" on
page 368
KSE
Sets the analyzer title
mode
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSE (Title Mode)" on page 369
KSe
Selects sample detection
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSe (Sample Detection)" on page
370
KSF
HP8566: Shifts the YTO
HP8568: Measures the
Sweep Time
No
No
N/A
KSf
Recover last instrument
state at power on
No
No
N/A
KSG
Turns on video averaging
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSG (Video Averaging On)" on page
371
KSg
Turns off the display
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSg (Display Off)" on page 372
KSH
Turns off video averaging
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSH (Video Averaging Off)" on page
373
KSh
Turns on the display
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSh (Display On)" on page 374
234
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
KSI
Allows the reference level
to be extended
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSI (Extend Reference Level)" on page
375
KSi
Exchanges traces B & C
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)"
on page 376
KSJ
Manual control of DACs
No
No
N/A
KSj
Views trace C
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSj (View Trace C)" on page 377
KSK
HP8566: Active Mkr to
next highest peak
HP8568: Counts pilot IF
at marker
Yes
No
N/A
"KSK (Marker to Next Peak)" on page
378
KSk
Blanks trace C
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSk (Blank Trace C)" on page 379
KSL
Turns off marker noise
function
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSL (Marker Noise Off)" on page 380
KSl
Moves trace B into trace
C
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)" on
page 381
KSM
Turns on marker noise
function
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSM (Marker Noise On)" on page 382
KSm
Turns off the graticule
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSm (Graticule Off)" on page 383
KSN
Marker minimum value
detected
Yes
No
N/A
"KSN (Marker Minimum)" on page 384
KSn
Turns on the graticule
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSn (Graticule On)" on page 385
KSO
Marker span
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSO (Marker Span)" on page 386
KSo
Turns off the annotation
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSo (Annotation Off)" on page 387
KSP
GPIB address
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSP (GPIB Address)" on page 388
KSp
Turns on the annotation
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSp (Annotation On)" on page 389
KSQ
Unlocks frequency band
No
No
N/A
KSq
Decouples IF gain and
input attenuation
No
No
N/A
KSR
Turns on service
diagnostics
No
No
N/A
KSr
Sets service request 102
No
No
N/A
KSS
HP8566: Fast GPIB
operation
HP8568: Determine
second LO frequency
No
No
N/A
KST
HP8566: Fast preset
HP8568: Shifts second
LO down
Yes
No
N/A
KSt
HP8566: Locks
No
No
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"KST (Fast Preset)" on page 390
235
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
frequency band
HP8568: Continues
sweep from marker
KSU
HP8566: External mixer
preset
HP8568: Shift second LO
up
No
No
N/A
KSu
Stops the sweep at the
active marker
No
No
N/A
KSV
Frequency offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
KSv
HP8566: External mixer
frequency identifier
HP8568: Inhibits phase
lock
No
No
N/A
KSW
Amplitude error
correction routine
No
No
N/A
KSw
Displays amplitude error
correction routine
No
No
N/A
KSX
Amplitude correction
factors on
No
No
N/A
KSx
Sets trigger mode to
external
Yes
Yes
N/A
KSY
Amplitude correction
factors off
No
No
N/A
KSy
Sets trigger mode to
video
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSy (Video Trigger)" on page 393
KSZ
Reference level offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
"KSZ (Reference Level Offset)" on page
394
KSz
Sets the display storage
address
No
No
N/A
L0
Turns off the display line
Yes
Yes
Yes
LB
Writes text label
No
No
No
LCLVAR
Defines a local variable
for use
N/A
N/A
No
LF
Preset 0-2.5GHz
Yes
N/A
N/A
"LF (Low Frequency Preset)" on page
396
LG
Selects log scale
Yes
Yes
Yes
"LG (Logarithmic Scale)" on page 397
LIMD
Delta amplitude value for
limit line segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMF
Frequency value for limit-
N/A
N/A
Yes
236
"KSV (Frequency Offset)" on page 391
"KSx (External Trigger)" on page 392
"L0 [zero] (Display Line Off)" on page
395
"LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)" on
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
line segment
More Information
page 398
LIMIDEL
Erase contents of limit
line table
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIDISP
Controls when the limit
line(s) are displayed
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIFAIL
Limit line fail
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMIFT
Select frequency or time
limit line
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIHI
Upper limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMILINE
Limit line
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMILO
Lower limit
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIMIRROR
Mirror limit line
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIMODE
Limit line entry mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMIPURGE
Disposes of current limit
line, not limit line table
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit
Line)" on page 401
LIMIRCL
Load stored limit line into
limit line table
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)" on page
402
LIMIREL
Determine whether limit
line values
absolute/relative
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)" on
page 403
LIMISAV
Save contents of limit
line table for recall
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)" on page
404
LIMISEG
Define slope & offset of
limit line segments
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMISEGT
Enter limit line segment
for sweep time
N/A
N/A
N/A
LIMITST
Compare active trace
data to limit line
parameters
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test
Function)" on page 407
LIML
Amplitude value for limit
line segment in lower
limit line
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)" on
page 405
LIMM
Middle amplitude value
for limit-line segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
LIMTFL
Specifies a flat limit-line
segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line)" on page 406
LIMTSL
Specifies a sloped limitline segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)" on page
408
LIMU
Amplitude value for limit
line segment in upper
N/A
N/A
Yes
"LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)" on
page 409
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)" on page 399
237
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
limit line
LINFILL
Line fill
N/A
N/A
N/A
LL
Provides lower left
recorder output voltage
at rear
No
No
N/A
LN
Selects linear scale
Yes
Yes
Yes
LOAD
Load article/file into
internal memory
N/A
N/A
N/A
LOG
Log
No
No
No
LOLIMOFF
LO Limit Off
No
No
N/A
LSPAN
Last span
N/A
N/A
N/A
M1
Turns off all markers
Yes
Yes
N/A
"M1 [one] (Marker Off)" on page 411
M2
Marker Normal
Yes
Yes
N/A
"M2 [two] (Marker Normal)" on page
412
M3
Marker Delta
Yes
Yes
N/A
"M3 [three] (Delta Marker)" on page
414
M4
Marker zoom
Yes
Yes
N/A
"M4 [four] (Marker Zoom)" on page
416
MA
Returns the amplitude of
active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MA (Marker Amplitude Output)" on
page 417
MBIAS
Mixer bias
No
No
N/A
MBRD
Processor memory block
read
No
No
N/A
MBWR
Processor memory block
write
No
No
N/A
MC0
Turns off the marker
frequency counter
N/A
Yes
N/A
"MC0 [zero]
(Marker Frequency Counter Off)" on
page 418
MC1
Turns on the marker
frequency counter
N/A
Yes
N/A
"MC1 [one]
(Marker Frequency Counter On)" on
page 419
MDS
Measurement data size
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on
page 420
MDU
Measurement data units
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MDU (Measurement Data Units)" on
page 421
MEAN
Returns mean value of
trace in display units
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MEAN (Trace Mean)" on page 422
MEANPWR
Mean power
measurement
N/A
N/A
Yes
"MEANPWR (Mean Power
measurement)" on page 423
238
"LN (Linear Scale)" on page 410
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
MEANTH
Trace mean above
threshold
N/A
N/A
N/A
MEAS
Measurement status
Yes
Yes
Yes
MEASOFF
Measurement off
No
No
N/A
MEASURE
Measure mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
MEM
Returns amount of
memory available
No
No
No
MENU
Menu
N/A
N/A
No
MERGE
Merge two traces
No
No
N/A
MF
Returns frequency of the
active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
MIN
Minimum
No
No
No
MINH
Min Hold
N/A
N/A
Yes
"MINH (Minimum Hold)" on page 426
MINPOS
Returns the minimum
position in the trace
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MINPOS (Minimum X Position)" on
page 427
MIRROR
Mirror image of the trace
No
No
N/A
MKA
Amplitude of the active
marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on page
428
MKACT
Specifies the active
marker
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MKACT (Activate Marker)" on page
429
MKACTV
Marker as the active
function
N/A
N/A
N/A
MKBW
Marker bandwidth
N/A
N/A
Yes
"MKBW (Marker Bandwidth)" on page
430
MKCF
Moves the active marker
to center frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)"
on page 431
MKCHEDGE
Marker to channel edge
N/A
N/A
No
MKCONT
Continues sweeping from
the marker after stop
No
No
N/A
MKD
Delta marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
MKDELCHBW
Delta markers to channel
power bandwidth
N/A
N/A
No
MKDLMODE
Marker delta display line
mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
MKDR
Reciprocal of marker
delta
N/A
N/A
No
MKF
Specifies the frequency of
the active marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page
434
MKFC
Turns the marker
N/A
Yes
Yes
"MKFC (Marker Counter)" on page 435
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"MEAS (Meas)" on page 424
"MF (Marker Frequency Output)" on
page 425
"MKD (Marker Delta)" on page 432
239
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
frequency counter on or
off
MKFCR
Specifies the marker
frequency counter
resolution
N/A
Yes
Yes
MKMCF
Marker mean to center
frequency
N/A
N/A
No
MKMIN
Moves active marker to
minimum signal detected
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKMIN (Marker Minimum)" on page
438
MKN
Normal marker
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKN (Marker Normal)" on page 439
MKNOISE
Marker noise function
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKNOISE (Marker Noise)" on page
441
MKOFF
Turns all markers or the
active marker off
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKOFF (Marker Off)" on page 442
MKP
Specifies the horizontal
position of the marker
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MKP (Marker Position)" on page 443
MKPAUSE
Pauses the sweep at the
active marker
No
No
N/A
MKPK
Marker peak
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKPK (Marker Peak)" on page 444
MKPT
Marker peak threshold
N/A
N/A
Yes
"MKPT (Marker Threshold)" on page
445
MKPX
Marker peak excursion
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)" on
page 446
MKREAD
Specifies marker readout
mode
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MKREAD (Marker Readout)" on page
447
MKRL
Moves the active marker
to reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)"
on page 449
MKSP
Marker span
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKSP (Marker Span)" on page 450
MKSS
Marker step size
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKSS (Marker to Step Size)" on page
451
MKSTOP
Stops the sweep at the
active marker
No
No
N/A
MKT
Position marker in units
of time
N/A
N/A
Yes
MKTBL
Marker table
N/A
N/A
N/A
MKTRACE
Marker trace
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MKTRACE (Marker Trace)" on page
453
MKTRACK
Turns the marker signal
track on or off
Yes
Yes
Yes
"MKTRACK (Marker Track)" on page
454
MKTYPE
Specifies the type of
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MKTYPE (Marker Type)" on page 455
240
"MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)"
on page 436
"MKT (Marker Time)" on page 452
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
"ML (Mixer Level)" on page 456
active marker to be used
ML
Mixer Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
MOD
Modulo
No
No
No
MODRCLT
Recalls trace from
module memory
N/A
N/A
No
MODSAVT
Saves trace in module
memory
N/A
N/A
No
MOV
Move
No
No
No
MPY
Multiply
No
No
No
MRD
Memory Read
No
No
N/A
MRDB
Memory read byte
No
No
N/A
MSDEV
Specifies mass storage
device
N/A
N/A
No
MSI
Mass storage interface
N/A
N/A
N/A
MT0
Turns off marker signal
track
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off)" on
page 458
MT1
Turns on marker signal
track
Yes
Yes
N/A
"MT1 [one] (Marker Track On)" on
page 459
MWR
Memory Write
No
No
N/A
MWRB
Memory write byte
No
No
N/A
MXM
Maximum
No
No
No
MXMH
Max Hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
MXRMODE
Mixer mode
N/A
N/A
No
NDB
Number of dB
N/A
N/A
N/A
NDBPNT
Turns the N dB points
function on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
NDBPNTR
N dB points bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
NORMLIZE
Normalize trace data
N/A
N/A
Yes
"NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data)"
on page 461
NRL
Normalized reference
level
N/A
N/A
Yes
"NRL (Normalized Reference Level)" on
page 462
NRPOS
Normalized reference
position
N/A
N/A
Yes
"NRPOS (Normalized Reference
Position)" on page 463
NSTART
Start harmonic
No
N/A
N/A
NSTOP
Stop harmonic
No
N/A
N/A
O1
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"MXMH (Maximum Hold)" on page
460
"O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)" on
page 464
241
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
O2
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
"O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)"
on page 465
O3
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
"O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude
Units)" on page 466
O4
Output format
Yes
Yes
N/A
"O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)"
on page 467
OA
Returns the active
function value
Yes
Yes
N/A
"OA or ? (Query Active Function)" on
page 468
OBW
Occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWBW
Bandwidth measured by
occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWFERR
Occupied bandwidth
transmit frequency error
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWLOWER
Relative lower frequency
limit of occupied
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWPCT
Occupied bandwidth
percent
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWPWR
Total power in the
occupied bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OBWUPPER
Relative upper frequency
limit of occupied
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
N/A
OCCUP
Percent occupied power
bandwidth
N/A
N/A
Yes
"OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power
Bandwidth)" on page 469
OL
Output learn string
Yes
Yes
N/A
"OL (Output Learn String)" on page
470
ONCYCLE
On cycle
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONDELAY
On delay
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONEOS
On end of sweep
No
No
No
ONMKR
On marker pause
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONMKRU
On marker update
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONPWRUP
On power up
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONSRQ
On service request
N/A
N/A
N/A
ONSWP
On sweep
No
No
N/A
ONTIME
On time
N/A
N/A
N/A
OP
Output parameters
No
No
No
OR
Set position of origin
N/A
N/A
No
OT
Output trace annotations
Yes
Yes
N/A
242
More Information
"OT (Output Trace Annotations)" on
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
page 472
OUTPUT
Output - sending data to
the GPIB from function
No
No
No
PA
Plot absolute
No
No
No
PARSTAT
Parallel status
N/A
N/A
N/A
PCTAM
Turns the percent AM
measurement on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
PCTAMR
Percent AM response
N/A
N/A
N/A
PD
Pen down
No
No
No
PDA
Probability distribution
amplitude
No
No
No
PDF
Probability distribution
frequency
No
No
No
PEAKS
Sorts the signal peaks by
amplitude/frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
PKDLMODE
Peak table delta display
line mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKPOS
Peak position
N/A
Yes
N/A
PKRES
Peak result
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKSORT
Selects how to sort signal
peaks listed in peak table
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKTBL
Turns the peak table on
or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKZMOK
Peak zoom okay
N/A
N/A
N/A
PKZOOM
Peak zoom
N/A
N/A
N/A
PLOT
Prints the screen
Yes
Yes
Yes
PLOTORG
Display origins
N/A
N/A
No
PLOTSRC
Plot source
N/A
N/A
No
PLTPRT
Plot port
N/A
N/A
N/A
POWERON
Power on state
N/A
N/A
N/A
PP
Peaks the preselector
Yes
N/A
Yes
PR
Plot relative
No
No
No
PREAMPG
External preamplifier gain
N/A
N/A
N/A
PREFX
Change user memory
entries file prefix
N/A
N/A
N/A
PRINT
Print
N/A
N/A
Yes
PRNPRT
Print port
N/A
N/A
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
"PEAKS (Peaks)" on page 474
"PKPOS (Peak Position)" on page 475
"PLOT (Plot)" on page 476
"PP (Preselector Peak)" on page 477
"PRINT (Print)" on page 478
243
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
PRNTADRS
Print address
N/A
N/A
N/A
PS
Skip page
No
No
N/A
PSDAC
Preselector DAC number
N/A
N/A
No
PSTATE
Protect state
N/A
N/A
No
PU
Pen up
No
No
No
PURGE
Purge file
N/A
N/A
N/A
PWRBW
Power bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
PWRUPTIME
Power up time
N/A
N/A
N/A
Q0
Sets detector to EMI
Peak detection
N/A
Yes
N/A
"Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak
Detection)" on page 480
Q1
Sets detector to Quasi
Peak detection
N/A
Yes
N/A
"Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak
Detection)" on page 481
R1
Resets service request
140
Yes
Yes
N/A
"R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ)" on
page 482
R2
Allows service request
140 & 104
Yes
Yes
N/A
"R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ)" on
page 483
R3
Allows service request
140 & 110
Yes
Yes
N/A
"R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ)"
on page 484
R4
Allows service request
140 & 102
Yes
Yes
N/A
"R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ)" on
page 485
RB
Resolution bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
"RB (Resolution Bandwidth)" on page
486
RBR
Resolution
bandwidth/Span ratio
N/A
N/A
Yes
"RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span
Ratio)" on page 488
RC
Recalls state register
Yes
Yes
Yes
"RC (Recall State)" on page 489
RCLOSCAL
Recall open/short
average
N/A
N/A
No
RCLS
Recall state
Yes
Yes
Yes
RCLT
Recall trace
N/A
N/A
No
RCLTHRU
Recall internal thrureference trace into trace
B
N/A
N/A
No
RELHPIB
Release control of GPIB
N/A
N/A
No
REPEAT
Conditional Programming
(Repeat ... Until …)
No
No
No
RESETRL
Reset reference level
N/A
N/A
N/A
RETURN
Return to user defined
function origination point
N/A
N/A
No
244
More Information
"PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)" on page
479
"RCLS (Recall State)" on page 490
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
REV
Returns the revision
string to the controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
"REV (Revision)" on page 491
RL
Reference level
Yes
Yes
Yes
"RL (Reference Level)" on page 492
RLCAL
Reference level
calibration
N/A
N/A
No
RLPOS
Reference level position
N/A
N/A
N/A
RMS
Root mean square
Yes
Yes
N/A
"RMS (Root Mean Square Value)" on
page 494
ROFFSET
Reference level offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
"ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)" on
page 495
RQS
SRQ mask
Yes
Yes
Yes
"RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on
page 497
S1
Continuous sweep mode
Yes
Yes
N/A
"S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)" on page
499
S2
Single sweep mode
Yes
Yes
N/A
"S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on page
500
SADD
Adds a limit line segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SADD (Add Limit Line Segment)" on
page 501
SAVEMENU
Save menu
N/A
N/A
N/A
SAVES
Saves analyzer state to
specified register
Yes
Yes
Yes
SAVET
Save trace
N/A
N/A
No
SAVRCLF
Save or recall flag
N/A
N/A
N/A
SAVRCLN
Save or recall number
N/A
N/A
N/A
SAVRCLW
Save or recall data
N/A
N/A
N/A
SDEL
Deletes a limit line
segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment)"
on page 503
SDON
Indicates limit line
segment is done
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SDON (Terminate SEDI Command)"
on page 504
SEDI
Edits limit line segment
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)" on
page 505
SEGDEL
Delete specified segment
from limit line tables
N/A
N/A
N/A
SENTER
Segment entry for
frequency limit lines
N/A
N/A
No
SENTERT
Segment entry for sweep
time limit lines
N/A
N/A
N/A
SER
Serial number
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SER (Serial Number)" on page 506
SETDATE
Set the date of spectrum
N/A
N/A
Yes
"SETDATE (Set Date)" on page 507
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"SAVES (Save State)" on page 502
245
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
"SETTIME (Set Time)" on page 508
analyzer
SETTIME
Set the time of spectrum
analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
SHOWMENU
Shows menu
N/A
N/A
No
SIGDEL
Signal amplitude delta
No
N/A
N/A
SIGID
External mixing frequency
bands signal identifier
No
N/A
No
SKYCLR
Clears user softkey
N/A
N/A
No
SKYDEF
Defines user softkey
N/A
N/A
No
SMOOTH
Smooths given trace over
specified number points
Yes
Yes
N/A
"SMOOTH (Smooth Trace)" on page
509
SNGLS
Single sweep mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
"SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on page 510
SP
Frequency Span
Yes
Yes
Yes
"SP (Frequency Span)" on page 511
SPEAKER
Turns the internal
speaker on or off
N/A
N/A
N/A
SPZOOM
Span Zoom
N/A
N/A
N/A
SQLCH
Sets the squelch
threshold
N/A
N/A
N/A
SQR
Square root
No
No
No
SQUELCH
Adjusts squelch level
N/A
N/A
No
SRCALC
Selects internal or
external level control
N/A
N/A
No
SRCAT
Attenuate source output
level
N/A
N/A
N/A
SRCCRSTK
Coarse tracking adjust
N/A
N/A
No
SRCFINTK
Fine tracking adjust
N/A
N/A
No
SRCNORM
Source normalization
N/A
N/A
N/A
SRCPOFS
Offset source power level
N/A
N/A
No
SRCPSTP
Select source power step
size
N/A
N/A
No
SRCPSWP
Select sweep range of
source output
N/A
N/A
No
SRCPWR
Select source power level
N/A
N/A
No
SRCTK
Adjust tracking of source
output with SA sweep
N/A
N/A
N/A
SRCTKPK
Auto adjust tracking of
source output with SA
sweep
N/A
N/A
No
246
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
SRQ
Service request
Yes
Yes
Yes
"SRQ (Service Request)" on page 513
SS
Frequency Step Size
Yes
Yes
Yes
"SS (Center Frequency Step Size)" on
page 514
ST
Sweep Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
"ST (Sweep Time)" on page 516
STB
Status byte query
N/A
N/A
Yes
"STB (Status Byte Query)" on page 518
STDEV
Standard deviation of
trace amplitude
Yes
Yes
N/A
"STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace
Amplitudes)" on page 519
STOR
Store file
N/A
N/A
N/A
STOREOPEN
Save current instrument
state
N/A
N/A
No
STORESHORT
Store short
N/A
N/A
No
STORETHRU
Store thru-calibration
trace in trace B
N/A
N/A
No
SUB
Subtract
No
No
No
SUM
Sum of trace element
amplitudes in display
units
No
No
Yes
SUMSQR
Squares trace element
amplitudes & returns sum
No
No
No
SV
Saves state
Yes
Yes
N/A
SW
Skip to next control
instruction
No
No
N/A
SWPCPL
Sweep couple
N/A
N/A
Yes
SWPOUT
Sweep output
N/A
N/A
No
SYNCMODE
Synchronize mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
T0
Turns the threshold level
off
Yes
Yes
N/A
"T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level)"
on page 523
T1
Sets the trigger mode to
free run
Yes
Yes
N/A
"T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)" on page
524
T2
Sets the trigger mode to
line
Yes
Yes
N/A
"T2 [two] (Line Trigger)" on page 525
T3
Sets the trigger mode to
external
Yes
Yes
N/A
"T3 [three] (External Trigger)" on page
526
T4
Sets the trigger mode to
video
Yes
Yes
N/A
"T4 [four] (Video Trigger)" on page 527
T7
Sets the trigger mode to
level
N/A
N/A
N/A
T8
Sets the trigger mode to
N/A
N/A
N/A
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"SUM (Sum)" on page 520
"SV (Save State)" on page 521
"SWPCPL (Sweep Couple)" on page
522
247
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
More Information
edge
TA
Returns trace A
amplitude values to
controller
Yes
Yes
N/A
"TA (Trace A)" on page 528
TB
Returns trace B
amplitude values to
controller
Yes
Yes
N/A
"TB (Trace B)" on page 529
TDF
Trace data format
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page
530
TEXT
Writes text on the
analyzer screen
No
No
No
TH
Threshold
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TH (Threshold)" on page 531
THE
Turns the threshold on or
off
Yes
Yes
N/A
"THE (Threshold Enable)" on page 533
THEN
Conditional Programming
(If…then…else…endif)
No
No
No
TIMEDATE
Allows setting of time &
date for analyzer
N/A
N/A
Yes
TIMEDSP
Enables display of time &
data on analyzer display
N/A
N/A
N/A
TITLE
Title entry
N/A
N/A
Yes
"TITLE (Title)" on page 535
TM
Trigger Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536
TOI
Third order
intermodulation
measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
TOIR
Third order
intermodulation response
N/A
N/A
N/A
TRA
Returns trace A
amplitude values to
controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TRA (Trace Data Input and Output)"
on page 537
TRB
Returns trace B
amplitude values to
controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TRB (Trace Data Input and Output)"
on page 538
TRC
Returns trace C
amplitude values to
controller
Yes
Yes
N/A
"TRC (Trace Data Input and Output)"
on page 539
TRCMEM
Trace C memory
N/A
N/A
N/A
TRDEF
Trace define
No
No
No
TRDSP
Trace display
Yes
Yes
N/A
TRGRPH
Trace graph display
No
No
N/A
248
"TIMEDATE (Time Date)" on page 534
"TRDSP (Trace Display)" on page 540
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
TRIGPOL
Trigger polarity
N/A
N/A
Yes
TRMATH
Executes specified trace
math at end of sweep
No
No
N/A
TRPRST
Sets trace operations to
their preset values
No
No
N/A
TRSTAT
Returns current trace
states to controller
Yes
Yes
N/A
"TRSTAT (Trace State)" on page 542
TS
Takes a sweep
Yes
Yes
Yes
"TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543
TVLINE
Selects which horizontal
line of video to trigger on
N/A
N/A
N/A
TVLSFRM
Selects the type of video
frame to trigger on
N/A
N/A
N/A
TVSTND
TV standard
N/A
N/A
N/A
TVSYNC
Selects polarity of video
modulation to trigger on
N/A
N/A
N/A
TWNDOW
Formats trace
information for FFT.
N/A
N/A
No
UNTIL
Conditional Programming
(Repeat…Until…)
No
No
No
UP
Increases active function
value by applicable step
N/A
N/A
N/A
UR
Upper right x-y recorder
output voltage at rear
No
No
N/A
USERREV
Modifies response to
query "REV (Revision)" on
page 491
Ext
Ext
Ext
USTATE
Configures user defined
states
No
No
N/A
VARDEF
Variable definition
No
No
No
VARIANCE
Returns the amplitude
variance of specified
trace
No
No
No
VAVG
Turns video averaging on
or off
Yes
Yes
Yes
"VAVG (Video Average)" on page 545
VB
Video Bandwidth
Yes
Yes
Yes
"VB (Video Bandwidth)" on page 547
VBO
Video Bandwidth
Coupling Offset
Yes
Yes
N/A
"VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling
Offset)" on page 549
VBR
Video Bandwidth Ratio
N/A
N/A
Yes
"VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution
Bandwidth Ratio)" on page 550
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
More Information
"TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity)" on page
541
"USERREV" on page 544
249
5 List of Legacy Analyzer Commands
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands with N9061A Support
Command
Description
8566
8568
8560
Series
VIEW
Stores and views the
specified trace
Yes
Yes
Yes
"VIEW (View Trace)" on page 551
VTL
Video trigger level
N/A
N/A
Yes
"VTL (Video Trigger Level)" on page
552
WAIT
Suspend program
operation for specified
time
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINNEXT
Next window
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINOFF
Turns off the window
display mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINON
Turns on the window
display mode
N/A
N/A
N/A
WINZOOM
Window zoom
N/A
N/A
N/A
XCH
Exchanges the two
specified traces.
Yes
Yes
N/A
ZMKCNTR
Zone marker at center
frequency
N/A
N/A
N/A
ZMKPKNL
Zone marker for next
peak left
N/A
N/A
N/A
ZMKPKNR
Zone marker for next
peak right
N/A
N/A
N/A
ZMKSPAN
Zone marker span
N/A
N/A
N/A
250
More Information
"XCH (Exchange)" on page 553
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
This chapter describes all the supported 8560 Series, 8566A/B and
8568A/B commands, and gives brief details of their syntax and
operation. The commands are sorted alphabetically. For more
detailed information about these commands, see the User’s Guides
for the 8566A/B, 8568A/B, and 8560 Series.
For a summary of all commands, see "List of Legacy Analyzer
Commands" on page 221.
For explanations of the entries in this chapter, see:
l
"Command Syntax" on page 252
l
"Command Description Notes" on page 254
251
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
Command Syntax
Command Syntax
Command syntax is represented pictorially.
l
l
l
Ovals enclose command mnemonics. The command mnemonic must be entered as shown, with the
exception that the case can be upper or lower.
Uppercase is recommended for entering all commands unless otherwise noted.
Circles and ovals surround secondary keywords or special numbers and characters. The characters in
circles and ovals are considered reserved words and must be entered as shown with the exception that
the case can be upper or lower.
l
Rectangles contain the description of a syntax element defined in the table below.
l
A loop above a syntax element indicates that the syntax element can be repeated.
l
Solid lines represent the recommended path.
l
Dotted lines indicate an optional path for bypassing secondary keywords or using alternate units.
l
Arrows and curved intersections indicate command path direction.
l
l
Semicolons are the recommended command terminators. Using semicolons makes programs easier to
read, prevents command misinterpretation, and is recommended by IEEE-728-1982 (Recommended
Practice for code and Format Conventions for IEEE Standard 488).
Syntax Elements are shown in the syntax diagrams as elements within rectangles. In the syntax
diagrams, characters and secondary keywords are shown within circles or ovals.
Syntax Elements
Syntax
Component
Definition/Range
Analyzer
command
Any command in this chapter, with required parameters and terminators.
Character
SP a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z databyte.
Character
8-bit byte containing only character data and followed by end-or-identify (EOI) condition, where the EOI control line
252
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
Command Syntax
Syntax
Component
Definition/Range
& EOI
on GPIB is asserted to indicate the end of the transmission. END signifies the EOI condition.
Character
string
A list of characters.
Data byte
8-bit byte containing numeric or character data.
Data byte &
EOI
8-bit byte containing numeric or character data followed by end-or-identify (EOI) condition, where the EOI control
line on GPIB is asserted to indicate the end of the transmission. END signifies the EOI condition.
Delimiter
| \ @ ˆ $ % ; ! Matching characters that mark the beginning and end of a character string, or a list of commands.
Choose delimiting characters that are not used within the string they delimit.
Digit
0123456789
lsb length
Represents the least significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the number of bytes returned or
transmitted. See msb length.
msb length
Represents the most significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the number of bytes returned or
transmitted. See lsb length.
Number
Expressed as integer, decimal, or in exponential (E) form.
Integer Number Range: –32,768 through +32,767
General formatting restrictions:
Real Number Range: ± 1.797693134862315 x 10 308, including 0.
Up to 15 significant figures allowed.
Numbers may be as small as ± 2.225073858507202 x 10 –308
Output
termination
Line feed (LF) and end-or-identify (EOI) condition. ASCII code 10 (line feed) is sent via GPIB and the end-or-identify
control line on GPIB sets to indicate the end of the transmission.
Units
Represent standard scientific units:
Frequency Units: GZ, GHZ, MZ, MHZ, KZ, KHZ, HZ
Amplitude Units: DB, DBMV, DM, DBM, DBUV, V, MV, UV, W, MW, UW
Time Units: SC, S, MS, US
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
253
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
Command Description Notes
Command Description Notes
All supported commands are listed here, with descriptions and cross-references to similar commands.
The information here does not provide a comprehensive guide to all 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series
commands. It gives brief descriptions of the supported commands, and highlights important functional or
behavioral differences that you should be aware of when transferring existing 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560
Series code to your X-Series instrument. For a complete description of the commands, refer to the
8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series Operating and Programming Manual.
To avoid confusion between numbers and letters, all commands that incorporate numbers have the
number spelled out and placed in square brackets after the command. For example, the command I1 is
shown as ‘I1 [one]’ - that is, the capital letter ‘I’ followed by the number ‘1’, and then the word ‘one’ in
square brackets. The word in brackets does not form part of the command.
254
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A)
A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets Trace A to clear write, which means that it continuously displays any signal present at the instrument
input. This command initially clears Trace A, setting all elements to zero.
Format
A1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of command A1 are identical to the command "CLRW (Clear Write)" on page
307.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
255
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A)
A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected during the period that the trace has been
active.
Format
A2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of the command A2 are identical to the MXMH TRA command. See
"MXMH (Maximum Hold)" on page 460.
256
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A)
A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays Trace A and then stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace A does not get updated with
new data.
Format
A3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of the command A3 are identical to the VIEW TRA command. See "VIEW (View
Trace)" on page 551.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
257
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)
A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks Trace A and stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace A is not updated.
Format
A4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The functions of the command A4 are identical to the BLANK TRA command. See "BLANK
(Blank Trace)" on page 292.
258
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting)
ACPALPHA (Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the alpha weighting for ACP measurements.
Format
ACPALPHA <real> (Valid Range from 0 to 1)
ACPALPHA?
Query Data Type
<real> (Valid Range from 0 to 1)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default – 0.35
Not affected by preset or Power Cycle
Couplings
Errors
Notes
The functions of the command A2 are identical to the MXMH TRA command. See "MXMH
(Maximum Hold)" on page 460.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
259
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels)
ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the number of alternate channels to be measured by an adjacent channel power measurement to
either 0, 1, or 2. The number of alternate channels is used with the command "ACPRSLTS (Adjacent
Channel Power Measurement Results)" on page 272.
Specifying parameter value 0 makes the measurement with the adjacent channel pair, but no alternate
channels. Specifying 1 selects the first alternate channel pair, which is centered at ±2 times the channel
spacing away from the center frequency of the main channel. Specifying 2 selects the second alternate
pair, which is at ±3 times the channel spacing.
Format
ACPALTCH <integer> (Valid Range: 0, 1, 2)
ACPALTCH?
Query Data Type
<integer> (Valid Range: 0, 1, 2)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 0. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
260
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period)
ACPBRPER (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the cycle time (period) of the burst RF signal. The cycle time is needed to set the sweep times when
using the peak, two bandwidth, burst power, and gated methods for adjacent channel power
measurements.
Format
ACPBRPER <real> (in time unit)
ACPBRPER?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 0. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Notes
N9061A supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only and therefore,
although you can set ACPBRPER, it has no effect.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
261
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width)
ACPBRWID (Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the on-time (pulse width) of the burst RF signal. The pulse width is needed to set the gating times
when using the gated method for adjacent channel power measurements.
Format
Range: 5 μs to 9.5 seconds.
Query Data Type
<real> (in time units)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 0. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Notes
N9061A supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only and therefore,
although you can set ACPBRWID, it has no effect.
262
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth)
ACPBW (Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the bandwidth of the channels as an active function for the commands "ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent
Channel Power)" on page 268 and "ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)" on page 264.
Format
ACPBW <frequency> with frequency unit
ACPBW?
Range:
<frequency>: 200 Hz to the double of max frequency range.
UP: original value x 1.1.
DN: original value x 0.9.
Query Data Type
Frequency in Hz
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 8.5 kHz. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Couplings
Channel spacing does not couple with channel bandwidth.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
263
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)
ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Calculates the ACP of a transmitter based on data on the display. This function does not make a new
measurement before computing. The measurement must have been made with ANALOG or PEAK method
selected so the appropriate data is available for the calculation.
This function is useful for recalculating ACP results on the same trace with different parameter settings.
Format
ACPCOMPUTE
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
264
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting)
ACPFRQWT (Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used to control the frequency weighting when making an Adjacent Channel Power
measurement. Weighting is not used in the measurement if OFF has been selected. Root-raised-cosine
weighting is selected with the RRCOS parameter.
Format
ACPFRQWT RRCOS|OFF
ACPFRQWT?
Query Data Type
RRCOS|OFF
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: OFF.
Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
265
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel Power)
ACPLOWER (Lower Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the power ratio result of the Adjacent Channel Power measurement for the lower frequency
channel.
Format
ACPLOWER?
Query Data Type
The power ratio result in dB.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
266
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent Channel Power)
ACPMAX (Maximum Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Description
Returns the maximum adjacent channel power of the adjacent channel power measurement.
Format
ACPMAX?
Query Data Type
The maximum adjacent channel power in dB.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
267
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)
ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Makes a measurement and calculates the adjacent channel power (ACP) of a transmitter. The
measurement determines the leakage power that is in the channels adjacent to the carrier. The result is
the ratio of the leakage power in the channel adjacent to the total power transmitted by the transmitter.
Format
ACPMEAS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
268
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State)
ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the parameters of the measurement state to either the default state (determined by the setup) or the
current state. The state parameters that could change between the default state and a current state
include:
l
Resolution bandwidth
l
Video bandwidth
l
Span
l
Sweep time
l
Detector mode
l
Gating parameters
l
Trigger parameters
l
Video averaging
Format
ACPMSTATE CURR|DFLT
ACPMSTATE?
Query Data Type
CURR|DFLT
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: DFLT.
Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
269
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPMSTATE (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State)
Couplings
Notes
270
Changes the following parameters:
l
Resolution bandwidth
l
Video bandwidth
l
Span
l
Sweep time
l
Detector mode
l
Gating parameters
l
Trigger parameters
l
Video averaging
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted)
ACPPWRTX (Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the result of the total power transmitted calculation of the adjacent channel power measurement.
Format
ACPPWRTX?
Query Data Type
A variable that contains the total transmit band carrier power.
Unit is determined by command "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)" on page 283.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The measurement must be made with the analog or burst power method selected, but the
N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
271
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results)
ACPRSLTS (Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns an array of power data resulting from an ACP measurement of an RF signal. The number of
alternate channel pairs selected by the command "ACPALTCH (Adjacent Channel Power Alternate
Channels)" on page 260 determines the size of the array.
Format
ACPRSLTS?
Query Data Type
(Analog Method) Number of Results per Set: 2. See "Query Data Type Details" on page 273
below.
Results (in order of output):
l
ACP ratio (lower channel)
l
ACP ratio (upper channel)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
272
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
Query Data Type Details
Query Data Type Details
Alternate
Channels
0
1
2
Channels used for Calculation
l
Main channel
l
Lower adjacent channel
l
Upper adjacent channel
Above channels plus:
l
First alternate lower channel
l
First alternate upper channel
Above channels plus:
l
Second alternate lower channel
l
Second alternate upper channel
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Number of Values Returned
1 set
2 sets
3 sets
273
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing)
ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the channel spacing for the commands "ACPMEAS (Measure Adjacent Channel Power)" on page 268
and "ACPCOMPUTE (Adjacent Channel Power Compute)" on page 264.
Format
ACP <real> with frequency units
ACP?
Range:
<real>: Minimum: 100 Hz. Maximum: 25 GHz.
UP: original value x 1.1.
DN: original value x 0.9.
Query Data Type
<real> in Hz
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 12.5 kHz. Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Couplings
Channel spacing does not couple with channel bandwidth.
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
274
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting)
ACPT (Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used to set the T used in weighting for an adjacent channel power measurement.
Format
ACPT <real> in time units
ACPT?
Range: 1 μs to 1 s.
Query Data Type
Real number in sec.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Default: 341 μs.
Not affected by preset or Power Cycle.
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
275
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel Power)
ACPUPPER (Upper Adjacent Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the power ratio result of the adjacent channel power measurement for the upper frequency
channel.
Format
ACPUPPER?
Query Data Type
The power ratio result in dB.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG method only.
276
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments)
ADJALL (LO and IF Adjustments)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates the RF local oscillator (LO) and intermediate frequency (IF) alignment routines. These are the
same routines that occur when the instrument is switched on. They are also the same routines that are
performed when you press System, Alignments, Align Now, All.
Commands following ADJALL are not executed until after the instrument has finished the alignment
routines.
Format
ADJALL;
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALibration[:ALL] (see "All" on page 1219)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
277
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMB (A minus B into A)
AMB (A minus B into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Subtracts the points in Trace B from the corresponding points in Trace A, and sends the results to Trace A.
Thus, AMB can restore the original trace after an "APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)" on page 281 or a "KSc (A
Plus B to A)" on page 366 command has been executed.
The query AMB? returns different responses depending on the language being used. The 8560 Series
languages return either a 1 or a 0 to indicate the On or Off status.The 8566, 8568 Series languages all
return either ON or OFF.
Format
AMB 0|1|OFF|ON
AMB?
Query Data Type
1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state respectively.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
OFF
Couplings
Sets Trace B to View mode and turns "AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A)" on page
279 (Normalize) OFF. All trace math is mutually exclusive, so turning one on turns the other off
and vice versa. Similarly, when AMB is on and you change Trace B to Clearwrite or Maxhold, it
turns AMB off.
Notes
The functions of the command AMB are identical to the command "C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)
" on page 297.
278
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A)
AMBPL (A minus B plus Display Line into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Does a point-by-point subtraction of Trace B from Trace A, and then adds the display line point values to
the difference. The results are sent to Trace A.
The query command AMBPL? returns different responses depending on the language being used.
Format
AMBPL (0|1|OFF|ON)
AMBPL?
Query Data Type
8560: 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state respectively.
8566A/B, 8568A/B: ON or OFF.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
OFF
Couplings
AMBPL sets Trace B to View mode and turns AMB (Normalize) OFF. All trace math is mutually
exclusive, so turning one on turns the other off and vice versa. Similarly, when AMBPL is on and
you change Trace B to Clearwrite or Maxhold, it turns AMBPL off.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
279
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ANNOT (Annotation)
ANNOT (Annotation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns on or off all annotation on the instrument display. Softkey labels are not affected by this command
and remain displayed.
Format
ANNOT (O|1|ON|OFF)
Query Data Type
1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state respectively.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
DISPlay:ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
DISPlay::ANNotation:SCReen[:STATe]?
(See "Screen" on page 1373)
Preset
ON
Couplings
Following FDSP, ANNOT does nothing until instrument preset.
Notes
The functions of ANNOT are identical to the commands "KSo (Annotation Off)" on page 387
and "KSp (Annotation On)" on page 389.
The two alternative commands, KSo and KSp, are only valid when the remote language is
either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.
280
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)
APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Does a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace B, and sends the results to Trace A. Thus, APB can
restore the original trace after an "AMB (A minus B into A)" on page 278 or a "C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)" on
page 297 command has been executed.
Format
APB
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of APB are identical to the command "KSc (A Plus B to A)" on page 366.
The alternative command, KSc, is only valid when the remote language is either HP8566A,
HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
281
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
AT (Input Attenuation)
AT (Input Attenuation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the RF input attenuation.
Although the attenuation level in the X-series instruments can be specified using absolute values, you can
never set attenuation below 10 dB using the DN parameter. This is a safety feature to prevent inadvertent
setting of attenuation to a level that could damage the instrument.
Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the instrument.
Format
AT <number> DB
<number>: any real number or integer. If the value you enter is not a valid value for the
instrument you are using, it switches automatically to the closest valid setting.
Default unit: dB.
Range: 0 to 70 dB specified absolutely, and 10 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps. (If 8564E/EC or
8565E/EC is selected, the range is limited to 0 to 60 dB.)
AT OA|DN|UP|AUTO|MAN
(AUTO|MAN available for 8560 Series only)
AT?
(Step Increment: 10 dB)
Query Data Type
<real> in dB.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSE]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement] 10dB (on mode entry or preset: see "
(Mech) Atten Step" on page 569)
[:SENSE]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO (OFF|ON|0|1) (see "(Mech) Atten " on page 562)
Preset
10 dB
Notes
In PXA/MXA, the auto attenuation range is 6-70 dB. In EXA, it is 6-60 dB.
You cannot step down below 10 dB. To set levels below 10 dB, you must specify the
attenuation absolutely. For example, to set attenuation to 0 dB, you must use the
command AT 0DB.
282
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)
AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)
Syntax
8560 series
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the amplitude readout units for the reference level, the marker, and the display line.
If your selected remote language is any of the 8560 Series analyzers, and if the AUNITS setting is AUTO,
then a change from log scale (LG) to linear scale (LN) automatically changes the AUNITS setting. For all
other settings, no change to AUNITS occurs, even when the scale is changed.
Format
AUNITS AUTO|MAN|DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W|DM
AUNITS?
Query Data Type
DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
283
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:UNIT:POWer (DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W)
:UNIT:POWer?
(See "Y Axis Unit" on page 573)
Preset
DBM
Notes
The functions of AUNITS are identical to the commands "KSA (Amplitude in dBm)" on page
361, "KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)" on page 363, "KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)" on page 365, and
"KSD (Amplitude in Volts)" on page 367.
The four alternative commands, KSA, KSB, KSC, and KSD are only valid when the remote
language is HP8566A/B or HP8568A/B.
284
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled)
AUTOCPL (Auto Coupled)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets video bandwidth, resolution bandwidth, input attenuation, sweep time and center frequency step-size
to coupled mode.
Format
AUTOCPL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:COUPle ALL (See "Auto Couple" on page 586)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
285
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point.
Format
AXB
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of the command AXB are identical to the command "EX (Exchange Trace A and
Trace B)" on page 333 and to the XCH TRA,TRB form of the command "XCH (Exchange)" on
page 553.
286
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B)
B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets Trace B to clear write. That is, it continuously displays any signal present at the instrument input. The
B1 command initially clears Trace B, setting all elements to zero. The sweep trigger then signals the start
of the sweep, and Trace B is continually updated as the sweep progresses. Subsequent sweeps send new
amplitude information to the display addresses.
Format
B1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of B1 are identical to the CLRW TRB form of the command "CLRW (Clear Write)"
on page 307.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
287
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B)
B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected while the trace is active.
Format
B2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The functions of B2 are identical to the MXMH TRB form of the command "MXMH (Maximum
Hold)" on page 460.
288
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)
B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays Trace B and then stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace B does not get updated.
Format
B3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The functions of B3 are identical to the VIEW TRB form of the command "VIEW (View Trace)"
on page 551.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
289
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)
B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks Trace B and stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace B is not updated.
Format
B4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of B4 are identical to the BLANK TRB form of the command "BLANK (Blank
Trace)" on page 292.
290
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B)
BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Subtracts the display line from Trace B and sends the results to Trace B.
The command BL is calculated differently depending on the language being used; for the 8560 Series the
calculation is performed in units of dBm.
8560 Series
The calculation is performed in units of dBm.
8566A/B
The calculation is performed in display units.
8568A/B
Format
BL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of BL are identical to the command "BML (Trace B Minus Display Line)" on page
293.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
291
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
BLANK (Blank Trace)
BLANK (Blank Trace)
Syntax
8560 Series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks Trace 1 or trace 2 and stops taking new data into the specified trace. TRA corresponds to Trace 1,
TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and so on.
Format
8566A/B, 8568A/B: BLANK TRA|TRB|TRC
8560 Series: BLANK TRA|TRB
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6]:UPDate[:STATe] OFF
TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6]:DISPlay[:STATe] OFF
(See "View/Blank " on page 1284)
Preset
TRB, TRC Blank.
Notes
The functions of BLANK are identical to the commands "A4 [four] (Blank Trace A)" on page
258, "B4 [four] (Blank Trace B)" on page 290, KSJ, and "KSk (Blank Trace C)" on page 379.
292
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
BML (Trace B Minus Display Line)
BML (Trace B Minus Display Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Subtracts the display line from trace B (point by point), and sends the difference to trace B. Trace B
corresponds to Trace 2.
The command BML is calculated differently depending on the language being used:
l
For the 8560 Series the calculation uses units of dBm.
l
For the 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the calculation uses display units.
Format
BML
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of BML are identical to the command "BL (Trace B minus Display Line to Trace
B)" on page 291.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
293
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transfers Trace B data to Trace C
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be updated as the
instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the instrument are reflected in the data
transferred from Trace B to Trace C, you must follow the four step process below.
1. Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command)
2. Select the desired instrument settings
3. Take one complete sweep
4. Transfer the data
Format
BTC
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe:COPY TRACE2, TRACE3 (see "Copy/Exchange" on page 1312)
Notes
The functions of BTC are identical to the command "KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)" on page
381.
294
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data.
Trace C must not be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be updated as the
instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the instrument are reflected in the data
exchanged between Trace B and Trace C, you must follow the four step process below.
1. Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command)
2. Select the desired instrument settings
3. Take one complete sweep
4. Exchange the data
Format
BXC
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
TRACe3:TYPe?
TRACe3:UPDate?
TRACe3:DISPlay?
TRACe2:TYPe?
TRACe2:UPDate?
TRACe2:DISPlay?
TRACe:EXCHange TRACE2, TRACE3
(See "View/Blank " on page 1284, etc.)
Couplings
Trace Update is set to Off and Trace Display is set to On.
Notes
The functions of BXC are identical to the command "KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)" on
page 376 and to the XCH TRB,TRC form of the command "XCH (Exchange)" on page 553.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
295
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off)
C1 [one] (Set A Minus B Mode Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the A Minus B mode off. That is, it switches off the functionality that was switched on by the
command "C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)" on page 297 or by the AMB ON form of the command "AMB (A minus
B into A)" on page 278.
Format
C1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MATH TRACE4, OFF (see "Math" on page 1299)
Notes
The functions of C1 are identical to the AMB OFF form of the command "AMB (A minus B into
A)" on page 278.
296
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)
C2 [two] (A Minus B Into A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Subtracts the points in Trace B from the corresponding points in Trace A, and sends the results to Trace A.
Thus, if your input signal remains unchanged, C2 can restore the original trace after an "APB (Trace A Plus
Trace B to A)" on page 281 or a "KSc (A Plus B to A)" on page 366 command has been executed.
Format
C2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of C2 are identical to the AMB ON form of the command "AMB (A minus B into A)
" on page 278.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
297
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CA (Couple Attenuation)
CA (Couple Attenuation)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
During normal operation, the instrument’s input attenuation is coupled to the reference level. This coupling
keeps the mixer input at a level such that a continuous wave signal displayed at the reference level is at or
below –10 dBm (or the value specified in the ML command.)
The CA command sets the threshold to –10 dBm (or to the value specified by the commands "ML (Mixer
Level)" on page 456 or "KS, (Mixer Level)" on page 357). The counterpart to the CA command is "AT (Input
Attenuation)" on page 282, which allows levels less than the threshold value at the mixer input.
Format
CA
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
[:SENse]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO ON (see "(Mech) Atten " on page 562)
298
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CARROFF (Carrier Off Power)
CARROFF (Carrier Off Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the average and peak power of the carrier during the portion of time when the power is off (when
it is not within 20 dB of its peak level). The powers are combined to provide a calculation of the leakage
power.
The measurement must be in zero span for the measurement to run.
Format
CARROFF TRA|TRB,?
Query Data Type
<ampl> in dBm.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
299
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CARRON (Carrier On Power)
CARRON (Carrier On Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the average power of the carrier during the portion of time when it is on and within 20 dB of its
peak level.
The measurement needs to be in zero span for the measurement to run.
Format
CARRON TRA|TRB,?
Query Data Type
<ampl> in dBm.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
300
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CF (Center Frequency)
CF (Center Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the value of the center frequency.
The step size depends on whether the frequency has been coupled to the span width using the command
"CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)" on page 312
l
l
When coupled, the step size is 10% of the span, or one major graticule division.
When uncoupled, the step size is determined by the command "SS (Center Frequency Step Size)" on
page 514.
Format
CF <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
Range: Frequency range of the instrument
Default unit is HZ.
CF UP
CF DN
Step size: see Description above.
CF OA
CF?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
301
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CF (Center Frequency)
Query Data Type
<freq> in Hz.
ASCII “0” if 0, otherwise scientific notation with precision to 1 Hz.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?
(See "Center Freq" on page 607)
Notes
302
Although the instrument allows entry of frequencies not in the specified frequency range, using
frequencies outside the frequency span of the instrument is not recommended and is not
warranted to meet specifications.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CHANNEL (Channel Selection)
CHANNEL (Channel Selection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Increments or decrements the instrument center frequency by one channel spacing.
The channel spacing value is set using the command "ACPSP (Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing)"
on page 274.
Format
CHANNEL UP|DN
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?
(See "Center Freq" on page 607)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
303
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CHANPWR (Channel Power)
CHANPWR (Channel Power)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the power within the specified channel bandwidth.
Format
CHANPWR TRA|TRB, <frequency> with frequency unit,?
Query Data Type
<amplitude> in dBm (without explicit units).
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
304
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CHPWRBW (Channel Power Bandwidth)
CHPWRBW (Channel Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Queries or sets the current value of the channel power bandwidth. Channel power can be measured with
the command "CHANPWR (Channel Power)" on page 304.
Format
CHPWRBW <frequency> with frequency unit
CHPWRBW?
Query Data Type
<frequency>, 2 digits to the right of the decimal place.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
3 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
305
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CLRAVG (Clear Average)
CLRAVG (Clear Average)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Restarts the VAVG command by resetting the number of averaged sweeps to one. The video averaging
routine resets the number of sweeps, but does not stop video averaging. Use VAVG OFF to stop video
averaging.
Format
CLRAVG
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:AVERage:CLEar (see "Average/Hold Number" on page 794)
306
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CLRW (Clear Write)
CLRW (Clear Write)
Syntax
8560 series
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Clears the specified trace and enables trace data acquisition. The CLRW command places the indicated
trace in clear-write mode. Data acquisition begins at the next sweep. (See the command "TS (Take Sweep)
" on page 543 for more information about data acquisition.)
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
In the 8560 series, 8566A/B, and 8568A/B analyzers, the trace settings are controlled by the trace mode
parameters, CLRW, VIEW, BLANK, MINH and MAXH and the averaging settings by VAVG. In the X-series
the same settings are controlled by the Trace/Detector and View/Blank parameters.
The following table describes the parameters set by N9061A in the X-series instrument when the legacy
commands for trace mode and averaging are sent.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
307
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CLRW (Clear Write)
Legacy Products command mapping to X-series for trace/detector settings
Legacy Products
X-series
Trace Commands
Averaging (VAVG)
Detector
(DET)
Trace/Detector
Trace Type
View/Blank
Detector
CLRW
Off
Normal
ClearWrite
On
Last set
CLRW
On
Sample
Trace Average
On
Sample
MXMH
Off
Peak
Max Hold
On
Peak
MXMH
On
Sample
Trace Average
On
Peak
MINH
Off
NegPeak
Min Hold
On
NegPeak
MINH
On
Sample
Trace Average
On
NegPeak
VIEW
Off
Normal
No change
View
No change
VIEW
On
Sample
Trace Average
View
Sample
BLANK
Off
Normal
No change
Blank
No change
BLANK
On
Sample
Trace Average
Blank
Sample
For example, if an 8560 series analyzer receives CLRW, and averaging is set to ON, then the analyzer's
detector is automatically set to Sample. In the same circumstances, N9061A sets the X-series instrument
trace type to Trace Average, View/Blank to On, and the Detector to Sample.
Format
CLRW TRA|TRB
Preset: CLRW TRA
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe1|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE WRITe (see "Trace/Detector" on page 1264)
Preset
TRA (after a preset, only trace A is set to clearwrite)
Notes
The functions of CLRW are identical to the command "A1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace A)" on
page 255 and "B1 [one] (Clear Write for Trace B)" on page 287.
308
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CONTS (Continuous Sweep)
CONTS (Continuous Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the instrument takes its
next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long as the trigger conditions are met). A
sweep may temporarily be interrupted by data entries made over the remote interface or from the front
panel.
Format
CONTS
Preset: CONTS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate:CONTinuous 1 (see "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599)
Notes
The functions of CONTS are identical to "S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)" on page 499.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
309
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
COUPLE (Input Coupling)
COUPLE (Input Coupling)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects AC or DC coupling.
Format
COUPLE AC|DC
COUPLE?
Query Data Type
AC|DC
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INPut:COUPling AC|DC
:INPut:COUPling?
(See "RF Coupling" on page 622)
Preset
AC (when possible)
Notes
When using the X-series instruments, you must use DC coupling to see calibrated frequencies
of less than 20 MHz. Signals of less than 20 MHz are not calibrated when using AC coupling on
these instruments.
310
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth)
CR (Couple Resolution Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Couples the resolution bandwidth to the span.
The counterpart to the CR command is the command "RB (Resolution Bandwidth)" on page 486 which
breaks the coupling. Use the CR command to re-establish coupling after executing an RB command.
Format
CR
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENse]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO ON (see "Res BW " on page 588)
Preset
ON
Notes
CR uses the legacy instrument settings for resolution bandwidth only if Mode Setup >
Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
311
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)
CS (Couple Frequency Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Couples the center frequency step size to the span width, so that the step size equals 10% of the span
width, or one major graticule division.
The counterpart to the CS command is "SS (Center Frequency Step Size)" on page 514 which breaks the
coupling. Use the CS command to re-establish coupling after an SS command has been executed.
Format
CS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO ON (see "CF Step" on page 616)
Preset
ON
312
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CT (Couple Sweep Time)
CT (Couple Sweep Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Couples the sweep time to the span, resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth.
The counterpart to the CT command is "ST (Sweep Time)" on page 516 which breaks the coupling. Use the
CT command to re-establish coupling after an ST command has been executed.
Format
CT
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON (see "Sweep Time Rules" on page 1119)
Preset
ON
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
313
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
CV (Couple Video Bandwidth)
CV (Couple Video Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
The counterpart to the CV command is "VB (Video Bandwidth)" on page 547, which breaks the coupling.
Use the CV command to re-establish coupling after executing a VB command.
Format
CV
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENse]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO ON (see "Video BW " on page 590)
Preset
ON
Notes
CV uses the legacy signal analyzer settings for video bandwidth only if Mode Setup >
Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.
314
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
DA (Display Address)
DA (Display Address)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the contents of the given display address to the controller.
Format
DA 1 (sets TRA)
DA 1025 (sets TRB)
DA 3073 (sets TRC)
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
This command only supports the use of DA 1, DA 1025, and DA 3073; these display addresses
contain the trace data and are equivalent to using the queries and commands"TRA (Trace Data
Input and Output)" on page 537, "TRB (Trace Data Input and Output)" on page 538, "TRC
(Trace Data Input and Output)" on page 539, "TA (Trace A)" on page 528 and "TB (Trace B)" on
page 529.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
315
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)
DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Calculates the OBW with respect to the power between the displayed delta markers. The power between
the displayed markers is then used as the reference, rather than using the total power in the frequency
span as is done in the command "PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)" on page 479.
If the DELMKBW command is used when no marker is active, a delta marker is activated at the center
frequency, and the returned bandwidth is 0. If the active marker is a normal marker when the DELMKBW
command is used, the marker type is changed to delta, and the returned bandwidth is 0.
Format
DELMKBW TRA|TRB,<real>,?
Query Data Type
<frequency> in Hz
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
316
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
DET (Detection Mode)
DET (Detection Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects the type of instrument detection (NEGative peak, NoRMal, POSitive peak, or SaMPle).
NEG
Enables negative peak detection.
NRM
Enables the ‘rosenfell’ detection algorithm that selectively chooses between positive and negative values.
POS
Enables positive-peak detection, which displays the maximum video signal detected over a number of
instantaneous samples for a particular frequency.
SMP
Enables sample detection, which uses the instantaneous video signal value. Video averaging and noise-level
markers, when activated, activate sample detection automatically.
Format
DET NEG|NRM|POS|SMP (For option descriptions, see table above)
DET?
Query Data Type
NEG|NRM|POS|SMP
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] (NEGative|NORMal|POSitive|SAMPle)
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]?
(See "Detector" on page 1287)
Preset
NRM
Notes
The functions of DET are identical to the commands"KSa (Normal Detection)" on page 362,
"KSb (Positive Peak Detection)" on page 364, "KSd (Negative Peak Detection)" on page 368,
and "KSe (Sample Detection)" on page 370.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
317
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
DL (Display Line)
DL (Display Line)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Defines the level of the display line and displays it on the instrument screen.
Format
DL <number>DB|DBM|DBMV|DBUV|MV|UV|V|MW|UW|W|DM
Default units are DBM
318
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
DL (Display Line)
Range: dependent on the reference level
DL UP
DL DN
(Step Increment: 1 major graticule division)
DL ON|OFF
DL OA
DL?
Query Data Type
<number> (Unit: V in LN, DBM in LG)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe <ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATE (ON|OFF)
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATE?
(See "Display Line" on page 1376)
Preset
OFF
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
319
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
DLE (Display Line Enable)
DLE (Display Line Enable)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Enables or disables the display line.
Format
DLE ON|OFF
DLE?
Query Data Type
ON|OFF
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATE ON|OFF (see "Display Line" on page 1376)
Preset
OFF
Couplings
Turning DL OFF, then ON again does not reset DL level.
320
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
DLYSWP (Delay Sweep)
DLYSWP (Delay Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Delays the start of the sweep until the specified time after the trigger event has elapsed.
Format
DLYSWP <number>US|MS|SC|S
Range: 2 μS to 65.535 S
DLYSWP ON|OFF|1|0
DLYSWP?
Query Data Type
Returns the value of the sweep delay length in seconds, or a ‘0’ indicating the delay sweep is
turned OFF.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <time>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay?
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe (OFF|ON|0|1)
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe?
(See "Trig Delay " on page 1336)
Preset
OFF, 2 μS
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
321
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
DONE (Done)
DONE (Done)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Allows you to determine when the instrument has parsed a list of commands and has executed all
commands prior to and including DONE. The DONE command returns a value of “1” when all commands in
a command string or command list have been completed.
If a "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 command precedes the command list, the TS command acts as a
synchronizing function, since the command list execution begins after the sweep has been completed.
Format
DONE?
Query Data Type
1
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*WAI or *OPC? (see "Wait-to-Continue " on page 162)
322
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
DR (Display Read)
DR (Display Read)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sends the contents of the current display address to the controller.
Format
DR
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
323
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
E1[one] (Peak Marker)
E1[one] (Peak Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Positions the marker at the signal peak.
Format
E1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum (see "Peak Search" on page 887)
Notes
The functions of E1 are identical to MKPK (without secondary keyword) and MKPK HI. See
"MKPK (Marker Peak)" on page 444.
324
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency)
E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Positions the marker on the screen at the center frequency position.
Format
E2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:SET]:CENTer (see "Mkr->CF " on page 785)
Notes
Unlike "MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)" on page 431, which moves the CF to the current
position of the active marker, E2 centers the active marker to the center frequency on the
instrument screen.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
325
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size)
E3 [three] (Delta Marker Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Establishes the center frequency step size as being the frequency difference between the delta marker and
the active marker.
Format
E3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:STEP (see "Mkr->CF Step" on page 785)
Notes
The functions of E3 are identical to the command"MKSS (Marker to Step Size)" on page 451.
326
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level)
E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the reference level.
Format
E4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:RLEVel (see "Mkr->Ref Lvl" on page 787)
Notes
Unlike "MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)" on page 449, this command moves to the level of
the delta Marker when in delta Marker mode.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
327
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
EDITDONE (Edit Done)
EDITDONE (Edit Done)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used at the completion of limit-line editing, following an EDITLIML command.
You can enter the limit line data between the limit line commands beginning with "EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)
" on page 329 and ending with EDITDONE.
Format
EDITDONE
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA <x>,<ampl>,<connect>,… (see "Limit Line Data (Remote
Command Only)" on page 825)
Couplings
"EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)" on page 329, "LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)" on page 403, "LIMF
(Limit Line Frequency Value)" on page 398, "LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)" on page 409,
"LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)" on page 405, "LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)" on page 408
328
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)
EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used to initiate limit-line editing.
You can enter the limit line data between the limit line commands beginning with EDITLIML and ending with
"EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on page 328.
Format
EDITLIML
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Couplings
"EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on page 328, "LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)" on page 403, "LIMF
(Limit Line Frequency Value)" on page 398, "LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)" on page 409,
"LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)" on page 405, "LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)" on page 408
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
329
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ERR (Error)
ERR (Error)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The ERR? query returns a list of three-digit error codes if errors are present. A return value of “0” means
that there are no errors present. Executing ERR? clears all GPIB errors.
If a command is a valid legacy command but not accepted by the N9061A application, no error message is
generated and the response to ERR? is 0. However, if logging is enabled, the N9061A application command
log registers a “Cmd not Supported” error.
If a command is not a valid legacy command, a command error is generated; CMD ERR is displayed on the
front panel and the response to ERR? is 112. If logging is enabled then "Cmd Error" is written to the
command error log.
Error codes are provided in N9061A mode for some X-series errors such as external reference, hardware
and alignment errors. The X-series error codes are translated to 8560 series error codes so that an error
query returns the legacy instrument error code. To review the error via the front panel, select the System >
Show > Errors.
The following table shows the X-series error codes and the translated value.
X-Series Error Code
Description
8560 Series Error Code
Description
40
TG Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown
system error
42
RF Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown
system error
44
IF Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown
system error
46
LO Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown
system error
330
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ERR (Error)
X-Series Error Code
Description
8560 Series Error Code
Description
48
ADC Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown
system error
50
FM Demod Alignment Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown
system error
54
Extended Align Failure Sum
758
SYSTEM: Unknown
system error
71
Characterize Preselector Failure
758
SYSTEM: Unknown
system error
-200.3310
Execution Error; Preselector Centering
failed
758
SYSTEM: Unknown
system error
503
Frequency Reference Unlocked
336
10 MHz Ref Cal
oscillator failed to lock
when going to internal
10 MHz reference.
505
2nd LO Unlocked
336
10 MHz Ref Cal
oscillator failed to lock
when going to internal
10 MHz reference.
509
LO Unlocked
300
YTO UNL: YTO (1st LO)
phase-locked loop
(PLL) is unlocked.
513
IF Synthesizer Unlocked
450
IF SYSTM: IF hardware
failure. Check other
error messages.
515
Calibration Oscillator Unlocked
336
10 MHz Ref: Cal
oscillator failed to lock
when going to internal
10 MHz reference
521
External Ref missing or out of range
905,333
EXT REF: Unable to
lock cal oscillator
when set to external
reference. Check that
the external reference
is within tolerance.
600 UNLK: 600 MHz
reference oscillator
PLL is unlocked
Format
ERR?
Query Data Type
0 if no error present.
3-digit number if error present. For valid codes, see table above.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Remote error list cleared. Persistent errors are re-entered into the error list.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
331
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ET (Elapsed Time)
ET (Elapsed Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns to the controller the elapsed time (in hours) of instrument operation.
Format
ET?
Query Data Type
<number> in hours.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SYSTem:PON:ETIMe? (see "Query the Elapsed Time since First Power-On" on page 1260)
332
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
This command exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point.
Format
EX
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of EX are identical to "AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)" on page 286 and to
the XCH TRA,TRB form of "XCH (Exchange)" on page 553.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
333
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
FA (Start Frequency)
FA (Start Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the start frequency value. The start frequency is equal to the center frequency minus the span
divided by two (FA = CF – SP/2). Changing the start frequency changes the center frequency and span.
Format
FA <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
<real>: Default unit is Hz. Range: frequency range of the instrument.
FA UP|DN
Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10.
FA OA
Specifying OA returns only the current value to the controller. It does not set the active function
to the start frequency.
FA?
Query Data Type
<real> in HZ.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:STARt <number> (HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ)
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:STARt?
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO?
334
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
FA (Start Frequency)
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP?
(See "Start Freq" on page 612)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
335
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
FB (Stop Frequency)
FB (Stop Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the stop frequency value. The stop frequency is equal to the center frequency plus the span
divided by two (FB = CF + SP/2). Changing the stop frequency changes the center frequency and span.
Format
FB <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
<real>: Default unit is Hz. Range: frequency range of the instrument.
FB UP|DN
Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10.
FB OA
Specifying OA returns only the current value to the controller. It does not set the active function
to the start frequency.
FB?
Query Data Type
<real> in HZ.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:STOP <real> (HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ) (see "Stop Freq" on page 614)
Preset
Instrument maximum frequency.
Notes
The OA parameter only returns the current value to the controller. It does not set the active
function to the stop frequency.
336
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
FDSP (Frequency Display Off)
FDSP (Frequency Display Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Turns the frequency annotation OFF.
Format
FDSP OFF
FDSP?
Query Data Type
‘1’ or ‘0’, indicating ON or OFF.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
See "ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 280.
Preset
ON
Couplings
It is not possible enable or disable the frequency annotation alone, leaving other annotation
unaffected. Thus, the FDSP command behaves in the same way as "ANNOT (Annotation)" on
page 280. If the FDSP command has been used to disable the frequency annotation, sending
the command ANNOT ON does not re-enable the display annotation. The display annotation is
only enabled by sending the command "IP (Instrument Preset)" on page 356.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
337
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)
FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute frequency readouts (for example, center
frequency). Relative values such as span and marker delta are not offset.
When an offset is in effect, it is displayed beneath the bottom graticule line on the instrument screen.
Execute FOFFSET 0 or IP to turn off the offset.
Format
FOFFSET <real> HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
<real>: Default unit is Hz.
FOFFSET UP|DN
UP or DN changes by 10% of Span.
FOFFSET OA
FOFFSET?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:OFFSet <number>
[:SENSE]:FREQuency:OFFSet?
(See "Freq Offset" on page 617)
338
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)
Preset
0 Hz
Notes
The functions of FOFFSET are identical to "KSV (Frequency Offset)" on page 391.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
339
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak)
FPKA (Fast Preselector Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B
Description
Automatically adjusts the preselector frequency to yield the greatest signal level at the active marker. The
FPKA command peaks the preselector faster than the preselector-peak command, PP Although this
command can be executed in all frequency spans, it performs best when the instrument is in zero span.
Use the standard preselector peak for all other frequency spans.
The FPKA command also returns the amplitude value of active marker.
Format
FPKA
Query Data Type
Amplitude value of active marker.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter (see "Presel Center" on page 571)
340
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
FREF (Frequency Reference)
FREF (Frequency Reference)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Specifies whether an external source or an internal source is being used.
Format
FREF INT|EXT
FREF?
Query Data Type
INT|EXT
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE INTernal|EXTernal|SENSe
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE?
(See "Freq Ref In " on page 665)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
341
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
FS (Full Span)
FS (Full Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
l
l
8560 series: Sets the frequency span of the instrument to full span. Resolution bandwidth, video
bandwidth, and sweep time are all set to auto-coupled.
8566A/B, 8568A/B: Does an instrument preset, then sets the low band.
Whenever the frequency range of the instrument you are using does not match the remote language’s own
range, the span is limited by the capabilities of the replacement instrument. The tables below list the
frequency ranges for all the supported remote languages when running on any supported X-series
instrument.
Format
FS
Range: see tables below
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENse]:FREQuency:CENTer (see "Center Freq" on page 607)
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN (see "Span " on page 1108)
Notes
The functions of FS are identical to "LF (Low Frequency Preset)" on page 396.
PXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command
N9030A-503
N9030A-508
N9030A-513
N9030A-526
Remote Language
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
8560E/EC
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
342
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
FS (Full Span)
N9030A-503
N9030A-508
N9030A-513
N9030A-526
Remote Language
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
8563E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8564E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8565E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8566B
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8568A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
MXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command
N9020A-503
N9020A-508
N9020A-513
N9020A-526
Remote Language
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
8560E/EC
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8564E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8565E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8566B
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8568A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
EXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command
N9010A-503
N9010A-507
N9010A-513
N9010A-526
Remote Language
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Range
8560E/EC
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz
8561E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz
8562E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz
8563E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8564E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8565E/EC
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz
8566A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8566B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz
8568A
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
8568B
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
343
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
GATE (Gate)
GATE (Gate)
Syntax
Preset State: GATE OFF
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Turns the time-gating function on or off. When the time-gating function is turned on, the instrument
activates the time gate circuitry according to the parameters controlled by gate length ("GL (Gate Length)"
on page 347), gate delay ("GD (Gate Delay)" on page 346) and the gate trigger input.
Format
GATE ON|OFF|1|0
GATE?
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Gate On/Off " on page 1155)
Preset
OFF
344
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
GATECTL (Gate Control)
GATECTL (Gate Control)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects between the edge and level mode for time gate function.
l
l
In the edge mode, a specified trigger edge starts the gate delay timer that in turn starts the gate length
timer.
In the level mode, the gate follows the trigger input level.
The gate delay timer ("GD (Gate Delay)" on page 346) and the gate time length ("GL (Gate Length)" on page
347) are operational in the edge mode, but not in the level mode.
Format
GATECTL EDGE|LEVEL
GATECTL?
Query Data Type
EDGE|LEVEL
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
EDGE
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
345
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
GD (Gate Delay)
GD (Gate Delay)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the delay time from when the gate trigger occurs to when the gate is turned on. GD only applies if
"GATECTL (Gate Control)" on page 345 is set to EDGE.
Format
GD <real>US|MS|SC|S
GD UP|DN
GD OA
GD?
Query Data Type
<real> S
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay <time> (see "Gate Delay " on page 1161)
Preset
3 μs
346
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
GL (Gate Length)
GL (Gate Length)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the length of time the time gate is turned on. GL only applies if "GATECTL (Gate Control)" on page 345
is set to EDGE.
Format
GL <real>US|MS|SC|S
GL UP|DN
GL OA
GL?
Query Data Type
<real> S
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <time> (see "Gate Length " on page 1162)
Preset
1 μs
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
347
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
GP (Gate Polarity)
GP (Gate Polarity)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the polarity (positive or negative) for the gate trigger.
l
l
If the "GATECTL (Gate Control)" on page 345 is in EDGE mode, the gate delay timer can be triggered on
either a positive or negative edge of the trigger input.
If the Gate Control is in LEVEL mode and POSitive is selected, the gate is on when the trigger input is
high. If the Gate Control is in LEVEL mode and NEGative is selected, the gate is on when the trigger is
low.
Format
GP NEG|POS
GP?
Query Data Type
NEG|POS
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SWEep:EGATe:POLarity NEG|POS (see "Gate Polarity (Remote Command Only)" on page
1191)
Preset
POS
348
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
GRAT (Graticule)
GRAT (Graticule)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the graticule on or off.
Format
GRAT ON|OFF|1|0
GRAT?
Query Data Type
ON|OFF|1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATE] (OFF|ON|0|1) (see "Graticule " on page
1376)
Preset
ON
Notes
The functions of GRAT are identical to "KSm (Graticule Off)" on page 383 and "KSn (Graticule
On)" on page 385.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
349
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
HD (Hold Data Entry)
HD (Hold Data Entry)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Disables data entry via the instrument numeric keypad, knob, or step keys. The active function readout is
blanked, and any active function is deactivated.
Format
HD
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
350
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC)
I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Sets the RF coupling to DC.
The tables below list the frequency specifications for all X-Series instruments, for both DC and AC
coupling.
8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
8568A/B
100 Hz
1.5 GHz
100 kHz
1.5 GHz
EXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9010A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
9 kHz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 507
9 kHz
7.0 GHz
10 MHz
7.0 GHz
Option 513
9 kHz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
9 kHz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
351
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
I1 [one] (Set RF Coupling to DC)
MXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9020A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
20 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
20 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
20 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
20 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
PXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9030A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
3 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
3 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
3 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
3 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
The X-Series instruments only have a single RF input port.
Format
I1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INPut:COUPling DC (see "RF Coupling" on page 622)
352
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC)
I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Sets the RF coupling to AC.
The tables below list the frequency specifications for all X-Series instruments for both DC and AC coupling.
8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Analyzer Model
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
8568A/B
100 Hz
1.5 GHz
100 kHz
1.5 GHz
EXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9010A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
9 kHz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 507
9 kHz
7.0 GHz
10 MHz
7.0 GHz
Option 513
9 kHz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
9 kHz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
353
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
I2 [two] (Set RF Coupling to AC)
MXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9020A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
20 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
20 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
20 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
20 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
PXA Series Instrument Frequency Coupling Specifications
DC Coupled Range
AC Coupled Range
Instrument Model (N9030A)
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Min. Freq.
Max. Freq.
Option 503
3 Hz
3.6 GHz
10 MHz
3.6 GHz
Option 508
3 Hz
8.4 GHz
10 MHz
8.4 GHz
Option 513
3 Hz
13.6 GHz
10 MHz
13.6 GHz
Option 526
3 Hz
26.5 GHz
10 MHz
26.5 GHz
Format
I2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INPut:COUPling AC (see "RF Coupling" on page 622)
Notes
The X-Series instruments only have a single RF input port.
354
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ID (Identify)
ID (Identify)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
The ID? query returns the current remote language to the controller (for example, “HP8563E”).
The response value is determined by your remote language selection. This is configured via the selection in
the front-panel Mode Setup menu when in N9061A mode. The remote language selection can also be set
using the SCPI command :SYSTem:LANGuage (see "Mode Setup" on page 879).
ID? also works when the instrument is not in N9061A mode. In this case the instrument model number is
returned. The string that is returned is identical to the second field of text that is returned from the *IDN?
command.
For more information see:
l
"Setting up N9061A" on page 126
l
"List of Supported SCPI Commands" on page 133
Format
ID OA
ID?
Query Data Type
See Description above.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*IDN? is similar; see "Identification Query " on page 157.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
355
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
IP (Instrument Preset)
IP (Instrument Preset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Performs an instrument preset, setting the instrument back to its factory settings. IP does not affect the
contents of any data or trace registers or stored preselector data. IP does not clear the input or output
data buffers on the 8560-series analyzers, but does clear them on the 8566A/B, 8568A/B.
Instrument preset automatically occurs when you turn on the instrument. IP is a good starting point for
many measurement processes. When IP is executed remotely, the instrument does not necessarily
execute a complete sweep, however. You should execute a "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 to ensure that
the trace data is valid after an IP.
N9061A executes this command after any language switch on the X-Series instrument.
Format
IP
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of IP are identical to the command "KST (Fast Preset)" on page 390.
If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing IP does not reset this value. This is to
protect the instrument.
356
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KS, (Mixer Level)
KS, (Mixer Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that is equal to or below
the reference level.
The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator setting. When KS, is
activated, the effective mixer level can be set from –10 dBm to –70 dBm in 10 dB steps.
As the reference level is changed, the coupled input attenuator automatically changes to limit the
maximum signal at the mixer input to your specified setting for signals less than or equal to the reference
level.
Format
KS, <real>DM|MV|UV
KS, OA
KS,?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <real> dBm
:[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]?
(See "Max Mixer Level" on page 570)
Preset
– 10 dBm
Notes
The functions of KS, are identical to "ML (Mixer Level)" on page 456.
If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing IP does not reset this value. This is to
protect the instrument.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
357
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution)
KS= (8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker
Counter Resolution)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
l
8566A/B: Reinstates automatic preselector tracking, after KS/ has been executed. Normally, the
center of the preselector filter automatically tracks signal responses in the four frequency bands of the
2 to 22 GHz range.
The KS/ command allows manual adjustment of the preselector tracking. X-Series instruments can
consume this command with no action.
l
8568A/B: Specifies the resolution of the marker frequency counter.
Format
KS= <real>HZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
KS=?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]:FCOunt:RESolution <freq> (see "Gate Time " on page 739)
Notes
For 8568A/B, the functions of KS= are identical to "MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)" on
page 436.
358
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KS( (Lock Registers)
KS( (Lock Registers)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Secures the contents of state registers one through six. When the registers are secured, the commands
"SV (Save State)" on page 521 and "SAVES (Save State)" on page 502 cannot save more instrument states
in the registers, but instead cause the display of "SAVE LOCK" on the instrument display.
To save an instrument state in a locked register, first execute "KS) (Unlock Registers)" on page 360 to
unlock the registers.
The recall function of the instrument is not affected by this function.
Format
KS(
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Unlocked
Couplings
This state is not affected by IP.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
359
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KS) (Unlock Registers)
KS) (Unlock Registers)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Unlocks the state registers, where instrument states are stored with "SV (Save State)" on page 521 and
"SAVES (Save State)" on page 502.
Format
KS)
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Unlocked
Couplings
This state is not affected by IP.
360
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSA (Amplitude in dBm)
KSA (Amplitude in dBm)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to dBm units.
Format
KSA
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of the KSA command are identical to AUNITS DBM . See "AUNITS (Absolute
Amplitude Units)" on page 283.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
361
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSa (Normal Detection)
KSa (Normal Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects normal input detection. That is, it enables the Rosenfell detection algorithm that selectively
chooses between positive and negative values.
Format
KSa
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSa are identical to DET NRM. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317.
362
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)
KSB (Amplitude in dBmV)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to dBmV units.
Format
KSB
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSB are identical to AUNITS DBMV. See "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)"
on page 283.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
363
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSb (Positive Peak Detection)
KSb (Positive Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Enables positive peak input detection for displaying trace information. Trace elements are only updated
when the detected signal level is greater than the previous signal level.
Format
KSb
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSb are identical to DET POS. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317.
364
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)
KSC (Amplitude in dBμV)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to dBμV units.
Format
KSC
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSC are identical to AUNITS DBUV. See "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)"
on page 283.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
365
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSc (A Plus B to A)
KSc (A Plus B to A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Performs a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace B, and sends the results to Trace A. Thus, if your
input signal remains unchanged, KSc can restore the original trace after an AMB or a C2 command has
been executed.
Format
KSc
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSc are identical to "APB (Trace A Plus Trace B to A)" on page 281.
366
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSD (Amplitude in Volts)
KSD (Amplitude in Volts)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to voltage units.
Format
KSD
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSD are identical to AUNITS V. See "AUNITS (Absolute Amplitude Units)" on
page 283.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
367
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSd (Negative Peak Detection)
KSd (Negative Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects negative-peak input detection for displaying trace information. Each trace element is updated with
the minimum value detected during the sweep.
Format
KSd
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] NEGative (see "Detector" on page 1287)
Notes
The functions of KSd are identical to DET NEG. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317.
368
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSE (Title Mode)
KSE (Title Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the title mode, writing a message to the top line of the display.
Format
KSE <char><real><terminator>
The only characters that N9061A accepts as <terminator> are ‘@’ and Carriage Return.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA “text” (see "Change Title " on page 1375)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
369
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSe (Sample Detection)
KSe (Sample Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects sample input detection for displaying trace information.
Format
KSe
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] SAMPle (see "Detector" on page 1287)
Notes
The functions of KSe are identical to DET SMP. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on page 317.
370
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSG (Video Averaging On)
KSG (Video Averaging On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Enables video averaging. The averaged trace is displayed in Trace A.
Format
KSG <average length>
KSG ON
KSG OA
KSG?
If video averaging is off when either KSG? or KSG OA is sent to the instrument, video averaging
is turned ON and the current average count is returned to the controller.
Query Data Type
Current average count.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe:COPY TRACE#,TRACE3
:TRACe3:TYPE WRITe
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion] SAMPle
:TRACe#:TYPE AVERage
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNT <integer>
(See "Copy/Exchange" on page 1312, "Detector" on page 1287, etc.)
Preset
Preset state is OFF.
If ON, <average length> is preset to 100.
Notes
The functions of KSG are identical to VAVG ON. See "VAVG (Video Average)" on page 545.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
371
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSg (Display Off)
KSg (Display Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the instrument’s display Off.
Format
KSg
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:ENABle OFF (see "Display Enable (Remote Command Only)" on page 1389)
Notes
On the legacy spectrum analyzers, this command turned the CRT beam power off to avoid
unnecessary wear on the CRT. Although this command is supported, displays used on the XSeries instruments have a much longer life than the CRTs used in the legacy spectrum
analyzers.
372
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSH (Video Averaging Off)
KSH (Video Averaging Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Switches video averaging Off.
Format
KSH
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe3:MODE BLANk
:TRACe#:TYPE WRITe
(See "View/Blank " on page 1284)
Notes
The functions of KSH are identical to VAVG OFF. See "VAVG (Video Average)" on page 545.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
373
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSh (Display On)
KSh (Display On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the instrument’s display On.
Format
KSh
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:ENABle ON (see "Display Enable (Remote Command Only)" on page 1389)
Notes
On the early models of spectrum analyzers, CRT beam power was often switched Off to prevent
wear of the CRT. This command was used to turn the CRT beam power on again. Although this
command is supported, displays used on the X-Series instruments have a much longer life than
the CRTs used in the legacy spectrum analyzers.
374
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSI (Extend Reference Level)
KSI (Extend Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
In legacy analyzers, KSI extends the reference level range to maximum limits of –139.9 dBm and +60 dBm.
N9061A accepts this command but takes no action, because the standard reference level lower limit of XSeries instruments covers the “extended” range of the legacy instruments.
Format
KSI
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
Off
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
375
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data.
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be updated as the
instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the instrument are reflected in the data
exchanged between Trace B and Trace C, you must follow the four step process below.
1. Select single sweep mode ("S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on page 500 or "SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on page
510)
2. Select the desired instrument settings
3. Take one complete sweep using the command "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543
4. Exchange the data
Format
KSi
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSi are identical to "BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)" on page 295 and
the XCH TRB,TRC form of "XCH (Exchange)" on page 553.
376
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSj (View Trace C)
KSj (View Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays Trace C.
Format
KSj
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSj are identical to VIEW TRC. See "VIEW (View Trace)" on page 551.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
377
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSK (Marker to Next Peak)
KSK (Marker to Next Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
If there is a marker on the screen, this command moves this marker to the next signal peak of lower
amplitude.
Format
KSK
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum:NEXT
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion <rel_ampl>
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl>
(See "Pk Excursion " on page 891)
Notes
The functions of KSK are similar to the MKPK NH form of "MKPK (Marker Peak)" on page 444,
except that KSK does not take into account the marker peak threshold value or the marker
peak excursion value.
For more details on marker peak threshold, see the command "MKPT (Marker Threshold)" on
page 445 and "TH (Threshold)" on page 531.
For more details on marker peak excursion, see the command "MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)
" on page 446.
378
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSk (Blank Trace C)
KSk (Blank Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks Trace C.
Format
KSk
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSk are identical to BLANK TRC. See "BLANK (Blank Trace)" on page 292)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
379
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSL (Marker Noise Off)
KSL (Marker Noise Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Disables the noise density function which displays the RMS noise density at the marker. KSL does not
blank the marker.
Format
KSL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion OFF (see "Marker Function" on page 742)
Notes
The functions of KSL are identical to MKNOISE OFF. See "MKNOISE (Marker Noise)" on page
441.
380
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
KSl (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transfers Trace B data to Trace C
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be updated as the
instrument sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the instrument are reflected in the data
transferred from Trace B to Trace C, you must follow the four step process below.
1. Select single sweep mode ("S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on page 500 or "SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on page
510)
2. Select the desired instrument settings
3. Take one complete sweep using the command "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543
4. Transfer the data
Format
KSl
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSl are identical to "BTC (Transfer Trace B to Trace C)" on page 294.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
381
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSM (Marker Noise On)
KSM (Marker Noise On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays the noise density at the marker. The noise density is normalized to a 1 Hz bandwidth.
Format
KSM OA
KSM?
Query Data Type
Noise density at the marker.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion NOISe (see "Marker Function" on page 742)
Notes
The functions of KSM are identical to MKNOISE ON. See "MKNOISE (Marker Noise)" on page
441.
382
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSm (Graticule Off)
KSm (Graticule Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks the graticule on the instrument display.
Format
KSm
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSm are identical to GRAT OFF. See "GRAT (Graticule)" on page 349.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
383
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSN (Marker Minimum)
KSN (Marker Minimum)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the marker to the minimum value detected.
Format
KSN
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MINimum (see "Min Search " on page 900)
Notes
The functions of KSN are identical to "MKMIN (Marker Minimum)" on page 438.
384
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSn (Graticule On)
KSn (Graticule On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns on the graticule on the instrument display.
Format
KSn
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSn are identical to GRAT ON. See "GRAT (Graticule)" on page 349.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
385
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSO (Marker Span)
KSO (Marker Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
This command operates only when the delta marker is On (see "MKD (Marker Delta)" on page 432 or "M3
[three] (Delta Marker)" on page 414).
When the delta marker is on and KSO is executed, the left marker specifies the start frequency, and the
right marker specifies the stop frequency.
If the delta marker is off, the command does nothing.
Format
KSO
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer2[:SET]:DELTA:SPAN (see "MkrΔ->Span" on page 789)
Notes
The functions of KSO are identical to "MKSP (Marker Span)" on page 450.
If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its position.
386
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSo (Annotation Off)
KSo (Annotation Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks the annotation on the instrument display.
Format
KSo
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSo are identical to ANNOT OFF. See "ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 280.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
387
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSP (GPIB Address)
KSP (GPIB Address)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Allows you to display or change the current read/write HP-IB address of the instrument.
Note that the “HZ” in the command format string is required.
Format
KSP OA
KSP <integer> HZ
Query Data Type
<integer>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <integer> (see "GPIB Address" on page 1241)
Preset
Factory preset address: 18
388
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSp (Annotation On)
KSp (Annotation On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the annotation on the instrument display.
Format
KSp
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSp are identical to ANNOT ON. See "ANNOT (Annotation)" on page 280.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
389
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KST (Fast Preset)
KST (Fast Preset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Performs an instrument preset, setting the instrument back to its factory settings.
Format
KST
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
There is no fast preset for X-Series instruments. Instead, the Code Compatibility software
performs an instrument preset (IP) when the KST command is issued. The functions of KST are
therefore identical to "IP (Instrument Preset)" on page 356.
390
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSV (Frequency Offset)
KSV (Frequency Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Allows you to specify a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute frequency readouts, for
example, center frequency. Relative values, for example, span and delta marker, are not offset.
Format
KSV
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSV are identical to "FOFFSET (Frequency Offset)" on page 338.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
391
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSx (External Trigger)
KSx (External Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the normal external trigger mode. When KSx is executed, the RF input signal is only displayed
when the external trigger level exceeds the trigger threshold level.
Format
KSx
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSx are identical to TM EXT. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536.
If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep time is less than 20
msec, the display is refreshed only when a fresh trace has been taken. This can cause the
displayed trace to flicker.
In X-Series instruments, all traces are displayed continuously, so are therefore free of flicker.
392
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSy (Video Trigger)
KSy (Video Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the normal video trigger mode. When KSy is executed, the RF input signal is only displayed when
the video trigger signal, which is internally triggered off the input signal, exceeds the trigger threshold
level.
Format
KSy
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of KSy are identical to the TM VID form of "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536 and
to "T4 [four] (Video Trigger)" on page 527.
If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep time is less than 20
msec, the display is refreshed only when a fresh trace has been taken. This can cause the
displayed trace to flicker.
In X-Series instruments, all traces are displayed continuously, so are therefore free of flicker.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
393
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
KSZ (Reference Level Offset)
KSZ (Reference Level Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Offsets all amplitude readouts on the display but without affecting the trace.
Once activated, KSZ displays the amplitude offset on the left side of the screen.
Sending KSZ 0, or presetting the instrument, eliminates an amplitude offset.
Format
KSZ <real>DM|MV|UV
8566A/B only supports unit DM
KSZ OA
KSZ?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet?
(See "Reference Level" on page 559)
Preset
0
Notes
The functions of KSZ are identical to "ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)" on page 495.
394
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
L0 [zero] (Display Line Off)
L0 [zero] (Display Line Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Disables the display line.
Format
L0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of L0 are identical to DLE OFF. See "DLE (Display Line Enable)" on page 320.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
395
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LF (Low Frequency Preset)
LF (Low Frequency Preset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B
Description
Performs a low frequency preset. That is, it selects a Start Frequency of 0 Hz and a Stop Frequency of
2.5 GHz, a Reference Level of 0 dBm, and sets all coupled functions to automatic.
Format
LF
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
396
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LG (Logarithmic Scale)
LG (Logarithmic Scale)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) as logarithmic units, without changing the reference
level.
Format
LG <number>DB|DM
Range: 1, 2, 5, and 10
LG UP|DN
LG OA
LG?
Query Data Type
<number> DB
When in linear mode, LG? returns "0".
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing?
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <ampl> dB
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?
(See "Scale / Div" on page 570)
Preset
10 dB
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
397
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)
LIMF (Limit Line Frequency Value)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used to enter a frequency value for a limit-line segment.
Format
LIMF <number>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
The response to the query LIMF? is not supported by N9061A.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
N/A
Couplings
"EDITLIML (Edit Limit Line)" on page 329, "EDITDONE (Edit Done)" on page 328
398
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)
LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns a number between 0 and 3, which specifies whether the active trace passed or failed the upper
and lower limit line tests.
Format
LIMIFAIL?
Query Data Type
The meanings of the returned numbers (0-3) are shown in the "Query Data Type Codes" on
page 400 table below.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:FAIL? (see "Limit Line Fail? (Remote Command Only)" on page 826)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
399
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
Query Data Type Codes
Query Data Type Codes
Results of the LIMIFAIL Query
Result
Meaning
0
The active trace passed both the upper and the lower limit tests. This value is also returned if there are no limits, or if
LIMITST is OFF.
1
The active trace failed the lower limit test.
2
The active trace failed the upper limit test.
3
The active trace failed both the upper and the lower limit tests.
400
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit Line)
LIMIPURGE (Delete Current Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Deletes the current limit line.
Format
LIMIPURGE
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete (see "Delete All Limits" on page 824)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
401
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)
LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Recalls a limit-line set from the limit-line table in the module user memory. The table is stored in user
memory with the command "LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)" on page 404. The command displays a limit line,
which is recalled by the name assigned to it. A limit line may be saved and given a name using LIMISAV, or
entered from the front panel with the screen-title function.
To display the line, send the command LIMITST 1 (see "LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function)" on page
407).
Format
LIMIRCL delimeter identifier delimiter
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2, <“filename”> (see "Limit" on page 976)
402
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)
LIMIREL (Relative Limit Lines)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative.
Format
LIMIREL ON|OFF|1|0
LIMIREL?
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe:CMODe FIXed|RELative (see "Fixed / Relative Limit (Remote Command Only)
" on page 829)
Preset
OFF
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
403
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)
LIMISAV (Save Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Saves the active limit line to module memory under the name assigned to it. Any previously existing limit
line having the same name is overwritten with the new limit-line table data.
Refer also to the command "LIMIRCL (Recall Limit Line)" on page 402.
Format
LIMISAV delimeter identifier delimiter
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
MMEMory:STORe:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2, <“filename”> (see "Limit " on page 1030)
404
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)
LIML (Lower-Limit Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Assigns the lower-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment.
Format
LIML <number>DB|DBM
Query Data Type
N/A. The query is not supported by N9061A.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
405
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line)
LIMTFL (Flat Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Used with the command "SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)" on page 505 to make the selected limit-line
segment flat.
Format
LIMTFL 0|1
LIMTFL?
Query Data Type
0|1
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
406
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function)
LIMITST (Activate Limit Line Test Function)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates the limit-line test function, which compares the trace data in the current sweep with the limits set
up in the limit table of the active limit line. The results of the current active trace compared with the active
limit line can be read using the command "LIMIFAIL (Limits Failed)" on page 399. When this option is set to
1 (ON), the active limit-line test limits are displayed on-screen, along with a LIMIT FAILED message if the
trace data fails.
Format
LIMITST 1|0
LIMITST?
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DISPlay OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Limit " on page 801)
:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Test Limits" on page 823)
Preset
0
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
407
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)
LIMTSL (Slope Limit Line)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Makes the selected limit-line segment sloped.
Format
LIMTSL 0|1
LIMTSL?
Query Data Type
0|1
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
1 (Sloped)
408
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)
LIMU (Upper-Limit Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Assigns the upper-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment.
Format
LIMU <number>DB|DBM
Query Data Type
N/A (Query is not supported by N9061A)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
409
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
LN (Linear Scale)
LN (Linear Scale)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Scales the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) proportional to the input voltage (that is, linearly),
without changing the reference level. The bottom line of the graticule represents 0 V.
Format
LN
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear (see "Scale Type" on page 570)
Preset
Off
410
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
M1 [one] (Marker Off)
M1 [one] (Marker Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks any markers showing on the display.
Format
M1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE OFF (see "Marker" on page 689)
Notes
Unlike the MKOFF ALL form of "MKOFF (Marker Off)" on page 442, M1 also blanks inactive
markers.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
411
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
M2 [two] (Marker Normal)
M2 [two] (Marker Normal)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the marker frequency. If the active marker type is not currently Normal (for
example, if it is Delta), the M2 command changes it to a Normal marker.
Format
M2 <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
M2 UP|DN
UP or DN increments 10% of span
M2 OA
M2?
Query Data Type
<real>. See "MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 434.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X <freq|time>
:CALCulate:MARKer:MODE POSition
(See "Marker" on page 689)
Notes
412
The functions of M2 are identical to "MKN (Marker Normal)" on page 439.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
M2 [two] (Marker Normal)
If the active marker has not been declared with "MKACT (Activate Marker)" on page 429, a
Normal marker is turned on and this active marker is assumed to be marker number 1.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
413
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
M3 [three] (Delta Marker)
M3 [three] (Delta Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Computes the frequency and amplitude difference between the active marker and the delta (or difference)
marker.
If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, M3 places one at the specified frequency or on the right
hand edge of the display. If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, M3 places an active marker at
the center of the screen.
Format
M3 <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
M3 UP|DN
UP or DN increments 10% of span
M3 OA
M3?
414
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
M3 [three] (Delta Marker)
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer2:MODE POSition|DELTa|OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer2:REFerence 1
:CALCulate:MARKer2:X <freq|time>
(See "Marker" on page 689)
Preset
0
Notes
The functions of M3 are identical to "MKD (Marker Delta)" on page 432.
The active marker is the number 1 marker unless otherwise specified by the command
"MKACT (Activate Marker)" on page 429.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
415
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
M4 [four] (Marker Zoom)
M4 [four] (Marker Zoom)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
This command increases or decreases the frequency span. With the UP/DN parameters, the change is by
one step. With a numeric value, the command moves the marker's horizontal (X) position to the specified
position in frequency or time.
Format
M4 <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
M4 UP|DN
UP or DN increases or decreases the frequency span by one step
M4 OA
The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it does not set the active
function to the active marker.
M4?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
416
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MA (Marker Amplitude Output)
MA (Marker Amplitude Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the amplitude level of the active marker if the marker is on the screen. If both the active marker
and the delta marker are displayed, the command returns the amplitude difference between the two
markers.
Format
MA
Query Data Type
8566A/B, 8568A/B: dependent on the currently set trace data format (see "TDF (Trace Data
Format)" on page 530, MDS, O1, O2, O3, or O4).
8560 Series: Amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P).
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Y? (see "Marker" on page 689)
Notes
The functions of MA are identical to "MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on page 428.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
417
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off)
MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Turns the marker frequency counter off.
Format
MC0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt[:STATe] OFF (see "Counter " on page 736)
Preset
Off
Notes
The functions of MC0 are identical to MKFC OFF. See "MKFC (Marker Counter)" on page 435.
418
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On)
MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Turns the marker frequency counter on.
Format
MC1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt[:STATe] ON
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt:X?
(See "Counter " on page 736)
Preset
Off
Notes
The functions of MC1 are identical to MKFC ON. See "MKFC (Marker Counter)" on page 435.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
419
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MDS (Measurement Data Size)
MDS (Measurement Data Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Formats binary data in one of the following formats:
B
Selects a data size of one byte (8 bits).
W
Selects a data size of one word (16 bits).
If no keyword is specified in the command, the default value of W is assumed.
Format
MDS B|[W]
MDS?
Query Data Type
B|W
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
W
420
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MDU (Measurement Data Units)
MDU (Measurement Data Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the measurement data units, as a list of four values. N9061A returns the values in display units.
Format
MDU[?]
Query Data Type
The four data values returned are as follows:
1. Lower vertical scale limit
2. Upper vertical scale limit
3. Baseline (dBm)
4. Reference level (dBm)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
421
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MEAN (Trace Mean)
MEAN (Trace Mean)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the mean value of the specified trace in display units.
Format
MEAN TRA|TRB
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
Query Data Type
Mean value of the specified trace in display units.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
CALCulate:DATA[1|2|3|4|5|6:COMPress? MEAN
TRACe:MATH:MEAN? TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|TRACE4|TRACE5|TRACE6
(See "Mean Trace Data (Remote Command Only) " on page 1325)
422
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MEANPWR (Mean Power measurement)
MEANPWR (Mean Power measurement)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Measures the average power of the carrier during that portion of the time when it is on. The on state is
defined as the time when the signal is within a selected number of dB of its peak level. The range of
amplitudes that is defined as the on state can be set with the command. The amplitude range is set
relative to the peak value of the signal.
Format
MEANPWR TRA|TRB,<number>,?
Range: 0.01 dB to 100 dB
Query Data Type
<number> in double.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
MEANPWR is similar to "CARRON (Carrier On Power)" on page 300, except that CARRON
defines ‘on’ as that time when the signal is within 20 dB of its peak level.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
423
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MEAS (Meas)
MEAS (Meas)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the current sweep status.
l
If the instrument is set to sweep and make measurements continuously, the command returns CONTS.
l
If it is set to make a single sweep with a single measurement, the command returns SNGLS.
The instrument can be set to single sweep using the command "SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on page 510 and it
can be set to continuous sweep using the command "CONTS (Continuous Sweep)" on page 309.
Format
MEAS?
Query Data Type
SNGLS|CONTS
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate:CONTinuous? (see "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599)
Note that the response values for this command differ from those of the legacy command
424
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MF (Marker Frequency Output)
MF (Marker Frequency Output)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the frequency (or time) of the on-screen active marker. If both an active marker and the delta
marker are on the screen, the frequency difference is returned.
Format
8560 series: MF?
8566A/B, 8568A/B: MF
Query Data Type
8566A/B, 8568A/B: Dependent on the current trace data format (see "TDF (Trace Data
Format)" on page 530, MDS, O1, O2, O3 and O4).
8560 series: Always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P).
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:X? (see "Marker" on page 689)
Notes
8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count set to On when using
the MF command, the marker frequency count value is returned to the controller.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
425
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MINH (Minimum Hold)
MINH (Minimum Hold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Updates the chosen trace with the minimum signal level detected at each trace-data point from
subsequent sweeps.
Format
MINH TRA|TRB
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE MINHold (see "Trace/Detector" on page 1264)
Preset
After a Preset, all Minhold traces are set to 1000 dBm.
426
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MINPOS (Minimum X Position)
MINPOS (Minimum X Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the X co-ordinate value that corresponds to the minimum amplitude of the specified trace.
Format
MINPOS TRA|TRB|TRC
Query Data Type
Value in X-axis display units.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6
:CALCulate:MARKer12:MINimum
:CALCulate:MARKer12:X?
(See "Marker" on page 689)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
427
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKA (Marker Amplitude)
MKA (Marker Amplitude)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the amplitude level of the active marker if the marker is on the screen. If both the active marker
and the delta marker are displayed, the command returns the amplitude difference between the two
markers.
Format
MKA?
Query Data Type
8560 Series: The marker amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P).
8566 and 8568 Series: Specifies the amplitude of the active marker in dBm when the active
marker is the fixed or amplitude type (see "MKTYPE (Marker Type)" on page 455).
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer1|2:Y? (see "Marker" on page 689)
Notes
The functions of MKA are identical to "MA (Marker Amplitude Output)" on page 417.
428
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKACT (Activate Marker)
MKACT (Activate Marker)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the active marker. There can be four different markers, but only one marker can be active at any
time.
Format
MKACT <integer>
Range: 1,2,3,4. Default: 1
MKACT?
Query Data Type
<integer>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
1
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
429
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKBW (Marker Bandwidth)
MKBW (Marker Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the bandwidth at the specified power level relative to an on-screen marker (if present) or the
signal peak (if no on-screen marker is present).
Format
MKBW <number>?
Query Data Type
<number>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:BANDwidth[:STATe] ON
:CALCulate:BANDwidth:NDB <rel_ampl>
:CALCulate:BANDwidth:RESult?
:CALCulate:BANDwidth[:STATe] OFF
(See "N dB Points " on page 830)
430
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)
MKCF (Marker to Center Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the center frequency equal to the marker frequency and moves the marker to the center of the
screen.
Format
MKCF
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:X:CENTer (see "Marker" on page 689)
Notes
The functions of MKCF are identical to "E2 [two] (Marker to Center Frequency)" on page 325.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
431
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKD (Marker Delta)
MKD (Marker Delta)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Computes the frequency and amplitude difference of the active marker and the delta marker. These values
are displayed on the screen.
If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, the command places one at the specified frequency or on
the left or right hand edge of the display.
If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, the command places an active marker at the center of
the screen.
Format
MKD <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
MKD UP|DN
UP or DN specifies 10% of the current span.
MKD OA
MKD?
432
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKD (Marker Delta)
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer2:MODE POSition|DELTa|OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer2:REFerence 1
:CALCulate:MARKer2:X
(See "Marker" on page 689)
Preset
0
Notes
For 8566A/B and 8568A/B, the functions of MKD are identical to "M3 [three] (Delta Marker)"
on page 414.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
433
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKF (Marker Frequency)
MKF (Marker Frequency)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the frequency value of the active marker.
8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count set to On when using the MKF?
command, the marker frequency count value is returned to the controller.
Format
MKF <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
MKF UP|DN
UP or DN specifies 10% of the current span.
MKF OA
MKF?
Query Data Type
8560 Series: The data is returned in ASCII format.
For all other languages, the format of the returned data is determined by "TDF (Trace Data
Format)" on page 530 command and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by "MDS
(Measurement Data Size)" on page 420.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
434
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X (see "Marker" on page 689)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKFC (Marker Counter)
MKFC (Marker Counter)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns on or off the marker frequency counter. The resolution of the frequency marker counter is determined
by "MKFC (Marker Counter)" on page 435.
Format
MKFC ON|OFF|1|0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FCOunt ON|OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer2:FCOunt:X?
(See "Counter " on page 736)
Preset
OFF
Notes
The functions of MKFC are identical to "MC0 [zero] (Marker Frequency Counter Off)" on page
418 and "MC1 [one] (Marker Frequency Counter On)" on page 419.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
435
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)
MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
436
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKFCR (Marker Counter Resolution)
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter. The marker counter resolution value is always given
either in Hertz or in seconds depending on whether the instrument is operating in the frequency domain or
the time domain.
Format
MKFCR <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
MKFCR UP|DN (8566A/B, 8568A/B only)
MKFCR OA
MKFCR?
Query Data Type
<real> in Hz or S.
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]:FCOunt:RESolution <freq> (see "Gate Time " on page 739)
Preset
10 kHz
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKFCR are identical to "KS= (8566A/B: Automatic
Preselector Tracking, 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution)" on page 358.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
437
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKMIN (Marker Minimum)
MKMIN (Marker Minimum)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the minimum value detected.
Format
MKMIN
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MINimum (see "Min Search " on page 900)
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKMIN are identical to "KSN (Marker Minimum)" on
page 384.
438
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKN (Marker Normal)
MKN (Marker Normal)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the specified frequency.
If no marker is currently turned on, a normal marker is turned on.
If the active marker type is not currently Normal (for example, it is Delta), the command changes it to a
Normal marker.
Format
MKN <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ|S|MS|US|SC
MKN UP|DN
UP or DN specifies 10% of the current span.
MKN OA
MKN?
Query Data Type
See "MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 434.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
439
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKN (Marker Normal)
:CALCulate:MARKer:MODE POSition
(See "Marker" on page 689)
Notes
440
The functions of MKN are identical to "M2 [two] (Marker Normal)" on page 412.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKNOISE (Marker Noise)
MKNOISE (Marker Noise)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays the average RMS noise density at the marker.
Format
MKNOISE ON|OFF|1|0
MKNOISE?
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion NOISe
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:FUNCtion? (Returns OFF|NOIS)
(See "Marker Function" on page 742)
Preset
OFF
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKNOISE are identical to "KSM (Marker Noise On)"
on page 382.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
441
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKOFF (Marker Off)
MKOFF (Marker Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns off either the active marker or all the markers. If the ALL parameter is omitted, only the active marker
is turned off.
Format
MKOFF [ALL]
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE OFF (see "Marker" on page 689)
442
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKP (Marker Position)
MKP (Marker Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the marker position horizontally, in display units.
Format
MKP <integer>
Range: 1 to 1001
MKP?
Query Data Type
<integer>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X (see "Marker" on page 689)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
443
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKPK (Marker Peak)
MKPK (Marker Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Executing MKPK HI, or simply MKPK (no secondary keyword), positions the active marker at the highest
signal detected. If an active marker is on the screen, the MKPK parameters move the marker as follows:
HI (highest)
Moves the active marker to the highest peak.
NH (next highest)
Moves the active marker to the next signal peak of lower amplitude.
NR (next right)
Moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the right of the current marker.
NL (next left)
Moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the left of the current marker.
Format
MKPK [HI]|NH|NR|NL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum:NEXT
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:MAXimum:LEFT|RIGHt
(See "Peak Search" on page 887)
Notes
The functions of MKPK (no secondary keyword) and MKPK HI are identical to "E1[one] (Peak
Marker)" on page 324.
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKPK NH are similar to "KSK (Marker to Next Peak)"
on page 378, except that KSK does not take in to account the marker peak excursion or
marker peak threshold values. For more details on marker peak excursion, see "MKPX (Marker
Peak Excursion)" on page 446.
444
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKPT (Marker Threshold)
MKPT (Marker Threshold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the minimum amplitude level from which a peak on the trace can be detected.
Format
MKPT <number>DBM
MKPT UP|DN
UP or DN increments by one step size
MKPT OA
MKPT?
Query Data Type
<number>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl> (see "Pk Threshold " on page 892)
Preset
–130 dBm
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
445
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)
MKPX (Marker Peak Excursion)
Syntax
Preset State: 6 dB
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the minimum signal excursion for the instrument’s internal peak identification routine.
The default value is 6 dB. In this case, any signal with an excursion of less than 6 dB on either side of the
marker would not be identified. Thus, if an MKPK NH command were to be executed on such a signal, the
instrument would not place a marker on this signal peak.
Format
MKPX <real>DB
MKPX UP|DN
UP or DN increments by one vertical display division
MKPX OA
MKPX?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion <rel_ampl> (see "Pk Excursion " on page 891)
446
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKREAD (Marker Readout)
MKREAD (Marker Readout)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects the type of active trace information displayed by the instrument marker readout.
The MKREAD command can select the following types of active trace information:
FRQ
frequency
SWT
sweep time
IST
inverse sweep time
PER
period
The results of the data depend on the MKREAD parameter and the frequency span, and whether the
marker delta function is used.
MKREAD
Type
Non-Zero Span
FRQ
Reads frequency
SWT
Non-Zero Span
Delta
Zero Span
Zero Span Delta
Reads delta
frequency
N/A
N/A
Reads time since
the start of sweep
Reads delta time
between end
points
Waveform measurements
of detected modulation
Waveform measurements of detected
modulation
IST
N/A
N/A
N/A
Computes frequency corresponding to
delta of markers. Performs 1/ (T1 – T2)
PER
Period of
frequency
(Pulse
measurement)
delta time
N/A
N/A
Format
MKREAD FRQ|SWT|IST|PER
MKREAD?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
447
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKREAD (Marker Readout)
Query Data Type
FRQ|SWT|IST|PER
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X:READout FREQuency|TIME|ITIMe|PERiod
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X:READout:AUTO ON
(See "X Axis Scale" on page 713)
Preset
FRQ
Notes
The Inverse Sweep Time (IST) readout is only available when using a delta marker in zero span.
FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is not available in N9061A.
448
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)
MKRL (Marker to Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the reference level.
Format
MKRL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:RLEVel (see "Mkr->Ref Lvl" on page 787)
Notes
The functions of MKRL are identical to "E4 [four] (Marker to Reference Level)" on page 327.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
449
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKSP (Marker Span)
MKSP (Marker Span)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
This command operates only when the delta marker is On (see "MKD (Marker Delta)" on page 432 or "M3
[three] (Delta Marker)" on page 414). When the delta marker is On and MKSP is executed, the delta marker
and active marker determine the start and stop frequencies. The left marker specifies the start frequency,
and the right marker specifies the stop frequency. If marker delta is Off, there is no operation.
Format
MKSP
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer2[:SET]:DELTA:SPAN (see "MkrΔ->Span" on page 789)
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, The functions of MKSP are identical to "KSO (Marker Span)" on page
386.
If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its position.
450
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKSS (Marker to Step Size)
MKSS (Marker to Step Size)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the center-frequency step-size equal to the marker frequency. If the instrument is in the delta mode,
the step size is set to the frequency difference between the active and the delta marker.
Format
MKSS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2[:SET]:STEP (see "Mkr->CF Step" on page 785)
Notes
When the marker is a delta marker, the functions of MKSS are identical to "E3 [three] (Delta
Marker Step Size)" on page 326.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
451
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKT (Marker Time)
MKT (Marker Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Places a marker at a position that corresponds to a specified point in time during the sweep.
Format
MKT <real>S|MS|US|SC
Default unit of time is seconds (‘S’ or ‘SC’).
MKT OA
MKT?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2:X (see "Marker" on page 689)
Preset
½ Sweep time
452
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKTRACE (Marker Trace)
MKTRACE (Marker Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the active marker to the corresponding position in Trace 1, Trace 2, or Trace 3.
Format
MKTRACE TRA|TRB|TRC
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds to Trace 3.
MKTRACE?
Query Data Type
TRA|TRB|TRC
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
453
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKTRACK (Marker Track)
MKTRACK (Marker Track)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of the instrument display and keeps
the signal peak at center screen.
To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on the desired signal before turning on
MKTRACK.
Format
MKTRACK ON|OFF|1|0
MKTRACK?
Query Data Type
8560 series: 0 |1
8566A/B, 8568A/B: ON|OFF
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer#:TRCKing[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1 (see "Signal Track (Span Zoom)" on page
1114)
Preset
OFF
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of MKTRACK are identical to "MT0 [zero] (Marker Track
Off)" on page 458 and "MT1 [one] (Marker Track On)" on page 459.
454
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MKTYPE (Marker Type)
MKTYPE (Marker Type)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the type of marker.
Type
Function
Commands Used to Position Marker
PSN
Allows the marker to be positioned horizontally in display units (default)
"MKP (Marker Position)" on page 443
"MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 434
AMP
Allows the marker to be positioned according to amplitude
"MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on page 428
FIXED
Allows a marker to be placed at any fixed point on the display
"MKP (Marker Position)" on page 443
"MKF (Marker Frequency)" on page 434
"MKA (Marker Amplitude)" on page 428
Format
MKTYPE PSN|AMP|FIXED
MKTYPE?
Query Data Type
PSN|AMP|FIXED
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE POSition
:CALCulate:MARKer#:MODE FIXed
:CALCulate:MARKer#:X
:CALCulate:MARKer#:Y
(See "Marker" on page 689)
Preset
PSN
Notes
Marker type can only be set for an active marker. The marker type is reset to PSN when the
marker is turned off (using "MKOFF (Marker Off)" on page 442), or when the instrument is
preset.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
455
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ML (Mixer Level)
ML (Mixer Level)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that is equal to or below
the reference level.
The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator setting.
If an external amplifier gain value is set, the mixer level is determined using the following equation:
l
Mixer Level = Ref. Level - Attenuation + Ext. Amplifier Gain
The external amplifier gain is not preset by doing an IP command in case the instrument is measuring a
large signal. This is to protect the instrument from damage from a large signal.
Format
ML <real>DB|DM|MV|UV
ML UP|DN
456
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ML (Mixer Level)
UP or DN increments by 10 dB
ML OA
ML?
Query Data Type
<real> in dBm
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <ampl> dBm
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]?
(See "Max Mixer Level" on page 570)
Preset
–10 dBm
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of ML are identical to "KS, (Mixer Level)" on page 357.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
457
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off)
MT0 [zero] (Marker Track Off)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Disables the marker tracking mode.
Format
MT0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of MT0 are identical to MKTRACK OFF. See "MKTRACK (Marker Track)" on page
454.
458
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MT1 [one] (Marker Track On)
MT1 [one] (Marker Track On)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of the instrument display and keeps
the signal peak at center screen.
To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on the desired signal before issuing an
MT1 command.
Format
MT1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of MT1 are identical to MKTRACK ON. See "MKTRACK (Marker Track)" on page
454.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
459
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
MXMH (Maximum Hold)
MXMH (Maximum Hold)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected.
MXMH updates the specified trace (either Trace A or Trace B) with a new value from a detector only if the
new value is larger than the previous trace data value.
Format
MXMH TRA|TRB
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE MAXHold
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt <integer>
(See "Average/Hold Number" on page 794)
Notes
460
The functions of MXMH are identical to "A2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace A)" on page 256
and "B2 [two] (Maximum Hold for Trace B)" on page 288.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data)
NORMLIZE (Normalize Trace Data)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates or de-activates the normalization routine for stimulus-response measurements. This function
subtracts trace B from trace A, offsets the result by the value of the normalized reference position (NRL)
and displays the result in trace A.
Normalization is automatically turned off by an instrument preset (IP), or at power on.
Normalization is not available when using linear mode and is mutually exclusive of other trace math.
Format
NORMLIZE ON|OFF|1|0
NORMLIZE OA
The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it does not set the active
function to the normalization state.
NORMLIZE?
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe:COPY TRACE1, TRACE3 (if necessary)
:TRACe[2]:UPDate OFF (blank Trace2, which corresponds to TRB)
:TRACe[2]:DISPlay OFF
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]?
(See "Normalize On/Off" on page 1316)
Preset
OFF
Couplings
NORMLIZE sets Trace B to Blank mode and turns AMBPL or AMB off. All trace math is mutually
exclusive, so turning one on turns the other off and vice versa. Similarly, when Normalize is on
and you change Trace B to Clearwrite or Maxhold (that is, Active), Normalize is turned off.
Errors
Accurate normalization occurs only if the reference trace and the measured trace are onscreen. If any of these traces are off-screen, an error message will be displayed.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
461
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
NRL (Normalized Reference Level)
NRL (Normalized Reference Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the normalized reference level. Intended for use with the NORMLIZE command. When using NRL, the
input attenuator and IF step gains are not affected. This function is a trace-offset function enabling the user
to offset the displayed trace without introducing hardware switching errors into the stimulus-response
measurement.
The unit of measurement for NRL is dB.
Format
NRL <number>DB
NRL?
Query Data Type
Returns the current Normalized Reference Level.
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel <rel ampl> (see "Norm Ref Lvl" on page 1319)
Preset
0 dB
462
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
NRPOS (Normalized Reference Position)
NRPOS (Normalized Reference Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Adjusts the normalized reference-position that corresponds to the position on the graticule where the
difference between the measured and calibrated traces reside. The dB value of the normalized reference
position is equal to the normalized reference level. The normalized reference position can be adjusted
between 0.0 and 10.0, corresponding to the bottom and top graticule lines, respectively.
Format
NRPOS <number>
Range: Min = 0; Max = 10
NRPOS UP|DN
UP or DN increments by 1.0
NRPOS OA
NRPOS?
Query Data Type
Returns the current Normalized Reference Position.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition <integer> (see "Norm Ref Posn" on page
1320)
Preset
10
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
463
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)
O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transmits trace amplitude and position information as decimal values in display units.
Format
O1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
464
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)
O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transmits trace amplitude and position information as two 8-bit binary numbers (one instruction word).
Format
O2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
465
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)
O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transmits trace vertical axis information only, in measurement units of Hz, dBm, dB, volts or seconds.
Format
O3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
466
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)
O4 [four] (Format - One 8-Bit Byte)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transmits trace amplitude information only as a binary number.
Format
O4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
N/A
Couplings
TDF B ("TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530) or "O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes)" on
page 465.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
467
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
OA or ? (Query Active Function)
OA or ? (Query Active Function)
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Query active function.
The active functions are ACPBW, ACPSP, AT, CF, CRTHPOS, CRTVPOS, DA, DL, DOTDENS, FA, FB,
FMGAIN, GD, GL, LG, MKA, MKD, MKFCR, MKN, MKPAUSE, MKPX, ML, NDB, NRL, RB, RCLS, ROFFSET, RL,
RLPOS, SAVES, SAVRCLN, SETDATE, SETTIME, SP, SQLCH, SRCALC, SRCAT, SRCPOFS, SRCPSWP,
SRCPWR, SRCTK, SS, ST, TH, TVLINE, VB, VBR, and user-defined active function specified by the ACTDEF
command.
Format
OA|?
Note that OA sets the active function, whereas ? does not. Thus, for example, SP CF? 100MZ
sets the Span, whereas SP CF OA 100 MZ sets the Center Frequency.
Query Data Type
Depends on active function.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
468
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth)
OCCUP (Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
This command is used to query the current value of the percent occupied power. This value is set by
"DELMKBW (Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker)" on page 316 and "PWRBW (Power
Bandwidth)" on page 479. This command can also be used to set the percent occupied power.
Format
OCCUP <number>
OCCUP?
Range: 0.10 to 100
Query Data Type
<number>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
90
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
469
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
OL (Output Learn String)
OL (Output Learn String)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transmits information to the controller that describes the state of the instrument when the OL command is
executed. This information is called the “Learn String.”
The Learn String can be sent from the controller memory back to the instrument to restore the instrument
to its original state.
The OL command is not completely supported, due to differences between the X-Series and 8566/8568.
The following table outlines each byte of the array and the bits supported within that byte.
Byte
Support Information
1
Fixed decimal value 31
2
Fixed decimal value 118
3 to 9
Supported
10
Supported
11
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
12 to 17
Supported
18
Supported: Bits 6, 2, 1 and 0
Unsupported: Bits 7, 5, 4, and 3
19
Supported:
Bits 7, 6, 4, 3, and 0
Bit 5 on X-Series only
Unsupported:
Bits 1 and 2
20
Supported: Trigger Mode, Sweep Mode, TRB Clearwrite status
Unsupported: Recorder Output
21
Supported
22
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
23 to 25
Supported
26
Supported: Scale Type, Log Scale Factor, and Display State
470
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
OL (Output Learn String)
Byte
Support Information
Unsupported: XY Recorder
27
Supported
28
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
29 to 30
Supported
31
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
32 to 37
Supported
38
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
39 to 45
Supported
46 to 47
VAVG count limit, value returned is always current count value * 2.
48 to 53
Supported
54 to 57
If active marker is a delta marker, active marker absolute Y position only supported for X-Series
58 to 61
If active marker is a delta marker, reference marker absolute Y position only supported for X-Series
62
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
63
Supported
64
Supported: Log Amp Units, R3, R2, and R4
Unsupported: Stop sweep
65
Supported: Lin Amp Units, TRC View Status
Unsupported: Bits 5 and 4 (always set HI)
66 to 71
Supported
72
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
73
Supported: Video Avg
Unsupported: Power on last, Ext Ref Lvl, Fast HP-IB, Bit 4 (always set HI)
74 to 77
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
78
Unsupported
79
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0
80
Fixed decimal 162
Format
OL <80-byte string>
OL?
Query Data Type
See table above.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
471
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
OT (Output Trace Annotations)
OT (Output Trace Annotations)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sends 32 character-strings to the controller. Each of the 32 character-strings can be up to 64 characters
long.
The significance of each string is as follows:
Index
Content
1
"BATTERY"
2
"CORR’D"
3
resolution bandwidth
4
video bandwidth
5
sweep time
6
attenuation
7
reference level
8
scale
9
trace detection
10
center frequency or start frequency
11
span or stop frequency
12
reference level offset
13
display line
14
threshold
15
marker frequency
16
marker amplitude
17
frequency offset
18
video averaging
19
title
20
"PL1 UNLOCK"
21
"PL2 UNLOCK"
22
"Y-I-0 UNLOCK"
23
"HET UNLOCK"
24
"M/N UNLOCK"
472
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
OT (Output Trace Annotations)
Index
Content
25
"REFUNLOCK"
26
"EXT/OVEN"
27
"MEASUNCAL"
28
frequency diagnostics
29
-
30
"SRQ"
31
center frequency "STEP"
32
active function
Format
OT
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
None
Notes
The 'data invalid indicator' status report in string 27 of the returned text is only supported on
X-Series instruments.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
473
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
PEAKS (Peaks)
PEAKS (Peaks)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sorts the signal peaks in the source trace by frequency or amplitude, and sends the results to destination
trace.
Format
PEAKS TRA|TRB|TRC,TRA|TRB|TRC,AMP|FRQ[?]
The first trace specified is the destination; the second trace specified is the source.
Query Data Type
Number of peaks found.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT FREQuency|AMPLitude
:CALCulate:DATA[1]|2|3|4:PEAK?
:TRACe[:DATA] TRACE[1]|2|3
(See "Peak Sort " on page 895)
474
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
PKPOS (Peak Position)
PKPOS (Peak Position)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568
Description
Returns the X co-ordinate value of the maximum peak in the specified trace.
Format
PKPOS TRA|TRB|TRC
Query Data Type
The X co-ordinate value of the maximum peak in the specified trace.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer12:MAXimum
:CALCulate:MARKer12:X?
(See "Marker" on page 689)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
475
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
PLOT (Plot)
PLOT (Plot)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Allows you transfer trace data, graticule and annotation information to a printer using a parallel port.
The legacy analyzers transferred data directly to a plotter via the GPIB connection. PLOT now transfers
data to a printer, and prints the entire screen.
Although PLOT reads in plotter dimension values, N9061A ignores these.
Format
PLOT <value>,<value>,<value>,<value>
N9061A ignores all plotter dimension <value> parameters.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:HCOPY[:IMMediate] (see "Print" on page 603)
Notes
In legacy instruments, PLOT also returns HPGL. The X-series instruments with N9061A
installed do not return HPGL.
476
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
PP (Preselector Peak)
PP (Preselector Peak)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B
Description
Optimizes preselector tracking to peak the amplitude of a signal at the active marker. If a marker is not on
the screen, PP places a marker at the highest signal level, and optimizes preselector tracking at that
frequency.
Format
PP
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter (see "Presel Center" on page 571)
Notes
This command is only supported when the X-series instrument’s maximum frequency limit is
greater than 3.6 GHz. If the command is sent to an instrument with a maximum frequency
limit of 3.6 GHz or less, the command is not executed, and no error is generated.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
477
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
PRINT (Print)
PRINT (Print)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Transfers trace data, graticule and annotation of the screen directly to the instrument’s default printer.
Format
PRINT [0|1]
N9061A ignores all parameters for this command.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:HCOPY[:IMMediate] (see "Print" on page 603)
478
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)
PWRBW (Power Bandwidth)
Syntax
8560 Series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Computes the combined power of all signal responses in the specified trace, and returns the bandwidth of
the specified percentage of total power. The number in the command is a percentage value, that is, it has a
range of 0 to 100.
Format
8560 series: PWRBW TRA|TRB, <real>,?
8566A/B, 8568A/B: PWRBW TRA|TRB|TRC, <real>
Range: 0-100 (percentage)
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
If the percent total power is 100%, the power bandwidth equals the frequency span.
On the 8566A/B analyzer, this command stops the trace. That is not the case for N9061A.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
479
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak Detection)
Q0 [zero] (Set Detector to EMI Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Sets the detector function to EMI Peak detection. This is the same as the Peak detector but uses CISPR
related bandwidths.
Format
Q0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The effect of Q0 is identical to that of the DET EPK command. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on
page 317.
480
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak Detection)
Q1 [one] (Set Detector to Quasi Peak Detection)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8568A/B
Description
Sets the detector function to Quasi Peak detection. This is a fast-rise, slow-fall detector used to make
CISPR compliant EMI measurements.
Format
Q1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The effect of Q1 is identical to that of the DET QPD command. See "DET (Detection Mode)" on
page 317.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
481
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ)
R1 [one] (Illegal Command SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Deactivates all instrument service requests (SRQs) except SRQ140, the illegal-command service request.
The function is identical to RQS 32 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497).
Format
R1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
482
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ)
R2 [two] (End-of-Sweep SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the end-of-sweep and illegal-command service requests.
The function is identical to RQS 36 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497).
Format
R2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
483
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ)
R3 [three] (Hardware Broken SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the hardware-broken and illegal-command service requests.
The function is identical to RQS 40 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497).
Format
R3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
484
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ)
R4 [four] (Units-Key-Pressed SRQ)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Activates the units-key-pressed and illegal-command SRQs.
The function is identical to RQS 34 (see "RQS (Request Service Conditions)" on page 497).
Format
R4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
X-Series instruments cannot replicate the units-key-pressed Service Request since no front
panel interaction is supported.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
485
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
RB (Resolution Bandwidth)
RB (Resolution Bandwidth)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the resolution bandwidth. Available bandwidths are 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3
kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, and 3 MHz. The resolution bandwidths, video bandwidths, and
sweep time are normally coupled, but executing RB decouples them. Execute "CR (Couple Resolution
Bandwidth)" on page 311 to re-establish coupling.
Format
RB <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
RB UP|DN
486
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
RB (Resolution Bandwidth)
UP or DN increments in a 1, 3, 10 sequence
RB AUTO|MAN (8560 series only)
RB OA
RB?
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <real>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]?
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO?
(See "Res BW " on page 588)
Preset
8560 series: Coupled mode, 1 MHz
8566A/B, 8568A/B: Coupled mode, 3 MHz
Notes
Default values on X-Series instruments may vary from the legacy analyzers. Refer to the XSeries User’s and Programmer’s Reference to find out any restrictions that may apply.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
487
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio)
RBR (Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the coupling ratio between the frequency span and the resolution bandwidth. It allows you to set the
Span/RBW ratio to 1/<value>, where <value> is set by the user.
Format
RBR <real>
RBR UP|DN
UP or DN increments in a 1, 2, 5 sequence
RBR OA
RBR?
Query Data Type
<real> in RBR units
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio <integer> (see "Span:3dB RBW "
on page 593)
488
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
RC (Recall State)
RC (Recall State)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Recalls instrument state data from the specified state register in the instrument’s memory.
l
l
l
Registers 1 through 6 are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states (such as front panel
configuration) saved with "SAVES (Save State)" on page 502 or "SV (Save State)" on page 521.
Option LAST: recalls the instrument state that existed previous to executing the IP command or
switching the instrument off. 8566/8 instruments use register 7 for this purpose.
Option PWRON: sets the instrument state to the same state that occurred when the instrument was
switched on. This state was originally saved using the SAVES command.
Format
RC <integer>
Range: 1-6
RC LAST|PWRON
See Description above.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*RCL <integer> (see "Recall Instrument State " on page 159)
Notes
The functions of RC are identical to "RCLS (Recall State)" on page 490.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
489
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
RCLS (Recall State)
RCLS (Recall State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Recalls instrument state data from the specified state register in the instrument’s memory.
l
l
l
Registers 1 through 6 are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states (such as front panel
configuration) saved with "SAVES (Save State)" on page 502 or "SV (Save State)" on page 521.
Option LAST: recalls the instrument state that existed previous to executing the IP command or
switching the instrument off. 8566/8 instruments use register 7 for this purpose.
Option PWRON: sets the instrument state to the same state that occurred when the instrument was
switched on. This state was originally saved using SAVES.
Format
RCLS <integer>
Range: 1-6
RCLS LAST|PWRON
See Description above.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*RCL <integer> (see "Recall Instrument State " on page 159)
Notes
The functions of RCLS are identical to "RC (Recall State)" on page 489.
490
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
REV (Revision)
REV (Revision)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the firmware revision number.
In X-Series instruments, this command returns the build date of the N9061A application that you have
installed in your instrument. The date is returned in YYMMDD format (where YY is the number of years since
1950, and MM is the month and DD is the date).
Format
REV?
Query Data Type
Firmware revision number.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
491
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
RL (Reference Level)
RL (Reference Level)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the amplitude level of the top graticule line on the display. This represents the reference level.
Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the instrument.
492
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
RL (Reference Level)
Format
8560 series: RL <real>DBM|DBMV|DBUV|MV|UV|V|MW|UW|W|DM
8566A/B, 8568A/B: RL <real>DB|DM|MV|UV
Range (MXA and PXA): –170 dBm to +30 dBm, with 0 dB attenuation
Range (EXA): –170 dBm to +23 dBm
RL UP|DN
UP or DN increments by one vertical division in log mode, and in a 1, 2, 5 sequence in linear
mode
RL OA
RL?
Query Data Type
<real> in dBm [LG] or V [LN]
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real> (see "Reference Level" on page 559)
Preset
0
Couplings
If the display line is on, changing the reference level does not adjust the position of the display
line.
Notes
The Reference Level range for the 8566A/B and 8568A/B is –89.9 dBm to +30 dBm.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
493
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
RMS (Root Mean Square Value)
RMS (Root Mean Square Value)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the RMS value of the trace, in display units.
Format
RMS TRA|TRB|TRC
Query Data Type
RMS value of the trace, in display units.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
494
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)
ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Offsets all amplitude readouts without affecting the trace.
Once activated, ROFFSET displays the amplitude offset on the left side of the screen.
Sending ROFFSET 0 or presetting the instrument eliminates any amplitude offset.
Format
ROFFSET <real>DM|MV|UV|DB
ROFFSET UP|DN (8560 series only)
UP or DN increments one vertical division
ROFFSET OA
ROFFSET?
Query Data Type
<real> in dB
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRAC:eY[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl>
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
495
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ROFFSET (Reference Level Offset)
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet?
(See "Reference Level Offset" on page 580)
Preset
0
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of ROFFSET are identical to "KSZ (Reference Level
Offset)" on page 394.
496
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
RQS (Request Service Conditions)
RQS (Request Service Conditions)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets a bit mask for service requests, each service request has a corresponding bit number and decimal
equivalent of that bit number as shown in the table below. Use the decimal equivalents to set the bit mask.
For example, to set a mask for bits 4 and 5, add the decimal equivalents (16 + 32 = 48), then send RQS 48.
Status Byte Definition
Bit#
State
Description
6
RQS
Request Service
5
Error Present
4
Command Complete
Any command completed.
2
End of Sweep
Any sweep completed.
1
Message
Display message appears.
0
Trigger
Trigger activated.
7
3
Format
RQS <bit number>
RQS OA
RQS?
Query Data Type
The current bit mask.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*SRE
*SRE? (See "Service Request Enable " on page 160)
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <integer>
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
497
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
RQS (Request Service Conditions)
STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer>
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?
(See "Operation Enable" on page 192)
498
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)
S1[one] (Continuous Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the instrument takes its
next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long as the trigger conditions are met). A
sweep may temporarily be interrupted by data entries made over the remote interface.
Format
S1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate:CONTinuous 1 (see "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599)
Preset
Couplings
Errors
Notes
The functions of S1 are identical to "CONTS (Continuous Sweep)" on page 309.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
499
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
S2 [two] (Single Sweep)
S2 [two] (Single Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument to single sweep mode. Each subsequent time that this command is sent, one sweep is
started if the trigger conditions are met.
Format
S2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate:CONTinuous 0 (see "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599)
Notes
The functions of S2 are similar to "SNGLS (Single Sweep)" on page 510.
500
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SADD (Add Limit Line Segment)
SADD (Add Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Used to add a limit-line segment to the current limit line.
Format
SADD
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
501
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SAVES (Save State)
SAVES (Save State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Saves the current state of the instrument in any of the registers one through six.
Format
SAVES <integer>
Range: 1-6
SAVES PWRON
PWRON sets the instrument to the state it was in when power was turned on.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*SAV <integer> (see "Save Instrument State " on page 160)
Notes
The functions of SAVES are identical to "SV (Save State)" on page 521.
502
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment)
SDEL (Delete Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Deletes the limit-line segment specified with the command "SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)" on page 505.
Format
SDEL
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
503
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SDON (Terminate SEDI Command)
SDON (Terminate SEDI Command)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Used to terminate the command "SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)" on page 505.
Format
SDON
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
504
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)
SEDI (Edit Limit Line Segment)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates the limit-line segment you identify by its segment number in the limit-line table.
Format
SEDI <integer>
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
505
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SER (Serial Number)
SER (Serial Number)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the X-series instrument serial number to the controller.
Format
SER OA
SER?
Query Data Type
Serial number.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*IDN? (see "Identification Query " on page 157)
506
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SETDATE (Set Date)
SETDATE (Set Date)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the date of the real-time clock of the instrument. The date takes the form YYMMDD (Year, Month,
Day)
Format
SETDATE <number>
SETDATE?
Query Data Type
YYMMDD
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SYSTem:DATE “YYYY,MM,DD”
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
507
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SETTIME (Set Time)
SETTIME (Set Time)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the date of the real-time clock of the instrument. The time takes the form HHMMSS (Hour, Minute,
Second).
Format
SETTIME <number>
SETTIME?
Query Data Type
HHMMSS
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SYSTem:TIME “HH,MM,SS”
508
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SMOOTH (Smooth Trace)
SMOOTH (Smooth Trace)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Smooths the trace according to the number of points specified for the running average.
Each point value is replaced with the average of the values (in measurement units) of the given number of
points centered on it. Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing
resolution. If the number of points is an even number, then the number of points is increased by one.
Smoothing decreases at the endpoints.
Format
SMOOTH TRA|TRB|TRC,<number>
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds to Trace 3.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see "Smooth Trace Data (Remote Command Only) "
on page 1323)
:CALCulate:DATA:COMPress? ...
Notes
Prerequisite Commands: "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 when using trace data.
Some differences may be noticed between the smoothed trace in the legacy analyzers and the
smoothed trace using the same signal in X-Series instruments.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
509
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SNGLS (Single Sweep)
SNGLS (Single Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument to single-sweep mode. Each time "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 is sent, one sweep
taken as long as the trigger conditions are met.
Format
SNGLS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate:CONTinuous 0 (see "Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)" on page 599)
Notes
The functions of SNGLS are identical to "S2 [two] (Single Sweep)" on page 500.
510
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SP (Frequency Span)
SP (Frequency Span)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
511
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SP (Frequency Span)
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Changes the total displayed frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency.
Format
SP <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
SP UP|DN
Step Increment: 1, 2, 5, 10 sequence (up to the stop frequency of the instrument)
SP FULL|ZERO|LAST (8560 series only)
SP OA
SP?
Query Data Type
<real> in Hz
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN?
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious
(See "Last Span " on page 1114)
Preset
856x: Full Span
8566: 20 GHz
Couplings
If resolution and video bandwidths are coupled to the span width, the bandwidths change with
the span width to provide a predetermined level of resolution and noise averaging. Likewise,
the sweep time changes to maintain a calibrated display, if coupled.
All of these functions are normally coupled, unless "RB (Resolution Bandwidth)" on page 486,
"VB (Video Bandwidth)" on page 547, or "ST (Sweep Time)" on page 516 have been executed.
512
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SRQ (Service Request)
SRQ (Service Request)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sends a service request to the controller when the SRQ operand fits the mask supplied with "RQS (Request
Service Conditions)" on page 497.
Format
SRQ <digit>
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
N9061A does not support the setting of bit 1 (units-key-pressed) of the status byte. Bit 1 of the
status byte is always set to Off.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
513
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SS (Center Frequency Step Size)
SS (Center Frequency Step Size)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the center frequency step size.
Format
SS <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
Range: 25 to hardware maximum
514
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SS (Center Frequency Step Size)
SS UP|DN
UP or DN increments in a 1, 2, 5, 10 sequence
SS AUTO|MAN (8560 series only)
SS OA
SS?
Query Data Type
<real> in Hz
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO ON|OFF
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq>
(See "CF Step" on page 616)
Preset
10 percent of span (1/4 of Res BW if zero-span)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
515
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ST (Sweep Time)
ST (Sweep Time)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the time in which the instrument sweeps the displayed frequency or time span.
Format
ST <real>S|MS|US|SC
ST UP|DN
UP or DN: Increments in a 1,2,5 sequence
ST AUTO|MAN (8560 series only)
ST OA
ST?
516
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
ST (Sweep Time)
The OA option in the ST command behaves in the same manner as the ST? query, in that it
returns the current value to the controller. However, the OA option does not set the active
function to Sweep Time.
Query Data Type
<real> in seconds
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME <time>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON
(See "Sweep Time" on page 1117)
Preset
AUTO
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
517
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
STB (Status Byte Query)
STB (Status Byte Query)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns to the controller the decimal equivalent of the bits set in the status byte (see "RQS (Request
Service Conditions)" on page 497 and "SRQ (Service Request)" on page 513). STB is equivalent to a serial
poll.
Format
STB?
Query Data Type
Status Byte (8 bits)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*STB? (see "Status Byte Query " on page 161)
518
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes)
STDEV (Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns the standard deviation of the trace amplitude in display units.
Format
STDEV TRA|TRB|TRC
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds to Trace 3.
Query Data Type
Standard deviation of the trace amplitude in display units.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe[:DATA]? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on
page 1321)
Notes
Prerequisite Commands: "TS (Take Sweep)" on page 543 when using trace data
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
519
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SUM (Sum)
SUM (Sum)
Syntax
8560 Series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Returns the sum of all the trace values to the controller.
Format
SUM TRA|TRB|TRC(,)(?)
Query Data Type
Sum of all the trace values.
The 8560 series returns display units, range (0-610)*601 points, or, if "TDF (Trace Data
Format)" on page 530 is set to M, it returns ASCII.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
520
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SV (Save State)
SV (Save State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Saves the current state of the instrument in any of the registers one through six.
Format
SV <integer>
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
*SAV <integer> (see "Save Instrument State " on page 160)
Notes
The functions of SV are identical to "SAVES (Save State)" on page 502.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
521
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
SWPCPL (Sweep Couple)
SWPCPL (Sweep Couple)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects either a stimulus-response (SR) or signal-analyzer (SA) auto-coupled sweep time. In stimulus
response mode, auto-coupled sweep times are usually much faster for swept response measurements.
Stimulus response auto-coupled sweep times are typically valid in stimulus-response measurements
when the system frequency span is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test.
Format
SWPCPL SA|SR
SWPCPL?
Query Data Type
SA|SR
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes NORMal|ACCuracy|SRESponse
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:RULes?
(See "Sweep Time Rules" on page 1119)
Preset
522
SA
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level)
T0 [zero] (Turn Off Threshold Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Removes the threshold boundary and its readout from the display.
Format
T0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of T0 are identical to THE OFF. See "THE (Threshold Enable)" on page 533.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
523
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)
T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument sweep to free run trigger mode.
Format
T1
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of T1 are identical to TM FREE. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536.
524
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
T2 [two] (Line Trigger)
T2 [two] (Line Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument sweep to line trigger mode.
Format
T2
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of T2 are identical to TM LINE. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
525
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
T3 [three] (External Trigger)
T3 [three] (External Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument sweep to external trigger mode.
Format
T3
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of T3 are identical to TM EXT. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536.
526
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
T4 [four] (Video Trigger)
T4 [four] (Video Trigger)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Sets the instrument sweep to video trigger mode.
Format
T4
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Notes
The functions of T4 are identical to TM VID. See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
527
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TA (Trace A)
TA (Trace A)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns trace A amplitude values from the instrument to the controller.
Format
TA?
Query Data Type
The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to right) as seen on the
screen.
Display unit values can be transferred to the controller in any one of the four output formats as
determined by "O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)" on page 464, "O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit
Bytes)" on page 465, "O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)" on page 466 and "O4 [four]
(Format - One 8-Bit Byte)" on page 467.
The format of the returned data is also affected by "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530,
and if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on
page 420.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe[:DATA]? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6)
:FORMat:[:TRACe][:DATA]
(See "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1321)
528
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TB (Trace B)
TB (Trace B)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns trace B amplitude values from the instrument to the controller.
Format
TB?
Query Data Type
The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to right) as seen on the
screen.
Display unit values can be transferred to the controller in any one of the four output formats as
determined by "O1 [one] (Format - Display Units)" on page 464, "O2 [two] (Format - Two 8-Bit
Bytes)" on page 465, "O3 [three] (Format - Real Amplitude Units)" on page 466 and "O4 [four]
(Format - One 8-Bit Byte)" on page 467.
The format of the returned data is also affected by "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page 530,
and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by "MDS (Measurement Data Size)" on
page 420.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6)
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]
(See "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 1321)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
529
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TDF (Trace Data Format)
TDF (Trace Data Format)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Formats trace information for return to the controller.
The different trace data formats are as follows:
Option
Format
P
Parameter data format. Numbers are in Hz, Volts, Watts, dBm, dBmV, DBuV, DBV.
A
Returns data as an A-block data field. MDS determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes. (See "MDS
(Measurement Data Size)" on page 420.)
I
Returns data as an I-block data field. MDS determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes. (See "MDS
(Measurement Data Size)" on page 420.)
M
ASCII data format.
B
Binary data format. MDS determines whether data comprises one or two 8-bit bytes. (See "MDS (Measurement Data
Size)" on page 420.)
Format
TDF P|A|I|M|B
TDF?
Query Data Type
P|A|I|M|B
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ASCii | INTeger,32 | REAL,32 | REAL,64
(See "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174)
Preset
530
P
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TH (Threshold)
TH (Threshold)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Blanks signal responses below the threshold level, similar to a base line clipper. The threshold level is nine
major divisions below the reference level, unless otherwise specified.
Format
TH <real>DM|MV|UV|DB
TH UP|DN
UP or DN increments by one step size
TH ON|OFF (8560 series only)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
531
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TH (Threshold)
TH OA
TH?
Query Data Type
<real> in dB
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl> (see "Pk Threshold " on page 892)
Preset
–130 dBm
532
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
THE (Threshold Enable)
THE (Threshold Enable)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Turns the threshold on or off.
Format
THE ON|OFF
THE?
Query Data Type
ON|OFF
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
OFF
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
533
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TIMEDATE (Time Date)
TIMEDATE (Time Date)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets and returns the date and time of the real-time clock of the instrument. The number takes the form
YYMMDDHHMMSS (Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second).
TIMEDATE ON and TIMEDATE OFF commands are supported on some models of the 8560 series. This set
of commands displays or hides the time and date in the graticule.
N9061A does not support these commands, but accepts them and does not display a CMD ERR error or
CMD NOT SUPPORTED error.
Format
TIMEDATE <number>
TIMEDATE?
Query Data Type
<number> (YYMMDDHHMMSS)
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:SYSTem:DATE ...
:SYSTem:DATE?
:SYSTem:TIME ...
:SYSTem:TIME?
Notes
534
This command changes the system clock of the instrument and may invalidate any time-based
licenses installed on the instrument.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TITLE (Title)
TITLE (Title)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Activates the screen title mode, enabling you to enter your own title for the screen. Valid string delimiters,
which must be used to start and terminate the title, are listed below.
See the 8560 Series User’s Guide for more details.
Format
TITLE <string delimiter>(<char>)(<real>)<string delimiter>
Valid string delimiters: !, ", $, %, &, ’, /, :, =, \, ~, @
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA “text” (see "Change Title " on page 1375)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
535
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TM (Trigger Mode)
TM (Trigger Mode)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Selects a trigger mode: free, line, video, or external.
The options are as follows:
Option
Mode Selected
EXT
External mode. Connect an external trigger source to J5 EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT on the rear panel of the instrument.
The source must range from 0 to 5 V (TTL). The trigger occurs on the rising, positive edge of the signal (about 1.5 V).
FREE
Free-run mode. Sweep triggers occur as fast as the instrument will allow.
LINE
Line mode. Sweep triggers occur at intervals synchronized to the line frequency.
VID
Video mode. Sweep triggers occur whenever the positively-sloped part of the input signal passes through the video
trigger level. This trigger level can be changed (refer to the VTL command), and a dashed line appears on the screen to
denote (approximately) the selected level. Video triggering is not available for resolution bandwidths £100 Hz.
TV
Allows TV triggering if Options 101 and 102, or Option 301 is installed. The functions of TM TV and TV TRIG are
similar. TM TV does not select the TV line number, set up the amplitude level, change the span, change the bandwidth,
or change the sweep time.
Format
TM FREE|VID|LINE|EXT|TV
TM?
Query Data Type
FREE|VID|LINE|EXT|TV
SCPI Equivalent
Commands
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal1|EXTernal2|IMMediate|LINE|FRAMe|RFBurst|VIDeo|TV
Preset
FREE
Notes
The functions of TM are identical to "T1 [one] (Free Run Trigger)" on page 524, "T2 [two] (Line
Trigger)" on page 525, "T3 [three] (External Trigger)" on page 526 and "T4 [four] (Video Trigger)"
on page 527.
536
(See "Trigger" on page 1326)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRA (Trace Data Input and Output)
TRA (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transfers Trace A amplitude values from the instrument to the controller.
Format
TRA?
Query Data Type
The format depends on the trace data format selected. See "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page
530 for details on formatting.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page
1321)
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ...
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
537
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRB (Trace Data Input and Output)
TRB (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transfers Trace B amplitude values between the instrument and the controller.
Format
TRB?
Query Data Type
The format depends on the trace data format selected. See "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page
530 for details on formatting.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page
1321)
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ...
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
538
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRC (Trace Data Input and Output)
TRC (Trace Data Input and Output)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Transfers Trace Amplitude values from the instrument to the controller.
Format
TRC?
Query Data Type
The format depends on the trace data format selected. See "TDF (Trace Data Format)" on page
530 for details on formatting.
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe? TRACE(1|2|3|4|5|6) (see "Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only)" on page
1321)
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA] ...
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
539
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRDSP (Trace Display)
TRDSP (Trace Display)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays a trace or turns it off.
Format
TRDSP TRA|TRB|TRC ON|OFF|1|0
TRDSP TRA|TRB|TRC ? (Not supported in 8566A/B)
Query Data Type
1|0
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe#:DISPlay[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0 (see "View/Blank " on page 1284)
Preset
ON for TRA, OFF for TRB and TRC
540
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity)
TRIGPOL (Trigger Polarity)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Selects the edge (positive or negative) of the trigger input that causes the trigger event. TRIGPOL is
available in all trigger modes.
Format
TRIGPOL POS|NEG
TRIGPOL?
Query Data Type
POS|NEG
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative (see "Trig Slope " on page 1335)
Preset
POS
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
541
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TRSTAT (Trace State)
TRSTAT (Trace State)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Returns trace states to the controller. Valid trace states are Clear-write, View, Blank, Maximum Hold, and
Off.
Possible Trace States
Trace State Description
Trace State Data Returned
Clear-write
CLRW
View
VIEW
Blank
BLANK
Maximum Hold
MXMH
Off
No data is returned
Format
TRSTAT?
Query Data Type
CLRW|VIEW|BLANK|MXMH
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe[1]|2|3:UPDate?
:TRACe[1]|2|3:DISPlay?
(See "View/Blank " on page 1284)
542
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
TS (Take Sweep)
TS (Take Sweep)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Starts and completes one full sweep before the next command is executed. A TS command is required for
each sweep in the single-sweep mode. TS always restarts a sweep even if a sweep is already in progress.
Format
TS
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:INITiate[:IMMediate] (see "Restart" on page 984)
*OPC? (see "Operation Complete " on page 158)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
543
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
USERREV
USERREV
Syntax
USERREV ""|"NNNNNNN"
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Modifies the response returned by the query "REV (Revision)" on page 491. This command sets the
response to be either the supplied parameter value, or else, if this command's parameter is empty or
missing, the system-defined value.
This is an N9061A "extension" command, which is not defined in the command set of any legacy instrument.
Format
USERREV ""|"NNNNNNN"
"N" is any digit 0-9
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Preset
System-defined value
Notes
Usually, you need to set the REV? response only once with this command, and the setting is
retained while power is on. However, you will need to set the response again in the following 3
cases:
1. Keysight recovery
2. Instrument software upgrade
3. Restore Mode Defaults
544
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
VAVG (Video Average)
VAVG (Video Average)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Enables the video-averaging function, which averages trace points to smooth the displayed trace. The
VAVG? query returns the number of averages for the 8560 series of analyzers.
There are a few differences in the way video averaging works in the N9061A application compared to the
legacy analyzers. See the following table for a summary of these differences.
Legacy Analyzers - Video Averaging Behavioral Differences
Condition
Legacy Spectrum Analyzers
N9061A application
All conditions.
8566 and 8568 only - Original trace
is displayed in Trace C.
Only displays the averaged trace. The averaged trace is
displayed in Trace A.
Average Count value set to 0.
Cannot be set to 0.
Video averaging is turned off if the Averaging Count is
set to 0.
Change in Average Count
8566 and 8568 only - Continues
Resets the counter to zero and starts the measurement
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
545
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
VAVG (Video Average)
Condition
Legacy Spectrum Analyzers
N9061A application
setting to a higher value.
counting from where the previous
value left off.
again.
Change in average counter
setting to a lower value.
8566 and 8568 only - Updates the
screen annotation with the lower
averaging value.
If the new count value has not been reached, continues
until the new lower count has been reached.
Averaging turned on.
Sweep time remains unchanged.
Sweep time changes due to the selection of the sample
detector.
Change in resolution
bandwidth, video bandwidth,
sweep time, reference level
or attenuation.
8566 and 8568 only - In single
sweep mode, resets counter to zero
and starts the averaging again.
Continues the measurement without resetting the
counter.
Change in center frequency
or span.
In single sweep mode, resets counter
to zero and starts the averaging
again.
In single sweep mode the X-Series instrument uses all
stored averages. Does not reset the counter after
changes in RBW, VBW, Sweep Time, Ref. Level and
Attenuation.
8566 and 8568 only - Also resets
the counter after changes in RBW,
VBW, Sweep Time, Ref. Level and
Attenuation.
Format
If the new, lower count value has already been reached,
the instrument will stop and wait until you take a new
sweep.
VAVG <average length>
Range: Integer from 1 to 999
VAVG UP|DN (8560 series only)
UP or DN: Increments by 1
VAVG ON|OFF
VAVG?
Query Data Type
<number>, or 0 if it is OFF
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe#:TYPE AVERage (for VAVG ON)
:TRACe#:TYPE WRITe (for VAVG OFF)
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNT <integer>
(See "Average/Hold Number" on page 794)
Preset
100, OFF
Notes
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of VAVG are identical to "KSG (Video Averaging On)" on
page 371 or "KSH (Video Averaging Off)" on page 373.
546
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
VB (Video Bandwidth)
VB (Video Bandwidth)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the video bandwidth, which is a post-detection, low-pass filter.
When auto coupled, the video bandwidth is calculated as Resolution Bandwidth x Video Resolution
Bandwidth Ratio. See "VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset)" on page 549 for more details.
Format
VB <real>HZ|KHZ|MHZ|GHZ|KZ|MZ|GZ
VB UP|DN
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
547
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
VB (Video Bandwidth)
UP or DN increments in a 1, 3, 10 sequence
VB AUTO|MAN (8560 series only)
VB OA
VB?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo <freq>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:AUTO ON
(See "Video BW " on page 590)
Preset
548
Coupled mode, 1 MHz
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset)
VBO (Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Specifies the relationship between the video and resolution bandwidths which is maintained when these
bandwidths are coupled. The bandwidths are usually coupled unless "RB (Resolution Bandwidth)" on page
486 or "VB (Video Bandwidth)" on page 547 have been executed.
The options specify the behavior as follows:
Option
Behavior
1
The video bandwidth is one step higher than the resolution bandwidth. That is, the video bandwidth:resolution bandwidth
ratio is 3.
–1
The video bandwidth is one step lower than the resolution bandwidth. That is, the video bandwidth:resolution bandwidth
ratio is 0.3.
0
The ratio remains fixed at 1. That is, the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth are always equal.
Format
VBO 1|–1|0
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
None
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
549
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio)
VBR (Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Specifies the relationship between the video and resolution bandwidths that is maintained when these
bandwidths are coupled.
Format
VBR <number>
<number> Range: 0.003 to 3
VBR UP|DN
UP or DN: increment in a 1, 3, 10 sequence
VBR OA
VBR?
Query Data Type
<number>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth:VIDeo:RATio <real> (see "VBW:3dB RBW " on page 591)
Preset
1
Notes
VBR uses the legacy signal analyzer settings for video bandwidth only if Mode Setup >
Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.
550
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
VIEW (View Trace)
VIEW (View Trace)
Syntax
8560 series:
8566A/B, 8568A/B:
Legacy Products
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Displays Trace A, Trace B, or Trace C, and stops taking new data into the viewed trace.
Format
VIEW TRA|TRB|TRC
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:UPDate OFF
:TRACe[1|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe] ON
(See "View/Blank " on page 1284)
Notes
The functions of VIEW are identical to "A3 [three] (View Mode for Trace A)" on page 257 and
"B3 [three] (View Mode for Trace B)" on page 289.
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, VIEW is also identical to "KSj (View Trace C)" on page 377.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
551
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
VTL (Video Trigger Level)
VTL (Video Trigger Level)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8560 series
Description
Sets the signal level that triggers a sweep.
Format
VTL <number>DB|DBM|DBMV|DBUV|MV|UV|V|MW|UW|W|DM
<number> Range: –220 to 30
VTL UP|DN
UP or DN increments by 1 vertical division
VTL?
Query Data Type
<real>
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <ampl> (see "Trigger Level " on page 1334)
Preset
0 dBm
Notes
Setting a value for VTL sets the trigger mode to VIDEO, even if it was not already set to VIDEO.
See "TM (Trigger Mode)" on page 536.
552
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
XCH (Exchange)
XCH (Exchange)
Syntax
Legacy Products
8566A/B, 8568A/B
Description
Exchanges the contents of the source and destination traces. The traces are analyzed and adjusted to fit
the number of display points on the screen.
Format
XCH TRA|TRB|TRC,TRA|TRB|TRC
Query Data Type
N/A
SCPI Equivalent Commands
:TRACe#:DISPlay[:STATe]?
:TRACe#:UPDate[:STATe]?
:TRACe:EXCHange TRACE#, TRACE#
:TRACe#:DISPlay[:STATe]
:TRACe#:UPDate[:STATe]
(See "View/Blank " on page 1284)
Notes
The functions of XCH TRA,TRB are identical to "AXB (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)" on page
286 and "EX (Exchange Trace A and Trace B)" on page 333.
The functions of XCH TRB,TRC are identical to "BXC (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)" on page
295 and "KSi (Exchange Trace B and Trace C)" on page 376.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
553
6 Legacy Command Descriptions
XCH (Exchange)
554
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel
& SCPI Reference
The Swept SA measurement uses both swept and FFT analysis, and
the frequency and time domains. For more details, see "Swept SA
Measurement Description" on page 558 .
In many of the key and command descriptions that follow,
reference is made to the "Spectrum Analyzer Mode" and
"Swept SA Measurement". In all cases, the information
applicable to this mode and measurement also applies to the
RLC Mode and RLC Swept SA Measurement.
555
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Measurement Commands and their Results for Swept SA
The INITiate and CONFigure syntax, as well as the data returned by the queries FETCh, MEASure and
READ, are described in this section.
Note that the data returned by FETCh?, MEASure? and READ? uses the data settings specified by the
commands FORMat:BORDer (see "Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only)" on page 175) and
FORMat:DATA (see "Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only)" on page 174), and can return
real or ASCII data. If the format is set to INT,32, it returns REAL,32 data.
For more measurement related commands, see the SENSe subsystem, and the "Remote Measurement
Functions" on page 163.
The INITiate command works in a slightly different fashion in the Spectrogram view. In the other Views
(Normal, Trace Zoom and Zone Span), the following two commands perform exactly the same function:
l
:INITiate:RESTart
l
:INITiate:IMMediate
However, in the Spectrogram View, the command :INITiate:RESTart works like the Restart key, and clears
out the Spectrogram trace history. The command :INITiate:IMMediate does not clear out the Spectrogram
trace history but performs all other functions of performing a restart.
The table below lists the measurement commands and their responses for the SANalyzer measurement.
Note that the marker values are x, y pairs.
Command
n
Return Value
INITiate:SANalyzer
n/a
n/a
CONFigure?
n/a
long form name of current measurement, for example,
"SANalyzer"
CONFigure:SANalyzer
n/a
n/a (selects SAN measurement with Meas Setup settings in
preset state – same as Meas Preset)
CONFigure:SANalyzer:NDEFault
n/a
n/a (selects SAN measurement without affecting settings)
FETCh:SANalyzer[n]?
0
Returns the following comma-separated results:
MEASure:SANalyzer[n]?
1. 1 if there is any margin or limit failure, otherwise 0
READ:SANalyzer[n]?
2. 0 (future).
3. 0 (future).
4. 0 (future).
5. N dB points result (not a number if off)
6. Current average count k (the current number of data
measurements that have already been combined, in the
averaging calculation).
7. Number of points in the sweep
556
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Command
n
Return Value
8. 0 (future).
9. 0 (future).
10. 0 (future).
11. Marker 1 value (x,y)
12. Marker 2 value (x,y)
13. Marker 3 value (x,y)
14. Marker 4 value (x,y)
15. Marker 5 value (x,y)
16. Marker 6 value (x,y)
17. Marker 7 value (x,y)
18. Marker 8 value (x,y)
19. Marker 9 value (x,y)
20. Marker 10 value (x,y)
21. Marker 11 value (x,y)
22. Marker 12 value (x,y)
not
specified
or n=1
This query returns Trace 1 data as a list of x,y pairs. The yvalues are in the current Y Axis Unit of the analyzer. The x-axis
values are the values of the trace, in the x-axis scale units of
the trace (Hz for frequency domain traces, seconds for time
domain traces).
When querying trace data, it is best if the analyzer is not
sweeping during the query. Therefore, it is good to be in Single
Sweep, or Update=Off when querying trace data from the
analyzer.
2
Returns Trace 2 data as a series of x,y pairs
3
Returns Trace 3 data as a series of x,y pairs
4
Returns Trace 4 data as a series of x,y pairs
5
Returns Trace 5 data as a series of x,y pairs
6
Returns Trace 6 data as a series of x,y pairs
7&
above
Future use
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
557
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Swept SA Measurement Description
l
l
l
Swept Spectrum Analysis (Freq Domain): The analyzer sweeps the LO to generate a heterodyned IF
signal that can be detected to analyze the signal content of a range of frequencies. The x-axis of the
display is frequency, the Y Axis is amplitude.
Swept FFT Analysis (Freq Domain): In some cases there is an advantage to not actually sweeping the
LO, but instead analyzing the signal by taking a time record and performing FFT analysis. This is what is
done in swept FFT analysis, but the data is still presented as though it were a sweeping spectrum
analyzer. The x-axis of the display is frequency, the Y Axis is amplitude.
Zero Span Analysis (Time Domain): In Zero Span analysis, the analyzer stops sweeping the LO, placing
it at the center frequency, and then takes time data from the detector while stopped at that frequency.
Because the LO is not moving, the frequency span is zero. The time data is presented left to right across
the screen just like on an oscilloscope. The x-axis of the display is time, and the Y Axis is amplitude.
All of the tools such as markers, peak tables, limit lines, trace math, N dB points, and marker functions are
available in Zero Span measurement analysis, although some work differently in the time and frequency
domains.
Key Path
Meas
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
558
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
AMPTD Y Scale
The Amplitude front-panel key activates the Amplitude menu and selects Reference Level or Reference
Value (depending on the measurement) as the active function.
Some features in the Amplitude menu apply to multiple measurements; others apply only to specific
measurements. Keys that only apply to some measurements are blanked or grayed out in measurements
that are not supported. Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Reference Level
The Reference Level specifies the amplitude represented by the topmost graticule line.
Changing the reference level does not restart a measurement, because it is a display function only; instead
it vertically ‘pans’ all displayed traces and markers to the new value. If a change to the reference level
changes the attenuation value (e.g. through an auto coupling), then the measurement will be restarted.
See "Amplitude Representations" on page 560
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Remote Command
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <real>
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?
Example
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV 20 dBm
Sets the reference level to 20 dBm, which displays in the current Y axis unit. For example, if the Y
axis unit is dBµV, then 126.99 dBµV will be displayed.
Couplings
If you reduce the attenuation, the analyzer may have to lower the reference level to keep it below its
allowed maximum. This allowed maximum level is specified in the “Max” row, below, along with
other variables which affect it. When you increase attenuation, the reference level does not change.
Preset
0 dBm
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
RefLevelMin = –170 dBm + RefLevelOffset - ExtGain.
Max
The maximum Ref Level is typically:
+30 dBm + RL Offset – External Gain (for MXA and PXA)
+23 dBm + RL Offset – External Gain (for EXA and CXA)
This maximum value is determined by the maximum power that can be safely applied to the input
circuitry. The actual maximum value at any given time may be even less than this, depending on
other values including Mech Atten, Int Preamp Gain, Swept IF Gain, FFT IF Gain, Max Mixer Level,
and the total attenuation currently available. Note that the maximum reference level is unaffected by the input choice of external mixing.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
559
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Default Unit
Depends on the current selected Y axis unit
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
1. In PSA, there was a restriction on Ref Level Max which was that it could not exceed 0 dBm when
the preamp was on. This restriction does not apply to X-Series.
2. Ref Level – Ref Level is a display function, not a measurement control function, so a change in the
setting does not start a new sweep (unless attenuation changes). This behavior differs from that of
legacy analyzers
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Amplitude Representations
The following is an illustration of the reference level and Y Axis scales under various conditions:
Attenuation
This menu controls the attenuator functions and interactions between the attenuation system
components.
There are two attenuator configurations in the X-Series. One is a dual attenuator configuration consisting
of a mechanical attenuator and an optional electronic attenuator. The other configuration uses a single
attenuator with combined mechanical and electronic sections that controls all the attenuation functions. Different models in the X-Series come with different configurations, as described in more detail below:
l
"Dual Attenuator Configurations" on page 561
l
"Single Attenuator Configuration" on page 561
l
"Determining Attenuator Configuration" on page 561
Most Attenuation settings are the same for all measurements; they do not change as you change
measurements. Settings like these are called “Meas Global” and are unaffected by Meas Preset. Key Path
560
AMPTD Y Scale
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Scope
Meas Global
Dependencies
In measurements that support the I/Q inputs, this key is unavailable when I/Q is the selected input,
and is replaced by the Range key in that case.
Readback Line
Contains a summary in [ ] brackets of the current total attenuation. See the descriptions of the "
(Mech) Atten " on page 562, "Enable Elec Atten" on page 564, and "Elec Atten" on page 566 keys
for more detail on the contributors to the total attenuation.
Note that when "Pre-Adjust for Min Clip" on page 567 is on, this value can change at the start of
every measurement.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Dual Attenuator Configurations
Configuration 1: Mechanical attenuator + optional electronic attenuator
Configuration 2: Mechanical attenuator, no optional electronic attenuator
(note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since there is no electronic
section available. However, it behaves exactly like Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator option
EA3, therefore for the sake of this document it is grouped into the “Dual Attenuator” configuration)
Single Attenuator Configuration
Determining Attenuator Configuration
You can tell which attenuator configuration you have by pressing the Attenuation key, which (in most
modes) opens the Attenuation menu. As shown in the examples below, if the first key in the Attenuation
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
561
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
menu says Mech Atten, then you have the dual attenuator configuration. If the first key says Atten, then
you have the single attenuator configuration.
Dual Attenuator
Single Attenuator
In the single attenuator configuration, you control the attenuation with a single control, as the fixed stage
has only two states. In the dual attenuator configuration, both stages have significant range so you are
given separate control of the mechanical and electronic attenuator stages. When you have the dual attenuator configuration, you may still have only a single attenuator, because
unless option EA3 (the Electronic Attenuator option) is available, and you purchase it, you will have only
the mechanical attenuator.
(Mech) Atten
This key is labeled Mech Atten in dual attenuator models and Atten in single attenuator models. In the
dual attenuator configuration, this key only affects the mechanical attenuator. This key lets you modify the attenuation applied to the RF input signal path. This value is normally auto
coupled to the Ref Level, the Internal Preamp Gain, any External Gain that is entered, and the Max Mixer
Level, as described in the table below.
See "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 563
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?
Example
POW:ATT 20
Dual attenuator configuration: sets the mechanical attenuator to 20 dB
Single attenuator mode: sets the main attenuation to 20 dB (see below for definition of “main”
attenuation).
If the attenuator was in Auto, it sets it to Manual.
Dependencies
Some measurements do not support the Auto setting of (Mech) Atten. In these measurements, the
Auto/Man selection is not available, and the Auto/Man line on the key disappears.
In dual attenuator configurations, when the electronic attenuator is enabled, the mechanical
attenuator has no auto setting and the Auto/Man line on the key disappears. The state of Auto/Man is
remembered and restored when the electronic attenuator is once again disabled. This is described in
more detail in the "Enable Elec Atten" on page 564 key description.
See "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 563 for more information on the Auto/Man
functionality of Attenuation.
562
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Couplings
When (Mech) Atten is in Auto, it uses the following algorithm to determine a value:
Atten = ReferenceLevel + PreAmpGain + ExternalGain – RefLevelOffset - MaxMixerLevel + IF Gain.
Limit this value to be between 6 dB and the Max value. No value below 6 dB can ever be chosen by
Auto.
The resulting value is rounded up to the largest value possible given the attenuation step setting. That
is, 50.01 dB would change to 60 dB (for a 10 dB attenuation step).
The “IF Gain” term in the equation above is either 0 dB or +10 dB, depending on the settings of FFT IF
Gain, Swept IF Gain, max Ref Level and the Auto/Man setting of Mech Atten. In External Mixing and BBIQ,where the Attenuator is not in the signal path, the Attenuator setting
changes as described above when (Mech) Atten is in Auto, but no changes are made to the actual
attenuator hardware setting until the input is changed back to the RF Input.
Preset
The preset for Mech Attenuation is “Auto.” The Auto value of attenuation is:
CXA, EXA, MXA and PXA: 10 dB
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 dB
The attenuation set by this key cannot be decreased below 6 dB with the knob or step keys. To get to
a value below 6 dB it has to be directly entered from the keypad or via SCPI. This protects from
adjusting the attenuation to a dangerously small value which can put the instrument at risk of
damage to input circuitry. However, if the current mechanical attenuation is below 6 dB it can be
increased with the knob and step keys, but not decreased.
Max
CXA N9000A–503/507: 50 dB
CXA N9000A–513/526: 70dB
EXA: 60 dB
MXA and PXA: 70 dB
In the single attenuator configuration, the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB, so if the EATT
is set to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced
accordingly; if the main attenuator is set to 40 dB first, EATT cannot be greater than 10 dB.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man
As described in the Attenuation key description, there are two distinct attenuator configurations available
in the X-Series, the single attenuator and dual attenuator configurations. In dual attenuator
configurations, we have the mechanical attenuation and the electronic attenuation, and the current total
attenuation is the sum of the electronic + mechanical attenuation. In single attenuator configurations, we
refer to the attenuation set using the (Mech) Atten key (or POW:ATT SCPI) as the “main” attenuation; and
the attenuation that is set by the SCPI command POW:EATT as the “soft” attenuation (the POW:EATT
command is honored even in the single attenuator configuration, for compatibility purposes). Then the
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
563
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
current total attenuation is the sum of the main + soft attenuation. See the Elec Atten key description for
more on “soft” attenuation.
In the dual attenuator configuration, when the electronic attenuator is enabled, there is no Auto/Man
functionality for the mechanical attenuator, and the third line of the key label (the Auto/Man line)
disappears:
Enable Elec Atten
Enables the Electronic Attenuator.
The electronic attenuator offers finer steps than the mechanical attenuator, has no acoustical noise, is
faster, and is less subject to wear. These advantages primarily aid in remote operation and are negligible
for front panel use. See "Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons" on page 566 for a detailed
discussion of the pros and cons of using the electronic attenuator.
For the single attenuator configuration, for SCPI backwards compatibility, the “soft” attenuation feature
replaces the dual attenuator configuration’s electronic attenuator. All the same couplings and limitations
apply. See "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 563
See "More Information" on page 565
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation:STATe?
Example
POW:EATT:STAT ON
Dependencies
This key only appears in Dual Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed. It does not
appear in models with the Single Attenuator configuration, as in the single attenuator configuration
there is no “electronic attenuator” there is only a single integrated attenuator (which has both a
mechanical and electronic stage). However, in the single attenuator configuration, EATT SCPI
commands are accepted for compatibility with other X-series instruments and set a “soft”
attenuation as described in "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 563
The electronic attenuator (and the “soft” attenuation function provided in single attenuator
configurations) is unavailable above 3.6 GHz. Therefore, if the Stop Frequency of the analyzer is >
3.6 GHz then the Enable Elec Atten key will be OFF and grayed out.
If the Internal Preamp is on, meaning it is set to Low Band or Full, the electronic attenuator (and the
“soft” attenuation function provided in single attenuator configurations) is unavailable. In this case the
Enable Elec Atten key will be OFF and grayed out.
If either of the above is true, if the SCPI command is sent, an error indicating that the electronic
attenuator is unavailable will be sent.
If the electronic/soft Attenuator is enabled, then the Stop Freq of the analyzer is limited to 3.6 GHz
and the Internal Preamp is unavailable.
The SCPI-only “soft” electronic attenuation for the single-attenuator configuration is not available in
564
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
all measurements; in particular, it is not available in the Swept SA measurement.
Couplings
Enabling and disabling the Electronic Attenuator affects the setting of the Mechanical Attenuator (in
dual attenuator configurations). This is described in more detail below this table.
Preset
OFF for Swept SA measurement; ON for all other measurements that support the electronic
attenuator
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
More Information
Mechanical Attenuator Transition Rules
When the Electronic Attenuator is enabled, the Mechanical Attenuator transitions to a state that has no
Auto function. Below are the rules for transitioning the Mechanical Attenuator. NOTE that the information
below ONLY applies to the dual attenuator configurations, and ONLY when the Electronic Attenuator is
installed:
When the Electronic Attenuation is enabled from a disabled state:
• The Mechanical Attenuator is initialized to 10 dB (this is its optimal performance setting). You can then
set it as desired with SCPI, numeric keypad, step keys, or knob, and it behaves as it normally would in
manual mode
• The Auto/Man state of (Mech) Atten is saved
• The Auto/Man line on the (Mech) Atten key disappears and the auto rules are disabled
• The Electronic Attenuator is set to 10 dB less than the previous value of the Mechanical Attenuator,
within the limitation that it must stay within the range of 0 to 24 dB of attenuation.
Examples in the dual attenuator configuration:
• Mech Atten at 20 dB. Elec Atten enabled, Mech Atten set to 10 dB, and Elec Atten set to 10 dB. New
total attenuation equals the value before Elec Atten enabled.
• Mech Atten at 0 dB. Elec Atten enabled, Mech Atten set to 10 dB, and Elec Atten set to 0 dB. New total
attenuation does not equal the value before Elec Atten enabled.
• Mech Atten at 40 dB. Elec Atten enabled, Mech Atten set to 10 dB, and Elec Atten set to 24 dB. New
total attenuation does not equal the value before Elec Atten enabled.
When the Electronic Attenuation is disabled from an enabled state:
• The Elec Atten key is grayed out
• The Auto/Man state of (Mech) Atten is restored
• If now in Auto, (Mech) Atten recouples
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
565
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
• If now in Man, (Mech) Atten is set to the value of total attenuation that existed before the Elec Atten was
disabled. The resulting value is rounded up to the smallest value possible given the (Mech) Atten Step
setting - (That is, 57 dB changes to 58 dB when (Mech) Atten Step is 2 dB.)
Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons
The electronic attenuator offers finer steps than the mechanical attenuator, has no acoustical noise, is
faster, and is less subject to wear. The “finer steps” advantage of the electronic attenuator is beneficial in optimizing the alignment of the
analyzer dynamic range to the signal power in the front panel as well as remote use. Thus, you can achieve
improved relative signal measurement accuracy. Compared to a mechanical attenuator with 2 dB steps,
the 1 dB resolution of the electronic attenuator only gives better resolution when the odd-decibel steps
are used. Those odd-decibel steps are less accurately calibrated than the even-decibel steps, so one
tradeoff for this superior relative accuracy is reduced absolute amplitude accuracy.
Another disadvantage of the electronic attenuator is that the spectrum analyzer loses its “Auto” setting,
making operation less convenient.
Also, the relationship between the dynamic range specifications (TOI, SHI, compression and noise) and
instrument performance are less well-known with the electrical attenuator. With the mechanical
attenuator, TOI, SHI and compression threshold levels increase dB-for-dB with increasing attenuation, and
the noise floor does as well. With the electronic attenuator, there is an excess attenuation of about 1 to 3
dB between 0 and 3.6 GHz, making the effective TOI, SHI, and so forth, less well known. Excess
attenuation is the actual attenuation relative to stated attenuation. Excess attenuation is accounted for in
the analyzer calibration
Elec Atten
Controls the Electronic Attenuator in dual attenuator configurations. This key does not appear in single
attenuator configurations, as the control of both the mechanical and electronic stages of the single
attenuator is integrated into the single Atten key.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:EATTenuation?
Notes
Electronic Attenuation’s specification is defined only when Mechanical Attenuation is 6 dB.
Dependencies
This key only appears in Dual Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed. It does not
appear in models with the Single Attenuator configuration, as in the single attenuator configuration
there is no “electronic attenuator” there is only a single integrated attenuator (which has both a
mechanical and electronic stage). However, in the single attenuator configuration, EATT SCPI
commands are accepted for compatibility with other X-series instruments and set a “soft”
attenuation as described in "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 563. The “soft”
attenuation is treated as an addition to the “main” attenuation value set by the Atten softkey or the
POW:ATT SCPI command and affects the total attenuation displayed on the Attenuation key and the
Meas Bar.
When Enable Elec Atten is off or grayed out, the Elec Atten key is grayed out.
Preset
566
0 dB
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 dB
Max
Dual attenuator configuration: 24 dB
Single attenuator configuration: the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB, so if the EATT is set
to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced accordingly; if
the main attenuator is set to 40 dB first, EATT cannot be greater than 10 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Adjust Atten for Min Clip
Sets the combination of mechanical and electronic attenuation based on the current measured signal level
so that clipping will be at a minimum.
This is an "immediate action" function, that is, it executes once, when the key is pressed.
This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The spectrum analyzer
measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize IMMediate
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
If this function is on, it does the adjustment described under "Adjust Atten for Min Clip" on page 567 each
time a measurement restarts. Therefore, in Continuous measurement mode, it only executes before the
first measurement.
In dual attenuator models, you can set Elec+Mech Atten, in which case both attenuators participate in the
autoranging, or Elec Atten Only, in which case the mechanical attenuator does not participate in the
autoranging. This latter case results in less wear on the mechanical attenuator and is usually faster.
This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The spectrum analyzer
measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation OFF | ELECtrical |
COMBined
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation?
Notes
The SCPI parameter ELECtrical sets this function to On in single attenuator models. The SCPI
parameter COMBined is mapped to ELECtrical in single attenuator models; if you send COMBined, it
sets the function to On and returns ELEC to a query.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
567
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Dependencies
This key only appears in Dual Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed. It does not
appear in models with the Single Attenuator configuration, as in the single attenuator configuration
there is no “electronic attenuator” there is only a single integrated attenuator (which has both a
mechanical and electronic stage). When Enable Elec Atten is off or grayed out, the Pre-Adjust for Min Clip key is grayed out.
Preset
OFF for Swept SA measurement; ON for all other measurements that support Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Range
Dual attenuator models:
Off | Elec Atten Only | Mech + Elec Atten
Single attenuator models:
Off | On
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:AUTO ON|OFF|1|0
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:AUTO?
Notes
ON aliases to "Elec Atten Only" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT ELEC)
OFF aliases to "Off" (:POW:RANG:OPT:ATT OFF)
The query :POW:RANG:AUTO? returns true if :POW:RANG:OPT:ATT is not "Off"
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Off
Turns Pre-Adjust for Min Clip off. This is the default setting.
This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The spectrum analyzer
measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
Example
:POW:RANGe:OPT:ATT OFF
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Elec Atten Only
Selects only the electric attenuator to participate in auto ranging. This offers less wear on the mechanical
attenuator and is usually faster.
This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The spectrum analyzer
measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality.
568
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
Example
:POW:RANGe:OPT:ATT ELEC
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Mech + Elec Atten
In dual attenuator models, this selects both attenuators participate in the autoranging.
This key is grayed out in measurements that do not support this functionality. The spectrum analyzer
measurement, Swept SA, does not support this functionality.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Pre-Adjust for Min Clip
Example
:POW:RANGe:OPT:ATT COMB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
(Mech) Atten Step
This controls thestep size used when making adjustments to the input attenuation.
This key is labeled Mech Atten Step in dual attenuator models and Atten Step in single attenuator models.
In the dual attenuator configuration, this key only affects the step size of the mechanical attenuator. Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement] 10 dB | 2 dB
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement]?
Example
POW:ATT:STEP 2
Notes
Note this feature works like a 1-N choice from the front panel, but it takes a specific value (in dB)
when used remotely. The only valid values are 2 and 10.
Dependencies
Blanked in CXA and EXA if option FSA (2 dB steps) is not present. If blanked, attempts to set it via
SCPI will yield an error. Couplings
When the attenuation step size changes, the current mechanical attenuation value is adjusted (if
necessary) to be quantized to the new step size. That is, if step is set to 10 dB, mech atten is
increased if necessary so it is a multiple of 10 dB
Preset
PXA and MXA: 2 dB
EXA and CXA: 10 dB (2 dB with option FSA)
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
569
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Max Mixer Level
Controls the limitation on the Ref Level for a given attenuation setting, and therefore also interacts with
the Auto rules for selecting the attenuation as a coupling from the reference level.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <real>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]?
Example
POW:MIX:RANG –15 dBm
Preset
–10 dBm
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
–50 dBm
Max
–10 dBm
Default Unit
Depends on the current selected Y axis unit, see Swept SA discussion of Y Axis Unit
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Scale / Div
Sets the units per vertical graticule division on the display. This function is only available when Scale Type
(Log) is selected and the vertical scale is power. When Scale Type (Lin) is selected, Scale/Div is grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Remote Command
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <rel_ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?
Example
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV 5 DB
Dependencies
Scale/Div is grayed out in linear Y scale. Sending the equivalent SCPI command does change the
Scale/Div, though it has no affect while in Lin.
Preset
10.00 dB / Div
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0.10 dB
Max
20 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Scale Type
Chooses a linear or logarithmic vertical scale for the display and for remote data readout.
When Scale Type (Log) is selected, the vertical graticule divisions are scaled in logarithmic units. The top
line of the graticule is the Reference Level and uses the scaling per division Scale/Div to assign values to
the other locations on the graticule.
570
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
When Scale Type (Lin) is selected, the vertical graticule divisions are linearly scaled with the reference
level value at the top of the display and zero volts at the bottom. Each vertical division of the graticule
represents one-tenth of the Reference Level.
The Y Axis Unit used for each type of display is set by pressing Y Axis Unit. The analyzer remembers
separate Y Axis Unit settings for both Log and Lin.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Remote Command
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing?
Example
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC?
Dependencies
If Normalize is on, Scale Type forced to Log and is grayed out.
Couplings
Changing the Scale Type always sets the Y Axis unit to the last unit specified for the current
amplitude scale. In other words, we restore the Y Axis unit setting appropriate per log/lin.
Preset
LOG
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Presel Center
When this key is pressed, the centering of the preselector filter is adjusted to optimize the amplitude
accuracy at the frequency of the selected marker. If the selected marker is not on when Presel Center is
pressed, the analyzer will turn on the selected marker, perform a peak search, and then perform centering
on the marker’s center frequency. If the selected marker is already on and between the start and stop
frequencies of the analyzer, the analyzer performs the preselector calibration on that marker’s frequency.
If the selected marker is already on, but outside the frequency range between Start Freq and Stop Freq,
the analyzer will first perform a peak search, and then perform centering on the marker’s center frequency.
The value displayed on the Presel Adjust key will change to reflect the new preselector tuning (see
Presel Adjust.
A number of considerations should be observed to ensure proper operation. See "Proper Preselector
Operation" on page 572.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter
Example
POW:PCEN
Notes
Note that the rules outlined above under the key description apply for the remote command as well
as the key. The result of the command is dependent on marker position, and so forth. Any message
shown by the key press is also shown in response to the remote command.
Dependencies
• Grayed out if the microwave preselector is off. )
• If the selected marker’s frequency is below Band 1, advisory message 0.5001 is generated and no
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
571
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
action is taken.
• Grayed out if entirely in Band 0. • Blank in models that do not include a preselector, such as option 503. If the SCPI is sent in these
instruments, it is accepted without error, and the query always returns 0.
• Grayed out in the Spectrogram View.
Couplings
The active marker position determines where the centering will be attempted.
If the analyzer s in a measurement such as averaging when centering is initiated, the act of centering
the preselector will restart averaging but the first average trace will not be taken until the centering
is completed.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
When centering the preselector, *OPC will not return true until the process is complete and a
subsequent measurement has completed, nor will results be returned to a READ or MEASure
command.
The Measuring bit should remain set while this command is operating and should not go false until
the subsequent sweep/measurement has completed.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Proper Preselector Operation
A number of considerations should be observed to ensure proper operation:
1. If the selected marker is off, the analyzer will turn on a marker, perform a peak search, and adjust the
preselector using the selected marker’s frequency. It uses the "highest peak" peak search method
unqualified by threshold or excursion, so that there is no chance of a ‘no peak found’ error. It continues
with that peak, even if it is the peak of just noise. Therefore, for this operation to work properly, there
should be a signal on screen in a preselected range for the peak search to find.
2. If the selected marker is already on, the analyzer will attempt the centering at that marker’s frequency. There is no preselector for signals below about 3.6 GHz, therefore if the marker is on a signal below 3.6
GHz, no centering will be attempted and an advisory message generated
3. In some models, the preselector can be bypassed. If it is bypassed, no centering will be attempted in
that range and a message will be generated.
Preselector Adjust
Allows you to manually adjust the preselector filter frequency to optimize its response to the signal of
interest. This function is only available when "Presel Center" on page 571 is available.
For general purpose signal analysis, using Presel Center is recommended. Centering the filter minimizes
the impact of long-term preselector drift. Presel Adjust can be used instead to manually optimize the
preselector. One application of manual optimization would be to peak the preselector response, which
both optimizes the signal-to-noise ratio and minimizes amplitude variations due to small (short-term)
preselector drifting.
572
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust <freq>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust?
Example
POW:PADJ 100KHz
POW:PADJ?
Notes
The value on the key reads out to 0.1 MHz resolution.
Dependencies
• Grayed out if microwave preselector is off. )
• Grayed out if entirely in Band 0. • Blank in models that do not include a preselector, such as option 503. If the SCPI is sent in these
instruments, it is accepted without error, and the query always returns 0.
• Grayed out in the Spectrogram View.
Preset
0 MHz
State Saved
The Presel Adjust value set by Presel Center, or by manually adjusting Presel Adjust, is not saved in
instrument state, and does not survive a Preset or power cycle.
Min
–500 MHz
Max
500 MHz
Default Unit
Hz
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PADJust
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MMW:PADJust
PSA had multiple preselectors, but the X-Series has only one. These commands simply alias to
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector MWAVe | MMWave | EXTernal
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector?
Notes
PSA had multiple preselectors, and you could select which preselector to adjust. Since the X-Series
has only one mm/uW preselector, the preselector selection softkey is no longer available. However, to provide backward compatibility, we accept the legacy remote commands.
The command form has no effect, the query always returns MWAVe
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Y Axis Unit
Displays the menu keys that enable you to change the vertical (Y) axis amplitude unit. The analyzer retains
the entered Y Axis Unit separately for both Log and Lin amplitude scale types. For example, if Scale Type
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
573
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
has been set to Log, and you set Y Axis Unit to dBm, pressing Scale Type (Log) sets the Y Axis Unit to dBm. If
Scale Type has been set to Lin and you set Y Axis Unit to V, pressing Scale Type (Lin) sets the Y Axis Unit to
V. Pressing Scale Type (Log) again sets the Y axis unit back to dBm.
The units of current (A, dBmA, dBuA) are calculated based on 50 ohms input impedance.
All four of the EMI units (dBµA/m, dBµV/m, dBG, dBpT) are treated by the instrument exactly as though
they were dBuV. The user must load an appropriate correction factor using Amplitude Corrections for
accurate and meaningful results.
If a SCPI command is sent to the analyzer that uses one of the EMI units as a terminator, the analyzer
treats it as though DBUV had been sent as the terminator.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Mode
SA
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
:UNIT:POWer DBM | DBMV | DBMA | V | W | A | DBUV | DBUA | DBPW | DBUVM
| DBUAM | DBPT | DBG
:UNIT:POWer?
Example
UNIT:POW dBmV
UNIT:POW?
Notes
The Y axis unit has either logarithmic or linear characteristics. The set of units that is logarithmic
consists of dBm, dBmV, dBmA, dBµV, dBµA, dBµV/m, dBµA/m, dBpT, and dBG. The set of units that
are linear consists of V, W, and A. The chosen unit will determine how the reference level and all the
amplitude-related outputs like trace data, marker data, etc. read out.
Notes
The settings of Y Axis Unit and Scale Type, affect how the data is read over the remote interface.
When using the remote interface no unit is returned, so you must know what the Y axis unit is to
interpret the results:
Example 1, set the following:
Scale Type (Log)
Y Axis Unit, dBm
Scale/Div, 1 dB
Ref Level, 10 dBm
This sets the top line to 10 dBm with each vertical division representing 1 dB. Thus, if a point on
trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top, it represents 5 dBm and will read out remotely as 5.
Example 2, set the following:
Scale Type (Lin)
Y Axis Unit, Volts
Ref Level, 100 mV (10 mV/div)
This sets the top line to 100 mV and the bottom line to 0 V, so each vertical division represents 10
mV. Thus, if a point on trace 1 is on the fifth graticule line from the top, it represents 50 mV and will
read out remotely as 50.
Dependencies
574
If an amplitude correction with an Antenna Unit other than None is applied and enabled, then that
antenna unit is forced and the key with that unit is the only Y Axis Unit available. All other Y Axis Unit
keys are grayed out. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
If an amplitude correction with an Antenna Unit other than None is applied and enabled, and you then
turn off that correction or set Apply Corrections to No, the Y Axis Unit that existed before the Antenna
Unit was applied is restored.
Couplings
The analyzer retains the entered Y Axis Unit separately for both Log and Lin amplitude scale types
Preset
dBm for log scale, V for linear. The true ‘preset’ value is dBm, since at preset the Y Scale type is set to
logarithmic.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback line
1-of-N selection
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00, A.04.00, A.11.00
dBm
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBm.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBM
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBm
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBmV
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBmV.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBMV
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBmV
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBmA
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBmA.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBMA
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
575
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBmA
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
W
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to watt.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW W
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
W
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
V
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to volt.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW V
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON.
Readback
V
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
A
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to Ampere.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW A
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
A
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
576
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
dBµV
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµV.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBUV
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBµV
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBµA
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA.
The unit dBuA can also appear as an Antenna Unit. This will be used by customers using current probes,
because current probes are often supplied with conversion tables that provide the transducer factors.
When dBuA is used as an Antenna Unit the normal conversion from power to amps for dBuA (based on the
analyzer input impedance) is not done, but instead the conversion is based solely on the Correction that
contains the transducer factors. This is what distinguishes dBuA as a normal unit from dBuA as an antenna
unit. When querying the Y-Axis unit, you can query the Antenna Unit to distinguish between regular dBuA
and the dBuA antenna unit. If :CORR:CSET:ANT? returns NOC (for No Conversion), you are using a normal
Y Axis dBuA. If it returns UA you are using an Antenna Unit dBuA.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBUA
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBµA
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBpW
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBpW.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBPW
Dependencies
Grayed out if an Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is ON. Readback
dBµA
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
577
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Antenna Unit
When a Correction is turned on that uses an Antenna Unit, the Y Axis Unit changes to that Antenna Unit. All
of the keys in the Y-Axis Unit menu are then greyed out, except the Antenna Unit key. The unit being used is
shown on this key and is shown as selected in the submenu.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback line
Currently selected unit
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
None
This is selected if no Antenna Unit is currently on, however you cannot actually set this value, since it is
always grayed out. The key is included simply to provide an indication on the Readback line of the Antenna
Unit key when there is no Antenna Unit selected.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Readback
“None”
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
dBµV/m
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµV/m. This is an antenna unit, and
this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the
other Antenna Units are grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBUVM
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback
dBµV/m
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBµA/m
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA/m. This is an antenna unit, and
this key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the
other Antenna Units are grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBUAM
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on.
578
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Readback
dBµA/m
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBpΤ
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBpT. This is an antenna unit, and this
key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the
other Antenna Units are grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBPT
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on. Readback
dBpT
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBG
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBG. This is an antenna unit, and this
key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the
other Antenna Units are grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBG
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on.
Readback
dBG
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBµA
Sets the amplitude unit for the selected amplitude scale (log/lin) to dBµA. This is an antenna unit, and this
key is grayed out unless a Correction with this Antenna Unit selected is ON. If this is the case, all of the
other Antenna Units are grayed out.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Y Axis Unit, Antenna Unit
Example
UNIT:POW DBUAM
Dependencies
Grayed out if no Amplitude Correction with an Antenna Unit is on.
Readback
dBµA
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
579
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Reference Level Offset
Adds an offset value to the displayed reference level. The reference level is the absolute amplitude
represented by the top graticule line on the display.
See "More Information" on page 580
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Mode
SA
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet?
Example
DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV:OFFS 12.7
Sets the Ref Level Offset to 12.7 dB. The only valid suffix is dB. If no suffix is sent, dB will be assumed.
Preset
0 dBm
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
The range for Ref Lvl Offset is variable. It is limited to values that keep the reference level within the
range of –327.6 dB to 327.6 dB.
Max
327.6 dB
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
1. In pre-X-Series instruments, Ref Level Offset could not be adjusted by the knob or step keys. That
is no longer the case.
2. In ESA and PSA, Ref Level Offset was applied to the data as it was acquired; thus if the Offset
changed the new offset was not applied until new trace data was taken. In X-Series, the offset is
applied as the data is displayed/queried, so if you change the offset, it will change the data
immediately.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.04.00
More Information
Offsets are used when gain or loss occurs between a device under test and the analyzer input. Thus, the
signal level measured by the analyzer may be thought of as the level at the input of an external amplitude
conversion device. Entering an offset does not affect the trace position or attenuation value, just the value
of the top line of the display and the values represented by the trace data. Thus, the values of exported
trace data, queried trace data, marker amplitudes, trace data used in calculations such as N dB points,
trace math, peak threshold, and so forth, are all affected by Ref Level Offset.
Changing the offset causes the analyzer to immediately stop the current sweep and prepare to begin a new
sweep, but the data will not change until the trace data updates, because the offset is applied to the data as
it is taken. If a trace is exported with a nonzero Ref Level Offset, the exported data will contain the trace
data with the offset applied.
The maximum reference level available is dependent on the reference level offset. That is, Ref Level - Ref
Level Offset must be in the range –170 to +30 dBm. For example, the reference level value range can be
580
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
initially set to values from –170 dBm to 30 dBm with no reference level offset. If the reference level is first
set to –20 dBm, then the reference level offset can be set to values of –150 to +50 dB.
If the reference level offset is first set to –30 dB, then the reference level can be set to values of –200 dBm
to 0 dBm. In this case, the reference level is “clamped” at 0 dBm because the maximum limit of +30 dBm is
reached with a reference level setting of 0 dBm with an offset of –30 dB. If instead, the reference level
offset is first set to 30 dB, then the reference level can be set to values of –140 to +60 dBm.
µW Path Control
The µW Path Control functions include the µW Preselector Bypass (Option MPB) and Low Noise Path
(Option LNP) controls in the High Band path circuits.
When the µW Preselector is bypassed, the user has better flatness, but will be subject to spurs from out of
band interfering signals. When the Low Noise Path is enabled, the analyzer automatically switches around
certain circuitry in the high frequency bands which can contribute to noise, when it is appropriate based on
other analyzer settings.
For most applications, the preset state is Standard Path, which gives the best remote-control throughput,
minimizes acoustic noise from switching and minimizes the risk of wear out in the hardware switches. For
applications that utilize the wideband IF paths, the preset state is the µW Preselector Bypass path, if
option MPB is present. This is because, when using a wideband IF such as the 140 MHz IF, the µW
Preselector’s bandwidth can be narrower than the available IF bandwidth, causing degraded amplitude
flatness and phase linearity, so it is desirable to bypass the preselector in the default case.
Selecting the Low Noise Path Enable option provides a lower noise floor, especially in the 21–26.5 GHz
region, though without improving many measures of dynamic range, and without giving the best possible
noise floor. The preamp, if purchased and used, gives better noise floor than does the Low Noise Path,
however its compression threshold and third-order intercept are much poorer than that of the non-preamp
Low Noise Path. There are some applications, typically for signals around −30 dBm, for which the thirdorder dynamic range of the standard path is good enough, but the noise floor is not low enough even with 0
dB input attenuation. When the third-order dynamic range of the preamp path is too little and the noise
floor of the standard path is too high, the Low Noise Path can provide the best dynamic range.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Mode
SA, BASIC, PNOISE, VSA , LTE, LTETDD
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH STD|LNPath|MPBypass|FULL
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH?
Example
:POW:MW:PATH LNP Enables the Low Noise path
Notes
If a Presel Center is performed, the analyzer will momentarily switch to the Standard Path,
regardless of the setting of µW Path Control
The DC Block is always switched in when the low noise path is switched in, to protect succeeding
circuitry from DC. Note that this does not mean “when the low noise path is enabled” but when,
based on the Low Noise Path rules, the path is actually switched in. This can happen when the
selection is Low Noise Path Enable . In the case where the DC Block is switched in the analyzer is
now AC coupled. However, if you have selected DC coupling, the UI will still behave as though it
were DC coupled, including all annunciation, warnings, status bits, and responses to SCPI queries. This is because, based on other settings, the analyzer could switch out the low noise path at any time
and hence go back to being DC coupled.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
581
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Alignment switching ignores the settings in this menu, and restores them when finished.
Dependencies
Preset
Unavailable in BBIQ and External Mixing
l
l
All modes other than IQ Analyzer mode and VXA: STD
IQ Analyzer, VXA and WLAN mode: l
MPB option present and licensed: MPB
l
MPB option not present and licensed: STD
State Saved
Save in instrument state
Readback
Value selected in the submenu
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.10.00
Standard Path
This path gives the best remote-control throughput, minimizes acoustic noise from switching and
minimizes the risk of wear in the hardware switches, particularly in remote test scenarios where both low
band and high band setups will follow in rapid succession. In this path, the bypass of the low band/high band switch and microwave preamp is never activated, which
can cause some noise degradation but preserves the life of the bypass switch.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, µW Path Control
Example
:POW:MW:PATH STD Readback Text
Standard Path
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
µW Preselector Bypass
This key toggles the preselector bypass switch for band 1 and higher. When the microwave presel is on,
the signal path is preselected. When the microwave preselector is off, the signal path is not preselected.
The preselected path is the normal path for the analyzer.
The preselector is a tunable bandpass filter which prevents signals away from the frequency of interest
from combining in the mixer to generate in-band spurious signals (images). The consequences of using a
preselector filter are its limited bandwidth, the amplitude and phase ripple in its passband, and any
amplitude and phase instability due to center frequency drift.
Option MPB or pre-selector bypass provides an unpreselected input mixer path for certain X-Series signal
analyzers with frequency ranges above 3.6 GHz. This signal path allows a wider bandwidth and less
amplitude variability, which is an advantage when doing modulation analysis and broadband signal
analysis. The disadvantage is that, without the preselector, image signals will be displayed. Another
disadvantage of bypassing the preselector is increased LO emission levels at the front panel input port.
582
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, µW Path Control
Example
:POW:MW:PATH MPB
Dependencies
Key is blanked if current mode does not support it.
Key is grayed out if mode supports it but current measurement does not support it.
Key is blank unless Option MPB is present and licensed. If SCPI command sent when MPB not
present, error –241, "Hardware missing; Option not installed" is generated.
Readback Text
µW Preselector Bypass
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PRESelector[:STATe] ON|OFF|0|1
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MW:PRESelector[:STATe]?
Example
:POW:MW:PRES OFF
Bypasses the microwave preselector
Notes
The ON parameter sets the STD path (:POW:MW:PATH STD)
The OFF parameter sets path MPB (:POW:MW:PATH MPB)
Preset
ON
Internal Preamp
Accesses a menu of keys that control the internal preamps. Turning on the preamp gives a better noise
figure, but a poorer TOI to noise floor dynamic range. You can optimize this setting for your particular
measurement.
The instrument takes the preamp gain into account as it sweeps. If you sweep outside of the range of the
preamp the instrument will also account for that. The displayed result will always reflect the correct gain.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]?
Dependencies
Preamp is not available on all hardware platforms. If the preamp is not present or is unlicensed, the
key is not shown.
The preamp is not available when the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
583
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN:BAND LOW|FULL
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN:BAND?
Dependencies
Preamp is not available on all hardware platforms. If the preamp is not present or is unlicensed, the
key is not shown.
If a POW:GAIN:BAND FULL command is sent when a low band preamp is available, the preamp band
parameter is to LOW instead of FULL, and an "Option not installed" message is generated.
Preset
LOW
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Off
Turns the internal preamp off
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp
Example
:POW:GAIN OFF
Readback
Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Low Band
Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band.
The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band preamp is displayed in square brackets on the
Low Band key label.
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp
Example
:POW:GAIN ON
:POW:GAIN:BAND LOW
Readback
Low Band
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Full Range
Sets the internal preamp to use its full range. The low band (0–3.6 GHz or 0–3GHz, depending on the
model) is supplied by the low band preamp and the frequencies above low band are supplied by the high
band preamp.
The frequency range of the installed (optional) preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Full Range
key label. If the high band option is not installed the Full Range key does not appear.
584
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
AMPTD Y Scale
Key Path
AMPTD Y Scale, Internal Preamp
Example
:POW:GAIN ON
:POW:GAIN:BAND FULL
Readback
Full Range
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
585
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Auto Couple
Auto Couple
The Auto Couple feature provides a quick and convenient way to automatically couple multiple instrument
settings. This helps ensure accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range. When the Auto Couple
feature is activated, either from the front panel or remotely, all parameters of the current measurement
that have an Auto/Manual mode are set to Auto mode and all measurement settings dependent on (or
coupled to) the Auto/Man parameters are automatically adjusted for optimal performance.
However, the Auto Couple key actions are confined to the current measurement only. It does not affect
other measurements in the mode, and it does not affect markers, marker functions, or trace or display
attributes.
For more details, see "More Information" on page 586 below.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Remote Command
:COUPle ALL|NONE
Example
:COUP ALL
Notes
:COUPle ALL puts all Auto/Man parameters in Auto mode (equivalent to pressing the Auto Couple
key).
:COUPLE NONE puts all Auto/Man parameters in manual mode. It decouples all the coupled
instrument parameters and is not recommended for making measurements.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
There are two types of functions that have Auto/Manual modes, as described below:
Auto/Man Active Function keys
An Auto/Man toggle key controls the binary state associated with an instrument parameter by toggling
between Auto (where the parameter is automatically coupled to the other parameters it is dependent
upon) and Man (where the parameter is controlled independent of the other parameters), as well as
making the parameter the active function. The current mode is indicated on the softkey with either Auto or
Man underlined as illustrated below.
Auto/Man 1-of-N keys
An Auto/Man 1-of-N key allows you to manually pick from a list of parameter values, or place the function
in Auto, in which case the value is automatically selected (and indicated) as shown below. If in Auto, Auto is
underlined on the calling key. If in manual operation, manual is indicated on the calling key. But the calling
key does not actually toggle the function, it simply opens the menu.
586
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Auto Couple
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
587
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
BW
The BW key opens the bandwidth menu, which contains keys to control the Resolution Bandwidth and
Video Bandwidth functions of the instrument.
The Resolution BW functions control filter bandwidth and filter type. There are two filter types, Gaussian
and Flattop. The Gaussian filters have a response curve that is parabolic on a log scale. The Flattop filter
shape is a close approximation of a rectangular filter.
The AVERAGE functions, which appeared in the BW menu in earlier analyzers, can now be found in the
Trace/Detector menu and the Meas Setup menu. In the Trace/Detector menu, you may turn Trace
Averaging on or off for the desired traces (rather than globally as in the past); and in the Meas Setup menu
you may configure Averaging, by setting the Average Number and the Average Type.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In previous analyzers, the BW hardkey was labeled “BW/Avg” and included menu keys to control the
averaging behavior of the instrument, which was global.
In the X-Series, averaging is performed on a trace-by-trace basis, with a corresponding impact on
the SCPI functions. A backwards compatibility command ([:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe]) is provided to
preserve the old global behavior. See the section "Trace/Detector" on page 1264 for details.
The control for the Average number is now found in the Meas Setup menu. See the section "Meas
Setup" on page 794 for details.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Res BW
Activates the resolution bandwidth active function, which allows you to manually set the resolution
bandwidth (RBW) of the analyzer. Normally, Res BW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the Res BW to
Span using the ratio set by the Span:3 dB RBW key. To decouple the resolution bandwidth, press Res BW
until Man is underlined, or simply enter a different value for Res BW.
See "More Information" on page 589
Key Path
BW
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <freq>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]?
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO?
Example
BAND 1 KHZ
BAND?
BWID:AUTO ON
BWID:AUTO?
Notes
588
For numeric entries, all RBW Types choose the nearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
available RBW to the value entered.
The setting and querying of values depends on the current bandwidth type.
Dependencies
When in Zero Span with no EMI Standard selected, there is no Auto setting for Res BW. The
Auto/Man line on the Res BW softkey disappears in this case, and if the SCPI command
[:SENSe]:BWID[:RESolution]:AUTO ON is sent, it generates a message.
While using the Tracking Generator, you must make sure the Start Frequency is high enough to avoid
capturing LO feedthrough in the trace. How high you must make the Start Frequency to avoid this
will depend on the RBW you have set. The analyzer displays a condition warning message if the Start
Frequency falls below roughly 2.5 times the current RBW. The warning is “Source Uncal;adj Start
Freq|RBW|Points”. When you see this warning, you should increase the Start Freq, narrow the RBW,
or increase the number of Sweep Points. Couplings
Res BW is normally coupled to Span; if Res BW is set to Auto, as the Span decreases, so will the Res
BW. Normally, in Zero Span, this coupling is turned off and Res BW has no Auto setting.
When a CISPR or MIL EMI Standard is in use, the Res BW is coupled to Center Frequency and not to
Span, and this is true even in Zero Span.
Sweep time is coupled to RBW when in a non-zero span. If Sweep Time is set to Auto, then the
sweep time is changed as the RBW changes, to maintain amplitude calibration.
Video bandwidth (VBW) is normally coupled to RBW. If VBW is set to Auto, then the VBW is changed
as the RBW changes, to maintain the ratio set by VBW:3 dB RBW. See the "VBW:3dB RBW " on
page 591"VBW:3dB RBW " on page 591 key description.
Preset
3 MHz
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
1 Hz
Max
8 MHz is the max equivalent –3 dB RBW, which means that the named RBW (the one shown on the
key etc) can actually exceed 8 MHz if using a filter other than –3 dB Gaussian
Default Unit
Hz
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
For backwards compatibility this command obeys both the BANDwidth and BWIDth forms.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
For ESA, the maximum Res BW was 5 MHz; on X-Series it is 8 MHz.
More Information
When the Res BW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by pressing the Res BW
key until Auto is underlined. This may also be done by pressing Auto Couple or by performing a Preset.
When Res BW is set to Auto, the bandwidth selected depends on the Filter Type (see “Filter Type” below).
Only certain discrete resolution bandwidths are available. The available bandwidths are dependent on the
Filter Type or the EMC Standard. If an unavailable bandwidth is entered with the numeric keypad, the
closest available bandwidth is selected.
The zero-span case deserves some mention, because RBW is coupled to Span when in a swept (non-zero)
span and in zero span there is normally no meaningful RBW coupling in Zero Span. However, when a MIL or
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
589
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
CISPR EMC Standard is selected, there IS a meaningful coupling for RBW in Zero Span – in fact, it is
coupled to Center Frequency, in order to make measurements according to the EMI specifications.
The annotation under RBW in the bottom left of the screen shows the type of filter or bandwidth that is
being used. The following examples illustrate this:
–3 dB (Normal) filter BW: Res BW 300 Hz
–6 dB filter BW: Res BW (–6 dB) 422 Hz
Noise filter BW: Res BW (Noise) 317 Hz
Impulse filter BW: Res BW (Impulse) 444 Hz
CISPR filter BW :Res BW (CISPR) 200 Hz
MIL filter BW:Res BW (MIL) 1 kHz
Flattop filter type:Res BW (Flattop) 300 Hz
Video BW
Lets you change the analyzer post-detection filter (VBW or “video bandwidth”) from 1 Hz to 8 MHz in
approximately 10% steps. In addition, a wide-open video filter bandwidth may be chosen by selecting 50
MHz. The VBW is annotated at the bottom of the display, in the center.
An * is displayed next to the VBW annotation when certain detector types (Average, EMI Average, Quasi
Peak, and RMS Average) are in use. This is because the VBW filter is out of the circuit for these detectors
and does not affect any traces which use them. If there is any active trace using one of these detectors the
* is displayed. See "Annotation Examples" on page 591.
Normally, Video BW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the Video BW filter to the resolution bandwidth
filter using the ratio set by the VBW:3 dB RBW key. To decouple the video bandwidth, press Video BW until
Man is underlined, or simply enter a new value.
When the Video BW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by pressing the Video
BW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be done by pressing Auto Couple or by performing a Preset.
Key Path
BW
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <freq>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo?
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO?
Example
590
BAND:VID 1 KHZ
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
BAND:VID?
BWID:VID:AUTO ON
BWID:VID:AUTO?
Notes
For numeric entries, the analyzer chooses the nearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up)
available VBW to the value entered. The 50 MHz VBW is defined to mean “wide open”.
The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset.
Dependencies
Sometimes the displayed Video BW is not actually used to process the trace data:
• When the Average Detector is selected and Sweep Type is set to Swept, the video bandwidth
filter cannot be used, because it uses the same hardware as the Average Detector. • When the Quasi-Peak, EMI Average or RMS Average detector is selected the VBW is
implemented by the digital IF as part of the detector
When this is the case, the VBW still acts to change the Sweep Time, if Sweep Time is in Auto, and
still affects the data on other traces for which this is not the case.
Preset
3 MHz
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
1 Hz
Max
50 MHz
Default Unit
Hz
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
For backwards compatibility this command obeys both the BANDwidth and BWIDth forms.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
Annotation Examples
All active traces using VBW One or more active traces not using VBW
VBW:3dB RBW
Selects the ratio between the video bandwidth and the equivalent 3 dB resolution bandwidth to be used for
setting VBW when VBW is in Auto.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
591
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
VBW:3dB RBW (Auto) selects automatic coupling of the VBW:3 dB RBW ratio to Detector using the rules
described below in "Auto Rules" on page 592. To decouple the ratio, press VBW:3 dB RBW until Man is
underlined, or simply enter a new value.
When the VBW:3dB RBW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by pressing the
VBW:3 dB RBW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be done by pressing Auto Couple or by
performing a Preset.
Key Path
BW
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <real>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio?
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO?
Example
BAND:VID:RAT 2
BAND:VID:RAT?
BAND:VID:RAT:AUTO 0
BAND:VID:RAT:AUTO?
Notes
The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset.
Couplings
See “Coupling Auto Rules”
Preset
1
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0.00001
Max
3000000
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
For backwards compatibility this command obeys both the BANDwidth and BWIDth forms.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
Auto Rules
The Auto Rules for the VBW:3dB RBW function follow.
First, if Source Mode is set to “Tracking”: Use 1.0
Otherwise, we go through the following list of detector numbers and find the lowest numbered detector
being used on any active traces (traces for which Update is On):
1. Peak
2. Normal
3. Average
4. Sample
592
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
5. Negative Peak
6. EMI Average
7. Quasi Peak
8. RMS Average
Use that detector to pick the ratio based on the following criteria:
1. If the detector is Peak and the EMC Standard is set to either CISPR or MIL, use 10.0 (we use wide VBWs
to capture peak levels accurately).
2. Otherwise, if the detector is Negative Peak, use 1.0 (in the Negative Peak case, there are no known
significant use models so we use a medium ratio).
3. Otherwise, if the detector is Normal, use 1.0.
4. Otherwise, if the detector is Average, and the span in nonzero, use 0.1. The use of a small ratio in
Average detection is desirable because of its effect on the sweep time equations. The VBW filter is not
actually in-circuit when the average detector is on. If the detector is Average, and the span is zero, use
10.0, which gives optimal behavior for Interval Markers in zero span.
5. Otherwise, if the detector is EMI Average, Quasi Peak or RMS Average, use 10.0. In fact this is a “don’t
care” since no VBW is used for these detectors, as noted under “Dependencies” for the VBW key
6. Otherwise, the detector is simply Peak or Sample. These two detectors can use the same rules. In these
cases, if any active trace is in max hold or min hold, use 10.0, because Max and Min Hold operations will
usually be intended to capture peaks and pits without smoothing from the VBW filter; otherwise, use 1.0
as a compromise, because you have not set the analyzer in a way that implies that you are measuring
noise, pulsed-RF or CW signals, and for backward compatibility with earlier analyzers.
Note that because the above couplings depend on which traces are active, they are re-examined
whenever any trace goes active or inactive, except when this leaves no traces active. Transitioning to the
state where no traces are active should not affect the couplings; in that way, the annotation will always
reflect the state of the last trace which was active.
Span:3dB RBW
Selects the ratio between span and resolution bandwidth.
Normally, Span:3dB RBW (Auto) selects a Span:3 dB RBW ratio of 106:1. If you manually enter the ratio,
Man will become underlined, which enables you to manually select ratios more suitable for certain
measurements.
When the Span:3dB RBW is manually selected, it may be returned to the coupled state by pressing the
Span:3dB RBW key until Auto is underlined. This may also be done by pressing Auto Couple or by
performing a Preset.
Key Path
BW
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio <integer>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio?
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio:AUTO OFF | ON | 0
| 1
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
593
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:BANDwidth[:RESolution]:RATio:AUTO?
Example
FREQ:SPAN:BAND:RAT 200 sets a ratio of 200:1, and turns off the auto coupling.
FREQ:SPAN:BAND:RAT:AUTO ON
FREQ:SPAN:BAND:RAT?
Notes
The values shown in this table reflect the conditions after a Mode Preset.
Dependencies
Grayed out when the EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL, since RBW is coupled to Center
Frequency rather than Span in this case.
If the grayed out key is pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is
sent, the command is acted upon, but it doesn’t affect the current measurement.
Preset
106
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
2
Max
10000
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
RBW Control
Selects the type/shape for the resolution bandwidth filters. Historically, the Res BW filters in Agilent
spectrum analyzers were Gaussian filters, specified using the –3 dB bandwidth of the filter. That is, a 10
MHz Res BW filter was a Gaussian shape with its –3 dB points 10 MHz apart. In the X-Series you can, using
the Filter BW key, specify bandwidths other than the –3 dB bandwidth (–6 dB, Noise, Impulse) for the width
of the Gaussian filters. Furthermore, the Filter BW menu lets you choose between a Gaussian and Flat Top
filter shape, for varying measurement conditions.
Key Path
BW
Dependencies
The RBW Control key is grayed out if the EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL. In this case the Filter
Type is always Gaussian; the Filter BW is chosen as appropriate for the filter and the standard.
Readback line
[<filter type>] or, if Filter Type is Gaussian, [Gaussian,<filter BW>]
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
Filter Type
Besides the familiar Gaussian filter shape, there are certain special filter types, such as Flat Top, that are
desirable under certain conditions. The Filter Type menu gives you control over these types.
See "More Information" on page 595
Key Path
BW, RBW Control
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:SHAPe GAUSsian|FLATtop
594
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:SHAPe?
Example
BAND:SHAP GAUS
Notes
GAUSsian= Gaussian
FLATtop = Flattop
Dependencies
When EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL, the Filter Type is always Gaussian. Any attempt to set it
to Flattop will give an error.
Preset
Auto Couple chooses the preset value
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback line
1-of-N selection
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
More Information
Gaussian filters
When the Gaussian filter type is chosen, a set of 160 RBW filters are available whose shape is
approximately Gaussian. The actual bandwidths used to realize the X-Series’ Gaussian filters are chosen
to come as close as possible to a 24 step per decade series, within the limitations of the digital IF.
For Gaussian filters, the annotation at the bottom of the screen shows the filter bandwidth type (unless it is
Normal). This will be shown parenthetically between the words “Res BW” and the value, for example
Res BW 10.0 Hz (Normal bandwidth)
Res BW (Impulse) 14.8 Hz (Impulse bandwidth)
Flattop filters
When the Flattop filter type is chosen, a new set of 134 RBW hardware settings are available. These
settings realize filters that are approximately rectangular in shape. When this shape is chosen the filter
bandwidth options are irrelevant and therefore unavailable.
The annotation at the bottom of the screen will show that the Flattop shape is being used, for example:
Res BW (Flattop) 10 Hz
Gaussian
Selects the Gaussian filter type. There are 160 of these RBWs. They are arranged in a 24-per-decade
sequence from 1 Hz through 3 MHz, plus the 4, 5, 6 and 8 MHz settings.
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter Type
Example
BAND:SHAP GAUS
Notes
Parameter is GAUSsian. See remote command in section "Filter Type " on page 594.
Readback
Gaussian
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
595
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
Flattop
Selects the flat top filter type
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter Type
Example
BAND:SHAP FLAT
Readback
Flattop
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Filter BW
When using the Gaussian filters for certain types of applications it can be useful to be able to specify the
filter width using points other than the –3 dB points. The Filter BW function allows you to pick the filter
based on its –3 dB (Normal) bandwidth, its –6 dB bandwidth, its Noise bandwidth, or its Impulse
bandwidth.Note that in all four cases the –3 dB bandwidth is the same. The filter does not change, but the
way you specify it changes.
See "More Information" on page 596
Key Path
BW, RBW Control
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:TYPE DB3|DB6|IMPulse|NOISe
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:TYPE?
Example
BAND:TYPE NOIS
Notes
DB3 = –3 dB (Normal)
DB6 = –6 dB
IMPulse = Impulse
NOISe = Noise
Dependencies
Grayed out if the Flattop filter type is selected.
When EMC Standard is set to CISPR or MIL, the Filter BW key is greyed out and the readback
annotation on the key is blanked. This is because the Filter BW is chosen as appropriate for the filter
and the standard and not selected by this key.Any attempt to set it otherwise will give an error.
Preset
Auto Couple chooses the preset value
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback line
1-of-N selection
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.02.00
More Information
The analyzer provides four ways of specifying the bandwidth of a Gaussian filter:
596
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
1. The –3 dB bandwidth of the filter
2. The –6 dB bandwidth of the filter
3. The equivalent Noise bandwidth of the filter, which is defined as the bandwidth of a rectangular filter
with the same peak gain which would pass the same power for noise signals.
4. The equivalent Impulse bandwidth of the filter, which is defined as the bandwidth of a rectangular filter
with the same peak gain which would pass the same power for impulsive (narrow pulsed) signals.
The figure below shows the relationships of the various filter bandwidths for filters with the X-Series’ shape
factor (shape factor is defined as the ratio of the –60 dB bandwidth to the – 3 dB bandwidth):
The Filter Type menu lets you choose the filter bandwidth (–3 dB, –6 dB, Noise or Impulse) that will be used
when specifying the width of the filter. Note that for a given Gaussian filter, changing the filter bandwidth
specification does not affect the filter width at all but only the means of specifying it. For example, the filter
whose –3 dB bandwidth is 1.0 kHz is the same as the filter whose –6 dB bandwidth is 1.41 kHz, whose
Noise bandwidth is 1.06 kHz, and whose Impulse bandwidth is 1.48 kHz. As you cycle through these
various filter bandwidths the filter does not change, but the way the filter is annotated and the value which
appears in the active function area and on the softkey does.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
597
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
BW
–3 dB (Normal)
Selects the normal Gaussian-shaped bandwidths that are defined by their –3 dB bandwidths.
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter BW
Example
BAND:TYPE DB3
Readback
–3 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
–6 dB
Selects the filter bandwidths where the bandwidth is defined at the –6 dB points. This uses the normal
RBW filters, but the value displayed on the key, active function line and screen annotation changes to
reflect the –6 dB bandwidth instead of the –3 dB bandwidth.
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter BW
Example
BAND:TYPE DB6
Readback
–6 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Noise
Selects the noise filter bandwidths. This uses the normal RBW filters, but the value displayed on the key,
active function line and screen annotation changes to reflect the equivalent noise bandwidth, instead of
the –3 dB bandwidth.
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter BW
Example
BAND:TYPE NOIS
Readback
Noise
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Impulse
Selects the impulse bandwidths. This uses the normal RBW filters, but the value displayed on the key,
active function line and screen annotation changes to reflect the equivalent impulse bandwidth instead of
the –3 dB bandwidth.
Key Path
BW, RBW Control, Filter BW
Example
BAND:TYPE IMP
Readback
Impulse
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
598
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)
Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)
Sets the analyzer for Continuous measurement operation. The single/continuous state is Meas Global so
the setting will affect all measurements. If you are Paused, pressing Cont does a Resume.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Remote Command
:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1
:INITiate:CONTinuous?
Example
:INIT:CONT 0 puts analyzer in Single measurement operation.
:INIT:CONT 1 puts analyzer in Continuous measurement operation
Preset
ON
(Note that SYST:PRESet sets INIT:CONT to ON but *RST sets INIT:CONT to OFF)
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
For Spectrum Analysis mode in ESA and PSA, there is no Cont hardkey, instead there is a Sweep
Single/Cont key. In these analyzers, switching the Sweep Single/Cont key from Single to Cont
restarts averages (displayed average count reset to 1), but does not restart Max Hold and Min Hold.
The X-Series has Single and Cont keys in place of the SweepSingleCont key. In the X-Series, if in
single measurement, the Cont key (and INIT:CONT ON ) switches to continuous measurement, but
never restarts a measurement and never resets a sweep.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
In Swept SA Measurement (Spectrum Analysis Mode):
l
The analyzer takes repetitive sweeps, averages, measurements, etc., when in Continuous mode.
When the average count reaches the Average/Hold Number the count stops incrementing, but the
analyzer keeps sweeping. See the Trace/Detector section for the averaging formula used both before
and after the Average/Hold Number is reached. The trigger condition must be met prior to each sweep.
The type of trace processing for multiple sweeps, is set under the Trace/Detector key, with choices of
Trace Average, Max Hold, or Min Hold.
In Other Measurements/Modes:
l
With Avg/Hold Num (in the Meas Setup menu) set to Off or set to On with a value of 1, a sweep is taken
after the trigger condition is met; and the analyzer continues to take new sweeps after the current
sweep has completed and the trigger condition is again met. However, with Avg/Hold Num set to On
with a value >1, multiple sweeps (data acquisitions) are taken for the measurement. The trigger
condition must be met prior to each sweep. The sweep is not stopped when the average count k equals
the number N set for Avg/Hold Num is reached, but the number k stops incrementing. A measurement
average usually applies to all traces, marker results, and numeric results. But sometimes it only
applies to the numeric results.
If the analyzer is in Single measurement, pressing the Cont key does not change k and does not cause the
sweep to be reset; the only action is to put the analyzer into Continuous measurement operation.
If it is already in continuous sweep:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
599
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Cont (Continuous Measurement/Sweep)
l
l
600
the INIT:CONT 1 command has no effect
the INIT:CONT 0 command places the analyzer in Single Sweep, but has no effect on the current
sequence until k = N, at which point the current sequence stops and the instrument goes into the idle
state.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
File
File
Opens a menu that enables you to access various standard and custom Windows functions. Press any
other front-panel key to exit.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
File Explorer
Opens the standard Windows File Explorer. The File Explorer opensin the My Documents directory for the
current user.
The File Explorer is a separate Windows application, so to return to the analyzer once you are in the File
Explorer, you may either:
Exit the File Explorer by clicking on the red X in the upper right hand corner, with a mouse
Or use Alt-Tab: press and hold the Alt
key and press and release the Tab key until the Analyzer
logo is showing in the window in the center of the screen, as shown above, then release the Alt key.
Key Path
File
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
601
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
File
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Page Setup
The Page Setup key brings up a Windows Page Setup dialog that allows you to control aspects of the
pages sent to the printer when the PRINT hardkey is pressed.
Key Path
File
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Paper size, the printer paper source, the page orientation and the margins are all settable. Just like any
standard Windows dialog, you may navigate the dialog using the front-panel keys, or a mouse. There are
no SCPI commands for controlling these parameters.
Also contained in this dialog is a drop-down control that lets you select the Theme to use when printing.
For more on Themes, see information under View/Display, Display, System Display Settings, Theme. The
Theme control has a corresponding SCPI command.
Parameter Name
Print Themes
Parameter Type
Enum
Mode
All
Remote Command
:SYSTem:PRINt:THEMe TDColor|TDMonochrome|FCOLor|FMONochrome
:SYSTem:PRINt:THEMe?
Example
:SYST:PRIN:THEM FCOL
Setup
:SYSTem:DEFault MISC
Preset
FCOL; not part of Preset, but is reset by Restore Misc Defaults or Restore System Defaults All and
survives subsequent running of the modes.
602
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
File
State Saved
No
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Print
This front-panel key is equivalent to performing a File, Print, OK. It immediately performs the currently
configured Print to the Default printer.
The :HCOPy command is equivalent to pressing the PRINT key. The HCOPy:ABORt command can be used
to abort a print which is already in progress. Sending HCOPy:ABORt will cause the analyzer to stop
sending data to the printer, although the printer may continue or even complete the print, depending on
how much data was sent to the printer before the user sent the ABORt command.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Remote Command
:HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Key Path
SCPI command only
Remote Command
:HCOPy:ABORt
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Restore Down
This key allows you to Restore Down the Instrument Application and reverses the action taken by
Maximize. This key is only visible when the application has been maximized, and after the Restore Down
action has been completed this key is replaced by the Maximize key.
Key Path
File
Mode
All
Notes
No equivalent remote command for this key.
State Saved
No
Initial S/W Revision
A.05.01
Minimize
The Minimize key causes the analyzer display to disappear down into the task bar, allowing you to see the
Windows Desktop. You can use Alt-Tab ( press and hold the Alt
key) to restore the analyzer display.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
key and press and release the Tab
603
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
File
Key Path
File
Mode
All
Notes
No equivalent remote command for this key.
State Saved
No
Initial S/W Revision
A.05.01
Exit
This key, when pressed, will exit the Instrument Application. A dialog box is used to confirm that you
intended to exit the application:
Key Path
File
Mode
All
Notes
The Instrument Application willclose. No further SCPI commands can be sent. Use with caution!
Initial S/W Revision
604
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
FREQ Channel
Accesses a menu of keys that allow you to control the Frequency and Channel parameters of the
instrument.
Some features in the Frequency menu are the same for all measurements – they do not change as you
change measurements. Settings like these are called “Meas Global” and are unaffected by Meas Preset. For example, the Center Freq setting is the same for all measurements - it does not change as you change
measurements. Key Path
Front-panel key
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Zone Center
Zone Center appears as the top key in the Frequency menu in the Trace Zoom View of the Spectrum
Analyzer & RLC Modes.
Zone Center allows you to change the frequency of the zone without changing the zone span. As the zone
center is changed, the center frequency of the lower window is changed. Note that the lower window is not
updated to reflect the change unless it is selected as the active window.
The center frequency for the lower window is not limited by the selected start and stop frequencies in the
upper window. However, if the frequency span of the lower window is at all outside of the span for the
upper window, an orange arrow pointing left or right will be displayed at the left or right edge of the top
window.
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:ZSPan:CENTer <frequency>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:ZSPan:CENTer?
Example
:FREQ:ZSP:CENT 20 MHz
Notes
Min and Max values depend on the Hardware Options (5xx)
Dependencies
Only appears when the Zone Span View of the Swept SA measurement is selected. If the SCPI
command is sent in other Views, an error is generated.
Couplings
Center Frequency of lower window changes so that it is always the same as Zone Center, and viceversa
Affected by Freq Offset exactly the same as is Center Frequency.
Preset
On entry to Zone Span, the Zone Center frequency is the same as the analyzer Center Frequency. So if
you do a Mode Preset and then immediately go into Zone Span, Zone Center matches the Preset
values listed in the table under the Center Freq key description.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
Hardware dependent; Zone Span dependent. Zone Center cannot go so low as to force Zone Left to
be <0.
Max
The maximum Zone Center frequency is the same as the maximum analyzer Center Frequency, which
is basically the instrument maximum frequency minus 5 Hz. See the table under the key description
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
605
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
for "Center Freq" on page 607.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Zoom Center
Zoom Center appears as the top key in the Frequency menu in the Trace Zoom View of the Spectrum
Analyzer Mode.
Zoom Center allows you to change the frequency of the zoom region, and hence of the lower window,
without changing the Zoom Span.
The Zoom Center value is displayed in the lower left corner of the zoom window (below the graticule) when
the frequency entry mode is Center/Span (pressing Center Freq or Span sets the frequency entry mode to
Center/Span). When the frequency entry mode is Start/Stop, Zoom Start is displayed in this lower left
annotation position (pressing Start Freq or Stop Freq sets the frequency entry mode to Start/Stop).
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:TZOom:CENTer <frequency>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:TZOom CENTer?
Example
FREQ:TZO:CENT 20 MHz
Dependencies
Only appears in the Trace Zoom View of the Swept SA measurement. If the SCPI command is sent in
other Views, an error is reported. Couplings
The center frequency for the lower window is limited by the start and stop frequencies in the upper
window. You cannot move the zoom region out of the upper window, nor does changing the Zoom
Center frequency ever change the Zoom Span. When Zoom Center increases or decreases to a
value that causes the zoom region to touch an edge of the top window, the Zoom Center is clipped
at that value. If the analyzer Start and/or Stop frequencies change such that the Zoom Region is
no longer between them, the Zoom Region is moved to the far left or right of the top window as
appropriate.
Affected by Freq Offset exactly the same as is Center Frequency.
Preset
13.255 GHz
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
Start Frequency of top window
Max
The maximum Zoom Center frequency is the same as the maximum analyzer Center Frequency,
which is basically the instrument maximum frequency – 5 Hz. See the table under the Center Freq
key description.
Default Unit
Hz
Initial S/W Revision
A.07.01
Preset
On entry to Trace Zoom, the Zoom Center frequency is the same as the analyzer Center Frequency.
So if you do a Mode Preset and then immediately go into Trace Zoom, Zoom Center matches the
Preset values listed in the table under the Center Freq key description.
606
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Auto Tune
Auto Tune appears as the top key in the Frequency menu in the Normal and Spectrogram views of the
Spectrum Analyzer Mode.
Auto Tune is an immediate action key. When it is pressed, it causes the analyzer to change Center
Frequency to the strongest signal in the tunable span of the analyzer, excluding the LO. It is designed to
quickly get you to the most likely signal(s) of interest, with no signal analysis knowledge required. As such,
there are no configurable parameters for this feature. There are only pre-selected values that work in most
real world situations.
Auto Tune performs a Preset as part of its function, so it always returns you to the Normal View and a
preset state, although it does leave the AC/DC coupling and Single/Cont state unaffected.
You may see a slight pause before the signal of interest is presented at midscreen.
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:TUNE:IMMediate
Dependencies
Auto Tune is not available (grayed out) when Source Mode=Tracking. Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Center Freq
Sets the frequency that corresponds to the horizontal center of the graticule (when frequency Scale Type
is set to linear). While adjusting the Center Frequency the Span is held constant, which means that both
Start Frequency and Stop Frequency will change.
Pressing Center Freq also sets the frequency entry mode to Center/Span. In Center/Span mode, the
center frequency and span values are displayed below the graticule, and the default active function in the
Frequency menu is Center Freq.
The center frequency setting is the same for all measurements within a mode, that is, it is Meas Global. Some modes are also able to share a Mode Global center frequency value. If this is the case, the Mode will
have a Global Settings key in its Mode Setup menu.
The Center Freq function sets (and queries) the Center Frequency for the currently selected input. If your
analyzer has multiple inputs, and you select another input, the Center Freq changes to the value for that
input. SCPI commands are available to directly set the Center Freq for a specific input.
Center Freq is remembered as you go from input to input. Thus you can set a Center Freq of 10 GHz with
the RF Input selected, change to BBIQ and set a Center Freq of 20 MHz, then switch to External Mixing and
set a Center Freq of 60 GHz, and when you go back to the RF Input the Center Freq will go back to 10 GHz;
back to BBIQ and it is 20 MHz; back to External Mixing and it is 60 GHz. See "RF Center Freq" on page 610
See Ext Mix Center Freq
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
607
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
See "I/Q Center Freq" on page 612
See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?
Example
FREQ:CENT 50 MHz
FREQ:CENT UP changes the center frequency to 150 MHz if you use FREQ:CENT:STEP 100 MHz to
set the center frequency step size to 100 MHz
FREQ:CENT?
Notes
This command sets either the RF or I/Q Center Frequency depending on the selected input.
For RF input it is equivalent to FREQ:RF:CENT
For I/Q input it is equivalent to FREQ:IQ:CENT
Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (5xx)
If no terminator (e.g. MHz) is sent the terminator Hz is used. If a terminator with unit other than
Frequency is used, an invalid suffix error message is generated.
Dependencies
The Center Frequency can be limited by Start or Stop Freq limits, if the Span is so large that Start or
Stop reach their limit. Couplings
When operating in “swept span”, any value of the Center Frequency or Span that is within the
frequency range of the analyzer is allowed when the value is being set through the front panel
numeric key pad or the SCPI command. The other parameter is forced to a different value if needed,
to keep the Start and the Stop Frequencies within the analyzer’s frequency range
Preset
Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input.
See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609 and "RF Center Freq" on page 610 and Ext Mix
Center Freq and "I/Q Center Freq" on page 612.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input..
See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609 and "RF Center Freq" on page 610 and "I/Q Center
Freq" on page 612.
Max
Depends on instrument maximum frequency, mode, measurement, and selected input..
See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609 and "RF Center Freq" on page 610 and "I/Q Center
Freq" on page 612.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
Dependencies
Non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
608
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Center Frequency Presets
The following table provides the Center Frequency Presets for the Spectrum Analyzer mode, and the Max
Freq, for the various frequency options: Freq Option
CF
Max Freq
after Mode Preset
Stop Freq after
Mode Preset
503
(all but N9000A)
1.805 GHz
3.6 GHz
3.7 GHz
503
(N9000A)
1.505 GHz
3.0 GHz
3.08 GHz
507
(all but N9000A)
3.505 GHz
7.0 GHz
7.1 GHz
507
(N9000A)
3.755 GHz
7.5 GHz
7.58 GHz
508
1.805 GHz
3.6 GHz
8.5 GHz
4.205 GHz
8.4 GHz
8.5 GHz
513
6.805 GHz
13.6 GHz
13.8 GHz
526
13.255 GHz
26.5 GHz
27.0 GHz
13.255 GHz
26.5 GHz
26.55
GHz
1.805 GHz
3.6 GHz
27.0 GHz
(can't
tune
above)
(all but N9038A)
508
(N9038A)
(all but N9000A and
N9038A)
526
(N9000A)
526
(N9038A)
532
16.005 GHz
32.0 GHz
32.5 GHz
543
21.505 GHz
43.0 GHz
TBD
544
22.005 GHz
44.0 GHz
44.5 GHz
550
25.005 GHz
50.0 GHz
51 GHz
Input 2:
Model
CF
Max Freq
after Mode
Preset
Stop Freq
after Mode
Preset
N9000A opt C75
0.7505GHz
1.5 GHz
1.58 GHz
N9038A
505 MHz
1 GHz
1.000025 GHz
(can't tune
above)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
609
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Tracking Generator Frequency Limits (N9000A only):
Tracking
Generator
Option
Min Freq (clips to
this freq when
turn TG on and
can’t tune below
while TG on)
If above this Freq,
Stop Freq clipped
to this Freq when
TG turned on
Max Freq
(can't tune
above) while
TG on
T03
9 kHz
3.0 GHz
3.08 GHz
T06
9 kHz
6.0 GHz
6.05 GHz
The following table shows the Center Frequency Presets for modes other than Spectrum Analyzer:
Mode
CF Preset for RF
WCDMA
1 GHz
WIMAXOFDMA,
1 GHz
BASIC
1 GHz
ADEMOD
1 GHz
VSA
1 GHz
TDSCDMA
1 GHz
PNOISE
1 GHz
LTE
1 GHz
LTETDD
1 GHz
MSR
1 GHz
GSM
935.2 MHz
NFIGURE
1.505 GHz
RF Center Freq
SCPI command for specifying the RF Center Frequency. This command will set the Center Frequency to be
used when the RF input is selected, even if the RF input is not the input that is selected at the time the
command is sent. Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always
applies to the currently selected input.
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:RF:CENTer <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:RF:CENTer?
Example
FREQ:RF:CENT 30 MHz
Notes
This command is the same in all modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So the value is
independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode.
Dependencies
If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Center Frequency such that the Stop
Frequency would be >3.6 GHz fails and results in an advisory message. If the equivalent SCPI
610
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning.
If Source Mode is set to Tracking, and the Max or Min Center Freq is therefore limited by the limits of
the source, a warning message is generated, “Data out of range;clipped to source max/min” if these
limits are exceeded. Note that for an external source, these limits can be affected by the settings of
Source Numerator, Source Denominator and Power Sweep.
Preset
See table above
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–79.999995 MHz, unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the
minimum frequency of the Source
Max
See table above. Basically instrument maximum frequency – 5 Hz. Note that, if the Source Mode is
set to Tracking, the effective instrument maximum frequency may be limited by the source maximum
frequency.
If the knob or step keys are being used, also depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters Span, Start Frequency and Stop Frequency
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Ext Mix Center Freq
SCPI command for specifying the External Mixer Center Frequency. This command will set the Center
Frequency to be used when the External Mixer is selected, even if the External Mixer input is not the input
which is selected at the time the command is sent. Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency
menu on the front panel always applies to the currently selected input.
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:EMIXer:CENTer <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:EMIXer:CENTer?
Example
:FREQ:EMIX:CENT 60 GHz
:FREQ:EMIX:CENT?
Notes
This command is the same in all modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So the value is
independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode.
Couplings
When returning to External Mixing after having been switched to one of the other inputs (e.g., RF), you
will come back into the settings that you had when you left External Mixing. So you will come back
to the band you were in with the Center Frequency that you had. However, Span is not an inputdependent parameter, therefore you will bring the span over from the other input. Therefore, the
analyzer comes back with the span from the previous input, limited as necessary by the current mixer
setup.
Preset
When a Mode Preset is performed while in External Mixing, the Start frequency of the current Mode
is set to the nominal Min Freq of the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current
mixer setup. Similarly, the Stop frequency of the current Mode is set to the nominal Max Freq of the
highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table. The Center Freq thus presets to the point
arithmetically equidistant from these two frequencies.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
611
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
If the current measurement has a limited Span available to it, and cannot achieve the Span shown in
the table (Span=Stop Freq – Start Freq), the analyzer uses the maximum Span the measurement
allows, and still sets the Center Freq to the midpoint of the Start and Stop Freq values in the
Harmonic Table.
When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, the mixer presets to the 11970A, whose Start
and Stop frequencies are 26.5 and 40 GHz respectively. The center of these two frequencies is
33.25 GHz.
Therefore, after a Restore Input/Output Defaults, if you go into External Mixing and do a Mode Preset
while in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the resulting Center Freq is 33.25 GHz.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
The minimum frequency in the currently selected mixer band + 5 Hz
Max
The maximum frequency in the currently selected mixer band – 5 Hz
If the knob or step keys are being used, also depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters Span, Start Frequency and Stop Frequency
Initial S/W Revision
A.08.01
I/Q Center Freq
SCPI command for specifying the I/Q Center Frequency. This command will set the Center Frequency to be
used when the I/Q input is selected, even if the I/Q input is not the input which is selected at the time the
command is sent. Note that the Center Freq function in the Frequency menu on the front panel always
applies to the currently selected input.
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:IQ:CENTer <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:IQ:CENTer?
Example
FREQ:IQ:CENT: 30 MHz
Notes
This command is the same in all modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So the value is
independent in each mode and common across all the measurements in the mode.
Preset
0 Hz
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–40.049995 MHz
Max
40.049995 MHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Start Freq
Sets the frequency at the left side of the graticule. While adjusting the start frequency, the stop frequency
is held constant, which means that both the center frequency and span will change.
612
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Start Freq also sets the frequency entry mode to Start or Stop. In Start or Stop mode, the start frequency
and stop frequency values are displayed below the graticule, and the default active function in the
Frequency menu is Start Freq.
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt?
Example
FREQ:STAR 200 MHz
FREQ:STAR?
Notes
Max values depends on Hardware Options (5xx)
Dependencies
By direct entry:
You cannot set Start frequency > Stop frequency. You cannot set Start frequency = Stop frequency.
You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop. You cannot set Start Frequency to a value that
would create a span of less than 10 Hz. If you try to do any of these, Stop Frequency will change to
maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference between Start and Stop.
With the knob or step keys:
Cannot increment Start Freq to a value greater than Stop Freq – 10 Hz. If already in zero span,
cannot increment at all, and the first decrement will be forced to at least 10 Hz.
The Start Frequency can be limited by Span limits, if the Stop Frequency is below its preset value.
If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set the Start Frequency such that the Stop
Frequency would be >3.6 GHz fails and results in an advisory message. If the equivalent SCPI
command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. If Source Mode is set to Tracking, and the Max or Min Start Freq is therefore limited by the limits of
the source, a warning message is generated, “Data out of range;clipped to source max/min” if these
limits are exceeded. Note that for an external source, these limits can be affected by the settings of
Source Numerator, Source Denominator and Power Sweep.
Couplings
In the Spectrum Analyzer, the four parameters Center Freq, Start Freq, Stop Freq and Span are
interdependent, as changing one necessarily affects one or more of the others. The couplings
between Center Freq and Span are detailed under the key descriptions for those keys. These
couplings also affect Start Freq and Stop Freq.
You cannot set Start frequency = Stop frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop.
The instrument will alter the value of the last setting to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the
difference between Start and Stop.
Preset
Start Freq does not preset. On Mode Preset, Span & CF preset, and Start Freq is derived. On a Meas
Preset only Span presets, CF does not, so Start Freq will vary depending on CF.
When a Mode Preset is performed while in External Mixing, the Start frequency of the current Mode
is set to the nominal Min Freq of the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current
mixer setup. If the current measurement has a limited Span available to it, and cannot achieve the Span shown in
the table (Span=Stop Freq – Start Freq), the analyzer uses the maximum Span the measurement
allows, and sets the Center Freq to the midpoint of the Start and Stop Freq values in the Harmonic
Table. Thus, in this case, the Start Freq will preset to a frequency below the preset Center Freq by ½
of the maximum Span.
When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, the mixer presets to the 11970A, whose Start
frequency is 26.5 GHz.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
613
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Therefore, after a Restore Input/Output Defaults, if you go into External Mixing and do a Mode Preset
while in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the resulting Start Freq is 26.5 GHz.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
–80 MHz, unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the minimum
frequency of the Source
If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters
While in External Mixing, the minimum Start Freq you can set is determined by the external mixing
parameters. It will be close to the minimum LO frequency (3.8 GHz if undoubled, 8.6 GHz if doubled)
times the harmonic number, for the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current
mixer setup. It can be queried with the SCPI command :FREQ:STARt? MIN.
Max
Depends on the instrument maximum frequency – 10 Hz. Note that, if the Source Mode is set to
Tracking, the effective instrument maximum frequency may be limited by the source maximum
frequency.
If the knob or step keys are being used, it depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters.
While in External Mixing, the maximum Start Freq you can set is determined by the external mixing
parameters. It will be close to the maximum LO frequency (7 GHz if undoubled, 14 GHz if doubled)
times the harmonic number, for the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current
mixer setup. It can be queried with the SCPI command :FREQ:STARt? MAX.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Stop Freq
Sets the frequency at the right side of the graticule. While adjusting the stop Frequency, the start
frequency is held constant, which means that both the center frequency and span will change.
Stop Freq also sets the frequency entry mode to Start or Stop. In Start or Stop mode, the start frequency
and stop frequency values are displayed below the graticule, and the default active function in the
Frequency menu is Start Freq.
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP?
Example
FREQ:STOP 220 MHz
FREQ:STOP?
Notes
Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (5xx)
Dependencies
By direct entry:
You cannot set the Stop frequency < Start frequency. You cannot set Start frequency = Stop
614
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop. You cannot set Stop Frequency to a
value that would create a span of less than 10 Hz. If you try to do any of these, Start Frequency will
change to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the difference between Start and Stop.
With the knob or step keys:
Cannot decrement Stop Freq to a value less than Start Freq + 10 Hz. If already in zero span, cannot
decrement at all, and the first increment will be forced to at least 10 Hz.
The Stop Frequency can be limited by Span limits, if the Start Frequency is above its preset value.
If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set the Stop Frequency >3.6 GHz fails and
results in an advisory message. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same message is
generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning. If Source Mode is set to Tracking, and the Max or Min Stop Freq is therefore limited by the limits of
the source, a warning message is generated, “Data out of range;clipped to source max/min” if these
limits are exceeded. Note that for an external source, these limits can be affected by the settings of
Source Numerator, Source Denominator and Power Sweep.
Couplings
In the Spectrum Analyzer, the four parameters Center Freq, Start Freq, Stop Freq and Span are
interdependent, as changing one necessarily affects one or more of the others. The couplings
between Center Freq and Span are detailed under the key descriptions for those keys. These
couplings also affect Start Freq and Stop Freq.
You cannot set Start frequency = Stop frequency. You cannot select zero span by setting Start = Stop.
The instrument will alter the value of the last setting to maintain a minimum value of 10 Hz for the
difference between Start and Stop.
Preset
On Mode Preset, Span & CF preset, and Stop Freq is derived. See "Center Frequency Presets" on
page 609 for a table which shows the Stop Freq after Preset for various model and option numbers).
On a Meas Preset only Span presets, CF does not, so Stop Freq will vary depending on CF.
When a Mode Preset is performed while in External Mixing, the Stop frequency of the current Mode is
set to the nominal Max Freq of the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current
mixer setup.
If the current measurement has a limited Span available to it, and cannot achieve the Span shown in
the table (Span=Stop Freq – Start Freq), the analyzer uses the maximum Span the measurement
allows, and sets the Center Freq to the midpoint of the Start and Stop Freq values in the Harmonic
Table. Thus, in this case, the Stop Freq will preset to a frequency above the preset Center Freq by ½
of the maximum Span.
When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, the mixer presets to the 11970A, whose Stop
frequency is 40 GHz.
Therefore, after a Restore Input/Output Defaults, if you go into External Mixing and do a Mode Preset
while in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the resulting Stop Freq is 40 GHz.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
–79.999999999 MHz, unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the
minimum frequency of the Source
If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters
While in External Mixing, the minimum Stop Freq you can set is determined by the external mixing
parameters. It will be close to the minimum LO frequency (3.8 GHz if undoubled, 8.6 GHz if doubled)
times the harmonic number, for the lowest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current
mixer setup. It can be queried with the SCPI command :FREQ:STOP? MIN.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
615
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Max
Depends on instrument maximum frequency. Note that, if the Source Mode is set to Tracking, the
effective instrument maximum frequency may be limited by the source maximum frequency.
If the knob or step keys are being used, depends on the value of the other three interdependent
parameters.
While in External Mixing, the maximum Stop Freq you can set is determined by the external mixing
parameters. It will be close to the maximum LO frequency (7 GHz if undoubled, 14 GHz if doubled)
times the harmonic number, for the highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table for the current
mixer setup. It can be queried with the SCPI command :FREQ:STOP? MAX.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
CF Step
Changes the step size for the center frequency and start and stop frequency functions. Once a step size
has been selected and the center frequency function is active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN
parameters for Center Frequency from remote commands) change the center frequency by the step-size
value. The step size function is useful for finding harmonics and sidebands beyond the current frequency
span of the analyzer.
Note that the start and stop frequencies also step by the CF Step value. Key Path
FREQ Channel
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]?
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO?
Example
FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO ON
FREQ:CENT:STEP 500 MHz
FREQ:CENT UP increases the current center frequency value by 500 MHz
FREQ:CENT:STEP?
FREQ:CENT:STEP:AUTO?
Notes
Preset and Max values are depending on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526)
Notes
Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (5xx)
Dependencies
Freq Offset is not available in External Mixing. In this case the Freq Offset key is grayed out and shows
a value of zero. It will once again be available, and show the previously set value, when you return to
the RF Input.
616
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Dependencies
Span, RBW, Center frequency
If the electronic/soft attenuator is enabled, any attempt to change the value of the center frequency
>3.6 GHz by pressing the Up-arrow key, fails and results in an advisory message. If the equivalent
SCPI command is sent, this same message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict”
warning. Couplings
When auto-coupled in a non-zero span, the center frequency step size is set to 10% of the span.
When auto-coupled in zero span, the center frequency step size is set to the equivalent –3 dB RBW
value.
Preset
Auto
ADEMOD: 1 MHz
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
– (the maximum frequency of the instrument). That is, 27 GHz max freq instrument has a CF step
range of +/– 27 GHz. Note that this is the maximum frequency given the current settings of the
instrument, so in External Mixing, for example, it is the maximum frequency of the current mixer
band.
Max
The maximum frequency of the instrument. That is, 27 GHz max freq instrument has a CF step range
of +/– 27 GHz. Note that this is the maximum frequency given the current settings of the instrument,
so in External Mixing, for example, it is the maximum frequency of the current mixer band.
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
non-overlapped
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Freq Offset
Enables you to set a frequency offset value to account for frequency conversions outside of the analyzer.
This value is added to the display readout of the marker frequency, center frequency, start frequency, stop
frequency, and all other absolute frequency settings in the analyzer including frequency count. When a
frequency offset is entered, the value appears below the center of the graticule. To eliminate an offset,
perform a Mode Preset or set the frequency offset to 0 Hz.
See "More Information" on page 618.
Key Path
FREQ Channel
Scope
Meas Global
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet?
Example
FREQ:OFFS 10 MHz
Notes
Preset and Max values are dependent on Hardware Options (503, 507, 508, 513, 526)
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
617
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
FREQ Channel
Dependencies
Freq Offset is not available in External Mixing. In this case the Freq Offset key is grayed out and shows
a value of zero. However, the value of CF Offset that was set for the RF Input is retained and restored
when the user switches back to the RF Input. Preset
See the table in See "Center Frequency Presets" on page 609
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
–500 GHz
Max
500 GHz
Default Unit
Hz
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
Non-overlapped
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
DISPlay:WINDow[1]:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:OFFSet
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
1. In pre-X-Series instruments, Frequency Offset could not be adjusted by the knob or step keys. That
is no longer the case.
The DISPlay version of the command is in the instrument for compatibility across platforms and is not
recommended for new development.
2. Some previous spectrum analyzers did not adjust frequency counter results for the Frequency
Offset. The X-Series does adjust the frequency counter for the offset.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.04.00, A.08.50
More Information
This command does not affect any bandwidths or the settings of relative frequency parameters such as
delta markers or span. It does not affect the current hardware settings of the analyzer, but only the
displayed frequency values. Entering an offset does not affect the trace position or display, just the value of
the start and stop frequency and the values represented by the trace data. The frequency values of
exported trace data, queried trace data, markers, trace data used in calculations such as N dB points, trace
math, etc., are all affected by Freq Offset. Changing the offset, even on a trace that is not updating will
immediately change all of the above, without taking new data.
If a trace is exported with a nonzero Freq Offset, the exported data will contain the trace data with the
offset applied. Therefore, if that trace were to be imported back into the analyzer, you would want Freq
Offset to be 0, or the offset would be applied again to data which is already offset. No such care need be
taken when saving a State+Trace file because the data and state are saved together.
618
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Input/Output
The Input/Output features are common across multiple Modes and Measurements. These common
features are described in this section. See the Measurement description for information on features that
are unique.
The Input/Output key accesses the keys that control the Input/Output parameters of the instrument. In
general, these are functions associated with external connections to the analyzer, either to the inputs or
the outputs. Since these connections tend to be fairly stable within a given setup, in general, the
input/output settings do not change when you Preset the analyzer.
Other functions related to the input/output connections, but which tend to change on a measurement by
measurement basis, can be found under the Trigger and AMPTD Y Scale keys. In addition, some of the
digital I/O bus configurations can be found under the System key.
The functions in the Input/Output menu are "global" (common) to all Modes (applications). But individual
Input/Output functions only appear in a Mode if they apply to that Mode. Functions that apply to a Mode
but not to all measurements in the Mode may be grayed-out in some measurements.
"Input/Output variables - Preset behavior" on page 621
The Input Port selection is the first menu under the Input/Output key:
Key Path
Front-panel key
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FEED RF|AIQ|EMIXer
[:SENSe]:FEED?
Example
:FEED RF
:FEED?
Couplings
The [:SENSe]:FEED RF command turns the calibrator OFF
Preset
This setting is unaffected by a Preset or power cycle. It survives a Mode Preset and mode changes.
It is set to RF on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
[:SENSe]:FEED AREFerence
In the PSA the calibrator was one of the inputs and selected using the AREF parameter to the same
:FEED command that switched the inputs. In the X-Series it is controlled in a separate menu and
overrides the input selection. For code compatibility the [:SENSe]:FEED AREFerence command is
provided, and is aliased to [SENSe]:FEED:AREF REF50, which causes the input to be switched to the
50 MHz calibrator. The [:SENSe]:FEED RF command switches the input back to the RF port and
turns the calibrator OFF, thus providing full compatibility with the PSA calibrator function.
Note that after sending this, the query [:SENSe]:FEED? does not return “AREF” but instead the
currently selected input. Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
[:SENSe]:FEED IQ|IONLy|QONLy
[:SENSe]:FEED?
The parameters IQ | IONLy | QONLy are supported for backwards compatibility with the E44406A. l
[:SENSe]:FEED IQ aliases to [:SENSe]:FEED: IQ:TYPE IQ
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
619
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
l
[:SENSe]:FEED IONLy aliases to [:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE IONLy
l
[:SENSe]:FEED QONLy aliases to [:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE QONLy
The query [:SENSe]:FEED? always returns AIQ, whichever of the legacy parameters IQ | IONLy |
QONLy have been specified.
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
Most of the settings in the X-Series Input/Output system, including External Gain, Amplitude
Corrections settings and data, etc., are shared by all modes and are not changed by a mode switch. Furthermore, most variables in the Input/Output system key are not affected by Mode Preset. Both of
these behaviors represent a departure from legacy behavior. In the X-Series, Input/Output settings are reset by using the "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
function. They can also be reset to their default values through the System->Restore System
Defaults-> In/Out Config key or through the System ->Restore System Defaults -> All key (and
corresponding SCPI).
While this matches most use cases better, it does create some code compatibility issues. For
example, Amplitude Corrections are no longer turned off by a Mode Preset, but instead by using the
"Restore Input/Output Defaults" key/SCPI.
Although Input/Output settings are not part of each Mode’s State, they are saved in the Save State
files, so that all of the instrument settings can be recalled with Recall State, as in legacy
instruments.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
:INPut:MIXer EXTernal|INTernal
:INPut:MIXer?
Example
INP:MIX INT
INP:MIX?
Notes
In legacy analyzers you choose between the Internal mixer or an External Mixer. In the X-Series, the
External Mixer is one of the choices for the Input and is selected using the FEED command
(:SENSe:FEED EXTMixer).
For compatibility, the INPut:MIXer EXTernal|INTernal legacy command is mapped as follows:
1. When INPut:MIXer EXTernal is received, SENSe:FEED EMIXer is executed.
2. When INPut:MIXer INTernal is received, SENSe:FEED RF is executed.
3. When INPut:MIXer? is received, the response will be INT if any input other than the external
mixer is selected and EXT if the external mixer is selected
Preset
INT
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
PSA supports the following SCPI Command :
:INPut:MIXer:TYPE PRESelected|UNPReselect
:INPut:MIXer:TYPE?
PXA does not support the :INPut:MIXer:TYPE command.
Initial S/W Revision
620
A.08.01
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Input/Output variables - Preset behavior
Virtually all the input/output settings are not a part of mode preset. They can be set to their default value
by one of the three ways:
l
by using the Restore Input/Output Defaults key on the first page of the input/output menu,
l
by using the System->Restore System Defaults->Input/Output Settings or,
l
by using the System -> Restore System Defaults->All. Also, they survive a Preset and a Power cycle.
A very few of the Input/Output settings do respond to a Mode Preset; for example, if the Calibrator is on it
turns off on a Preset, and if DC coupling is in effect it switches to AC on a Preset. These exceptions are
made in the interest of reliability and usability, which overrides the need for absolute consistency.
Exceptions are noted in the SCPI table for the excepted functions.
RF Input
Selects the front-panel RF input port to be the analyzer signal input. If RF is already selected, pressing this
key accesses the RF input setup functions.
Key Path
Input/Output
Example
[:SENSe]:FEED RF
Readback
The RF input port, RF coupling, and current input impedance settings appear on this key as:
"XX, YY, ZZ" where
XX is RF, RF2, RFIO1, RFIO2, depending on what input is selected (only appears on analyzers with
multiple RF inputs)
YY is AC or DC
ZZ is 50Ω or 75Ω
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Input Z Correction
Sets the input impedance for unit conversions. This affects the results when the y-axis unit is voltage or
current units (dBmV, dBµV, dBµA, V, A), but not when it is power units (dBm, W). The impedance you select
is for computational purposes only, since the actual impedance is set by internal hardware to 50 ohms.
Setting the computational input impedance to 75 ohms is useful when using a 75 ohm to 50 ohm adapter to
measure a 75 ohm device on an analyzer with a 50 ohm input impedance.
There are a variety ways to make 50 to 75 ohm transitions, such as impedance transformers or minimum
loss pads. The choice of the solution that is best for your measurement situation requires balancing the
amount of loss that you can tolerate with the amount of measurement frequency range that you need. If
you are using one of these pads/adaptors with the Input Z Corr function, you might also want to use the
Ext Gain key. This function is used to set a correction value to compensate for the gain (loss) through your
pad. This correction factor is applied to the displayed measurement values.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
621
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, RF Input
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude] 50|75
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude]?
Example
CORR:IMP 75 sets the input impedance correction to 75 ohms.
CORR:IMP?
Couplings
In the N9000A option C75, when RF Input 2 is selected, the Input Z Correction will automatically
change to 75 ohms. The user may then change it to whatever is desired. When the main RF Input is
selected, the Input Z Correction will automatically change to 50 ohms. The user may then change it
to whatever is desired. Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 50 ohms on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
Some instruments/options may have 75 ohms available.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback
50 Ω or 75 Ω. Current setting reads back to the RF key.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
RF Coupling
Specifies alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC) coupling at the analyzer RF input port. Selecting AC
coupling switches in a blocking capacitor that blocks any DC voltage present at the analyzer input. This
decreases the input frequency range of the analyzer, but prevents damage to the input circuitry of the
analyzer if there is a DC voltage present at the RF input.
In AC coupling mode, you can view signals below the corner frequency of the DC block, but below a certain
frequency the amplitude accuracy is not specified. The frequency below which specifications do not apply
is:
X-Series Model
Lowest Freq for
meeting specs
when AC coupled
Lowest Freq for
meeting specs
when DC coupled
N9000A–503/507
100 kHz
n/a
N9000A-C75 Input 2
1 MHz
n/a
N9000A–513/526
10 MHz
9 kHz
N9010A
10 MHz
9 kHz
N9020A
10 MHz
20 Hz
N9030A
10 MHz
3 Hz
Some amplitude specifications apply only when coupling is set to DC. Refer to the appropriate amplitude
specifications and characteristics for your analyzer.
622
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
When operating in DC coupled mode, ensure protection of the analyzer input circuitry by limiting the DC
part of the input level to within 200 mV of 0 Vdc. In AC or DC coupling, limit the input RF power to +30 dBm
(1 Watt).
Key Path
Input/Output, RF Input
Remote Command
:INPut:COUPling AC|DC|RLC
:INPut:COUPling?
Example
INP:COUP DC
Dependencies
This key does not appear in models that are always AC coupled. When the SCPI command to set DC
coupling is sent to these models, it results in the error “Illegal parameter value; This model is always
AC coupled” In these models, the SCPI query INP:COUP? always returns AC.
This key does not appear in models that are always DC coupled.When the SCPI command to set AC
coupling is sent to these models, it results in the error “Illegal parameter value; This instrument is
always DC coupled” In these models, the SCPI query INP:COUP? always returns DC.
Preset
AC on models that support AC coupling
On models that are always DC coupled, such as millimeter wave models (frequency ranges 30 GHz
and above), the preset is DC.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
I/Q
This feature is not available unless the "Baseband I/Q (Option BBA)" on page 623 is installed.
Selects the front-panel I/Q input ports to be the analyzer signal input. If I/Q is already selected, pressing
this key accesses the I/Q setup menu.
Key Path
Input/Output
Mode
BASIC, CDMA2K, EDGEGSM, TDSCMDA, VSA89601, WIMAXOFDMA
Example
FEED AIQ
Notes
Not all measurements support the use of the I/Q signal input. When I/Q is selected in a
measurement that does not support it, the “No Result; Meas invalid with I/Q inputs” error condition
message appears. This is error 135
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Baseband I/Q (Option BBA)
The Baseband I/Q functionality is a hardware option. It is option BBA. If the option is not installed, none of
the I/Q functionality is enabled.
The Baseband I/Q has four input ports and one output port. The input ports are I, I-bar, Q, and Q-bar. The I
and I-bar together compose the I channel and the Q and Q-bar together compose the Q channel. Each
channel has two modes of operation, Single-Ended (also called "unbalanced") and Differential Input (also
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
623
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
called "balanced"). When in Single-Ended operation, only the main port (I or Q) is used and the
complementary port (I-bar or Q-bar) is ignored. When in Differential Input mode, both main and
complementary ports are used.
The input settings (range, attenuation, skew, impedance, external gain) apply to the channels, not the
individual ports.
The system supports a variety of 1 MΩ input passive probes as well as the Keysight 113x Series active
differential probes using the Infinimax probe interface. The Keysight 113x Series active probes can be used for both single ended and differential measurements. In either case a single connection is made for each channel (on either the I or Q input). The input is
automatically configured to 50 Ω single ended and the probe power is supplied through the Infinimax
interface. The probe can be configured for a variety of input coupling and low frequency rejection modes.
In addition, a wide range of offset voltages and probe attenuation accessories are supported at the probe
interface. The active probe has the advantage that it does not significantly load the circuit under test, even
with unity gain probing. With passive 1 MΩ probes, the probe will introduce a capacitive load on the circuit, unless higher
attenuation is used at the probe interface. Higher attenuation reduces the signal level and degrades the
signal-to-noise-ratio of the measurement. Passive probes are available with a variety of attenuation
values for a moderate cost. Most Keysight passive probes can be automatically identified by the system,
setting the input impedance setting required as well as the nominal attenuation. For single ended
measurements a single probe is used for each channel. Other passive probes can be used, with the
attenuation and impedance settings configured manually.
For full differential measurements, the system supports probes on each of the four inputs. The
attenuation of the probes should be the same for good common mode rejection and channel match.
Both active and passive probes in single ended and differential configurations can be calibrated. This
calibration uses the Cal Out BNC connection and a probe connection accessory. The calibration achieves
excellent absolute gain flatness in a probed measurement. It matches both the gain and frequency
response of the I and Q channels as well as any delay skew, resulting in high accuracy in derived
measurements such as Error Vector Magnitude (EVM).
When a probe is connected a status message will be displayed. The message will indicate if calibration
data is available or not. Calibration data is saved for each type of probe (including "none") for each port and
will be reapplied whenever that type of probe is re-connected to the same port. For probes with EEPROM
identification, the calibration data will be stored based on the unique probe identifier and will reapply data
for that particular probe if it is available. The data will not follow a probe from one port to another. For
probes without EEPROM identification, the instrument cannot distinguish between different probes of the
same type and it will use the data from the last calibration for that probe type on that port.
When in differential mode, both the main and complementary probes are expected to be of the same type.
In some situations, the I and Q channels should be configured identically. In other situations it is convenient
to control them independently. Some menus have a "Q Same as I" setting that will cause the Q channel
configuration to mirror the I channel configuration, avoiding the overhead of double data entry when the
channels should be the same.
The output port is for calibrating the I/Q input ports, although it can also be manually controlled.
624
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
There are two types of calibrations available: cable calibration and probe calibration. The cable calibration
will guide the user through connecting each input port in turn. All ports must be calibrated together. The
probe calibration is done for a specific channel (I or Q). If in Single-Ended mode, only the main port is
calibrated. When in Differential Input mode, the user is guided through calibrating both main and
complementary ports.
The front panel I/Q port LEDs indicate the current state of that port. On (green) indicates it is active, and off
(dark) indicates it is not in use. For example, the Cal Out port LED is on if and only if there is signal coming
out of that port.
The input is a context and some parameters have separate values for each context. The SCPI for these
parameters has an optional "[:RF|IQ]" node. If the specific context is omitted, the command acts on the
current input context's value. Here are the parameters that are input context sensitive:
l
Center Frequency
l
Trigger Source
It is important to distinguish between the I and Q input ports and the displayed I and Q data values. The I
and Q input ports feed into a digital receiver that does digital tuning and filtering. The I and Q data seen by
the user (either on the display or through SCPI) corresponds to the real ("I") and the imaginary ("Q") output
from the digital receiver. When the input path is I+jQ or I Only and the center frequency is 0 Hz the I input
ends up in as the real output from the receiver and appears as "I" data. Likewise, when the input path is
I+jQ and the center frequency is 0 Hz, the Q input ends up as the imaginary output from the receiver and
appears as "Q" data. However, when the input path is Q Only, the Q input is sent to the receiver as Q+j0, so
the receiver output has the Q input coming out on the real output, and so in Q Only, the signal from the Q
input port appears as the "I" data. Another situation where the I and Q data do not necessarily correspond
directly to the I and Q inputs is when the center frequency is non-zero. The digital processing involved in
the tuning is a complex operation. This will result in I Only data appearing as both "I" and "Q" data, the
same as that signal would appear if seen through the RF input port.
Baseband I/Q Remote Language Compatibility
For the Keysight E4406A VSA Series Transmitter Tester, Option B7C provided baseband I/Q inputs. Code
compatibility has been provided to allow many of the commands for option B7C to function properly with
the X-Series. The X-Series has hardware differences and additional capabilities (e.g., E4406A does not
have independent settings of I & Q nor does it provide for probe calibrations) which make 100%
compatibility impossible.
The following commands are supported:
l
:CALibration:IQ:FLATness
l
:INPut:IMPedance:IQ U50|B50|U1M|B1M
l
:INPut:IMPedance:REFerence <integer>
The [:SENSe]:FEED RF|IQ|IONLy|QONLy|AREFerence|IFALign command supports all parameters except
IFALign. The FEED? query returns only RF|AIQ|AREF.
The following commands are not supported:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
625
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
l
:CALibration:GIQ
l
:CALibration:IQ:CMR
l
:INPut:IQ:ALIGn OFF|ON|0|1
The Rohde & Schwarz FSQ-B71 also provides baseband I/Q inputs. A certain amount of code compatibility
is provided in the X-Series, however hardware differences make this a somewhat limited set.
Supported:
l
The "<1|2>" is supported as "[1]".
l
INPut<1|2>:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] ON | OFF
l
INPut<1|2>:IQ:TYPE I | Q | IQ
l
INPut<1|2>:IQ:IMPedance LOW | HIGH
Not Supported:
l
INPut<1|2>:SELect AIQ | RF
l
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:FORMat COMPatible | IQBLock | IQPair>
l
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? <offset samples>,<# of samples>
l
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA?
l
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SET <filter type>,<rbw>,<sample rate>,<trigger source>,<trigger slope>, <pretrigger
samples>, <# of samples>
l
TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SRATe 10.0kHz to 81.6MHz
l
TRACe<1|2>:IQ[:STATe] ON|OFF
The Rohde & Schwarz FMU has the following SCPI, which is not supported (these commands start/abort
the probe calibration procedure, which is manually interactive from the front panel):
l
CALibration:ABORt
l
CALibration:PROBe[:STARt]
I/Q Path
Selects which I/Q input channels are active. The LED next to each I/Q input port will be on when that port is
active.
The analysis bandwidth for each channel is the same as that of the instrument. For example, the base
N9020A has a bandwidth of 10 MHz. With I/Q input the I and Q channels would each have an analysis
bandwidth of 10 MHz, giving 20 MHz of bandwidth when the I/Q Path is I+jQ. With option B25, the available
bandwidth becomes 25 MHz, giving 25 MHz each to I and Q and 50 MHz to I+jQ.
I/Q voltage to power conversion processing is dependent on the I/Q Path selected.
626
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
• With I+jQ input we know that the input signal may not be symmetrical about 0 Hz, because it has a
complex component. Therefore, above 0 Hz only the positive frequency information is displayed, and
below 0 Hz only the negative frequency information is displayed.
• With all other Input Path selections, the input signal has no complex component and therefore is always
symmetrical about 0 Hz. In this case, by convention, the power conversion shows the combined voltage
for both the positive and negative frequencies. The information displayed below 0 Hz is the mirror of the
information displayed above 0 Hz. This results in a power reading 6.02 dB higher (for both) than would
be seen with only the positive frequency voltage. Note also that, in this case the real signal may have
complex modulation embedded in it, but that must be recovered by further signal processing.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE IQ|IONLy|QONLy|INDependent
[:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE?
Example
Set the input to be both the I and Q channels, combined as I + j * Q.
FEED:IQ:TYPE IQ
Notes
The Independent I and Q selection is only available in GPVSA
Preset
IQ
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
I+jQ | I Only | Q Only | Independent I and Q
Readback Text
I+jQ | I Only | Q Only | Ind I/Q
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
:INPut[1]:IQ:TYPE IQ|I|Q
:INPut[1]:IQ:TYPE?
Notes
For R&S FSQ-B71 compatibility
Preset
IQ
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I+jQ
Sets the signal input to be both the I and Q channels. The I and Q channel data will be combined as I + j * Q.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Path
Example
Set the input to be both the I and Q channels, combined as I + j * Q.
FEED:IQ:TYPE IQ
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
627
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
I Only
Sets the signal input to be only the I channel. The Q channel will be ignored. The data collected is still
complex. When the center frequency is 0 the imaginary part will always be zero, but for any other center
frequency both the real and imaginary parts will be significant.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Path
Example
Set the input to be only the I channel.
FEED:IQ:TYPE IONL
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Only
Sets the signal input to be only the Q channel. The I channel will be ignored. The Q channel will be sent to
the digital receiver block as Q+j0. The receiver's output is still complex. When the center frequency is 0 the
imaginary part will always be zero, but for any other center frequency both the real and imaginary parts will
be significant. Note that since the receiver's real output is displayed as the "I" data, when the center
frequency is 0, the Q Only input appears as the "I" data.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Path
Example
Set the input to be only the Q channel.
FEED:IQ:TYPE QONL
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I Setup
Access the channel setup parameters for the I channel.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I Differential Input
Selects differential input on or off for the I channel. For differential input (also called balanced input), the
analyzer uses both main and complementary ports. When differential input is off (also called single-ended
or unbalanced input), the analyzer uses only the main port.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup
Remote Command
:INPut:IQ[:I]:DIFFerential OFF|ON|0|1
:INPut:IQ[:I]:DIFFerential?
Example
Put the I channel in Differential Input mode
INP:IQ:DIFF ON
628
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Notes
When I Differential Input = On, the analyzer will check for attenuation mismatches between the I and
I-bar ports. If the difference in attenuation values exceeds 0.5 dB a Settings Alert error condition,
error 159 will be set.
When I Differential Input = On, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q Differential input must also be On. Similarly, when I Differential Input = Off, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q Differential input must also be Off. If the states of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings
Alert;I/Q mismatch:Differential.
Couplings
Some active probes include built-in differential capability. When one of these probes is sensed, this
key is disabled. Since the differential capability is handled in the probe, the Analyzer will use only the
main port and the key will show that the Analyzer's Differential Input mode is Off (indicating that the
complementary port is not in use).
When Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will also be copied to Q.
Preset
Off
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
Off | On
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
:INPut[1]:IQ:BALanced[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:INPut[1]:IQ:BALanced[:STATe]?
Notes
For R&S FSQ-B71 compatibility, with no independent settings for the I and Q channels. Therefore, it
is tied only to the I channel and does not provide an equivalent for the Q channel. For proper
operation of the backwards compatibility command Q Same as I should be set to On.
Preset
OFF
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I Input Z
Selects the input impedance for the I channel. The impedance applies to both the I and I-bar ports.
The input impedance controls the hardware signal path impedance match. It is not used for converting
voltage to power. The voltage to power conversion always uses the Reference Z parameter. The
Reference Z parameter applies to both I and Q channels.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup
Remote Command
:INPut[1]:IQ[:I]:IMPedance LOW|HIGH
:INPut[1]:IQ[:I]:IMPedance?
Example
Set the I channel input impedance to 1 MΩ
INP:IQ:IMP HIGH
Notes
LOW = 50 Ω, HIGH = 1 MΩ
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
629
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
When IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Input Z setting must be the same as the Q Input Z setting. If the settings
of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q
mismatch:Input Z.
Couplings
Input impedance is a built-in characteristic of a probe. Therefore, whenever a probe is sensed, this
key is disabled and the value is set to match the probe.
When no probe is sensed on Q and Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will also be copied to Q.
Preset
LOW
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
50 Ω | 1 MΩ
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I Skew
Sets the skew factor for the I channel. The skew will shift the channel's data in time. Use this to
compensate for differences in the electrical lengths of the input paths due to cabling.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ[:I]:SKEW <seconds>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ[:I]:SKEW?
Example
Delay the data for the I channel by 10 ns.
CORR:IQ:SKEW 10 ns
Preset
0
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
0 s to 100 ns
Min
0s
Max
+100 ns
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I Probe
Access the probe setup parameters for the I channel. See "I/Q Probe Setup" on page 640.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup
State Saved
No
Readback Text
[<I port probe id>]
This is reporting the type of probe sensed on the I port. There is no parameter for overriding what is
630
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
sensed.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Attenuation
The attenuation is part of the calibration data stored with the probe type and is initially the value that was
returned by the last calibration. You can modify this value and any changes will be stored with the
calibration data and will survive power cycles and presets. When a probe calibration is performed the
attenuation value will be overwritten by the calibration.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio <real>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio?
Example
Set the attenuation for the current I probe to 100.00:1.
CORR:IQ:I:ATT:RAT 100
Notes
Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will
reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's setting
and leaves all others unchanged.
When the IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q probe attenuation setting must match the I Probe attenuation setting
within 1 dB. If this is not the case, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q
mismatch:Attenuation.
Preset
Each probe type has its own default. The default for the "Unknown" probe type is 1:1.
State Saved
Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or
Restore.
Range
0.001 to 10000
Min
0.001
Max
10000
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation?
Example
Set the attenuation for the current I probe type to 100.00:1.
CORR:IQ:I:ATT 20 dB
Range
–60 dB to +80 dB
Min
–60 dB
Max
+80 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
631
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Calibrate
Invokes the guided probe calibration. The guided probe calibration is context sensitive and depends on the
channel (I or Q) and the Differential Input state. The calibration is only performed on the selected channel.
When Differential Input is on, both the probe attached to the main port and the probe attached to the
complementary port are calibrated. When Differential Input is off, only the probe attached to the main port
is calibrated. See "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 688.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Readback Text
The last calibration date, or if no calibration exists, "(empty)".
Last: <cal date>
<cal time>
Example:
Last: 8/22/2007
1:02:49 PM
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Clear Calibration
Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe. It does not clear the data for other probe types
or other ports. If the sensed probe has EEPROM identification, only the data for that specific probe is
cleared. After this command has completed, the probe calibration state will be the same as if no probe
calibration had ever been performed for the specified channel and probe. The probe attenuation will be the
default value for that probe type and the Cable Calibration frequency response corrections will be used.
This command is dependent on the Differential Input state. When Differential Input is on, both the data for
the probe attached to the main port and the data for the probe attached to the complementary port are
cleared. When Differential Input is off, only data for the probe attached to the main port is cleared.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Remote Command
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I|Q:CLEar
Example
Clear the calibration data for the I channel and the current probe (with EEPROM identification) or
probe type (without EEPROM identification).
:CAL:IQ:PROBe:I:CLE
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Combined Differential/Input Z (Remote Command Only)
This is Remote Command only (no front panel) and is for backwards compatibility only. It combines the
Differential Input and Input Z selections into a single SCPI command.
Remote Command
:INPut:IMPedance:IQ U50|B50|U1M|B1M
:INPut:IMPedance:IQ?
Example
:INPut:IMPedance:IQ U50
This is equivalent to the following two SCPI commands:
632
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
:INP:IQ:DIFF OFF
:INP:IQ:IMP 50
Notes
Provided for E4406A code compatibility.
The enum values translate as follows:
U50: Differential Input = Off, Input Z = 50Ω
B50: Differential Input = On, Input Z = 50Ω
U1M: Differential Input = Off, Input Z = 1 MΩ
B1M: Differential Input = On, Input Z = 1 MΩ
This command is for backwards compatibility. It combines the Input Z (50Ω or 1 MΩ) parameter
with the Differential Input (Off = "Unbalanced", On = "Balanced") parameter into a single
enumeration.
This backwards compatibility SCPI command was for an instrument without independent settings for
the I and Q channels. Therefore, it is tied only to the I channel and does not provide an equivalent for
the Q channel. For proper operation of the backwards compatibility command Q Same as I should be
set to On.
Also, note the subtle difference between this SCPI command and the backwards compatibility
command for Input Z. The Input Z SCPI has "IQ" before "IMP" while this command has that order
reversed.
Couplings
This command does not have an independent parameter, but instead is tied to the Differential Input
and Input Z parameters. The coupling for those parameters apply to this command too.
Preset
U50
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Setup
Access the channel setup parameters for the Q channel.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q
Readback Text
When Q Same as I is On the readback is "Q Same as I".
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Same as I
Many, but not all, usages require the I and Q channels have an identical setup. To simplify channel setup,
the Q Same as I will cause the Q channel parameters to be mirrored from the I channel. That way you only
need to set up one channel (the I channel). The I channel values are copied to the Q channel, so at the time
Q Same as I is turned off the I and Q channel setups will be identical. This does not apply to Probe settings
or to parameters that are determined by the probe.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup
Remote Command
:INPut:IQ:MIRRored OFF|ON|0|1
:INPut:IQ:MIRRored?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
633
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Example
Turn off the mirroring of parameters from I to Q.
INP:IQ:MIRR OFF
Couplings
Only displayed for the Q channel. When Yes, the I channel values for some parameters are mirrored
(copied) to the Q channel. However, when a parameter is determined by the type of probe and a
probe is sensed, the probe setting is always used and the I channel setting is ignored. The following
parameters are mirrored:
Differential Input (when not determined by probe)
Input Z (when not determined by probe)
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value (Q Same as I set to "On") on a "Restore
Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Range
On | Off
Readback Text
"Q Same as I" when On, otherwise none.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Differential Input
Selects differential input on or off for the Q channel. For differential input (also called balanced input), the
analyzer uses both the Q and Q-bar ports. When differential input is off (also called single-ended or
unbalanced input), the analyzer uses only the Q port.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup
Remote Command
:INPut:IQ:Q:DIFFerential OFF|ON|0|1
:INPut:IQ:Q:DIFFerential?
Example
Put the Q channel in Differential Input mode
INP:IQ:Q:DIFF ON
Notes
When Differential Input = On, the analyzer will check for attenuation mismatches between the Q and
Q-bar ports. If the difference in attenuation values exceeds 0.5 dB a Settings Alert error condition,
error 159 will be set.
When Q Differential Input = On, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Differential input must also be On. Similarly, when Q Differential Input = Off, and IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Differential input must also be Off. If the states of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings
Alert;I/Q mismatch:Differential.
Couplings
Some active probes include built-in differential capability. When one of these probes is sensed, this
key is disabled. Since the differential capability is handled in the probe, the Analyzer will use only the
main port and the key will show that the Analyzer's Differential Input mode is Off (indicating that the
complementary port not in use).
When a differential probe is not sensed and Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will be copied to Q.
This key is disabled when Q Same as I is On.
Preset
Off
State Saved
On
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
634
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Range
Off | On
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Input Z
Selects the input impedance for the Q channel. The impedance applies to both the Q and Q-bar ports.
The input impedance controls the hardware signal path impedance match. It is not used for converting
voltage to power. The voltage to power conversion always uses the Reference Z parameter. The
Reference Z parameter applies to both I and Q channels.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup
Remote Command
:INPut[1]:IQ:Q:IMPedance LOW|HIGH
:INPut[1]:IQ:Q:IMPedance?
Example
Set the Q channel input impedance to 1 MΩ
INP:IQ:Q:IMP HIGH
Notes
LOW = 50 Ω, HIGH = 1 MΩ
When IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Input Z setting must be the same as the Q Input Z setting. If the settings
of the two inputs do not match, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q
mismatch:Input Z.
Couplings
Input impedance is a built-in characteristic of a probe. Therefore, whenever a probe is sensed, this
key is disabled and the value is set to match the probe.
When no probe is sensed and Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will also be copied to Q. This key
is disabled when Q Same as I is On.
Preset
LOW
State Saved
On
This is unaffected by Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
50 Ω | 1 MΩ
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Skew
Sets the skew factor for the Q channel. The skew will shift the channel's data in time. Use this to
compensate for differences in the electrical lengths of the input paths due to cabling and probes.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:SKEW <seconds>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:SKEW?
Example
Delay the data for the Q channel by 10 ns.
CORR:IQ:Q:SKEW 10 ns
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
635
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Preset
0
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
0 s to 100 ns
Min
0s
Max
+100 ns
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Probe
Accesses the probe setup parameters for the Q channel. See "I/Q Probe Setup" on page 640.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup
State Saved
No
Readback Text
[<Q port probe id>]
This is reporting the type of probe sensed on the Q port. There is no parameter for overriding what is
sensed.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Attenuation
The attenuation is part of the calibration data stored with the probe type and is initially the value that was
returned by the last calibration. You can modify this value and any changes will be stored with the
calibration data and will survive power cycles and presets. When a probe calibration is performed the
attenuation value will be overwritten by the calibration.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio <real>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio?
Example
Set the attenuation for the current I probe to 100.00:1.
CORR:IQ:I:ATT:RAT 100
Notes
Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will
reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's setting
and leaves all others unchanged.
When the IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q probe attenuation setting must match the I Probe attenuation setting
within 1 dB. If this is not the case, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q
mismatch:Attenuation.
Preset
Each probe type has its own default. The default for the "Unknown" probe type is 1:1.
State Saved
Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or
Restore.
636
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Range
0.001 to 10000
Min
0.001
Max
10000
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation?
Example
Set the attenuation for the current I probe type to 100.00:1.
CORR:IQ:I:ATT 20 dB
Range
–60 dB to +80 dB
Min
–60 dB
Max
+80 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Calibrate
Invokes the guided probe calibration. The guided probe calibration is context sensitive and depends on the
channel (I or Q) and the Differential Input state. The calibration is only performed on the selected channel.
When Differential Input is on, both the probe attached to the main port and the probe attached to the
complementary port are calibrated. When Differential Input is off, only the probe attached to the main port
is calibrated. See "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 688.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Readback Text
The last calibration date, or if no calibration exists, "(empty)".
Last: <cal date>
<cal time>
Example:
Last: 8/22/2007
1:02:49 PM
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Next
Perform the Q port calibration.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, Q Setup, Q Probe, Calibrate
Remote Command
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:Q
Example
CAL:IQ:PROB:Q
Notes
The Q port must be connected to the Cal Out port before issuing the SCPI command.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
637
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
The calibration data is saved as soon as the port is calibrated and will survive power cycles. It is not
reset by any preset or restore data commands.
State Saved
No
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Clear Calibration
Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe. It does not clear the data for other probe types
or other ports. If the sensed probe has EEPROM identification, only the data for that specific probe is
cleared. After this command has completed, the probe calibration state will be the same as if no probe
calibration had ever been performed for the specified channel and probe. The probe attenuation will be the
default value for that probe type and the Cable Calibration frequency response corrections will be used.
This command is dependent on the Differential Input state. When Differential Input is on, both the data for
the probe attached to the main port and the data for the probe attached to the complementary port are
cleared. When Differential Input is off, only data for the probe attached to the main port is cleared.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Remote Command
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I|Q:CLEar
Example
Clear the calibration data for the I channel and the current probe (with EEPROM identification) or
probe type (without EEPROM identification).
:CAL:IQ:PROBe:I:CLE
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Reference Z
Sets the value of the impedance to be used in converting voltage to power for the I and Q channels. This
does not change the hardware's path impedance (see "I Input Z" on page 629 ).
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q
Remote Command
:INPut:IMPedance:REFerence <integer>
:INPut:IMPedance:REFerence?
Example
Set the I/Q reference impedance to 50 Ω
INP:IMP:REF 50
Preset
50 Ω
State Saved
Yes
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to the default value on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or
"Restore System Defaults->All"
Range
1 Ω to 1 MΩ
Min
1Ω
Max
1 MΩ
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
638
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
I/Q Cable Calibrate…
The I/Q cable calibration creates correction data for each of the front panel I/Q ports. This calibration data
is used whenever no probe specific calibration data is available. It is important that all ports are calibrated
using the same short BNC cable so that the data is comparable from port to port.
The guided calibration (front panel only) will show connection diagrams and guide you through the isolation
calibration and calibrating each port. The calibration data for each port is stored separately, so as soon as
a port is calibrated that data is saved and will be used. If you press "Exit" to exit the calibration process, the
data for the ports already completed will still be used. It is recommended that a calibration be completed
once started, or if exited, that it be properly done before the next use of the I/Q ports. The "Next" button will
perform the calibration for the current port and then proceed to the next step in the calibration procedure.
The "Back" button will return to the prior port in the procedure. Both keys and dialog buttons are supplied
for ease of use. The dialog buttons are for mouse use and the softkeys for front panel use.
The calibration can also be done via SCPI, but no connection diagrams will be shown. You will have to
make the correct connections before issuing each port calibration command. Again, it is recommended that
all ports be calibrated at the same time.
The instrument state remains as it was prior to entering the calibration procedure except while a port is
actually being calibrated. Once a port is calibrated it returns to the prior state. A port calibration is in
process only from the time the "Next" button is pressed until the next screen is shown. For SCPI, this
corresponds to the time from issuing the CAL:IQ:FLAT:I|IB|Q|QB command until the operation is complete.
For example, if the prior instrument state is Cal Out = Off, Input = I+jQ, and Differential = Off, then up until
the time the "Next" button is pressed the I Input and Q Input LEDs are on and the Cal Out, I-bar Input and
Q-bar Input LEDs are off. Once the "Next" button is pressed for the I port calibration, only the Cal Out and I
Input LEDs will be on and the others will be off. When the screen progresses to the next step ("Next" button
again enabled), the prior state is restored and only the I Input and Q Input LEDs are on (Cal Out is off again).
The last calibration date and time for each port will be displayed. Any calibrations that are more than a day
older than the most recent calibration will be displayed with the color amber.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Next
Perform the I/Q Isolation calibration.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Calibration
Remote Command
:CALibration:IQ:ISOLation
Example
CAL:IQ:ISOL
Notes
All front panel I/Q ports must not be connected to anything.
Notes
All cables and probes should be disconnected from the I/Q ports before issuing the SCPI command.
State Saved
No.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
639
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Exit
Exits the calibration procedure. All ports calibrated before pressing Exit will use the newly acquired
calibration data.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Calibration
Notes
Using the Exit button does not restore the calibration data to the state prior to entering the guided
calibration. Once a port is calibrated the data is stored immediately and the only way to change it is
to redo the calibration step.
When the calibration may be left in an inconsistent state, a confirmation dialog is displayed (see "Exit
Confirmation" on page 640 ).
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Exit Confirmation
When Exit is pressed during one of the calibration routines, the calibration may be in an inconsistent state,
with some of the ports having newly measured calibration data and others with old data. If this is the case,
a dialog box appears, to confirm that you really want to exit.
l
l
A "Yes" answer exits the calibration procedure, leaving potentially inconsistent calibration data in
place.
A "No" answer returns you to the calibration procedure.
I/Q Probe Setup
The set of I/Q probe setup parameters will change based on the type of probe that is sensed. All probe
types have the Attenuation parameter, and all probe types can be calibrated. The remaining parameters
are only available for some probe types and will not be shown when not available. The probe type is
determined by and reported for only for the I and Q ports, never the I-bar or Q-bar ports. The menu title will
be "<ch>: <probe id>", where "<ch>" is either "I" or "Q" and "<probe id>" is the type of probe. For example,
for the I Probe setup with a Keysight 1130A probe connected to the I port, the title will be "I: 1130A".
Probe calibration data is stored for each probe type for each channel. When no probe is sensed, the probe
type "Unknown" is used, and this is also treated like a probe type with its own calibration data. When a
probe is changed, the calibration data for that probe type for that port is restored. An advisory message will
be displayed showing the new probe type and the calibration status. The calibration data is stored
permanently (survives a power cycle) and is not affected by a Preset or any of the Restore commands.
When the probe has EEPROM identification (most newer Keysight probes have this), the calibration data is
stored by probe serial number and port, so if you have two probes of the same type, the correct calibration
data will be used for each. For probes that do not have EEPROM identification, the calibration data is stored
by probe type and port and the instrument cannot distinguish between different probes of the same type. In
all cases (with or without EEPROM identification), the calibration data is port specific, so it will not follow a
specific probe from port to port if the probe is moved.
The "Unknown" probe type is used whenever no probe is sensed. When no calibration data exists for
"Unknown" the latest cable calibration data is used (see Section "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 688).
640
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Attenuation
The attenuation is part of the calibration data stored with the probe type and is initially the value that was
returned by the last calibration. You can modify this value and any changes will be stored with the
calibration data and will survive power cycles and presets. When a probe calibration is performed the
attenuation value will be overwritten by the calibration.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio <real>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation:RATio?
Example
Set the attenuation for the current I probe to 100.00:1.
CORR:IQ:I:ATT:RAT 100
Notes
Each probe type has its own attenuation setting. As probes are changed the attenuation value will
reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the attenuation affects only the current probe type's setting
and leaves all others unchanged.
When the IQ Path is I+jQ, the Q probe attenuation setting must match the I Probe attenuation setting
within 1 dB. If this is not the case, an error condition message is generated, 159;Settings Alert;I/Q
mismatch:Attenuation.
Preset
Each probe type has its own default. The default for the "Unknown" probe type is 1:1.
State Saved
Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or
Restore.
Range
0.001 to 10000
Min
0.001
Max
10000
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I|Q:ATTenuation?
Example
Set the attenuation for the current I probe type to 100.00:1.
CORR:IQ:I:ATT 20 dB
Range
–60 dB to +80 dB
Min
–60 dB
Max
+80 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Offset
Some active probes have DC offset capability. When one of these probes is connected this control will be
visible. The signal is adjusted for the DC offset before entering the analyzer's port. This allows for removal
of a DC offset before reaching the analyzer's input port voltage limits. For example, a signal that varies 1 V
peak-to-peak with a DC offset equal to the analyzer's max input voltage would exceed the input limits of
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
641
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
the analyzer for half its cycle. Removing the DC offset allows the analyzer to correctly process the entire
signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Remote Command
:INPut:OFFSet:I|Q <voltage>
:INPut:OFFSet:I|Q?
Example
Remove a DC offset of –0.5 V from the I channel input.
INP:OFFS:I –0.5
Notes
Only some probe types support Offset. For those that do, each probe type has its own Offset setting.
As probes are changed the Offset value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the Offset
affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged.
Preset
0V
State Saved
Saved with probe calibration data. It survives power cycle and is not affected by Preset or Restore.
Range
–18 V to +18 V
Min
–18 V
Max
+18 V
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Coupling
Some probe types allow coupling to reject low frequencies. This will filter out the DC component of a signal
that is composed of a DC bias plus some AC signal. This control is visible only for probe types that have this
capability.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Remote Command
:INPut:COUPling:I|Q DC|LFR1|LFR2
:INPut:COUPling:I|Q?
Example
Set the probe to low frequency rejection below 1.7 Hz.
INP:COUP:I LFR1
Notes
Only some probe types support Coupling. For those that do, each probe type has its own Coupling
setting. As probes are changed the Coupling value will reflect the new probe's setting. Changing the
Coupling affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged.
Preset
DC
State Saved
Saved with probe calibration data. It survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or
Restore.
Range
DC | AC 1.7 Hz LFR1 | AC 0.14 Hz LFR2
Readback Text
DC | LFR1 | LFR2
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
DC
Turns off low frequency rejection, allowing signals down to DC.
642
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Example
Turn off low frequency rejection on the I channel
INP:COUP:I DC
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
LFR1
Turns on low frequency rejection, rejecting signal component lower than 1.7 Hz.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Example
Turn on low frequency rejection on the I channel for frequencies lower than 1.7 Hz
INP:COUP:I LFR1
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
LFR2
Turns on low frequency rejection, rejecting signal component lower than 0.14 Hz.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Example
Turn on low frequency rejection on the I channel for frequencies lower than 0.14 Hz
INP:COUP:I LFR2
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Calibrate
Invokes the guided probe calibration. The guided probe calibration is context sensitive and depends on the
channel (I or Q) and the Differential Input state. The calibration is only performed on the selected channel.
When Differential Input is on, both the probe attached to the main port and the probe attached to the
complementary port are calibrated. When Differential Input is off, only the probe attached to the main port
is calibrated. See "I/Q Guided Calibration" on page 688.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe, Coupling
Readback Text
The last calibration date, or if no calibration exists, "(empty)".
Last: <cal date>
<cal time>
Example:
Last: 8/22/2007
1:02:49 PM
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
643
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Clear Calibration
Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe. It does not clear the data for other probe types
or other ports. If the sensed probe has EEPROM identification, only the data for that specific probe is
cleared. After this command has completed, the probe calibration state will be the same as if no probe
calibration had ever been performed for the specified channel and probe. The probe attenuation will be the
default value for that probe type and the Cable Calibration frequency response corrections will be used.
This command is dependent on the Differential Input state. When Differential Input is on, both the data for
the probe attached to the main port and the data for the probe attached to the complementary port are
cleared. When Differential Input is off, only data for the probe attached to the main port is cleared.
Key Path
Input/Output, I/Q, I Setup | Q Setup, I Probe | Q Probe
Remote Command
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I|Q:CLEar
Example
Clear the calibration data for the I channel and the current probe (with EEPROM identification) or
probe type (without EEPROM identification).
:CAL:IQ:PROBe:I:CLE
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)
Returns the last date and time that the I/Q Cable Calibration was performed for a specific port. This is a
remote query command only.
Remote Command
:CALibration:IQ:FLATness:I|IBAR|Q|QBAR:TIME?
Example
:CAL:IQ:FLAT:I:TIME?
Notes
This returns 6 integer values: year, month, day, hour, minute, second. When no calibration has been
performed, all values will be 0.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
I/Q Probe Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)
Return the last date and time that the I/Q Probe Calibration was performed for a specific port. This is a
remote query command only.
Remote Command
:CALibration:IQ:PROBe:I|IBAR|Q|QBAR:TIME?
Example
:CAL:IQ:PROB:I:TIME?
Notes
This returns 6 integer values: year, month, day, hour, minute, second. When no calibration has been
performed, all values are 0. The value is specific to both the port and probe, so the value will change
as probes are connected or disconnected.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
RF Calibrator
Lets you choose a calibrator signal to look at or turns the calibrator "off".
644
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:FEED:AREFerence REF50|REF4800|OFF
[:SENSe]:FEED:AREFerence?
Example
FEED:AREF REF50 selects the 50 MHz amplitude reference as the signal input.
FEED:AREF REF4800 selects the 4.8 GHz amplitude reference as the signal input
FEED:AREF OFF turns the calibrator "off" (switches back to the selected input – RF or I/Q)
Dependencies
Selecting an input (RF or I/Q) turns the Calibrator OFF. This is true whether the input is selected by
the keys or with the [:SENSe]:FEED command.
The 4.8 GHz internal reference is only available in some models and frequency range options. If the
4.8 GHz reference is not present, the 4.8 GHz softkey will be blanked, and if the REF4800 parameter
is sent, the analyzer will generate an error.
Couplings
When one of the calibrator signals is selected, the analyzer routes that signal (an internal amplitude
reference) to the analyzer, and changes the main input selection to RF so the calibrator signal can be
seen. When you turn the calibrator off it does not switch back to the previously selected input.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback
Off, 50 MHz, 4.8 GHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
:CALibration:SOURce:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALibration:SOURce:STATe?
Notes
For ESA backwards compatibility.
In the ESA the calibrator was a separate output which you connected to the input and switched on
with this command. In the X-Series, the ON parameter is aliased to the [SENSe]:FEED:AREF REF50 command and the
OFF parameter is aliased to [SENSe]:FEED:AREF OFF.
When CALibration:SOURce:STATe? is received, 1 will be returned if any of the references is selected
and 0 if the Calibrator is "Off"
Preset
OFF
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
50 MHz
Selects the 50 MHz internal reference as the input signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, RF Calibrator
Example
:FEED:AREF REF50
Readback
50 MHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
645
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
4.8 GHz
Selects the 4.8 GHz internal reference as the input signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, RF Calibrator
Example
:FEED:AREF REF4800
Dependencies
The 4.8 GHz internal reference is only available in some models and frequency range options. If the
4.8 GHz reference is not present, the 4.8 GHz softkey will be blanked, and if the REF4800 parameter
is sent, the analyzer will generate an error. Readback
4.8 GHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.03.00
Off
Switches the input back to the selected input (RF or I/Q)
Key Path
Input/Output, RF Calibrator
Example
:FEED:AREF OFF
Readback
Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
External Gain
Compensates for gain or loss in the measurement system outside the spectrum analyzer. The External
Gain is subtracted from the amplitude readout (or the loss is added to the amplitude readout). So, the
displayed signal level represents the signal level at the output of the device-under-test, which can be the
input of an external device that provides gain or loss.
Entering an External Gain value does not affect the Reference Level, therefore the trace position on screen
changes, as do all of the values represented by the trace data. Thus, the values of exported trace data,
queried trace data, marker amplitudes, trace data used in calculations such as N dB points, trace math,
peak threshold, etc., are all affected by External Gain. Changing the External Gain, even on a trace that is
not updating, will immediately change all of the above, without new data needing to be taken.
Changing the External Gain causes the analyzer to immediately stop the current sweep and prepare to
begin a new sweep. The data will not change until the trace data updates because the offset is applied to
the data as it is taken. If a trace is exported with a nonzero External Gain, the exported data will contain the
trace data with the offset applied.
In the Spectrum Analyzer mode, a Preamp is the common external device providing gain or loss. In a
measurement application mode like GSM or W-CDMA, the gain or loss could be from a BTS (Base
Transceiver Station) or an MS (Mobile Station). So in the Spectrum Analyzer mode MS and BTS would be
grayed out and the only choice would be Ext Preamp. Similarly in some of the digital communications
applications, Ext Preamp will be grayed out and you would have a choice of MS or BTS.
646
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output
Couplings
The Ext Preamp, MS, and BS keys may be grayed out depending on which measurement is currently
selected. If any of the grayed out keys are pressed, or the equivalent SCPI command is sent, an
advisory message is generated.
Readback
1-of-N selection | [variable]
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Ext Preamp
This function is similar to the reference level offset function. Both affect the displayed signal level. Ref Lvl
Offset is a mathematical offset only, no analyzer configuration is affected. Ext Preamp gain is used when
determining the auto-coupled value of the Attenuator. The External Gain value and the Maximum Mixer
Level settings are both part of the automatic setting equation for the RF attenuation setting. (10 dB of
Attenuation is added for every 10 dB of External Gain.)
Note that the Ref Lvl Offset and Maximum Mixer Level are described in the Amplitude section. They are
reset by the instrument Preset. The External Preamp Gain is reset by the "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
or "Restore System Defaults->All functions. . The External Gain is subtracted from the amplitude readout
so that the displayed signal level represents the signal level at the output of the device-under-test, which
is the input of the external device that is providing gain or loss.
Key Path
Input/Output, External Gain
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:SA[:RF]:GAIN <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:SA[:RF]:GAIN?
Example
CORR:SA:GAIN 10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB
CORR:SA:GAIN –10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB (that is, an attenuation of 10 dB)
Notes
Does not auto return.
Dependencies
The reference level limits are determined in part by the External Gain/Atten, Max Mixer Level, and RF
Atten.
This key is grayed out in Modes that do not support External Gain
Preset
This is unaffected by Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
–120 dB
Max
120 dB
Readback
Preamp Gain, <Ext Gain value> dB
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
[:SENSe]:CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude]
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
The legacy "Ext Preamp Gain" key is now called "Ext Gain" and the sub-menu has choices of Ext
Preamp | MS | BTS for backwards compatibility.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
647
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
MS
Sets an external gain/attenuation value for MS (Mobile Station) tests.
Key Path
Input/Output, External Gain
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:GAIN <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:GAIN?
Example
CORR:MS:GAIN 10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB
CORR:MS:GAIN –10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB (that is, a loss of 10 dB.)
Notes
Does not auto return.
Dependencies
The reference level limits are determined in part by the External Gain, Max Mixer Level, RF Atten
This key is grayed out in modes that do not support MS.
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–100 dB
Max
100 dB
Readback
MS, <Ext Gain value> dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:LOSS <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:MS[:RF]:LOSS?
Example
CORR:MS:LOSS 10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB, and subsequently querying :LOSS will give 10
dB
CORR:MS:LOSS –10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB, and subsequently querying :LOSS will give –10
dB
Notes
A positive value of <rel_ampl> in the above command means a loss and a negative value indicates a
gain.
Anytime :LOSS is set it sets :GAIN to the negative value of the parameter sent. Anytime :LOSS is queried it gives the negative of :GAIN
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
Min
100 dB
Max
–100 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
648
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
BTS
Sets an external attenuation value for BTS (Base Transceiver Station) tests.
Key Path
Input/Output, External Gain
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:GAIN <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:GAIN?
Example
CORR:BTS:GAIN 10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB
CORR:BTS:GAIN –10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB (that is, a loss of 10 dB.)
Notes
Does not auto return.
Dependencies
The reference level limits are determined in part by the External Gain, Max Mixer Level, RF Atten
This key is grayed out in modes that do not support BTS.
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–100 dB
Max
100 dB
Readback
BTS, <Ext Gain value> dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:LOSS <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:BTS[:RF]:LOSS?
Example
CORR:BTS:LOSS 10 sets the Ext Gain value to –10 dB, and subsequently querying :LOSS will give 10
dB
CORR:BTS:LOSS –10 sets the Ext Gain value to 10 dB, and subsequently querying :LOSS will give –
10 dB
Notes
A positive value of <rel_ampl> in the above command means a loss and a negative value indicates a
gain.
Anytime :LOSS is set it sets :GAIN to the negative value of the parameter sent. Anytime :LOSS is queried it gives the negative of :GAIN
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
Min
100 dB
Max
–100 dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
649
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
I Ext Gain
This function affects only the I channel input, except when the Input Path is I+jQ. In I+jQ this setting is
applied to both I and Q channel inputs. It is not available unless the Baseband I/Q option (BBA) is installed.
Key Path
Input/Output, External Gain
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:GAIN <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:I:GAIN?
Example
Set the I Ext Gain to 10 dB
CORR:IQ:I:GAIN 10
Set the I Ext Gain to –10 dB (that is, a loss of 10 dB.)
CORR:IQ:I:GAIN –10
Notes
Not available unless option BBA is installed
Preset
0 dB
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–100 dB
Max
100 dB
Readback Text
I Gain, <I Ext Gain> dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Q Ext Gain
This function affects only the Q channel input and only when the Input Path is not I+jQ. It is not available
unless the Baseband I/Q option (BBA) is installed.
Key Path
Input/Output, External Gain
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:GAIN <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:GAIN?
Example
Set the Q Ext Gain to 10 dB
CORR:IQ:Q:GAIN 10
Set the Q Ext Gain to –10 dB (that is, a loss of 10 dB.)
CORR:IQ:Q:GAIN –10
Notes
Not available unless option BBA is installed.
Preset
0 dB
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 0 dB on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
–100 dB
Max
100 dB
650
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Readback Text
Q Gain, <I Ext Gain> dB
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Restore Input/Output Defaults
This selection causes the group of settings and data associated with the Input/Output key to be a reset to
their default values. In addition, when a Source is installed, licensed and selected, Restore Input/Output
defaults will initiate a Source Preset. This level of Restore System Defaults does not affect any other system settings or mode settings and does
not cause a mode switch. All the features described in this section are reset using this key, including Input
Corrections and Data (described in the Corrections section).
Key Path
Input/Output
Example
:SYST:DEF INP presets all the Input/Output variables to their factory default values.
Notes
Refer to the Utility Functions for information about Restore System Defaults and the complete
description of the :SYSTem:DEFault INPut: command.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Corrections
This key accesses the Amplitude Corrections menu.
Amplitude Corrections arrays can be entered, sent over SCPI, or loaded from a file. They allow you to
correct the response of the analyzer for various use cases. The X-series supports four separate
Corrections arrays, each of which can contain up to 2000 points. They can be turned on and off individually
and any or all can be on at the same time.
Trace data is in absolute units and corrections data is in relative units, but we want to be able to display
trace data at the same time as corrections data. Therefore we establish a reference line to be used while
building or editing a Corrections table. The reference line is halfway up the display and represents 0 dB of
correction. It is labeled “0 dB CORREC”. It is drawn in blue. Corrections data is always in dB. Whatever dB value appears in the correction table represents the
correction to be applied to that trace at that frequency. So if a table entry shows 30 dB that means we
ADD 30 dB to each trace to correct it before displaying it. In zero span, where the frequency is always the center frequency of the analyzer, we apply the
(interpolated) correction for the center frequency to all points in the trace. In the event where there are
two correction amplitudes at the center frequency, we apply the first one in the table.
Note that the corrections are applied as the data is taken; therefore, a trace in View (Update Off) will not be
affected by changes made to the corrections table after the trace is put in View.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
651
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA, DVB-T/H, DTMB, SEQAN, TDSCDMA
Dependencies
This key will only appear if you have the proper option installed in your instrument.
Amplitude correction may not be available in all modes; if a mode does not support amplitude
correction, the Corrections key should be blanked while in that mode. If an application supports
corrections but the current measurement does not, then the key should be grayed out in that
measurement
Preset
Corrections arrays are reset (deleted) by Restore Input/Output Defaults. They survive shutdown and
restarting of the analyzer application, which means they will survive a power cycle.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
652
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
653
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Correction On/Off
Turning the Selected Correction on allows the values in it to be applied to the data. This also automatically
turns on "Apply Corrections" (sets it to ON), otherwise the correction would not take effect.
A new sweep is initiated if an amplitude correction is switched on or off. Note that changing, sending or
loading corrections data does NOT directly initiate a sweep, however in general these operations will turn
corrections on, which DOES initiate a sweep.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6[:STATe]?
Example
SENS:CORR:CSET1 ON
Dependencies
Turning this on automatically turns on "Apply Corrections"
Only the first correction array (Correction 1) supports antenna units. When this array is turned on,
and it contains an Antenna Unit other than “None”, the Y Axis Unit of the analyzer is forced to that
Antenna Unit. All other Y Axis Unit choices are grayed out. Note that this means that a correction file with an Antenna Unit can only be loaded into the
Corrections 1 register. Consequently only for Correction 1 does the dropdown in the Recall dialog
include.ant, and if an attempt is made to load a correction file into any other Correction register
which DOES contain an antenna unit, a Mass Storage error is generated. This command will generate an “Option not available” error unless you have the proper option
installed in your instrument. Preset
Not affected by a Preset. Set to OFF by Restore Input/Output Defaults
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Backwards Compatibility
Unlike legacy analyzers, Preset does not turn Corrections off (Restore Input/Output Defaults does).
654
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Notes
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Properties
Accesses a menu that lets you set the properties of the selected correction.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
655
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
656
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Select Correction
Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to
specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Mode
SA
Notes
The selected correction is remembered even when not in the correction menu.
Preset
Set to Correction 1 by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Readback
Correction 1|Correction 2|Correction 3|Correction 4|Correction 5|Correction 6
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Antenna Unit
For devices (like antennas) that make measurements of field strength or flux density, the correction array
should contain within its values the appropriate conversion factors such that, when the data on the
analyzer is presented in dBµV, the display is calibrated in the appropriate units. The "Antenna Unit" used
for the conversion is contained within the corrections array database. It may be specifiedor loaded in from
an external file or SCPI.
When an array with an Antenna Unit other than "None" is turned on, the Y Axis Unit of the analyzer is forced
to that unit. When this array is turned on, and it contains an Antenna Unit other than “None”, the Y Axis
Unit of the analyzer is forced to that Antenna Unit., and all other Y Axis Unit choices are grayed out.
Antenna Unit does not appear in all Modes that support Corrections. Only the modes listed in the Mode
row of the table below support Antenna Units. Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties
Mode
SA
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]:ANTenna[:UNIT] GAUSs | PTESla | UVM | UAM |
UA | NOConversion
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]:ANTenna[:UNIT]?
Example
CORR:CSET:ANT GAUS
Dependencies
Only the first correction array (Correction 1) supports antenna units. Note that this means that a correction file with an Antenna Unit can only be loaded into the
Corrections 1 register. Consequently only for Correction 1 does the dropdown in the Recall dialog
include.ant, and if an attempt is made to load a correction file into any other Correction register
which DOES contain an antenna unit, a Mass Storage error is generated. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
657
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Preset
Unaffected by Preset. Set to NOC by Restore Input/Output Defaults
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
None
Selects no antenna unit for this Correction set. Thus no Y Axis unit will be forced.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT NOC
Readback
"None"
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBµV/m
Sets the antenna unit to dBµV/m. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit
will then be forced to dBµV/m and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT UVM
Readback
"dBµV/m"
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBµA/m
Sets the antenna unit to dBµA/m. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit
will then be forced to dBµA/m and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT UVA
Readback
" dBµA/m"
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBpT
Sets the antenna unit to dBpT. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit
will then be forced to dBpT and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT PTES
658
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Readback
"dBpT"
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBG
Sets the antenna unit to dBG. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit will
then be forced to dBG and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT GAUS
Readback
" dBG"
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
dBµA
Sets the antenna unit to dBµA. If this correction is turned on, and Apply Corrections is on, the Y Axis Unit
will then be forced to dBµA and all other Y Axis Unit selections will be grayed out.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties, Antenna Unit
Example
:CORR:CSET:ANT UA
Readback
" dBµA"
Initial S/W Revision
A.11.00
Frequency Interpolation
This setting controls how the correction values per-bucket are calculated. We interpolate between
frequencies in either the logarithmic or linear scale.
This setting is handled and stored individually per correction set.
See "Interpolation" on page 660
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:X:SPACing LINear | LOGarithmic
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:X:SPACing?
Example
CORR:CSET:X:SPAC LIN
Preset
Unaffected by a Preset. Set to Linear by Restore Input/Output Defaults.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
659
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Interpolation
For each bucket processed by the application, all of the correction factors at the frequency of interest
(center frequency of each bucket) are summed and added to the amplitude. All trace operations and post
processing treat this post-summation value as the true signal to use.
To effect this correction, the goal, for any particular start and stop frequency, is to build a correction trace,
whose number of points matches the current Sweep Points setting of the instrument, which will be used to
apply corrections on a bucket by bucket basis to the data traces.
For amplitudes that lie between two user specified frequency points, we interpolate to determine the
amplitude value. You may select either linear or logarithmic interpolation between the frequencies.
If we interpolate on a log scale, we assume that the line between the two points is a straight line on the log
scale. For example, let’s say the two points are (2,4) and (20,1). A straight line between them on a log scale
looks like:
On a linear scale (like that of the spectrum analyzer), this translates to:
660
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
If we interpolate on a linear scale, we assume that the two points are connected by a straight line on the
linear scale, as below:
The correction to be used for each bucket is taken from the interpolated correction curve at the center of
the bucket.
Description
Sets an ASCII description field which will be stored in an exported file. Can be displayed in the active
function area by selecting as the active function, if desired to appear in a screen capture.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DESCription "text"
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DESCription?
Example
:CORR:CSET1:DESC "11941A Antenna correction"
Notes
45 chars max; may not fit on display if max chars used
Preset
Unaffected by a Preset. Set to empty by Restore Input/Output Defaults
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Comment
Sets an ASCII comment field which will be stored in an exported file. Can be displayed in the active
function area by selecting as the active function, if desired to appear in a screen capture.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections, Properties
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:COMMent "text"
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:COMMent?
Example
:CORR:CSET1:COMM "this is a comment"
Notes
60 chars max; may not fit on display if max chars used
Preset
Unaffected by Preset. Set to empty by Restore Input/Output Defaults
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
661
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Edit
Invokes the integrated editing facility for this correction set. When entering the menu, the editor window turns on, the selected correction is turned On, Apply
Corrections is set to On, the amplitude scale is set to Log, and the Amplitude Correction (“Ampcor”) trace is
displayed. The actual, interpolated correction trace is shown in green for the selected correction. Note
that since the actual interpolated correction is shown, the correction trace may have some curvature to it. This trace represents only the correction currently being edited, rather than the total, accumulated
amplitude correction for all amplitude corrections which are currently on, although the total, accumulated
correction for all corrections which are turned on is still applied to the data traces.
Because corrections data is always in dB, but the Y-axis of the analyzer is in absolute units, it is necessary
to establish a reference line for display of the Corrections data. The reference line is halfway up the
display and represents 0 dB of correction. It is labeled “0 dB CORREC”. It is drawn in blue.
Corrections data is always in dB. Whatever dB value appears in the correction table represents the
correction to be applied to that trace at that frequency. So if a table entry shows 30 dB that means we
ADD 30 dB to each trace to correct it before displaying it. By definition all points are connected. If a gap is
desired for corrections data, enter 0 dB. Note that a well-designed Corrections array should start at 0 dB and end at 0 dB. This is because
whatever the high end point is will be extended to the top frequency of the instrument, and whatever the
low end point is will be extended down to 0 Hz. So for a Corrections array to have no effect outside its
range, you should start and end the array at 0 dB.
The table editor will only operate properly if the analyzer is sweeping, because its updates are tied to the
sweep system. Thus, you should not try to use the editor in single sweep, and it will be sluggish during
compute-intensive operations like narrow-span FFT sweeps.
When exiting the edit menu (by using the Return key or by pressing an instrument front-panel key), the
editor window turns off and the Ampcor trace is no longer displayed; however, Apply Corrections remains
On, any correction that was on while in the editor remains on, and the amplitude scale returns to its
previous setting.
Corrections arrays are not affected by a Preset, because they are in the Input/Output system. They also
survive shutdown and restarting of the analyzer application, which means they will survive a power cycle.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
662
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Delete Correction
Deletes the correction values for this set. When this key is pressed a prompt is placed on the screen that
says “Please press Enter or OK key to delete correction. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The
deletion is only performed if you press OK or Enter.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DELete
Example
CORR:CSET:DEL
CORR:CSET1:DEL
CORR:CSET4:DEL
Notes
Pressing this key when no corrections are present is accepted without error.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Apply Corrections
Applies amplitude corrections, which are marked as ON to the measured data. If this is set to OFF, then no
amplitude correction sets will be used, regardless of their individual on/off settings. If set to ON, the
corrections that are marked as ON (see "Correction On/Off" on page 654) are used.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe]?
Example
SENS:CORR:CSET:ALL OFF
This command makes sure that no amplitude corrections are applied, regardless of their individual
on/off settings.
Preset
Not affected by Preset. Set to OFF by Restore Input/Output Defaults
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Delete All Corrections
Erases all correction values for all 4 Amplitude Correction sets.
When this key is pressed a prompt is placed on the screen that says “Please press Enter or OK key to
delete all corrections. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The deletion is only performed if you
press OK or Enter.
Key Path
Input/Output, Corrections
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete
Example
CORR:CSET:ALL:DEL
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
663
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Merge Correction Data (Remote Command Only)
The command takes an ASCII series of alternating frequency and amplitude points, each value separated
by commas. The difference between this command and Set Data is that this merges new correction points
into an existing set.
Any new point with the same frequency as an existing correction point will replace the existing point’s
amplitude with that of the new point.
An Ampcor array can contain a maximum of 2000 points.
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DATA:MERGe <freq>, <ampl>, ...
Example
CORR:CSET1:DATA:MERGE 15000000, –5.0, 25000000, 5.0
This adds two correction points at (15 MHz, –5.0 dB) and (25 MHz, 5.0 dB) to whatever values
already exist in correction set 1.
Preset
Empty after Restore Input/Output Defaults. Survives shutdown/restart of analyzer application
(including power cycle)
Min
Freq: 0 Hz
Amptd: –1000 dBm
Max
Freq: 1 THz
Amptd: +1000 dBm
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Set (Replace) Data (Remote Command Only)
The command takes an ASCII series of alternating frequency and amplitude points, each value separated
by commas.
The values sent in the command will totally replace all existing correction points in the specified set.
An Ampcor array can contain a maximum of 2000 points.
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DATA <freq>, <ampl>, . . .
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|...6:DATA?
Example
CORR:CSET1:DATA 10000000, –1.0, 20000000, 1.0
This defines two correction points at (10 MHz, –1.0 dB) and (20 MHz, 1.0 dB) for correction set 1.
Preset
Empty after Restore Input/Output Defaults. Survives a shutdown or restart of analyzer application
(including a power cycle).
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
Freq: 0 Hz
Amptd: –1000 dBm
Max
Freq: 1 THz
Amptd: +1000 dBm
Initial S/W Revision
664
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Freq Ref In
Specifies the frequency reference as being the internal reference, external reference or sensing the
presence of an external reference.
When the frequency reference is set to internal, the internal 10 MHz reference is used even if an external
reference is connected.
When the frequency reference is set to external, the instrument will use the external reference. However, if
there is no external signal present, or it is not within the proper amplitude range, a condition error message
is generated. When the external signal becomes valid, the error is cleared.
If Sense is selected, the instrument checks whether a signal is present at the external reference connector
and will automatically switch to the external reference when a signal is detected. When no signal is
present, it automatically switches to the internal reference. No message is generated as the reference
switches between external and internal. The monitoring of the external reference occurs approximately on
1 millisecond intervals, and never occurs in the middle of a measurement acquisition, only at the end of the
measurement (end of the request).
If for any reason the instrument’s frequency reference is not able to obtain lock, Status bit 2 in the
Questionable Frequency register will be true and a condition error message is generated. When lock is
regained, Status bit 2 in the Questionable Frequency register will be cleared and the condition error will be
cleared.
If an external frequency reference is being used, you must enter the frequency of the external reference if it
is not exactly 10 MHz. The External Ref Freq key is provided for this purpose.
Key Path
Input/Output
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE INTernal|EXTernal|SENSe
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE?
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to SENSe on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All".
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency bit 2 set if unlocked.
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
Freq Ref In was not saved in state in the legacy instruments. It is a part of state in the X-Series.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce?
Notes
The query [SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce? returns the current switch setting. This means:
1. If it was set to SENSe but there is no external reference so the instrument is actually using the
internal reference, then this query returns INTernal and not SENSe.
2. If it was set to SENSe and there is an external reference present, the query returns EXTernal and
not SENSe.
3. If it was set to EXTernal, then the query returns "EXTernal"
4. If it was set to INTernal, then the query returns “INTernal”
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
665
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Preset
SENSe
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The query [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce? was a query-only command in ESA which always returned
whichever reference the instrument was using. The instrument automatically switched to the ext ref
if it was present.
In PSA (which had no sensing) the command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce set the reference (INT or
EXT), so again its query returned the actual routing.
Thus the query form of this command is 100% backwards compatible with both instruments.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce INTernal|EXTernal
Notes
For PSA compatibility the command form is provided and is directly mapped to
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Sense
The external reference is used if a valid signal is sensed at the Ext Ref input. Otherwise the internal
reference is used.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Example
:ROSC:SOUR:TYPE SENS
Readback
Sense
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Internal
The internal reference is used.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Example
:ROSC:SOUR:TYPE INT
Readback
Internal
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
External
The external reference is used.
Key Path
666
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Example
:ROSC:SOUR:TYPE EXT
Readback
External
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Ext Ref Freq
This key tells the analyzer the frequency of the external reference. When the external reference is in use
(either because the reference has been switched to External or because the Reference has been switched
to Sense and there is a valid external reference present) this information is used by the analyzer to
determine the internal settings needed to lock to that particular external reference signal. For the instrument to stay locked, the value entered must be within 5 ppm of the actual external reference
frequency. So it is important to get it close, or you risk an unlock condition.
Note that this value only affects the instrument’s ability to lock. It does not affect any calculations or
measurement results. See "Freq Offset" in the Frequency section for information on how to offset
frequency values.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <freq>
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency?
Example
ROSC:EXT:FREQ 20 MHz sets the external reference frequency to 20 MHz, but does not select the
external reference.
ROSC:SOUR:TYPE EXT selects the external reference.
Notes
Still available with Internal selected, to allow setup for when External is in use.
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 10 MHz on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
Min
CXA: 10 MHz
EXA: 10 MHz or 13 MHz, depending on whether N9010A-R13 is licensed
MXA: 1 MHz
PXA: 1 MHz
Max
CXA: 10 MHz
EXA: 10 MHz
MXA: 50 MHz
PXA: 50 MHz
Default Unit
Hz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
667
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
External Reference Lock BW
This control lets you adjust the External Reference phase lock bandwidth. This control is available in some
models of the X-Series.
The PXA variable reference loop bandwidth allows an external reference to be used and have the analyzer
close-in phase noise improved to match that of the reference. This could result in an improvement of tens
of decibels. The choice of “Wide” or “Narrow” affects the phase noise at low offset frequencies, especially
4 to 400 Hz offset. When using an external reference with superior phase noise, we recommend setting the
external reference phase-locked-loop bandwidth to wide (60 Hz), to take advantage of that superior
performance. When using an external reference with inferior phase noise performance, we recommend
setting that bandwidth to narrow (15 Hz). In these relationships, inferior and superior phase noise are with
respect to −134 dBc/Hz at 30 Hz offset from a 10 MHz reference. Because most reference sources have
phase noise behavior that falls off at a rate of 30 dB/decade, this is usually equivalent to −120 dBc/Hz at
10 Hz offset.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Scope
Mode Global
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:BANDwidth WIDE|NARRow
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:BANDwidth?
Example
ROSC:BAND WIDE
Dependencies
This key only appears in analyzers equipped with the required hardware.
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to Narrow on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults -> All"
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output state.
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
External Ref Coupling
Only appears with option ERC installed and licensed.
This function lets you couple the sweep system of the analyzer to the state of the External Reference. If
Normal is selected, data acquisition proceeds regardless of the state of the External Reference. When you
select Ext Ref Out Of Range Stops Acquisition, the data acquisition (sweep or measurement) stops when
either the "521, External ref out of range" or the "503, Frequency Reference unlocked” error message is
asserted. Note that this will only take place if the Freq Ref In selection is External.
With the acquisition stopped, the data display will stop updating (even if this occurs in the middle of a
sweep or measurement) and no data will be returned to a READ? or MEASure? query; that is, these queries
will not complete because the analyzer will not respond to them. Furthermore, no response will be
generated to a *WAI? or *OPC? query. Proper SCPI sequences are shown below, which will always fail to return if the acquisition stops during the
requested sweep or measurement. Note that, for predictable operation of this function, it is best to
operate the analyzer in single measurement mode (INIT:CONT OFF), because if operating in continuous
668
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
mode, the analyzer may respond to the above queries even after the acquisition stops, with data left over
from the previous acquisition. :INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*OPC?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*WAI?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:READ?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:MEASure?
When the acquisition ceases, in addition to the error condition(s) described above, a popup error message
will be generated informing you that the acquisition has ceased due to an invalid external reference. This
message will stay on the screen while the acquisition is suspended.
If you press the Restart key this message will be taken off the screen and a new acquisition will be
attempted. If the External Reference problem persists the message will re-appear. You can also remove
the message by changing back to the Normal setting of Sweep/Ext Ref Coupling, or by pressing Freq Ref In,
Internal, or Freq Ref In, Sense, or Restore Input/Output Defaults.
The setting of External Ref Coupling is persistent across power-cycling and is not reset with a Preset. It is
reset to the default state (Normal) when Restore Input/Output Defaults is invoked, which will also restart
normal data acquisition.
The detection of invalid external reference is under interrupt processing. If the external reference becomes
invalid then returns to valid in too short a time, no error condition will be detected or reported and therefore
the acquisition will not be stopped.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
669
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Mode
All
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling NORMal|NACQuisition
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling?
Preset
This setting is persistent: it survives power-cycling or a Preset and is reset with Restore Input/Output
defaults.
State Saved
Not saved in instrument state
Readback
Normal|Stop Acq
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
External Ref Coupling
Only appears with option ERC installed and licensed.
This function lets you couple the sweep system of the analyzer to the state of the External Reference. If
Normal is selected, data acquisition proceeds regardless of the state of the External Reference. When you
select Ext Ref Out Of Range Stops Acquisition, the data acquisition (sweep or measurement) stops when
either the "521, External ref out of range" or the "503, Frequency Reference unlocked” error message is
asserted. Note that this will only take place if the Freq Ref In selection is External.
With the acquisition stopped, the data display will stop updating (even if this occurs in the middle of a
sweep or measurement) and no data will be returned to a READ? or MEASure? query; that is, these queries
will not complete because the analyzer will not respond to them. Furthermore, no response will be
generated to a *WAI? or *OPC? query. Proper SCPI sequences are shown below, which will always fail to return if the acquisition stops during the
requested sweep or measurement. Note that, for predictable operation of this function, it is best to
operate the analyzer in single measurement mode (INIT:CONT OFF), because if operating in continuous
mode, the analyzer may respond to the above queries even after the acquisition stops, with data left over
from the previous acquisition. :INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*OPC?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*WAI?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:READ?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
670
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
:MEASure?
When the acquisition ceases, in addition to the error condition(s) described above, a popup error message
will be generated informing you that the acquisition has ceased due to an invalid external reference. This
message will stay on the screen while the acquisition is suspended.
If you press the Restart key this message will be taken off the screen and a new acquisition will be
attempted. If the External Reference problem persists the message will re-appear. You can also remove
the message by changing back to the Normal setting of Sweep/Ext Ref Coupling, or by pressing Freq Ref In,
Internal, or Freq Ref In, Sense, or Restore Input/Output Defaults.
The setting of External Ref Coupling is persistent across power-cycling and is not reset with a Preset. It is
reset to the default state (Normal) when Restore Input/Output Defaults is invoked, which will also restart
normal data acquisition.
The detection of invalid external reference is under interrupt processing. If the external reference becomes
invalid then returns to valid in too short a time, no error condition will be detected or reported and therefore
the acquisition will not be stopped.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Mode
All
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling NORMal|NACQuisition
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling?
Preset
This setting is persistent: it survives power-cycling or a Preset and is reset with Restore Input/Output
defaults.
State Saved
Not saved in instrument state
Readback
Normal|Stop Acq
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
External Ref Coupling
Only appears with option ERC installed and licensed.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
671
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
This function lets you couple the sweep system of the analyzer to the state of the External Reference. If
Normal is selected, data acquisition proceeds regardless of the state of the External Reference. When you
select Ext Ref Out Of Range Stops Acquisition, the data acquisition (sweep or measurement) stops when
either the "521, External ref out of range" or the "503, Frequency Reference unlocked” error message is
asserted. Note that this will only take place if the Freq Ref In selection is External.
With the acquisition stopped, the data display will stop updating (even if this occurs in the middle of a
sweep or measurement) and no data will be returned to a READ? or MEASure? query; that is, these queries
will not complete because the analyzer will not respond to them. Furthermore, no response will be
generated to a *WAI? or *OPC? query. Proper SCPI sequences are shown below, which will always fail to return if the acquisition stops during the
requested sweep or measurement. Note that, for predictable operation of this function, it is best to
operate the analyzer in single measurement mode (INIT:CONT OFF), because if operating in continuous
mode, the analyzer may respond to the above queries even after the acquisition stops, with data left over
from the previous acquisition. :INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*OPC?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:INIT:IMM;*WAI?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:READ?
-:INIT:CONT OFF
:MEASure?
When the acquisition ceases, in addition to the error condition(s) described above, a popup error message
will be generated informing you that the acquisition has ceased due to an invalid external reference. This
message will stay on the screen while the acquisition is suspended.
672
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
If you press the Restart key this message will be taken off the screen and a new acquisition will be
attempted. If the External Reference problem persists the message will re-appear. You can also remove
the message by changing back to the Normal setting of Sweep/Ext Ref Coupling, or by pressing Freq Ref In,
Internal, or Freq Ref In, Sense, or Restore Input/Output Defaults.
The setting of External Ref Coupling is persistent across power-cycling and is not reset with a Preset. It is
reset to the default state (Normal) when Restore Input/Output Defaults is invoked, which will also restart
normal data acquisition.
The detection of invalid external reference is under interrupt processing. If the external reference becomes
invalid then returns to valid in too short a time, no error condition will be detected or reported and therefore
the acquisition will not be stopped.
Key Path
Input/Output, Freq Ref In
Mode
All
Remote Command
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling NORMal|NACQuisition
[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:COUPling?
Preset
This setting is persistent: it survives power-cycling or a Preset and is reset with Restore Input/Output
defaults.
State Saved
Not saved in instrument state
Readback
Normal|Stop Acq
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Output Config
Accesses keys that configure various output settings, like the frequency reference output, trigger output
and analog output.
Key Path
Input/Output
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In ESA there was not a user interface to enable the Video Output (Analog Output), Trigger Output, or
Gate Output. In the X-Series each of these physical connectors requires configuration, thus the
user interface has been added for X-Series, along with the potential for an output you think is
always on to be switched off.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Trig Out (1 and 2)
Select the type of output signal that will be output from the rear-panel Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connectors.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Remote Command
:TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut HSWP | MEASuring | MAIN |
GATE | GTRigger | OEVen | SPOint | SSWeep | SSETtled | S1Marker |
S2Marker | S3Marker | S4Marker | OFF
:TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
673
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Example
TRIG:OUTP HSWP
TRIG2:OUTP GATE
Dependencies
The second Trigger output (Trig 2 Out) does not appear in all models; in models that do not support it,
the Trig 2 Out key is blanked, and sending the SCPI command for this output generates an error,
“Hardware missing; Not available for this model number” In models that do not support the Trigger
2 output, this error is returned if trying to set Trig 2 Out and a query of Trig 2 Out returns OFF.
Preset
Trigger 1: Sweeping (HSWP)
Trigger 2: Gate
This is unaffected by a Preset but is preset to the above values on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
or "Restore System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Polarity
Sets the output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector to trigger on either the positive or negative
polarity.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Remote Command
:TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:POLarity POSitive |
NEGative
:TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:POLarity?
Example
TRIG1:OUTP:POL POS
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to POSitive on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Off
Selects no signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP OFF
Readback
Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
674
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Sweeping (HSWP)
Selects the Sweeping Trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector when a
measurement is made. This signal has historically been known as "HSWP" (High = Sweeping), and is 5 V
TTL level with 50 ohm output impedance.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP HSWP
Readback
Sweeping
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Measuring
Selects the Measuring trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. This signal is
true while the Measuring status bit is true.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP MEAS
Readback
Measuring
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Main Trigger
Selects the current instrument trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP MAIN
Readback
Main Trigger
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Gate Trigger
Selects the gate trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. This is the source of
the gate timing, not the actual gate signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP GTR
Readback
Gate Trigger
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
675
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Gate
Selects the gate signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. The gate signal has been
delayed and its length determined by delay and length settings. When the polarity is positive, a high on the
Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out represents the time the gate is configured to pass the signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP GATE
Readback
Gate
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Odd/Even Trace Point
Selects either the odd or even trace points as the signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out
connector when performing swept spectrum analysis. When the polarity is positive, this output goes high
during the time the analyzer is sweeping past the first point (Point 0) and every other following trace point.
The opposite is true if the polarity is negative.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP OEV
Readback
Odd/Even
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Trig Out (1 and 2)
Select the type of output signal that will be output from the rear-panel Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connectors.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Remote Command
:TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut HSWP | MEASuring | MAIN |
GATE | GTRigger | OEVen | SPOint | SSWeep | SSETtled | S1Marker |
S2Marker | S3Marker | S4Marker | OFF
:TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut?
Example
TRIG:OUTP HSWP
TRIG2:OUTP GATE
Dependencies
The second Trigger output (Trig 2 Out) does not appear in all models; in models that do not support it,
the Trig 2 Out key is blanked, and sending the SCPI command for this output generates an error,
“Hardware missing; Not available for this model number” In models that do not support the Trigger
2 output, this error is returned if trying to set Trig 2 Out and a query of Trig 2 Out returns OFF.
Preset
Trigger 1: Sweeping (HSWP)
Trigger 2: Gate
This is unaffected by a Preset but is preset to the above values on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults"
or "Restore System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
676
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Polarity
Sets the output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector to trigger on either the positive or negative
polarity.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Remote Command
:TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:POLarity POSitive |
NEGative
:TRIGger|TRIGger1|TRIGger2[:SEQuence]:OUTPut:POLarity?
Example
TRIG1:OUTP:POL POS
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to POSitive on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All"
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Off
Selects no signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP OFF
Readback
Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Sweeping (HSWP)
Selects the Sweeping Trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector when a
measurement is made. This signal has historically been known as "HSWP" (High = Sweeping), and is 5 V
TTL level with 50 ohm output impedance.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP HSWP
Readback
Sweeping
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Measuring
Selects the Measuring trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. This signal is
true while the Measuring status bit is true.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
677
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP MEAS
Readback
Measuring
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Main Trigger
Selects the current instrument trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP MAIN
Readback
Main Trigger
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Gate Trigger
Selects the gate trigger signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. This is the source of
the gate timing, not the actual gate signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP GTR
Readback
Gate Trigger
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Gate
Selects the gate signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out connector. The gate signal has been
delayed and its length determined by delay and length settings. When the polarity is positive, a high on the
Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out represents the time the gate is configured to pass the signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP GATE
Readback
Gate
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Odd/Even Trace Point
Selects either the odd or even trace points as the signal to be output to the Trig 1 Out or Trig 2 Out
connector when performing swept spectrum analysis. When the polarity is positive, this output goes high
678
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
during the time the analyzer is sweeping past the first point (Point 0) and every other following trace point.
The opposite is true if the polarity is negative.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Trig 1/2 Output
Example
TRIG1:OUTP OEV
Readback
Odd/Even
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Analog Out
This menu lets you control which signal is fed to the “Analog Out” connector on the analyzer rear panel.
See "More Information" on page 679
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Remote Command
:OUTPut:ANALog OFF|SVIDeo|LOGVideo|LINVideo|DAUDio
:OUTPut:ANALog?
Example
OUTP:ANAL SVIDeo ! causes the analog output type to be Screen Video
Preset
OFF
Preset
This is unaffected by Preset but is set to DAUDio on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output State
Readback line
1-of-N selection [variable]
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
Prior to A.04.00, OFF was the default functionality except when in the Analog Demod application or
with Tune and Listen, in which case it was DAUDio, and there was no selection menu. So for
backwards compatibility with earlier X-Series firmware versions, Auto (:OUTP:ANAL:AUTO ON) will
duplicate the prior behavior.
The DNWB and SANalyzer parameters, which were legal in PSA but perform no function in the XSeries, are accepted without error.
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
More Information
The table below gives the range for each output.
Analog Out
Nominal Range
exc.
(10% overrange)
Off
0V
Screen
Video
Log Video
Scale Factor
Notes
0 – 1 V open
circuit
10%/division
8566 compatible
0 –1 V
terminated
1/(192.66 dB/V)
dB referenced to mixer level, 1V out for –10 dBm
at the mixer.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
679
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Linear Video
0 –1 V
terminated
100%/V
Demod
Audio
(varies with analyzer setting)
Linear referenced to Ref Level, 1 V out for RF
envelope at the Ref Level.
Auto
Selects the Auto state for the Analog Output menu. In this state, the Analog Output will automatically be
set to the most sensible setting for the current mode or measurement.
If you make a selection manually from the Analog Out menu, this selection will remain in force until you
change it (or re-select Auto), even if you go to a mode or measurement for which the selected output does
not apply.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Remote Command
OUTPut:ANALog:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
OUTPut:ANALog:AUTO?
Example
OUTP:ANAL:AUTO ON
Preset
ON
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output State
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Off
Turns off the analog output.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Example
OUTP:ANAL OFF ! causes the analog output to be off
Readback Text
Off
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Screen Video
Selects the analog output to be the screen video signal. In this mode, the pre-detector data is output to
the Analog Out connector. The output looks very much like the trace displayed on the analyzer’s screen,
and depends on the Log/Lin display Scale, Reference Level, and dB per division, but is not influenced by the
selected detector or any digital flatness corrections or trace post-processing (like Trace Averaging).
Note that this mode is similar to the Analog Output of the HP 8566 family and the Video Out (opt 124)
capability of the Keysight PSA analyzer (E444x), although there are differences in the behavior. Key Path
680
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Example
OUTP:ANAL SVID
Dependencies
Because the Screen Video output uses one of the two IF processing channels, only one detector is
available while Screen Video is selected. All active traces will change to use the same detector as
the selected trace when Screen Video is activated. Screen Video output is not available while any EMI Detector is selected (Quasi Peak, RMS Average or
EMI Average), because these detectors use both IF processing channels. Consequently, if the user
chooses an EMI Detector, there will be no Screen Video output.
The output holds at its last value during an alignment and during a marker count. After a sweep:
l
l
If a new sweep is to follow (as in Continuous sweep mode), the output holds at its last value
during the retrace before the next sweep starts. If the analyzer is in zero-span, there is no
retrace, as the analyzer remains tuned to the Center Frequency and does not sweep. Therefore,
in zero-span, the output simply remains live between display updates.
If no new sweep is to follow (as in Single sweep mode), the output remains live, and continues to
show the pre-detector data This function depends on optional capability; the key will be blanked and the command will generate
an “Option not available” error unless you have Option YAV or YAS licensed in your instrument. Couplings
Screen Video output changes while in FFT Sweeps, so for measurements that use exclusively FFT
Sweeps, or if the user manually chooses FFT Sweeps, the Screen Video output will look different than
it does in swept mode.
Readback Text
Screen Video
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
See "Backwards Compatibility:" on page 681, below.
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Backwards Compatibility:
The Screen Video function is intended to be very similar to the 8566 Video Output and the PSA Option 124. However, unlike the PSA, it is not always on; it must be switched on by the Screen Video key. Also, unlike
the PSA, there are certain dependencies (detailed above) – for example, the Quasi Peak Detector is unavailable when Screen Video is on.
Furthermore, the PSA Option 124 hardware was unipolar and its large range was padded to be exactly
right for use as a Screen Video output. In the X-Series, the hardware is bipolar and has a wider range to
accommodate the other output choices. Therefore, the outputs won’t match up exactly and users may
have to modify their setup when applying the X-Series in a PSA application.
Log Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Mixer Level)
Selects the analog output to be the log of the video signal. In this mode, the pre-detector data is output to
the Analog Out connector with a Log scaling. The output is referenced to the current level at the mixer,
does not depend on display settings like Reference Level or dB per division, and it is not influenced by the
selected detector or any digital flatness corrections or trace post-processing (like Trace Averaging), but
does change with input attenuation.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
681
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
The output is designed so that full scale (1 V) corresponds to –10 dBm at the mixer. The full range (0–1 V)
covers 192.66 dB ; thus, 0 V corresponds to –202.66 dBm at the mixer.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Example
OUTP:ANAL LOGV
Dependencies
Because the Log Video output uses one of the two IF processing channels, only one detector is
available while Screen Video is selected. All active traces will change to use the same detector as
the selected trace when Log Video is activated. Log Video output is not available while any EMI Detector is selected (Quasi Peak, RMS Average or
EMI Average), because these detectors use both IF processing channels. Consequently, if the user
chooses an EMI Detector, there will be no Log Video output.
The output holds at its last value during an alignment, during a marker count, and during retrace
(after a sweep and before the next sweep starts).
This function depends on optional capability. The key will be blanked and the command will generate
an “Option not available” error unless you have Option YAV licensed in your instrument. Couplings
Log Video output changes while in FFT Sweeps, so for measurements that use exclusively FFT
Sweeps, or if the user manually chooses FFT Sweeps, the Log Video output will look different than it
does in swept mode.
Readback Text
Log Video
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Linear Video (RF Envelope, Ref=Ref Level)
Selects the analog output to be the envelope signal on a linear (voltage) scale. In this mode, the predetector data is output to the Analog Out connector with a Linear scaling. The output is based on the
current Reference Level, and is not influenced by the selected detector or any digital flatness corrections
or trace post-processing (like Trace Averaging).
The scaling is set so that 1 V output occurs with an instantaneous video level equal to the reference level,
and 0 V occurs at the bottom of the graticule. This scaling gives you the ability to control the gain without
having another setup control for the key. But it requires you to control the look of the display (the reference
level) in order to control the analog output.
This mode is ideal for looking at Amplitude Modulated signals, as the linear envelope effectively
demodulates the signal.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Example
OUTP:ANAL LINV
Dependencies
Because the Linear Video output uses one of the two IF processing channels, only one detector is
available while Linear Video is selected. All active traces will change to use the same detector as
the selected trace when Log Video is activated. Linear Video output is not available while any EMI Detector is selected (Quasi Peak, RMS Average or
EMI Average), because these detectors use both IF processing channels. Consequently, if the user
chooses an EMI Detector, there will be no Linear Video output.
The output holds at its last value during an alignment and during a marker count and during retrace
(after a sweep and before the next sweep starts).
682
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
This function depends on optional capability; the key will be blanked and the command will generate
an “Option not available” error unless you have Option YAV licensed in your instrument. Couplings
Linear Video output changes while in FFT Sweeps, so for measurements that use exclusively FFT
Sweeps, or if the user manually chooses FFT Sweeps, the Linear Video output will look different than
it does in swept mode.
Readback Text
Linear Video
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Demod Audio
Selects the analog output to be the demodulation of the video signal. When Demod Audio is selected, the demodulated audio signal appears at this output whenever the Analog
Demod application is demodulating a signal or when Analog Demod Tune and Listen is operating in the
Swept SA measurement.
When Analog Out is in the Auto state, this output is auto-selected when in the Analog Demod mode or
when Analog Demod Tune and Listen is operating in the Swept SA measurement. If any other Analog Output is manually selected when in the Analog Demod mode or when Analog Demod
Tune and Listen is operating in the Swept SA measurement, a condition warning message appears.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Analog Out
Example
OUTP:ANAL DAUD
Dependencies
This key only appears if the Analog Demod application (N9063A), the N6141A or W6141A
application, or Option EMC is installed and licensed, otherwise the key will be blanked and the
command will generate an “Option not available” error. The output holds at its last value during an alignment and during a marker count. It is not held
between sweeps, in order for Tune and Listen to work properly.
When Demod Audio is the selected Analog Output:
• all active traces are forced to use the same detector.
• CISPR detectors (QPD, EMI Avg, RMS Avg) are unavailable
Readback Text
Demod Audio
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00 (this was the default functionality, and there was no selection)
Modified at S/W Revision
A.04.00
Digital Bus
This menu allows you to configure the LVDS connector located on the rear panel of the instrument. It is a
unidirectional link of real time data at a 90 MSa/s rate. The ADC is sampling a 22.5 MHz IF.
The data that appears on this port is raw, uncorrected ADC samples, unless you have option RTL. With
option RTL, you get fully corrected I/Q data.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
683
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
This connector will only be active when the Narrowband IF Path is currently in use.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Bus Out On/Off
When Bus Out is on, all acquisitions are streamed to the output port including acquisitions for internal
purposes such as Alignment. The internal processing and routing of acquisitions continues as usual and is
unaffected by the state of Bus Out.
When Bus Out is off, no signal appears on the LVDS port.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Digital Bus
Scope
Mode Global
Remote Command
:OUTPut:DBUS[1][:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0
:OUTPut:DBUS[1][:STATe]?
Example
OUTP:DBUS ON
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to Off on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults -> All"
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output State
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Modified at S/W Revision
A.04.00
I/Q Cal Out
The Baseband I/Q "Cal Out" port can be turned on with either a 1 kHz or a 250 kHz square wave. This can
be turned on independent of the input selection. A Preset will reset this to Off.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Remote Command
:OUTPut:IQ:OUTPut IQ1|IQ250|OFF
:OUTPut:IQ:OUTPut?
Example
OUTP:IQ:OUTP IQ1
Couplings
An I/Q Cable Calibration or an I/Q Probe Calibration will change the state of the Cal Out port as
needed by the calibration routine. When the calibration is finished the I/Q Cal Out is restored to the
pre-calibration state.
Preset
Off
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Range
1 kHz Square Wave|250 kHz Square Wave|Off
Readback Text
1 kHz|250 kHz|Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Saved State
Saved in instrument state
684
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
1 kHz Square Wave
Turns on the 1 kHz square wave signal at the Cal Out port. This choice is only available with option BBA.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, I/Q Cal Out
Readback
I/Q 1kHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
250 kHz Square Wave
Turns on the 250 kHz square wave signal at the Cal Out port. This choice is only available with option BBA.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, I/Q Cal Out
Readback
I/Q 250kHz
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Off
Turns off the signal at the Cal Out port. This choice is only available with option BBA.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, I/Q Cal Out
Readback
Off
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Aux IF Out
This menu controls the signals that appear on the SMA output on the rear panel labeled “AUX IF OUT
The Aux IF Out functionality is only valid for RF and External Mixer inputs. When using the External Mixing
path, the Aux IF Out levels (for all three Options CR3, CRP, and ALV) will be uncalibrated because the
factory default Aux IF level was set to accommodate the expected IF levels for the RF path.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config
Remote Command
:OUTPut:AUX SIF|AIF|LOGVideo|OFF
:OUTPut:AUX?
Dependencies
The softkey does not appear in models that do not support the Aux IF Out.
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to OFF on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All”
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output state
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
685
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Readback line
1-of-N selection [variable]
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In the PSA, the IF output has functionality equivalent to the "Second IF" function in the X-Series’ Aux
IF Out menu. In the X-Series, it is necessary to switch the Aux IF Out to “Second IF” to get this
functionality, whereas in PSA it is always on, since there are no other choices. Hence a command to
switch this function to “Second IF” will have to be added by customers migrating from PSA who use
the IF Output in PSA.
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Off
In this mode nothing comes out of the “AUX IF OUT” connector on the rear panel. The connector appears
as an open-circuit (that is, it is not terminated in any way).
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out
Example
OUTP:AUX OFF
causes the aux output type to be off
Readback Text
Off
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Second IF
In this mode the 2nd IF output is routed to the rear panel connector. The annotation on the key shows the
current 2nd IF frequency in use in the analyzer.
The frequency of the 2nd IF depends on the current IF signal path as shown in the table below:
IF Path Selected
Frequency of “Second IF” Output
10 MHz
322.5 MHz
25 MHz
322.5 MHz
40 MHz
250 MHz
140 MHz
300 MHz
The signal quality, such as signal to noise ratio and phase noise, are excellent in this mode.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out
Example
OUTP:AUX SIF
causes the aux output type to be Second IF
Dependencies
Does not appear unless Option CR3 is installed.
Readback Text
Second IF
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
686
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
Arbitrary IF
In this mode the 2nd IF output is mixed with a local oscillator and mixer to produce an arbitrary IF output
between 10 MHz and 75 MHz with 500 kHz resolution. The phase noise in this mode will not be as good as
in Second IF mode. The IF output frequency is adjustable, through an active function which appears on the Arbitrary IF
selection key, from 10 MHz to 75 MHz with 500 kHz resolution.
The bandwidth of this IF output varies with band and center frequency, but is about 40 MHz at the –3 dB
width. When the output is centered at lower frequencies in its range, signal frequencies at the bottom of
the bandwidth will “fold”. For example, with a 40 MHz bandwidth (20 MHz half-bandwidth), and a 15 MHz
IF center, a signal –20 MHz relative to the spectrum analyzer center frequency will have a relative
response of about –3 dB with a frequency 20 MHz below the 15 MHz IF center. This –5 MHz frequency will
fold to become a +5 MHz signal at the IF output. Therefore, lower IF output frequencies are only useful with
known band-limited signals.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out
Example
OUTP:AUX AIF
causes the aux output type to be the Arbitrary IF
Dependencies
Does not appear unless Option CRP is installed.
Readback Text
Arbitrary IF
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out
Scope
Mode Global
Remote Command
:OUTPut:AUX:AIF <value>
:OUTPut:AUX:AIF?
Example
:OUTP:AUX:AIF 50 MHZ
Preset
This is unaffected by a Preset but is set to 70 MHz on a "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore
System Defaults->All”
State Saved
Saved in Input/Output State
Min
10 MHz
Max
75 MHz
Default Unit
Hz
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
Fast Log Video
In this mode the 2nd IF output is passed through a log amp and the log envelope of the IF signal is sent to
the rear panel. The open circuit output level varies by about 25 mV per dB, with a top-of-screen signal
producing about 1.6 Volts. The output impedance is nominally 50 ohms.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
687
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Input/Output
This mode is intended to meet the same needs as Option E4440A-H7L Fast Rise Time Video Output on the
Keysight E4440A PSA Series, allowing you to characterize pulses with fast rise times using standard
measurement suites on modern digital scopes.
Key Path
Input/Output, Output Config, Aux IF Out
Example
OUTP:AUX LOGVideo
causes the aux output type to be Fast Log Video
Dependencies
Does not appear unless Option ALV is installed.
The output is off during an alignment but not during a marker count, and is not blanked during retrace
(after a sweep and before the next sweep starts).
Readback Text
Fast Log Video
Initial S/W Revision
A.04.00
I/Q Guided Calibration
Calibrating the Baseband I/Q ports requires several steps and manual connections. The Guided
Calibration interactively guides you through the required steps, displaying diagrams to help with the
connections. The steps vary depending on the setup.
In the Guided Calibration windows, the date and time of the last calibration are displayed. If any of the
items listed are displayed in yellow, this indicates that the calibration for that item is inconsistent with the
latest calibration, and you should complete the entire calibration process before you exit the calibration.
I/Q Isolation Calibration
The I/Q Isolation Calibration must be run before calibrating any port with either the I/Q Cable Calibration or
I/Q Probe Calibration. This calibration is performed with nothing connected to any of the front panel I/Q
ports. This is the first step in both the I/Q Cable Calibration and the I/Q Probe Calibration.
I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Command Only)
Returns the last date and time that the I/Q Isolation Calibration was performed. This is a remote query
command only.
Remote Command
:CALibration:IQ:ISOLation:TIME?
Example
:CAL:IQ:ISOL:TIME?
Notes
This returns 6 integer values: year, month, day, hour, minute, second. When no calibration has been
performed, all values will be 0.
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
688
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Marker
The Marker key accesses the Marker menu. A marker can be placed on a trace to allow the value of the
trace at the marker point to be determined precisely. The functions in this menu include a 1-of-N selection
of the control mode Normal, Delta, Fixed, or Off for the selected marker.
The fundamental marker operation involves setting a Marker’s X-Axis value and then reading the marker’s
Y-Axis value. From the front panel you do this using the Marker menu and the green marker readout in the
upper right corner of the display. Programmatically, to set the Marker’s X-Axis value use
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10|11|12:X <freq|time> . To query the Marker’s Y-Axis value, use
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10|11|12:Y? . See "Setting/Querying the Marker X Axis Value" on
page 690 and "Setting/Querying the Marker Y Axis Value" on page 692 for information on these functions.
When Marker is pressed, if the selected marker is Off, pressing Marker sets it to Normal and places it at the
center of the screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules. If the selected marker is already
On it will remain at the frequency/time and amplitude to which it is already set, even if this means it will be
offscreen.
Markers can be on and not be visible because they are offscreen. This may occur if you set a marker to a
frequency outside of the current settings of the Start and Stop frequencies, or in Spectrogram View, you
place a marker on a Display Trace other than 0. To move the marker on to the display, press Peak Search.
Markers may also be used in pairs to read the difference (or delta) between two data points. They can be
used in Marker Functions to do advanced data processing, or to specify operating points in functions like
Signal Track and N dB Points.
The command in the table below selects the marker and sets the marker control mode as described under
Normal, Delta, Fixed and Off, below. All interactions and dependencies detailed under the key description
are enforced when the remote command is sent.
See "Marker Control Mode" on page 690.
See "Setting/Querying the Marker X Axis Value" on page 690.
See "Setting the Marker X Position in Trace Points" on page 691.
See "Setting/Querying the Marker Y Axis Value" on page 692.
See "Marker Backwards Compatibility" on page 693
Key Path
Front-panel key
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE POSition|DELTa|FIXed|OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE?
Preset
OFF (all markers)
State Saved
The marker control mode is saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:MODE SPAN|BAND
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
To support band function backwards compatibility, both of these legacy parameters are accepted and
aliased to POSition. They are never returned to a query. See "Band Function Backwards
Compatibility" on page 743 for more information.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
689
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Marker Control Mode
There are four control modes for markers:
l
l
l
l
Normal (POSition) - A marker that can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis value,
and who's absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value.
Delta (DELTa) - A marker that can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis offset from
a reference marker, and whose absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis
value.
Fixed (FIXed) - A marker whose X Axis and Y Axis values may be directly or indirectly specified by you,
but whose Y Axis value remains fixed, once specified, and does not follow the trace. Fixed markers are
useful as reference markers for Delta markers, as operands in a Peak Search operation, and as
arbitrary reference points settable by you. These markers are represented on the display by an “X”
rather than a diamond.
Off (OFF) - A marker that is not in use.
In the Swept SA measurement, the Preset control mode is Off for all markers.
Setting/Querying the Marker X Axis Value
The command below sets the marker X Axis value in the current marker X Axis Scale unit. In each case the
marker that is addressed becomes the selected marker. It has no effect (other than to cause the marker to
become selected) if the control mode is Off, but it is the SCPI equivalent of entering an X value if the
control mode is Normal,Delta, or Fixed.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X <freq|time>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X?
Notes
If no suffix is sent it will use the fundamental units for the current marker X Axis Scale. If a suffix is
sent that does not match the current marker X Axis Scale unit, an invalid suffix message will be
generated.
If the specified marker is Fixed and a Marker Function is on, a message is generated. If the key is
pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same
message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning.
The query returns the marker’s absolute X Axis value if the control mode is Normal or Fixed. It returns
the offset from the marker’s reference marker if the control mode is Delta. The query is returned in
the fundamental units for the current marker X Axis scale: Hz for Frequency and Inverse Time,
seconds for Period and Time. If the marker is Off the response is not a number.
Preset
After a preset, if X is queried with no value sent first, the center of screen value will be returned. This
will depend on the frequency range of the instrument. 13.255 GHz is correct for 26 GHz instruments
only (Option 526).
Min
– ∞ (minus infinity)
Max
+ ∞ (plus infinity). Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series
690
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
marker values are not limited and do not clip
Default Unit
determined by X Axis Scale
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:CENTer
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In earlier Agilent analyzers, markers were position markers, which means that Normal and Delta
markers stayed at the same screen position when X Axis parameters were changed. In the X-Series,
markers are value markers, which means that when the analyzer’s X Axis settings are changed, the
marker’s X Axis value in fundamental X Axis units remains unchanged. See "Marker Backwards
Compatibility" on page 693 for a full discussion of this change.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
This alias is provided for compatibility with the Band Power function in PSA and ESA. See details in
the “Marker Function” section under "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743
Setting the Marker X Position in Trace Points
The command below sets the marker X position in trace points. It has no effect if the marker control mode
is Off. But it is the SCPI equivalent of entering a value if the control mode is Normal or Delta or Fixed –
except the setting is in trace points rather than X Axis Scale units.
The entered value in Trace Points is immediately translated into the current X Axis Scale units for setting
the value of the marker. The marker’s value in X Axis Scale Units, NOT trace points, will be preserved if a
change is made to the X Axis scale settings. Thus, if you use this command to place a marker on bucket
500, which happens at that time to correspond to 13 GHz, and then you change the Start Frequency so that
bucket 500 is no longer 13 GHz, the marker will stay at 13 GHz, NOT at bucket 500! This is important to
realize as it differs from the behavior of past Agilent analyzers.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:POSition <real>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:POSition?
Notes
If the specified marker is Fixed and a Marker Function is on, a message is generated. If the key is
pressed, an advisory message is generated. If the equivalent SCPI command is sent, this same
message is generated as part of a “–221, Settings conflict” warning.
The query returns the marker’s absolute X Axis value in trace points if the control mode is Normal or
Fixed. It returns the offset from the marker’s reference marker in trace points if the control mode is
Delta. The value is returned as a real number, not an integer, corresponding to the translation from X
Axis Scale units to trace points
Preset
After a preset, if X is queried with no value sent first, the center of screen value will be returned. So if
per default, the number of Trace points is 1001, the center value will be 500.
Min
0
Max
Number of trace points – 1
Default Unit
unitless
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:CENTer
This alias is provided for compatibility with the Band Power function in PSA and ESA. See details in
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
691
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
the “Marker Function” section under "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Setting/Querying the Marker Y Axis Value
The fundamental item of marker data accessed by users is the marker’s Y-Axis value. The query below is
used to select the marker and read the marker’s Y-Axis value.
In the command form, it selects the marker and sets the marker Y Axis value; the default unit is the current
Y Axis unit. The command form has no effect (other than selecting the marker) unless the marker control
mode is Fixed.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Y <real>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Y?
Example
CALC:MARK2:MODE POS turns on marker 2 as a normal marker.
CALC:MARK2:X 20 GHZ moves marker 2 to 20 GHz if X Axis Scale is Frequency. If X Axis Scale is
Time, an Invalid Suffix error is generated.
Notes
The command :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10|11|12:Y? returns the marker Y-axis result, if
the control mode is Normal, Fixed or Delta. If the marker is Off the response is 9.91e37 (“Not
A Number”).
If no suffix is sent it will use the current Y Axis unit. If a suffix is sent that does not have units of
absolute amplitude, an invalid suffix error is generated. If a marker function is on for the specified
marker, a Settings Conflict message is generated.
Preset
Trace value at center of screen. There is no way to predict what this will be after a preset.
Min
– ∞ (minus infinity)
Max
+ ∞ (plus infinity)
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
As a result of the change from position markers to value markers (see below), markers can be at a
frequency which is offscreen, whereas in the past, they were clipped to the screen edges and hence
were never offscreen. In the past, since markers could never be offscreen they always returned a
valid result. In the X-Series, markers which are offscreen return not a number as a result; hence the
potential now exists for not a number to be returned for a marker Y-Axis query.
Also, in some previous analyzers linear ratios read out on the display in %. In the X-Series they display
as dimensionless quantities. Eg, a quantity which used to display as 52% now displays as .52. The
SCPI behavior is unaffected as it has always read out the ratio rather than the percentage.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Querying the Marker Z Axis Value
The command below queries the marker Z Axis value in the Spectrogram View only. The Z Axis value of a
marker represents the time value of the marker (see “Representation of Time” under the Spectrogram
View description). In each case the marker that is addressed becomes the selected marker.
Remote Command
692
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Z?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Notes
The query returns the marker’s absolute Z Axis value if the control mode is Normal or Fixed. It returns
the offset from the marker’s reference marker if the control mode is Delta.
For Spectrogram, the Z Axis value represents the amount of time transpired since the start of the
recording of traces.
Preset
9.91E+37
Min
-Infinity
Max
+Infinity
Setting or Querying the Marker Z Position
The command below sets the Marker Z position in the Spectrogram View only. Setting the Z Position sets
which of the 300 traces in the Spectrogram the selected marker will appear on. In each case the marker
that is addressed becomes the selected marker. It has no effect (other than to cause the marker to
become selected) if the control mode is Off, but it is the SCPI equivalent of making a Marker Z entry if the
control mode is Normal,Delta, or Fixed.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Z:POSition <integer>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:Z:POSition?
Notes
The command sets or queries the Z Axis position. In the Spectrogram View, this value correlates to
be one of the 300 stored traces. Each Z Axis position represents a different stored trace.
Preset
0
Min
0
Max
Number of traces stored is limited to 300.
Default Unit
unitless
Marker Backwards Compatibility
In earlier Agilent analyzers, markers were position markers, which means that Normal and Delta markers
stayed at the same screen position when X Axis parameters were changed. So a marker at center screen
stayed at center screen even if Center Frequency was changed (which means that the marker’s frequency
changed). In the X-Series, markers are value markers, which means that when the analyzer’s X Axis
settings are changed, the marker’s X Axis value in fundamental X Axis units remains unchanged. For
example, if you put a marker at a particular frequency, it will stay at that frequency regardless of whether
or not you change the Center Frequency of the analyzer, even if that means that the marker ends up
offscreen.
While this change resulted in an overall higher level of usability of the marker system, there are some use
cases where the user depends on the marker staying at the center of the screen. The most common one is
where the user turns on a marker at center screen and uses it to measure the trace amplitude at the center
frequency or at a series of center frequencies, without the need to ever move the marker. In the X-Series,
to mimic the legacy behavior for this use case, the user must turn the marker off and then back on after
changing the center frequency of the analyzer. This causes the marker to reappear in the center of the
screen.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
693
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Also as a result of the change from position markers to value markers, markers can be at a frequency which
is offscreen, whereas in the past, they were clipped to the screen edges and hence were never offscreen. Users who depended on this clipping behavior to force markers to the edges of the screen will have to
rewrite their code. Furthermore, since markers could never be offscreen they always returned a valid
result. In the X-Series, markers which are offscreen return not a number as a result; hence the potential
now exists for not a number to be returned for a marker query.
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
694
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
695
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
696
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
697
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Normal
Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Normal and turns on the active function for setting its
value. If the selected marker was Off, it is placed at the center of the screen on the trace specified by the
marker’s Trace attribute. A Normal mode (POSition type) marker can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis
value. Its absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value.
Key Path
Marker
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE POS sets Marker 1 to Normal.
Notes
See the description under the “ Marker” key.
Couplings
The marker addressed by this command becomes the selected marker on the front panel.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X Axis value are saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Backwards
Compatibity SCPI
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:STATe ON|1
Setting a marker which is OFF to ON or 1 selects the marker, puts it in Normal mode and places it at
the center of the screen.
Setting a marker which is not OFF to ON has no effect (does not change its control mode).
Example: CALC:MARK2:STAT ON sets Marker 2 to Normal if it was off; otherwise it does nothing.
The response to the query will be ON unless the marker is OFF.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:STATe?
Preset
OFF
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Delta
Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Delta and turns on the active function for setting its delta
value. If the selected marker was Off, it is placed at the center of the screen on the trace specified by the
marker’s Trace attribute.
In Delta mode the marker result shows the relative result between the selected (Delta) marker and its
reference marker. A delta marker can be moved to any point on the X Axis by specifying its X Axis offset
from a reference marker. Its absolute Y Axis value is then the value of the trace point at that X Axis value.
Key Path
698
Marker
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE DELT sets marker 1 to Delta.
Notes
See the description under the “ Marker” key.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X Axis value are saved in instrument state
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
Previously, pressing Delta (or sending the CALC:MARK:MODE:DELTa command) always moved the
reference marker to the delta marker. Now it only does so if the marker was already a delta marker.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Fixed
Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Fixed. A fixed marker is fixed in the sense that it stays
where you place it. It can be directly moved in both X and Y. It can be moved with a Peak Search. It can also
be indirectly moved by re-zeroing the delta if it is a relative marker. If it is moved, it again becomes fixed at
the X Axis point it moved to and it has a Y-axis result that it took on when it moved there. If a Normal or
Delta marker is changed to Fixed it becomes fixed at the X Axis point it was at, and with the Y-axis result it
had when it was set to Fixed.
In Fixed mode the marker result shows:
• If no Marker Function is on, the absolute X Axis and Y axis value of the marker
• If a Marker Function is on, the X Axis value and the Y-axis function result the marker had when it became
fixed.
See "Fixed Marker X Axis Value" on page 699.
See "Fixed Marker Y Axis Value" on page 700.
See Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
Fixed Marker X Axis Value
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed.
Notes
See the description under the “ Marker” key, above.
Dependencies
• You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on.
If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is
generated.
• You cannot directly set the Y value of a Fixed marker while Normalize is turned on. If an attempt is
made to do so while Normalize is on, a warning message is generated.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument
state
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In legacy analyzers, only a Reference marker could be Fixed, and it was always Fixed. Additionally it
could not be noved. In the X-Series, any marker can be set to Fixed and can be moved to any X or Y
value.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
699
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Fixed Marker Y Axis Value
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed.
Notes
See the description under the Marker key.
Dependencies
You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on. If
an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is
generated.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument
state
Default Unit
depends on the current selected Y axis unit
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
The Marker Z position determines which of the 301 traces (0–300) the selected marker is on. It cannot be
set above the maximum trace in the Spectrogram window and, unlike the Marker X position, will not move
off screen in the Spectrogram Window if the storage size is smaller than the number of traces that can be
viewed.
If Spectrogram is on, the marker result block has a third line displaying the time value of Marker Z. If the
marker is a delta marker, the delta time value is displayed. Although the Z Marker position can be moved to
trace 0, this is not recommended, as the current trace value is constantly being updated by new
acquisitions and therefore the Z time value for trace 0 is not completely registered until the trace is
completed.
Marker Z position is only available in the Spectrogram View
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK2:MODE FIX sets Marker 2 to Fixed.
:CALC:MARK2:Z:POS 150 puts Marker 2 on Trace 150
Dependencies
Only appears in the Spectrogram view, otherwise blanked
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X, Y and Z Axis values are saved in
instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.07.01
Fixed
Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Fixed. A fixed marker is fixed in the sense that it stays
where you place it. It can be directly moved in both X and Y. It can be moved with a Peak Search. It can also
be indirectly moved by re-zeroing the delta if it is a relative marker. If it is moved, it again becomes fixed at
the X Axis point it moved to and it has a Y-axis result that it took on when it moved there. If a Normal or
700
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Delta marker is changed to Fixed it becomes fixed at the X Axis point it was at, and with the Y-axis result it
had when it was set to Fixed.
In Fixed mode the marker result shows:
• If no Marker Function is on, the absolute X Axis and Y axis value of the marker
• If a Marker Function is on, the X Axis value and the Y-axis function result the marker had when it became
fixed.
See "Fixed Marker X Axis Value" on page 701.
See "Fixed Marker Y Axis Value" on page 701.
See Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
Fixed Marker X Axis Value
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed.
Notes
See the description under the “ Marker” key, above.
Dependencies
• You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on.
If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is
generated.
• You cannot directly set the Y value of a Fixed marker while Normalize is turned on. If an attempt is
made to do so while Normalize is on, a warning message is generated.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument
state
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In legacy analyzers, only a Reference marker could be Fixed, and it was always Fixed. Additionally it
could not be noved. In the X-Series, any marker can be set to Fixed and can be moved to any X or Y
value.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Fixed Marker Y Axis Value
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed.
Notes
See the description under the Marker key.
Dependencies
You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on. If
an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is
generated.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument
state
Default Unit
depends on the current selected Y axis unit
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
701
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
The Marker Z position determines which of the 301 traces (0–300) the selected marker is on. It cannot be
set above the maximum trace in the Spectrogram window and, unlike the Marker X position, will not move
off screen in the Spectrogram Window if the storage size is smaller than the number of traces that can be
viewed.
If Spectrogram is on, the marker result block has a third line displaying the time value of Marker Z. If the
marker is a delta marker, the delta time value is displayed. Although the Z Marker position can be moved to
trace 0, this is not recommended, as the current trace value is constantly being updated by new
acquisitions and therefore the Z time value for trace 0 is not completely registered until the trace is
completed.
Marker Z position is only available in the Spectrogram View
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK2:MODE FIX sets Marker 2 to Fixed.
:CALC:MARK2:Z:POS 150 puts Marker 2 on Trace 150
Dependencies
Only appears in the Spectrogram view, otherwise blanked
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X, Y and Z Axis values are saved in
instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.07.01
Fixed
Sets the control mode for the selected marker to Fixed. A fixed marker is fixed in the sense that it stays
where you place it. It can be directly moved in both X and Y. It can be moved with a Peak Search. It can also
be indirectly moved by re-zeroing the delta if it is a relative marker. If it is moved, it again becomes fixed at
the X Axis point it moved to and it has a Y-axis result that it took on when it moved there. If a Normal or
Delta marker is changed to Fixed it becomes fixed at the X Axis point it was at, and with the Y-axis result it
had when it was set to Fixed.
In Fixed mode the marker result shows:
• If no Marker Function is on, the absolute X Axis and Y axis value of the marker
• If a Marker Function is on, the X Axis value and the Y-axis function result the marker had when it became
fixed.
See "Fixed Marker X Axis Value" on page 702.
See "Fixed Marker Y Axis Value" on page 703.
See Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
Fixed Marker X Axis Value
Key Path
702
Marker, Fixed
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed.
Notes
See the description under the “ Marker” key, above.
Dependencies
• You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on.
If an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is
generated.
• You cannot directly set the Y value of a Fixed marker while Normalize is turned on. If an attempt is
made to do so while Normalize is on, a warning message is generated.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument
state
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In legacy analyzers, only a Reference marker could be Fixed, and it was always Fixed. Additionally it
could not be noved. In the X-Series, any marker can be set to Fixed and can be moved to any X or Y
value.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Fixed Marker Y Axis Value
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE FIX sets Marker 1 to Fixed.
Notes
See the description under the Marker key.
Dependencies
You cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on. If
an attempt is made to actually adjust it while a Marker Function is on, a warning message is
generated.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X and Y Axis values are saved in instrument
state
Default Unit
depends on the current selected Y axis unit
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Fixed Marker Z Axis Value
The Marker Z position determines which of the 301 traces (0–300) the selected marker is on. It cannot be
set above the maximum trace in the Spectrogram window and, unlike the Marker X position, will not move
off screen in the Spectrogram Window if the storage size is smaller than the number of traces that can be
viewed.
If Spectrogram is on, the marker result block has a third line displaying the time value of Marker Z. If the
marker is a delta marker, the delta time value is displayed. Although the Z Marker position can be moved to
trace 0, this is not recommended, as the current trace value is constantly being updated by new
acquisitions and therefore the Z time value for trace 0 is not completely registered until the trace is
completed.
Marker Z position is only available in the Spectrogram View
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
703
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Key Path
Marker, Fixed
Example
:CALC:MARK2:MODE FIX sets Marker 2 to Fixed.
:CALC:MARK2:Z:POS 150 puts Marker 2 on Trace 150
Dependencies
Only appears in the Spectrogram view, otherwise blanked
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) and X, Y and Z Axis values are saved in
instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.07.01
Off
Turns off the selected marker.
In addition, Off removes the marker annunciation from the display, turns off any active function and any
marker function, and resets the following properties to their default value:
• X Axis scale: Auto
• Band/Interval Span: 0
• Auto Trace: On
Off does not affect which marker is selected.
Key Path
Marker
Example
:CALC:MARK:MODE OFF sets Marker 1 to Off.
Notes
See the description under the “ Marker” key.
State Saved
The marker control mode (Normal, Delta, Fixed, Off) is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Backwards
Compatibity SCPI
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:STATe OFF|0
The response to the query will be OFF unless the marker is ON.
Properties
Opens a menu used to set certain properties of the selected marker.
Key Path
Marker
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
704
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
705
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
706
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
707
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Relative To
Selects the marker that the selected marker will be relative to (its reference marker).
Every marker has another marker to which it is relative. This marker is referred to as the “reference marker”
for that marker. This attribute is set by the Marker, Properties, Relative To key. The marker must be a Delta
marker to make this attribute relevant. If it is a Delta marker, the reference marker determines how the
marker is controlled and how its value is displayed. A marker cannot be relative to itself.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:REFerence <integer>
708
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:REFerence?
Example
CALC:MARK1:REF 2 sets the marker 1 reference marker to 2 and turns marker 1 on as a delta
marker.
Notes
A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is grayed out. If the grayed out key is pressed, an
advisory message is generated.
Notes
This command causes the marker specified with the subopcode to become selected.
Range (for SCPI command): 1 to 12. If the range is exceeded the value is clipped.
Couplings
The act of specifying the selected marker’s reference marker makes the selected marker a Delta
marker. If the reference marker is off it is turned on in Fixed mode at the delta marker location.
Preset
The preset default “Relative To” marker (reference marker) is the next higher numbered marker
(current marker +1). For example, if marker 2 is selected, then it’s default reference marker is
marker 3. The exception is marker 12, which has a default reference of marker 1.
Set to the defaults by using Restore Mode Defaults. This is not reset by Marker Off, All Markers Off, or
Preset.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state. Not affected by Marker Off and hence not affected by Preset or power
cycle.
Min
1
Max
12
Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
none
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Default (selected when Restore Mode Defaults is pressed): next higher numbered marker or 1 if
marker 12.
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
709
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
710
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
711
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
712
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
X Axis Scale
Accesses a menu that enables you to affect how the X Axis information for the selected marker is displayed
in the marker area (top-right of display) and the active function area of the display, and how the marker is
controlled. The available settings for the X Axis Scale are Frequency, Period, Time, and Inverse Time.
See "More Information" on page 713.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:READout FREQuency | TIME | ITIMe |
PERiod
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:READout?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:READout:AUTO ON|OFF|1|0
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:X:READout:AUTO?
Example
CALC:MARK3:X:READ TIME sets the marker 3 X Axis Scale to Time.
Notes
This command causes the specified marker to become selected.
Preset
AUTO
Marker Preset (selected when a marker is turned Off): Auto (see below). In most measurements the
Auto settings results in Frequency being the preset readout.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The X Axis Scale of a marker (Readout in legacy analyzers) now has only one value, not one value for
frequency domain and another value for time domain. The value changes (if in Auto) when the domain
of the trace it is on changes. This means that the default behaviors are identical, but if the user
changes the readout manually in swept and expects the default to remain in zero span, there may be
some backwards compatibility problems. As an example, in the old instruments, if the user set
Readout to Period in a swept span, and the instrument was set to zero span, the readout changed to
Time, the default for Zero Span. Now, it will stay in Period even in Zero Span until the user changes
it or sets it back to Auto.
Additionally, all choices for X Axis Scale are now always allowed. In legacy analyzers the choices of X
Axis Scale were restricted based on the domain the instrument was currently in. Since the new
behavior is less restrictive this should not show up as a backwards compatibility issue.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
The X Axis Scale of a marker is the scale of its X Axis value. This affects the units displayed in the Marker
Result block and used to specify the marker’s X Axis location. The X Axis Scale is specified using the
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale key.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
713
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
All markers in swept spans have both a time and frequency value. Which of these is used for the result
display, and for positioning the marker, depends on the X Axis Scale setting. The X Axis Scale setting can
be Frequency or Time, as well as the reciprocal of either (Period or Inverse Time). There is also an Auto
setting - when in Auto, a marker’s X Axis Scale changes whenever the domain of the trace, upon which it
set, changes. All choices for X Axis Scale are allowed. Note that this behavior differs from the behavior in
previous instruments: previously the instrument remembered a different X Axis Scale (formerly called
Readout) for each domain, and the choices of X Axis Scale were restricted. These restrictions were based
on the current domain of the instrument.
Auto
When in Auto, the X-Axis Scale is Frequency if the Marker Trace is a frequency domain trace, Time if the
Marker Trace is a time domain trace. When in Auto, if the marker changes traces, or the domain of the trace
the marker is on changes, the auto result is re-evaluated. If the X Axis Scale is chosen manually, that Scale
is used regardless of the domain of the trace.
Key Path
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale
Example
CALC:MARK2:X:READ:AUTO ON sets the marker 2 X-axis scaling to automatically select the most
appropriate units.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Frequency
Sets the marker X Axis scale to Frequency, displaying the absolute frequency of a normal marker or the
frequency of the delta marker relative to the reference marker. Frequency is the auto setting for frequency
domain traces.
If Frequency is selected for a time domain trace, all of the points in the trace will show the same value.
Attempting to use the knob or step keys to adjust the X Axis value of the marker or entering an X Axis value
from the numeric keypad or remotely will have no effect but will generate no error.
Key Path
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale
Example
CALC:MARK2:X:READ FREQ sets the marker 2 X Axis scale to Frequency.
Notes
1-of-N readback is Frequency
State Saved
The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Period
Sets the marker X Axis scale to Period, displaying the reciprocal of the frequency of the marker, or the
reciprocal of the frequency separation of the two markers in a delta-marker mode. The units are those of
time (sec, msec, etc). If the markers are at the same frequency in a delta marker mode, the result will be
the reciprocal of 0, which is infinitely large. The display will show “---” and a SCPI query will return infinity.
714
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
If Period is selected for a time domain trace, all of the points in the trace will show the same value.
Attempting to use the knob or step keys to adjust the X Axis value of the marker or entering an X Axis value
from the numeric keypad or remotely will have no effect but will generate no error.
Key Path
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale
Example
CALC:MARK2:X:READ PER sets the marker 2 X Axis scale to Period.
Notes
1-of-N readback is Period
State Saved
The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Time
Sets the marker X Axis scale to Time, displaying the time interval between a normal marker and the start of
a sweep or the time of the delta marker relative to the reference marker. Time is the auto setting for time
domain traces. In a delta-marker mode it is the (sweep) time interval between the two markers.
Key Path
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale
Example
CALC:MARK2:X:READ TIME sets the marker 2 X Axis Scale to Time..
Notes
1-of-N readback is Time
Couplings
Frequency domain traces taken in FFT mode have no valid time data. Therefore when Time is
selected for markers on such traces, the X Axis value is taken as the appropriate percentage of the
displayed sweep time, which is a calculated estimate.
State Saved
The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Inverse Time
Sets the marker X Axis scale to Inverse Time, displaying the reciprocal time. It is useful in a delta mode to
show the reciprocal of (sweep) time between two markers. This function is only meaningful when on a time
domain trace and in the Delta control mode. If the markers are at the same X Axis value, the time between
them is 0, so the reciprocal of sweep time is infinitely large. The display will show “---” and a SCPI query
will return infinity.
Key Path
Marker, Properties, X Axis Scale
Example
:CALC:MARK2:X:READ ITIM sets the marker 2 X Axis scale to Inverse Time.
Notes
1-of-N readback is Inverse Time
Couplings
Frequency domain traces taken in FFT mode have no valid time data. Therefore when Inverse Time is
selected for markers on such traces, the X Axis value is undefined, shows as “---” and returns not a
number to a query.
State Saved
The X Axis Scale setting is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
715
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Marker Trace
Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one
trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers
have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and
behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers.
See "Auto Init On" on page 716.
See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 717.
See "Auto Init OFF" on page 717.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe?
Example
CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2.
Notes
A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible
and/or updating.
An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number.
Couplings
The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
Presets on Preset or All Markers Off
State Saved
The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state.
Min
1
Max
6
Readback line
[TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently
assigned.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto Init On
When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer
whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also
determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on).
When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For
moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for
moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the
marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change).
Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old
trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to
the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this
means it will be at negative time!
Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off.
716
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules:
This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify
which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to
trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View.
Auto Init OFF
This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that
marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker
is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace.
The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in
Auto mode.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO?
Notes
Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed.
The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON.
Couplings
The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off.
If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately
set according to the above flowchart.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
717
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Preset
ON
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but
the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 716, "Auto Init OFF" on page 717 and the "Auto Init
Rules Flowchart" on page 717 for details.
The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the
marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or
out of View will have to modify their code.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Trace
Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one
trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers
have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and
behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers.
See "Auto Init On" on page 719.
See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 719.
See "Auto Init OFF" on page 719.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe?
Example
CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2.
Notes
A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible
and/or updating.
An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number.
Couplings
The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
Presets on Preset or All Markers Off
State Saved
The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state.
Min
1
Max
6
Readback line
[TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently
assigned.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
718
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Auto Init On
When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer
whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also
determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on).
When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For
moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for
moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the
marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change).
Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old
trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to
the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this
means it will be at negative time!
Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off.
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules:
This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify
which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to
trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View.
Auto Init OFF
This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that
marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker
is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
719
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in
Auto mode.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO?
Notes
Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed.
The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON.
Couplings
The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off.
If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately
set according to the above flowchart.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
ON
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but
the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 719, "Auto Init OFF" on page 719 and the "Auto Init
Rules Flowchart" on page 719 for details.
The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the
marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or
out of View will have to modify their code.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Trace
Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one
trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers
have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and
behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers.
See "Auto Init On" on page 721.
See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 721.
See "Auto Init OFF" on page 722.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe?
Example
CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2.
Notes
A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible
and/or updating.
An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number.
Couplings
The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker.
720
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
Presets on Preset or All Markers Off
State Saved
The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state.
Min
1
Max
6
Readback line
[TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently
assigned.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto Init On
When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer
whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also
determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on).
When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For
moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for
moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the
marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change).
Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old
trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to
the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this
means it will be at negative time!
Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off.
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
721
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify
which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to
trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View.
Auto Init OFF
This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that
marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker
is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace.
The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in
Auto mode.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO?
Notes
Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed.
The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON.
Couplings
The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off.
If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately
set according to the above flowchart.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
ON
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but
the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. 722
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 721, "Auto Init OFF" on page 722 and the "Auto Init
Rules Flowchart" on page 721 for details.
The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the
marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or
out of View will have to modify their code.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Trace
Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one
trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers
have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and
behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers.
See "Auto Init On" on page 723.
See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 724.
See "Auto Init OFF" on page 724.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe?
Example
CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2.
Notes
A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible
and/or updating.
An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number.
Couplings
The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
Presets on Preset or All Markers Off
State Saved
The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state.
Min
1
Max
6
Readback line
[TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently
assigned.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto Init On
When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer
whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also
determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on).
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
723
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For
moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for
moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the
marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change).
Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old
trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to
the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this
means it will be at negative time!
Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off.
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules:
This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify
which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to
trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View.
Auto Init OFF
This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that
marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker
is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace.
The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in
Auto mode.
724
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO?
Notes
Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed.
The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON.
Couplings
The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off.
If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately
set according to the above flowchart.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
ON
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but
the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 723, "Auto Init OFF" on page 724 and the "Auto Init
Rules Flowchart" on page 724 for details.
The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the
marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or
out of View will have to modify their code.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Trace
Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one
trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers
have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and
behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers.
See "Auto Init On" on page 726.
See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 726.
See "Auto Init OFF" on page 727.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe?
Example
CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2.
Notes
A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible
and/or updating.
An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number.
Couplings
The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
Presets on Preset or All Markers Off
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
725
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
State Saved
The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state.
Min
1
Max
6
Readback line
[TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently
assigned.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto Init On
When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer
whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also
determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on).
When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For
moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for
moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the
marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change).
Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old
trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to
the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this
means it will be at negative time!
Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off.
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules:
726
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify
which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to
trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View.
Auto Init OFF
This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that
marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker
is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace.
The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in
Auto mode.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO?
Notes
Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed.
The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON.
Couplings
The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off.
If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately
set according to the above flowchart.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
ON
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but
the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
727
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 726, "Auto Init OFF" on page 727 and the "Auto Init
Rules Flowchart" on page 726 for details.
The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the
marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or
out of View will have to modify their code.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Trace
Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one
trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers
have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and
behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers.
See "Auto Init On" on page 728.
See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 729.
See "Auto Init OFF" on page 729.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe?
Example
CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2.
Notes
A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible
and/or updating.
An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number.
Couplings
The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
Presets on Preset or All Markers Off
State Saved
The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state.
Min
1
Max
6
Readback line
[TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently
assigned.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto Init On
When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer
whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also
determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on).
728
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For
moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for
moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the
marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change).
Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old
trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to
the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this
means it will be at negative time!
Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off.
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules:
This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify
which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to
trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View.
Auto Init OFF
This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that
marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker
is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace.
The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in
Auto mode.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
729
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO?
Notes
Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed.
The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON.
Couplings
The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off.
If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately
set according to the above flowchart.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
ON
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but
the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 728, "Auto Init OFF" on page 729 and the "Auto Init
Rules Flowchart" on page 729 for details.
The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the
marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or
out of View will have to modify their code.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Trace
Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one
trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers
have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and
behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers.
See "Auto Init On" on page 731.
See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 731.
See "Auto Init OFF" on page 732.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe?
Example
CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2.
Notes
A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible
and/or updating.
An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number.
Couplings
The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
730
Presets on Preset or All Markers Off
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
State Saved
The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state.
Min
1
Max
6
Readback line
[TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently
assigned.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto Init On
When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer
whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also
determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on).
When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For
moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for
moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the
marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change).
Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old
trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to
the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this
means it will be at negative time!
Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off.
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
731
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify
which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to
trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View.
Auto Init OFF
This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that
marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker
is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace.
The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in
Auto mode.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO?
Notes
Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed.
The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON.
Couplings
The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off.
If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately
set according to the above flowchart.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
ON
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but
the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. 732
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 731, "Auto Init OFF" on page 732 and the "Auto Init
Rules Flowchart" on page 731 for details.
The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the
marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or
out of View will have to modify their code.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Trace
Selects the trace that you want your marker to be placed on. A marker is associated with one and only one
trace. This trace is used to determine the placement, result, and X Axis Scale of the marker. All markers
have an associated trace, even Fixed markers; it is from that trace that they determine their attributes and
behaviors, and it is to that trace that they go when they become Normal or Delta markers.
See "Auto Init On" on page 733.
See "Auto Init Rules Flowchart" on page 734.
See "Auto Init OFF" on page 734.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe?
Example
CALC:MARK1:TRAC 2 places marker 1 on trace 2.
Notes
A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible
and/or updating.
An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the key instead of a trace number.
Couplings
The state of Marker Trace is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
If a Marker Trace is chosen manually, Auto Init goes to Off for that marker.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
Presets on Preset or All Markers Off
State Saved
The Marker Trace and state of Auto Init for each marker is saved in instrument state.
Min
1
Max
6
Readback line
[TraceN, Auto Init] or [TraceN, Manual] where N is the trace number to which the marker is currently
assigned.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Auto Init On
When Auto Init is true, the marker’s trace attribute is re-determined automatically by the analyzer
whenever the marker turns on (Normal, Delta or Fixed) from an Off state. (The trace attribute is also
determined for all markers that are on, whenever Auto Init is turned on).
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
733
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
When the marker moves between traces the marker’s X position in trace points is retained as it moves. For
moving between active traces this generally means the x-axis value of the marker will not change. But for
moving to or from an inactive trace, the x-axis value will take on that of the new trace at the bucket the
marker was on the old trace (and is still on, on the new trace, since the bucket doesn’t change).
Note this is true even if the marker is off screen. Thus, a marker that is at the center of the screen on the old
trace stays at the center of the screen on the new trace. A marker that is off screen one whole screen to
the left on the old trace remains off screen one whole screen to the left on the new trace – even if this
means it will be at negative time!
Marker Trace is set to 1, and Auto Init is set to On, on a Preset or All Markers Off.
Auto Init Rules Flowchart
The following flowchart depicts the Auto Init rules:
This flowchart makes it clear that putting all lower-numbered traces in View is the simplest way to specify
which trace you want the markers to go to when they turn on. For example, if you want all Markers to go to
trace 2 when they turn on, put trace 1 in View.
Auto Init OFF
This command associates the marker with the specified trace and turns Marker Trace, Auto Init OFF for that
marker. If the marker is not Off it moves the marker from the trace it was on to the new trace. If the marker
is Off it stays off but is now associated with the specified trace.
The query returns the number of the trace on which the marker is currently placed, even if that marker is in
Auto mode.
734
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:TRACe:AUTO?
Notes
Turning Marker Trace Auto Init off has no effect on the trace on which the marker is currently placed.
The response to the query will be 0 if OFF, 1 if ON.
Couplings
The state of Auto Init is not affected by the Auto Couple key.
Auto Init is set to True on a Preset or All Markers Off.
If Auto Init is set to On for a marker and that marker is on, that marker’s Marker Trace is immediately
set according to the above flowchart.
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
ON
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The Marker Trace Auto function in legacy analyzers has been replaced by Marker Trace Auto Init, but
the same SCPI command is used for the new function. This should work fine for most legacy users. See the sections on "Auto Init On" on page 733, "Auto Init OFF" on page 734 and the "Auto Init
Rules Flowchart" on page 734 for details.
The new auto functionality causes markers to automatically go to the appropriate trace when the
marker is first turned on. Users who counted on markers changing traces when a trace was put in or
out of View will have to modify their code.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Lines
When on, displays a vertical line of graticule height and a horizontal line of graticule width, intersecting at
the indicator point of the marker (that is, the center of the X or the bottom tip of the diamond. The lines are
blue in color.
If the marker is off screen the lines should be extended from the marker so that they go thru the screen
area if possible. This is really useful for off screen Fixed markers as it lets you see their amplitude even
though they are off the X Axis.
Key Path
Marker, Properties
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:LINes[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:LINes[:STATe]?
Example
:CALC:MARK2:LIN:ON turns Lines on for marker 2.
Couplings
Sending the remote command causes the addressed marker to become selected.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Table
When set to On, the display is split into a measurement window and a marker data display window. For
each marker which is on, information is displayed in the data display window, which includes the marker
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
735
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
number, control mode, trace number, X axis scale, X axis value, and the Y-axis result. Additional
information is shown for markers which have marker functions turned on.
Turning the Marker Table on turns the Peak Table off and vice versa.
Key Path
Marker
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe]?
Example
CALC:MARK:TABL ON turns on the marker table.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
The on/off state of the Marker Table is saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Count
Accesses the marker count menu.
Key Path
Marker
Readback line
[On] if count on for the selected marker, [Off] if it is off.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Counter
Turns the marker frequency counter on and off. The selected marker is counted, and if the selected marker
is a delta marker and its reference marker is not fixed, the reference marker is counted as well.
See "Understanding the Marker Counter" on page 737.
See "Query Count Value" on page 737.
Key Path
Marker, Marker Count
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt[:STATe]?
Example
CALC:MARK2:FCO ON selects marker 2, turns it on, and turns on the counter
CALC:MARK2:FCO:X? returns the counted frequency.
Notes
Fixed markers are not counted, but a Fixed marker will have a count stored in it if it is selected or is
the reference marker for the selected marker. The count already in the marker is stored when the
marker becomes fixed and if there is none or the marker moves (for example, Pk Search) it is counted
and stored after the next sweep.
If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, that count will be displayed when the marker is selected,
and used as the reference count when that marker is a reference marker.
If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, that count will be deleted if the marker X is adjusted.
736
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, and a Search function is performed using the Fixed marker,
while the counter is on, the count stored in the marker will be updated.
If a Fixed marker has a count stored in it, and is a reference marker, and the reference is moved to a
valid trace point by re-zeroing the delta (by pressing Delta again or sending the DELTa SCPI
command), while the counter is on, the count stored in the marker will be updated.
Notes
This command causes the specified marker to become selected.
Dependencies
Marker Count is unavailable (grayed out and Off) if the Gate function is on.
Couplings
If the selected marker is Off when the counter is turned on, the selected marker is set to Normal and
placed at center of screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules.
If a marker that is OFF is selected while the counter is on, the counter remains on, but since the
marker is off, the count is undefined. In this case the analyzer will return not a number to a SCPI
count query.
The counter is turned OFF when the selected marker is turned OFF.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
The state of the counter (on/off) is saved in instrument state. In the case of Fixed markers, the count
stored in the marker is saved in instrument state.
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
In some legacy analyzers (e.g., the 8560 series) the FreqOffset value was applied to the Marker
Count. In others (e.g., ESA and PSA) it was not. The X-Series follows the ESA/PSA model and does
not apply Freq Offset to the Marker Count.
In ESA and PSA the reference marker for Delta markers was always counted. In the X-Series the
marker is counted for Normal and Delta markers; but for the reference marker, if it is a Fixed marker,
we use the count stored in the Fixed marker. This enhanced capability may require a change to some
users’ code and/or test procedures.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Query Count Value
Queries the frequency count. The query returns the absolute count unless the specified marker is in Delta
mode, then it returns the relative count. If the marker is off, or the marker is on but the counter is off, the
analyzer will return not a number to a SCPI count query. A marker with no stored count, or a non-Fixed
marker on a stored trace, will also return not a number to a SCPI count query. Note this result may simply
mean that the first sweep after the counter turned on has not yet completed.
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt:X?
Notes
This query does NOT cause the specified marker to become selected.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Understanding the Marker Counter
See "Counting Off-screen Markers" on page 738.
See "Delta Marker" on page 738.
See "Fixed Markers" on page 738.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
737
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
See "More Information on "Counter"" on page 738.
Using the internal counter we can count the frequency of a marker, but we cannot count while we are
actually sweeping. So, once we are done with a sweep, we move to the selected marker frequency and
count that frequency. Then, if the marker is a Delta marker, the count is also taken for its reference marker.
The count is actually performed by moving the LO to the frequency (or frequencies in the case of a delta
marker) we wish to count. The count is executed on a marker by marker basis and no further count is taken
until after the next sweep (even if the marker moves before another sweep has completed).
The Marker Count is taken by tuning the instrument to the frequency of the marker and counting the IF,
with the instrument not sweeping. The count is adjusted for display by adding or subtracting it (as
appropriate) from the LO frequency, so that you see a count that represents the signal frequency. This is
true even if External Mixing is on. Since all this happens between sweeps, you never see the instrument
retuning to do the counts.
If you wish to see the entered frequency of a counted marker it will appear in the active function area when
that marker is selected (for Fixed markers, you have to press the Marker, Fixed key to select Fixed markers
and then press it a second time to view or adjust the x or y marker values).
Counting Off-screen Markers
If the selected marker is off the X-axis the instrument can still be tuned to the marker (unless it is outside
the current range of the instrument), so the count can still be displayed. This means you can see a count for
an off-screen marker even though there may be no valid Y-value for the marker. If the marker frequency is
outside the range of the instrument, the display will show three dashes in the count block (---), and not a
number is returned to a SCPI count query.
Delta Marker
When a Delta Marker is selected while Marker Count is on:
5. If the reference marker is not a fixed marker, the display shows the difference between the count of the
selected marker and the count of the reference marker
6. If the reference marker is a fixed marker and there is a count stored in the marker (because Marker Count
was on when the marker became a fixed marker), the display shows the difference between the count at
the marker and the count stored in the reference marker.
Marker Count works in zero span as well as in Swept SA. The instrument tunes to the frequency of the
selected marker, which, for active zero span traces, is simply the center frequency of the analyzer.
Fixed Markers
Fixed markers have a count stored in them that is generally kept fixed and not updated. If a fixed marker is
selected, or used as a reference, the signal at the marker frequency is not counted; rather the stored count
is seen or used as the reference. The count is stored, if Count is on, when the marker becomes fixed or
when, while fixed, the marker is moved by re-zeroing the reference (if it is the reference marker) or via a
peak search (since both of these, by definition, use valid trace data). The count stored in a Fixed marker is
lost if the counter is turned off, if the marker is moved to an inactive trace, or if the marker is moved by
adjusting its x-value.
More Information on "Counter"
When the counter is on, the count (or the delta count) for the selected marker is displayed.
738
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
The invalid data indicator (*) will turn on until the completion of the first count.
Marker Count frequency readings are corrected using the Freq Offset function (in some previous analyzers,
they were not). Note however that Marker Delta readings are not corrected, as any offset would be applied
to both.
In zero span on active traces the counter continues to function, counting any signal near the center
frequency of the analyzer.
No signal farther from the marker frequency than the Res BW will be seen by the counter.
The above command turns on or off the frequency counter. If the specified marker number in the command
is not the selected marker, it becomes the selected marker. If the specified marker number is not on,
FCOunt ON sets it to Normal and places it at center of screen on the trace determined by the Marker Trace
rules. Once the marker count is on, it is on for any selected marker, not just for the one used in the
command. A 1 is returned to the state query only if marker count is on and the specified number is the
selected marker. The invalid data indicator (*) will turn on until the completion of the first count but this
does not keep a value from being returned.
Gate Time
Controls the length of time during which the frequency counter measures the signal frequency. Longer
gate times allow for greater averaging of signals whose frequency is “noisy”, though the measurement
takes longer. If the gate time is an integer multiple of the length of a power-line cycle (20 ms for 50 Hz
power, 16.67 ms for 60 Hz power), the counter rejects incidental modulation at the power line rate. The
shortest gate time that rejects both 50 and 60 Hz modulation is 100 ms, which is the value chosen in Auto,
or on Preset or when Auto Couple is pressed.
The start time of the Gate Time of the counter must be controlled by the same trigger parameters as
controls the sweep. Thus, if the Trigger is not in Free Run, the counter gate must not start until after the
trigger is received and delayed.
Key Path
Marker Function, Marker Count
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt:GATetime <time>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt:GATetime?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt:GATetime:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FCOunt:GATetime:AUTO?
Example
:CALC:MARK2:FCO:GAT 1e–2 sets the gate time for Marker 2 to 10^(–2) s = 10 ms.
Notes
When Auto Couple is pressed, Gate Time is set to 100 ms.
Notes
This command causes the specified marker to become selected.
Preset
100 ms
ON
State Saved
Saved in instrument state.
Min
1 us
Max
500 ms
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
739
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:FCOunt:RESolution <freq>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:FCOunt:RESolution?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO?
Notes
This command is provided for ESA compatibility, which allowed the user to control the gate
resolution, rather than the gate time. :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt:RESolution <freq> Sets the gate time to 1/freq
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt:RESolution? Returns 1/gate_time
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 is accepted and ignored
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO? Always returns 1
All of these commands cause the marker to become selected.
Preset
1Hz
ON
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Couple Markers
When this function is On, moving any marker causes an equal X Axis movement of every other marker
which is not Fixed or Off. By “equal X Axis movement” we mean that we preserve the difference between
each marker’s X Axis value (in the fundamental x-axis units of the trace that marker is on) and the X Axis
value of the marker being moved (in the same fundamental x-axis units).
Note that Fixed markers do not couple. They stay where they were while all the other markers move. Of
course, if a Fixed marker is being moved, all the non-fixed markers do move with it.
This may result in markers going off screen.
Key Path
Marker
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]?
Example
:CALC:MARK:COUP ON sets Couple Markers on.
Preset
Off, presets on Mode Preset and All Markers Off
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
All Markers Off
Turns off all markers. See Marker, "Off " on page 704.
Key Path
Marker
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
740
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker
Example
CALC:MARK:AOFF turns off all markers.
Couplings
Sets the selected marker to 1.
Preset
n/a.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
741
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Marker Function
The Marker Function key opens up a menu of softkeys that allow you to control the Marker Functions of the
instrument. Marker Functions perform post-processing operations on marker data. Band Functions are
Marker Functions that allow you to define a band of frequencies around the marker. The band defines the
region of data used for the numerical calculations. These marker functions also allow you to perform
mathematical calculations on trace and marker data and report the results of these calculations in place of
the normal marker result.
Unlike regular markers, marker function markers are not placed directly on the trace. They are placed at a
location which is relative to the result of the function calculation.
l
See "More Information" on page 742.
l
See "Fixed marker functions" on page 743.
l
See "Interval Markers" on page 743.
Key Path
Front-panel key
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion NOISe | BPOWer | BDENsity | OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion?
Notes
Sending this command selects the sub-opcoded marker
The marker function result is queried in the same way as the Marker Result, as outlined in the
Marker section, with the CALC:MARK:Y? command.
Dependencies
Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker; so all of the Band
Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker.
If a marker function was already on when the marker became Fixed, then the selected Band Function
is shown but cannot be changed. Therefore, you cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker
that has a marker function turned on. To turn off the function, turn off the marker.
Preset
OFF
State Saved
The band function for each marker is saved in instrument state
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The introduction of adjustable-width Band Functions in the X-Series fundamentally changes the way
Band Power markers are controlled. See the section entitled "Band Function Backwards
Compatibility" on page 743 below for a complete discussion of programming Band Functions in a
backwards compatible fashion.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
The units to be used for displaying Marker Function results in Delta mode vary depending on what is the
reference marker and what it is referenced to.
Marker Functions are different from Measurements, which automatically perform complex sequences of
setup, data acquisition, and display operations in order to measure specified signal characteristics. Marker
Functions are specified for each individual marker and may be turned on individually for each marker.
742
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
The Marker Fctn menu controls which marker functions are turned on and allows you to adjust setup
parameters for each function. The Marker Functions are Marker Noise, Band/Interval Power, and
Band/Interval Density, only one of which can be on for a given marker.
If the selected marker is off, pressing Marker Fctn sets it to Normal and places it at the center of the display
on the trace determined by the Marker Trace rules. However, if the selected marker was Off, Marker
Function Off had to be the selected function, and it remains so even after the marker is thus turned on,
although you may then change it.
Fixed marker functions
In the case of a fixed marker, it is not possible to turn on or change a band function. This is because a Fixed
marker holds the value it had when it became fixed; the trace it was on may keep on changing, so the
function value, which depends on trace data, could not be calculated on an ongoing basis.
It is possible to have a Marker Function on for a Fixed marker, in the case where a function was already on
when the marker became Fixed. In this case the function value will be retained in the marker. It is also
possible to have a Marker Function on for a Fixed marker in the case when the marker was off and was
turned on as Fixed because Delta was pressed to create a reference marker - in which case the marker
function, marker function width, Y Axis value and marker function result that the Delta marker had when
Delta was pressed are copied into the Fixed marker. If Delta is pressed again, causing the fixed reference
marker to move to the delta marker’s position, the marker function, marker function width, Y Axis value and
marker function result that the Delta marker had when Delta was pressed are again copied into the fixed
reference marker.
If a Marker Function is on for a Fixed marker, the marker’s reported value is derived by the function.
Therefore you cannot directly set the X or Y value of a Fixed marker which has a marker function turned on.
Indirect setting as detailed above or when a Peak Search is performed is allowed, as the Fixed marker is
always placed on a trace and can derive its function value from the trace at the moment when it is placed.
Interval Markers
What is an interval marker? The band power marker computes the total power within a span in a nonzero
span. The results computation must include the RBW. The interval power marker measures the average
power across some time interval in zero span.
Interval Density is defined to be Interval Power divided by Bn. Bn is the noise bandwidth of the RBW filter,
as noted and used within the Band Power computation.
Band Function Backwards Compatibility
To define the Band Power function, the ESA and PSA analyzers used Delta Marker functionality with two
markers, for example, Marker 1 and its Reference Marker, as shown below:
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
743
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
e
The marker modes known as Span Pair and Delta Pair (Band Pair in ESA) were used to set two markers for
the primary purpose of defining the band of a Band Power function. The two markers were set by adjusting
their span and centerpoint (Span Pair mode) or by adjusting their locations independently to directly define
the Start and Stop edges of the band (Band Pair/Delta Pair modes).
In the X-Series, the introduction of adjustable-width Band Functions fundamentally changes the way Band
Power markers are controlled, by using a single marker to completely define the function, as shown below:
744
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
. In the X-Series the marker itself has a width attribute, which you set using the Band Span function. The
marker shows “wings” that define the edges of the band in which the Band Power is being measured. You
only need one marker, not a pair of markers, to completely define a Band Power function (making it
possible to do Delta Band Power, which PSA and ESA could not do).
Additional control functions of Band Left and Band Right are provided for the case when you need to
precisely set the band edges. Note that the marker itself always remains centered in the band.
To map the old Span Pair and Band Pair/Delta Pair functions to the X-Series for code compatibility, aliases
and compatibility commands were added. Since Span Pair and Band Pair/Delta Pair were primarily used
for making band power measurements, the aliases are provided for setting the parameters of a Band
Function. If the user was using the old commands for anything other than Band Power these aliases will
likely not yield compatible results.
For example, some users took advantage of the fact that the Band Pair commands let you arbitrarily set
the frequency (time) of a delta marker and its non-fixed reference marker. In these cases, which had
nothing to do with band Power, the new commands will not be compatible. For these use cases the user
must use two markers and position each using the CALC:MARK:X commands, since “marker pairs” do not
exist anymore.
Note that all of the alias commands described below cause the specified marker to become selected.
1. Marker Mode compatibility
To setup Band Power measurements in the ESA and PSA, you had to send the :CALCulate:MARKer[1]
|2|3|4:MODE POSition|DELTa|BAND|SPAN|OFF
command with either the BAND or SPAN parameter, in order to turn on the marker control modes that let
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
745
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
you use a pair of delta markers as Band Power markers. In the X-Series this is no longer necessary, as
there are no special marker modes for Band power. So when this command is sent with either a BAND or
SPAN parameter it is aliased to simply turn on Normal markers. Thus:
Old command
Aliased to
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE:BAND
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE:POSition
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE:SPAN
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE:POSition
2. Span Pair Compatibility
In the past, the Span Pair function was used with a marker pair to set the band for Band Power. The
following SCPI commands were used when performing this setup programmatically:
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:CENTer <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:CENTer? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN? These commands are now aliased as follows to preserve the old functionality as much as possible:
Old command
Aliased to
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:CENTer
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN
3. Delta Pair/Band Pair functionality
Another way to set the marker pair for Band Power was with the Delta Pair function (Band Pair in ESA). The following SCPI commands were used when performing this setup programmatically:
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STARt <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STARt? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP? These commands are now aliased as follows to preserve the old functionality as much as possible:
Old command
Aliased to
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STARt
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt
746
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
4. Arbitrary Marker Pair functionality
Another use case was to use the STARt and STOP commands to arbitrarily set the frequency (time) of a
delta marker and its reference marker without being in Band Power mode. This use case is not
supported with a backwards compatibility command, but since in the X-Series you can arbitrarily set any
marker’s value and any reference marker’s value, it is easy to fix this problem in code; but the user will
have to change their code.
Old command
User must change to
:CALCulate:MARKer1:X:STARt <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer1:X <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer1:X:STOP <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer2:X <param>
(in the example marker 1 and marker 2 are used; in practice, use the reference marker number for the STOP
marker number, which is usually marker number+1)
5. Band changes with analyzer settings
In the past, when a marker pair was used to set the width of the band for Band Power, the markers held
their screen positions when analyzer frequency settings such as Span changed. The result of this was
that as the Span changed, the frequency difference and hence the width of the band changed as well. In
the X-Series, as a result of the change from position markers to value markers, the width of the band
remains constant as frequency settings of the analyzer change.
6. Offscreen Markers
As a result of the change from position markers to value markers, markers can be at a frequency which is
offscreen, whereas in the past, they were clipped to the screen edges and hence were never offscreen. Users who depended on this clipping behavior by setting Band Span to a high value in order to force
Band Power markers to the left and right edges of the screen will have to rewrite their code. Furthermore, since markers could never be offscreen, Band Power always returned a valid result. In the XSeries, if either edge of the Band is offscreen, Band Power returns not a number as a result.
7. Direct Marker Positioning
The following commands were used in ESA and PSA to directly set the marker to a specific trace point
(“bucket”) position when they were being used in Span Pair and Delta Pair/Band Pair modes:
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:CENTer <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:CENTer? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt? :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP <param> :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP?
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
747
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
They are aliased very similarly to the non-position commands (above) however a translation to/from trace
points (buckets) is also performed:
Old command
Aliased to
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:CENTer
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNC:BAND:SPAN
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNC:BAND:LEFT
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNC:BAND:RIGHt
In each case but the first (:X:POSition:CENTer),the analyzer first converts the specified value in trace
points to the current X Axis Scale Units (for example, frequency or time) of the trace upon which the
marker resides. Then, that value is used in the alias command to set the desired value.
The query form of the command returns the marker function span in trace points (buckets) by translating
back based on the X Axis Scale settings at the time the query is sent.
The value in Trace Points is translated into the current X Axis Scale units for the purpose of setting the
value of the marker. However, the marker’s span value, LEFT value, or RIGHt value in X Axis Scale Units,
not trace points, are preserved if a change is made to the X Axis scale settings. For example, if you use this
command to set a marker function span of 500 buckets, which happens at that time to correspond to 13
GHz, and then you change the analyzer’s Start Frequency so that 500 buckets is no longer 13 GHz, the span
stays at 13 GHz, not at 500 buckets! This is important to realize as it differs from the legacy behavior.
The UP/DOWN parameters increment/decrement by one bucket. For this, the analyzer performs a
conversion to buckets and back.
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
748
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
749
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
750
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
751
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Select Marker
Specifies the selected marker. The term “selected marker” is used throughout this document to specify
which marker will be affected by the functions.
Key Path
Marker
Notes
The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a Search is
done or a Band Function is turned on or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak.
Preset
Marker 1
State Saved
The number of the selected marker is saved in instrument state.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Marker Noise
Turns on the Marker Noise function for the selected marker, making it a noise marker. If the selected
marker is off, it is turned on in Normal mode and located at the center of the screen.
When Marker Noise is selected while in the Marker Function Off state, the Band Span or Interval Span is
initialized to 5% of the screen width.
When Marker Noise is on, the marker’s Y Axis Result is the average noise level, normalized to a 1 Hz noise
power bandwidth, in the band specified under the Band Adjust key.
See "More Information" on page 753.
See "Off-trace Markers" on page 753.
Key Path
Marker Function
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC NOIS turns on marker 1 as a noise marker.
CALC:MARK:FUNC? returns the current marker function for the marker specified. In this case it
returns the string: NOIS.
CALC:MARK:Y? returns the y-axis value of the Marker Noise function for marker 1 (if Marker Noise is
ON for marker 1). Note that the delta value when the Y axis unit is Watt is the square of the delta
value when the Y axis unit is Volt. For example, when the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Volt is 0.2,
the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Watt will be 0.22 = 0.04. When you read the value out remotely
you have to know whether your Y Axis Unit is log (dB), linear (V or A), or power (W).
Notes
See the description under the “"Marker Function" on page 742” key.
Dependencies
Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker; so all of the Band
Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker.
752
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Couplings
Average detector and Power Averaging auto selected when Marker Noise on
If the selected (specified) marker is off, selecting Marker Noise via front panel or SCPI will turn the
marker on.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
To guarantee accurate data for noise-like signals, a correction for equivalent noise bandwidth is made by
the analyzer. The Marker Noise function accuracy is best when the detector is set to Average or Sample,
because neither of these detectors will peak-bias the noise. The tradeoff between sweep time and
variance of the result is best when Average Type is set to Power Averaging. Therefore, Auto coupling
chooses the Average detector and Power Averaging when Marker Noise is on. Though the Marker Noise
function works with all settings of detector and Average Type, using the positive or negative peak detector
gives less accurate measurement results.
Off-trace Markers
If a Normal or Delta noise marker is so near to the left or right edge of the trace that some of the band is off
the trace, then it uses only that subset of the Band Width that is on-trace. If the marker itself is off-trace, its
value becomes undefined.
Neither band/interval power nor band/interval density markers are defined if any part of the band is offtrace (unless they are Fixed with a stored function value in them), except that when the edges of the
bandwidth are trivially off-screen, due to mathematical limitations in the analyzer or in the controlling
computer, the result will still be considered valid.
Band/Interval Power
Turns on the Band/Interval Power function for the selected marker. If the selected marker is off it is turned
on in Normal marker and located at the center of the screen.
When Band/Interval Power is selected while in the Marker Function Off state, the Band Span or Interval
Span is initialized to 5% of the screen width.
If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the average detector is selected.
If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is selected. Other choices for the detector or Average
type will usually cause measurement inaccuracy.
Key Path
Marker Function
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC BPOW turns on marker 1 as a band power marker.
CALC:MARK2:FUNC? returns the current setting of marker function for marker 2. In this case it
returns the string: BPOW.
CALC:MARK:Y? returns the y-axis value of the Band Power function for marker 1. Note that the delta
value when the Y axis unit is Watt is the square of the delta value when the Y axis unit is Volt. For
example, when the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Volt is 0.2, the percent ratio with Y axis unit in
Watt will be 0.22 = 0.04. When you read the value out remotely you have to know whether your Y
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
753
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Axis Unit is log (dB), linear (V or A), or power (W).
Notes
See the description under the “"Marker Function" on page 742” key, above.
Dependencies
Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker, so all of the Band
Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker.
Couplings
If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the average detector is
selected. If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is selected.
If the selected (specified) marker is off, selecting Band Power via thefront panel or SCPI will turn the
marker on.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Band/Interval Density
Turns on the Band/Interval Density function for the selected marker. If the selected marker is off it is turned
on in Normal marker mode and located at the center of the screen.
When Band/Interval Density is selected while in the Marker Function Off state, the Band Span or Interval
Span is initialized to 5% of the screen width.
See "More Information" on page 755.
See "What is band/interval density? " on page 755
Key Path
Marker Function
Example
CALC:MARK:FUNC BDEN turns on marker 1 as a band density marker.
CALC:MARK:FUNC? returns the current setting of band function for the marker specified. In this case
it returns the string: BDEN.
CALC:MARK:Y? returns the y-axis value of the Band Density function for marker 1. Note that the delta
value when the Y axis unit is Watt is the square of the delta value when the Y axis unit is Volt. For
example, when the percent ratio with Y axis unit in Volt is 0.2, the percent ratio with Y axis unit in
Watt will be 0.22 = 0.04. When you read the value out remotely you have to know whether your Y
Axis Unit is log (dB), linear (V or A), or power (W).
Notes
The zero-width case is treated as one bucket wide although it shows a width of 0.
When the trace the marker is on crosses domains, the width crosses domains as well, to remain the
same percentage of the trace.
Notes
See the description under the “"Marker Function" on page 742” key.
Dependencies
Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker, so all of the Band
Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker.
Couplings
If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the average detector is
selected. If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is selected.
If the selected (specified) marker is off, selecting Band Density via front panel or SCPI will turn the
marker on.
754
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
State Saved
n/a.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
More Information
It may seem like the band density marker function is exactly like a function of a noise marker with variable
width. But they are somewhat different. The Noise markers assume that the signal to be measured is
noise-like. Based on this assumption, we can actually make reasonable measurements under very
nonideal conditions: any detector may be used, any averaging type, any VBW. In contrast, the Band Power
and Band Density markers make no assumption about the statistics of the signal.
If the detector mode for the detector on the marker’s trace is set to Auto, the average detector is selected.
If the Average type is set to Auto, Power Averaging is selected. Other choices for the detector or Average
type will usually cause measurement inaccuracy.
What is band/interval density?
On frequency domain traces, the average density across a band is the total band power divided by the
bandwidth over which it is measured.
On time domain traces, interval density is the average power in the interval divided by the noise bandwidth
of the RBW of the trace.
Marker Function Off
Turns off band functions for the selected marker.
Key Path
Marker Function
Example
:CALC:MARK:FUNC OFF turns off marker functions for marker 1
Notes
See the description under the "Marker" on page 689 key, above.
Dependencies
Fixed markers: It is not possible to change the Band Function for a Fixed marker, so all of the Band
Function keys are grayed out for a Fixed marker, including Off
Couplings
Turning off the marker function has no effect on the band span nor does it turn the marker off.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Band Adjust
Opens a menu that lets you set the width or left or right edges of the band.
It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on. Generally this can only
happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the menu is restricted if no marker function is on.
Key Path
Marker Function
Dependencies
If the marker is Fixed, Band Adjust is grayed out.
If the marker function is Off, Band Adjust is grayed out.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
755
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Couplings
If any of the Band Adjust functions are the active function, the wings and arms of the selected marker
display in green; otherwise they display in white.
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
If any of the band adjust SCPI commands (including the legacy compatibility commands documented
under "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743) are sent while the marker function is
off, they will be accepted and the value stored. If sent while the marker is off, they will be accepted
and ignored.
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Band/Interval Span
Sets the width of the span for the selected marker.
It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on. Generally this can only
happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the menu is restricted if no marker function is on.
In the table below, sweep_width = max(1,sweep_points–1) and sweep_points is the number of sweep
points, set in the Sweep menu.
Key Path
Marker Function, Band Adjust
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN <freq>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN?
Example
:CALC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:SPAN 20 MHz sets the band span of marker 12 to 20 MHz
:CALC:MARK:FUNC:BAND:SPAN? queries the band span of Marker 1
Notes
Units are those of the trace’s domain, Hz for frequency domain, s for time domain.
Notes
Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker
The unit of the parameter must match the current domain of the trace the selected marker is on, or
an invalid suffix error will be generated. If no unit is sent the fundamental unit for the trace domain
will be used (Hz for freq domain traces, s for time domain traces).
Note that all the values provided in this table are only valid for frequency domain traces. If the current
domain of the trace is time domain, values and unit will be different. In frequency domain, the Preset
value is dependent on the frequency range of the instrument. The default value 1.3245 GHz is
appropriate only if the instrument is a 26.5 GHz instrument (Option 526). In a 26.5 GHz Instrument,
the default span is 26.49 GHz, so 5% of the span corresponds to 1.3245 GHz.
Couplings
Changing the Band/Interval Span necessarily changes the Band/Interval Left and Band/Interval Right
values
Band/Interval Span is set to 0 when the marker is turned off
Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span when any marker function is turned on if and only if it is zero
at that time
Preset
If 0, set to 5% of span, when a marker function is turned on
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 Hz
Max
Infinity. Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series marker
values are not limited and do not clip
756
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:SPAN
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:SPAN <param>
See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:SPAN?
Preset
50
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
The old command,
:CALCulate:MARKer[n]:X:POSition:SPAN <param>
was used to set the span between a delta marker and its reference marker in trace points (buckets)
in Span Pair mode. There is no new command for setting the span of a Band Function in trace points.
So, when this command is received, the analyzer first converts the specified span in trace points to
the current X Axis Scale Units (e.g., frequency or time) of the trace upon which the marker resides.
Then, that value is sent to the
:CALC:MARKer[n]:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN <param>
command to set the span of the marker’s Band Function.
The query form of the command will return the marker function span in trace points (buckets) by
translating back based on the X Axis Scale settings at the time the query is sent.
! See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 for more information
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Band/Interval Left
Sets the left edge frequency or time for the band of the selected marker. The right edge is unaffected.
It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on. Generally this can only
happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the menu is restricted if no marker function is on.
In the table below, sweep_width = max(1,sweep_points–1) and sweep_points is the number of sweep
points, set in the Sweep menu.
Key Path
Marker Function, Band Adjust
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT <freq>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT?
Example
:CALC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:LEFT 20 GHz sets the left edge of the band span of marker 12 to 20
GHz
:CALC:MARK:FUNC:BAND:LEFT? queries the band span of Marker 1
Notes
Units are those of the trace’s domain, Hz for frequency domain, s for time domain. When the left edge
is moved, the right edge stays anchored; thus, the marker’s frequency will change.
Notes
Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
757
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
The unit of the parameter must match the current domain of the trace the selected marker is on, or
an invalid suffix error will be generated.If no unit is sent the fundamental unit for the trace domain
will be used (Hz for freq domain traces, s for time domain traces).
Note that all the values provided in this table are only valid for frequency domain traces. If the current
domain of the trace is time domain, values and unit will be different. In frequency domain, the Preset
value is dependent on the frequency range of the instrument. The default value 1.3245 GHz is
appropriate only if the instrument is a 26.5 GHz instrument (Option 526). In a 26.5 GHz Instrument,
the default span is 26.49 GHz, so 5% of the span corresponds to 1.3245 GHz.
Couplings
Changing the Band/Interval Left necessarily changes the Band/Interval Span and Band/Interval
Center values.
Band/Interval Span is set to 0 when the marker is turned off so that means Band/Interval Left is set
to the center value at this time.
Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span when any marker function is turned on if and only if it is zero
at that time.
Preset
If 0, Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span, when a marker function is turned on, which affects
Band/Interval Left.
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 Hz
Max
Infinity. Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series marker
values are not limited and do not clip
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:STARt
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:STARt <integer>
See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:STARt?
Preset
0
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
The legacy command,
:CALCulate:MARKer[n]:X:POSition:STARt <param>
was used to control the Reference marker in trace points (buckets) in Band Pair/Delta Pair mode.
There is no new command for setting the start of a Band Function in trace points. So, when this
command is received, the analyzer first converts the specified span in trace points to the current X
Axis Scale Units (e.g., frequency or time) of the trace upon which the marker resides.
:CALC:MARKer[n]:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT <param>
command to set the start of the marker’s Band Function.
The query form of the command will return the marker function LEFT value in trace points (buckets)
by translating back based on the current X Axis Scale settings at the time the query is sent.
See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 for more information
Initial S/W Revision
758
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Band/Interval Right
Sets the right edge frequency or time for the band of the selected marker. The left edge is unaffected
In the table below, sweep_width = max(1,sweep_points–1) and sweep_points is the number of sweep
points, set in the Sweep menu.
It is legal to change the width of the band even if there is no marker function on. Generally this can only
happen by sending the SCPI command since access to the menu is restricted if no marker function is on.
Key Path
Marker Function, Band Adjust
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt <freq>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt?
Example
:CALC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:RIGHt 20 GHz sets the right edge of the band span of marker 12 to 20
GHz
:CALC:MARK:FUNC:BAND:RIGHt? queries the band span of Marker 1
Notes
Units are those of the trace’s domain, Hz for frequency domain, s for time domain. When the right
edge is moved, the left edge stays anchored; thus, the marker’s frequency will change.
Notes
Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker
The unit of the parameter must match the current domain of the trace the selected marker is on, or
an invalid suffix error will be generated. If no unit is sent the fundamental unit for the trace domain
will be used (Hz for freq domain traces, s for time domain traces).
Note that all the values provided in this table are only valid for frequency domain traces. If the current
domain of the trace is time domain, values and unit will be different. In frequency domain, the Preset
value is dependent on the frequency range of the instrument. The default value 1.3245 GHz is
appropriate only if the instrument is a 26.5 GHz instrument (Option 526). In a 26.5 GHz Instrument,
the default span is 26.49 GHz, so 5% of the span corresponds to 1.3245 GHz.
Couplings
Changing the Band/Interval Right necessarily changes the Band/Interval Span and Band/Interval
Center values
Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span when any marker function is turned on if and only if it is zero
at that time
Preset
If 0, Band/Interval Span is set to 5% of span, when a marker function is turned on, which affects
Band/Interval Right
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Min
0 Hz
Max
Infinity. Unlike legacy analyzers, where the markers were forced to be on screen, X-Series marker
values are not limited and do not clip
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:STOP
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:STOP <integer>
See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
759
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...4:X:POSition:STOP?
Preset
1000, the actual value is dependent on the selected number of sweep points.
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
The legacy command,
:CALCulate:MARKer[n]:X:POSition:STOP <param>
was used to control the Delta marker in trace points (buckets) in Band Pair/Delta Pair mode. There is
no new command for setting the stop of a Band Function in trace points. So, when this command is
received, the analyzer first converts the specified span in trace points to the current X Axis Scale
Units (e.g., frequency or time) of the trace upon which the marker resides. Then, that value is sent to
the
:CALC:MARKer[n]:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt <param>
command to set the stop of the marker’s Band Function.
The query form of the command will return the marker function RIGHt value in trace points (buckets)
by translating back based on the current X Axis Scale settings at the time the query is sent.
See "Band Function Backwards Compatibility" on page 743 for more information
Initial S/W Revision
Prior to A.02.00
Band Span Auto/Man
Determines whether the Band Span for Marker Noise will track the analyzer’s Span.
Band Span is initialized as specified above, under Band/Interval Span. Subsequently, if the analyzer’s
Span is changed, the effect on Band Span depends on the Auto/Man setting of Band Span:
• If in Auto, then whenever the Span changes, the Band Span for Marker Noise is changed to 5% of the
new Span.
• If in Man, the Band Span does not change when the Span is changed.
The Band Span is set to 5% regardless of whether or not this would place part of the Band offscreen. The
Marker Noise function is well able to function with part of the band offscreen.
This function only affects Marker Noise. The key only appears when Maker Noise is the Marker Function for
the selected marker.
Note that, if in Zero Span, “Span” should be replaced by “Sweep Time” and “Band Span” should be
replaced by “Band Interval”, in the above specification and in the table below:
Key Path
Marker Function, Band Adjust
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN:AUTO ON|OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN:AUTO?
Example
:CALC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:SPAN:AUTO ON sets the band span of marker 12 to Auto
:CALC:MARK:FUNC:BAND:SPAN:AUTO? queries the auto band span state of Marker 1
Dependencies
760
This only appears when the Marker Function for the selected marker is Marker Noise. If the SCPI
command is sent to a marker that does not have Marker Noise selected, it is honored but of course,
the user will not see any indication of this.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Couplings
When Auto Band Span is turned on, it immediately adjusts the band span to 5% of the Span.
If the Band Span is changed, either by the Band/Interval Span key, the Band/Interval Left key, or the
Band/Interval Right key, or the equivalent SCPI commands, this function is set to Man.
This function is set to Auto on Preset and when the Auto Couple key is pressed.
This function is set to Auto when Marker Noise is turned on, if the value of Band/Interval Span is 0. Note that this test must be performed before Band/Interval Span is initialized, because Band/Interval
Span is initialized to 5% if Band/Interval Span is 0 when the marker function is turned on.
Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker.
Preset
Auto
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards Compatibility
Notes
Initial S/W Revision
In legacy analyzers, the Noise Marker had a width that was always equal to 5% of the span. But in
the X-Series it is possible for the user to change the span of the Marker Noise band using the Band
Adjust function. To preserve the legacy behavior, the Band Span Auto/Man function is provided. When it is in Auto, which it is by default, the Maker Noise band is always held at 5% of Span, even
if the Span changes. When the user adjusts the Marker Noise Band Span, Band Span Auto/Man is
set to Manual. So the legacy behavior is preserved, but now the user can set the Marker Noise
Span as well and that setting will be preserved when Span is changed.
Prior to A.02.00
Measure at Marker
This key and all the keys in this menu only appear with the N6141A or W6141A application or when Option
EMC is installed and licensed.
Key Path
Marker Function
Dependencies
The Measure at Marker menu is not available in Spectrogram. Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Measure at Marker
When this key is pressed, the analyzer executes one Measure at Marker function and then returns. Measure at Marker goes to the frequency of the selected marker and takes a reading with each of the three
detectors selected in the Detectors menu, using the dwell times specified there, then displays the readings
in a window on the display, using the current Y-Axis Unit.
When the Measure at Marker is complete, the analyzer restores all settings to their pre-Measure-atMarker values and normal sweeps resume.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|...12:FUNCtion:MAMarker?
Example
:CALC:MARK2:FUNC:MAM?
Performs a Measure at Marker function at Marker 2’s current frequency and, when completed,
returns the results of the measure at marker window in a query
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
761
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Notes
This query command returns comma separated values for the 3 specified detectors and the frequency
value of the marker. If a Detector is off or if no measurement has yet completed, –999.0 will be
returned. This can happen, for example, if you are operating with too large a value of (span/sweep
points) and the Measure at Marker function does not execute but instead puts up the advisory
message, “Span per point too large, narrow span or increase RBW or number of points” (see below).
The size of the return data array is fixed at 4. The elements are:
1. Detector 1 value ( if off, –999.0 for backwards compatibility)
2. Detector 2 value ( if off, –999.0 for backwards compatibility)
3. Detector 3 value ( if off, –999.0 for backwards compatibility)
4. Frequency of Marker
If a sweep is in process when this function executes it aborts, and restarts after the function is
complete.
Dependencies
If BW & Avg Type is in an Autocoupled state, the (up to three) measurements taken by Measure at
Marker are taken with Auto Coupled settings for the functions in the BW menu, even if those
functions are in manual. Couplings
If the specified Marker is not on, the analyzer turns it on at the center of the screen and does a peak
search before performing the function. Status Bits/OPC
dependencies
OPC goes true when the measurement is complete
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
:MEASure:EMI:MARKer[1]|2|...12?
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
This command is included for compatibility with the E7400 and PSA option 239 . Performs a
Measure at Marker function at the specified marker’s current frequency and returns the results.
Measure at Marker presents its information in a separate window that normally appears in the upper right
of the display, but it can be repositioned to the upper left.
762
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
The Measure at Marker box shows the detector name for the selected detectors and “Off” for those not
selected. The names used are:
Name
Detector
Normal
Normal
Peak
Peak
Sample
Sample
Neg Peak
Negative Peak
RMS
Average detector with Power Average (RMS)
Log Avg
Average detector with Log-Pwr Average
VoltageAvg
Average detector with Voltage Average
Quasi Peak
Quasi Peak
EMI Avg
EMI Average
RMS Avg
RMS Average
The marker frequency is shown in the “Freq” field. The measured value is shown for all detectors except
those that are “Off.” For these, --- is displayed. The current Y-Axis unit is used, and the precision that is
used for the detector value displays is exactly the same as for the Marker. The precision used for the
Frequency display is six significant digits.
The sequence of steps in the measurement is as follows:
• Any sweep in progress is aborted.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
763
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
• If in Zero Span, the Center Frequency is used as the frequency at which to take the reading, since in Zero
Span, all markers are by definition at the Center Frequency
• If not in Zero Span:
−If the selected marker is Off, it is first turned on in the center of the screen and a peak search
performed. −If the selected marker is on, but offscreen, it is first moved to the center of the screen and a peak
search performed. .
−A frequency “zoom” function is performed to determine the frequency of the selected marker to the
required precision. If you are operating with too large a value of (span/sweep points) then the
Measure at Marker window will not display, but instead an advisory message, “Span per point too
large, narrow span or increase RBW or number of points”.This means you have chosen a combination
of RBW, span and sweep points that makes each trace point much wider than the RBW, so that the
trace point in which the signal appears is an inadequately precise measure of its frequency—for
example, with a 30 MHz to 1000 MHz span, 601 trace points and 120 kHz RBW, each trace point is 13
times as wide as the RBW. In this case, a SCPI query of the results will yield –999 dBm for each
detector.
−If the zoom is successful, the analyzer goes to zero span at this frequency.
• Each detector is then read in successive single-point zero span sweeps, using a sweep time equal to the
specified dwell time. The value displayed by Measure at Marker represents the maximum value output
by the detector during the dwell timeAutocoupled bandwidth and average type settings are used for
each detector unless the BW & Avg Type key is set to As Set, in which case the current bandwidth and
average type settings are used. • Each result is then displayed in the measure at marker window as it becomes available. • The analyzer returns to its pre-Measure at Marker span and settings after executing a Measure at
Marker function, including Bandwidth, Avg Type, and EMC Std - regardless of the setting of BW & Avg
Type.
• Finally, if the sweep had to be aborted, the aborted sweep is restarted.
While the function is executing, all the fields except Freq show “---“ for their values until the measurement
is complete for that detector. As each detector is read, an informational message is displayed in the
status line, for example:
Measuring with detector 1 (Peak) with RBW=120 kHz
After the last detector, the status line is cleared. Meas at Marker Window
This key opens a menu which controls the Measure at Marker window. Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker
Readback
In square brackets, the state of the window then the window position, separated by commas, as [On,
Left]
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
764
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Window
This key turns the Measure at Marker window on and off. It turns on automatically when Measure at
Marker is initiated and turns off on a Preset. If the Window is turned on without a Measure at Marker result,
“---“ is displayed for each result for which the detector is not “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Meas at Marker Window
Remote Command
:DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker[:STATe] ON|OFF|1|0
:DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker[:STATe]?
Example
:DISP:WIND:MAM ON
Couplings
The window turns on automatically when Measure at Marker is initiated and turns off on a Preset.
Preset
Off
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
On|Off
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Position
This key controls the placement of the Measure at Marker window on the display.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Meas at Marker Window
Remote Command
:DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker:POSition LEFT|RIGHt
:DISPlay:WINDow:MAMarker:POSition?
Example
:DISP:WIND:MAM:POS RIGH
Preset
Right
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Left|Right
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detectors
This key opens up a menu that allows you to configure the detectors to be used for the Measure at Marker
reading. Any of the analyzer’s detectors can be used for each of the three detectors, or any of the three
can be turned off. The dwell time for each detector is also settable.
When performing a Meas at Marker, the dwell time settings that you select will depend on the
characteristics of the emission you are measuring. The default dwell time (200 ms) should work well for
typical EUT emissions, but sometimes you will encounter emissions for which the defaults are not optimal.
This is especially the case for emissions that vary slowly over time or have a slow repetition rate. By
lengthening the dwell times you can increase the likelihood of accurately measuring these low repetition
rate signals.
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
765
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
When Measure at Marker is activated, the receiver makes a zero span measurement for each of the (up to)
three detectors selected, using the Dwell Time set for each detector. If the signal's repetition period is
greater than 200 ms (the default setting), the dwell time should be increased to capture at least two and
preferably more repetitions of the signal. Additionally, if you do not need or do not wish to use a detector to
make a measurement, that specific detector may be turned off.
If the Measure at Marker window is being displayed, and one of the detectors is changed, any value being
displayed for that detector changes to “---“ until the next successful reading from that detector.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker,
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector[1] | 2 | 3 OFF | NORMal | AVERage |
POSitive | SAMPle | NEGative | QPEak | EAVerage | RAVerage
:CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector[1]|2|3?
Example
:CALC:MAM:DET2 QPE
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 2 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker,
Remote Command
:CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector[1]|2|3:DWELl <dwell time>
:CALCulate:MAMarker:DETector[1]|2|3:DWELl?
Example
:CALC:MAM:DET2:DWEL 500 ms
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 2 to dwell for 500 ms
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Backwards
Compatibility SCPI
[:SENSe]:EMI:MEASure:DETector:DWELl <dwell time>
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
This command is included for compatibility with the E7400 and PSA option 239 . Sets all of the
detectors’ dwell times to the specified amount
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N
menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 765. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET QPE
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
766
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
Preset
Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N
menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 765. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET QPE
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
Preset
Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N
menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 765. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET QPE
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
Preset
Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
767
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N
menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 765. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET QPE
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
Preset
Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N
menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 765. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET QPE
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
Preset
Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N
menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 765. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET QPE
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
768
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
Preset
Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N
menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 765. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET QPE
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
Preset
Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N
menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 765. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET QPE
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
Preset
Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Remote Language Compatibility Measurement Application Reference
769
7 RLC Swept SA Measurement Front-Panel & SCPI Reference
Marker Function
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N
menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function, Measure at Marker, Detectors
Remote Command
See "Detectors" on page 765. Example
:CALC:MAM:DET QPE
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Quasi peak
:CALC:MAM:DET OFF
Sets the detector for measure at marker detector 1 to Off
Preset
Peak
State Saved
Saved in instrument state
Readback Text
Detector name
Initial S/W Revision
A.02.00
Detector 1
This menu lets you select the detector to be used for Detector 1, or turn Detector 1 off. This is a 1-of-N
menu that shows the normal list of detectors, but with the “Auto” key replaced by “Off”.
Key Path
Marker Function,